JP7446627B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as a unit attached to the inner frame, there are a game board member having a member forming a gaming area, a movable accessory mechanism part having various movable accessories, driving members, etc. It had an integrated unit with a liquid crystal display device that displayed the display effects. In conventional gaming machines with this type of configuration, when changing the specifications or replacing the gaming machine at the gaming parlor, the staff at the gaming parlor needs to adjust the unit with this configuration according to the specifications and model. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2015-047245A

Conventional gaming machines such as those mentioned above require multiple parts such as game board parts, etc., and it is necessary to change the specifications of the gaming parlor as it has a large number of gaming machines of various models. Since it was necessary to perform replacement work such as replacing a heavy unit, there was a problem in that the replacement work required time and effort. In addition, during the time-consuming replacement work, there are cases where the replaced parts are not installed securely or parts that are different from those that should have been installed, and in these cases, when the gaming machine operates, There were also problems in that replaced parts could come off from the game machine and be damaged, or parts different from the original were attached and could be damaged depending on the operating mode. In addition, during the replacement work, the operator also needs to change the setting value that determines the probability that a special game will be executed according to the changed specifications, making the replacement work easier and easier than before. It was also desired that the modification work be executable.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and one of the purposes is to determine whether or not the replaced member is the member that should originally be installed in the replacement work of the member of the gaming machine. By making it easier than before to recognize whether or not replaced parts are securely installed, and by making it easier to change settings, it reduces the occurrence of defects after replacement work. In other words, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in playing games due to playing a game with a gaming machine that has a problem.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example]
In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine (gaming machine 100) which is an application example to which the present invention is applied includes a gaming machine door (glass frame 150) that is disposed in front of a gaming board having a gaming area and can be opened and closed; A second means to which a control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game performance and a first means (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700) capable of executing the performance can be attached. (Accessory object unit 102B, superior object main body part 650, subordinate object main body section 750), and a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, production board lighting) that can execute notification in a predetermined manner device 341, production frame illumination device 342), and detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d) capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means. In this case , when the second means is attached to something different from the first means, the control means causes the plurality of notification means to notify the first abnormality (upper decoration) based on the detection by the detection means. part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Fig. 14-1 (B), etc.) , and when the gaming machine door is in an open state, the plurality of A second abnormality notification (door open error notification: Fig. 15-4 (A)) can be executed by the notification means, and the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be executed by the first notification means (main display device 131). The abnormality notification can be executed in a visible state at the same time (FIG. 15-4 (C)), and the second notification means (audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) , the gist is that the first abnormality notification can be executed with a higher priority than the second abnormality notification .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress reduction in interest in gaming.

It is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which a glass frame 150 and an inner frame 170 are opened with respect to an outer frame 160. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing functional blocks of a gaming machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by the main control board 300. FIG. It is a block diagram showing details of the production control board 320. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 provided in a sub-RAM 320c. It is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the production control board 320. 2 is a perspective view of the upper unit 180, (A) is a diagram showing the upper unit 180 fixed to the outer frame 160 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, and (B) is a diagram of the upper unit 180. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a state in which the frame 180 is fixed only to the outer frame 160. It is a perspective view of the back of upper unit 180, (A) is a perspective view of the right back, and (B) is a perspective view of the left back. 3 is a schematic diagram of a lantern member 1580 in the upper unit 180, (A) is a perspective view of the lantern member 1580, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the lantern member 1580 is disassembled. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the upper part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160, (A) is a schematic diagram of the structure of the upper part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed, and (B) 2 is a perspective view schematically showing the structure of the upper right portion of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of a lock unit 190 of a glass frame 150, in which (A) is a diagram showing the lock unit 190 in a locked state, and (B) is a diagram showing the lock unit 190 in an unlocked state. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the sword handle unit 135. 2 is a schematic diagram of the sword handle unit 135, (A) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the sword handle unit 135, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the bottom surface of the sword handle unit 135. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic top view of the configuration at the bottom of the glass frame 150; 2A and 2B are schematic diagrams of the configuration of the lower part of the glass frame 150, in which (A) is a bottom view of the lower part of the glass frame 150, and (B) is a rear view of the lower part of the glass frame 150. 3 is a perspective view of the front side of the game board unit 102. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the game board unit 102. FIG. It is a perspective view of the front side of game board 102A. It is a perspective view of the front side of accessory unit 102B. It is a perspective view of the back side of the main display device 131 in which the production control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are provided. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the accessory mechanism section 158 in a state where the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 are in the initial position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the accessory mechanism section 158 with the upper accessory unit 154 in the first position. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the accessory mechanism part 158 in a state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the accessory mechanism section 158 with the upper accessory unit 154 in the second position, and (B) is the accessory with the lower accessory unit 156 in the advanced position. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of a mechanism section 158. FIG. (A) is a schematic view of the front surface of the upper accessory decoration part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the upper accessory decoration part 600. (A) is a schematic view of the surface of the upper accessory main body part 650 of the upper accessory unit 154, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the internal configuration of the upper accessory main body part 650. (A) is a schematic view of the front surface of the accessory decoration part 700 of the lower accessory unit 156, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the accessory decoration part 700. (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the accessory main body part 750 of the lower accessory unit 156, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the internal configuration of the accessory main body part 750. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the second upper decorative locking portion 645 and the second upper main body locking portion 695 of the upper accessory unit 154 are in a locked state, and (B) is a perspective view of the second upper decoration locking portion 695 of the upper accessory unit 154. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the decorative locking portion 645 and the second upper body locking portion 695 are in an unlocked state. (A) is a schematic view of the front surface of the superior accessory decoration part 800, (B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the superior accessory decoration part 800 in the state shown in (A), and (C) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the superior accessory decoration part 800 in the state shown in (A). It is a schematic diagram of the front surface of the object decoration part 800, and (D) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the accessory decoration part 800 in the state shown in (C). (A) is a schematic diagram of the front surface of the minor accessory decoration portion 900, (B) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the minor accessory decoration portion 900 in the state shown in (A), and (C) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the minor accessory decoration portion 900 in the state shown in (A). It is a schematic diagram of the front surface of the object decoration part 900, and (D) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the auxiliary object decoration part 900 in the state shown in (C). It is a diagram illustrating the movement of the character accessory 1550 during the attachment/detachment operation of the upper unit 180, and (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is covered by the character accessory 1550. B) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is not covered by the character accessory 1550. It is a schematic diagram of a state where glass frame 150 is opened. It is a schematic diagram of a state where the glass frame 150 is opened, (A) is a schematic diagram of a state where only the game board 102A is removed, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a state where the game board unit 102 is removed. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a state in which a glass frame 150 and an inner frame 170 are opened. It is a schematic diagram with the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 opened, (A) is a schematic diagram with the production control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D removed, and (B) is a schematic diagram with the main display device 131 is a schematic diagram of the state in which 131 is removed. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a mode of attachment error notification; (A) is a diagram showing a mode of upper decorative part non-attached error notification; and (B) is a figure showing a mode of upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification. (C) is a diagram illustrating the timing of output in upper decoration part non-installation error notification and upper decoration part erroneous installation error notification. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a mode of attachment error notification, in which (A) is a diagram showing a mode of lower decorative part non-attached error notification, and (B) is a figure showing a mode of lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification. be. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a mode of attachment error notification, in which (A) is a diagram showing a mode of upper unit non-installation error notification, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode of upper unit incorrect attachment error notification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating other aspects of the attachment error notification, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating another aspect of the upper decoration part not attached error notification, and (B) is a diagram showing other aspects of the upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification. FIG. 7C is a diagram showing another mode of upper decorative part non-installation error notification. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a power restoration notification and a mounting error notification, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating an aspect of a power restoration notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a power restoration notification and a mounting error notification. It is a diagram. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between RAM clear notification and installation error notification, where (A) is a diagram illustrating a mode of RAM clear notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between RAM clear notification and installation error notification. It is a diagram. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and attachment error notification; FIG. It is. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between door open error notification and mounting error notification, where (A) is a diagram illustrating a mode of door opening error notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between door opening error notification and mounting error notification. (C) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between door opening error notification and mounting error notification. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and attachment error notification, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating the aspect of magnetic error notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the timing of output in magnetic error notification. (C) is a diagram illustrating a mode of radio wave error notification, and (D) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between magnetic error notification and radio wave error notification. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between switch connection error notification and mounting error notification, where (A) is a diagram illustrating a mode of switch connection error notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating output timing in switch connection error notification. FIG. 3C is a diagram illustrating the relationship between switch connection error notification and attachment error notification. It is a diagram explaining the relationship between vibration error notification etc. and mounting error notification, (A) is a diagram explaining the relationship between vibration error notification and mounting error notification, and (B) is a diagram explaining the relationship between abnormal winning notification and mounting error notification. (C) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between ejection error notification and mounting error notification. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a plate full error notification and a mounting error notification, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the plate full error notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a plate full error notification and a mounting error notification. FIG. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a left-handed player notification and a mounting error notification, (A) is a diagram explaining the aspect of a left-handed player notification, and (B) is a diagram explaining the relationship between a left-handed player notification and a mounting error notification. FIG. 3C is a diagram illustrating the relationship between left-handed player notification and mounting error notification. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the output priority of various notifications, etc., (A) is a diagram for explaining the output priority of the frame lamp/board lamp for various notifications, etc., and (B) is a diagram for explaining the output priority of various notifications, etc. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the priority of output in an audio output device. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the output mode of the main display device 131 for various notifications, etc. (A) is a diagram illustrating the output mode of the main display device 131 for various notifications, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the output mode of the main display device 131 for various notifications. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an output mode on the main display device 131 in notification. It is a front view of gaming machine 200 of a second embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine 200 showing the configuration of the gaming machine 200. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing functional blocks of a gaming machine 200. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the entire management system in the gaming machine 200. FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 200 showing a state in which a glass frame 2150 is opened with respect to an outer frame 2160. 3A is a back view of the gaming machine 200, (A) is a view with a back cover 2600 attached, and (B) is a view with the back cover 2600 removed. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic view of the decoration unit 2180, (A) is a perspective view of the decoration unit 2180, and (B) is a schematic view showing the decoration unit 2180 in a removed state. It is a table explaining various detection methods as other embodiments. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of gaming state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation effect of a first variation route. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation effect of a second variation route. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation start period of a fluctuation performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a fluctuation start effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation start period and a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the number of pending memories. It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation stop suggestion period of fluctuation performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching a variable route. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching a variable route. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching a variable route. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching a variable route. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching a variable route. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching a variable route. It is an explanatory view showing an example of continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of operation performance of a movable member. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation suggestion effect of an operation button. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pseudo continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pseudo continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pseudo continuous performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of normal reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of SP reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of SP reach performance. This is a continuation of FIG. 31. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of SP reach performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of promotion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation effect of an advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of normal reach performance in an advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of SP reach performance in an advantageous gaming state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between fluctuation paths. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of SP reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of revival performance.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine 100 and a gaming machine 200 as an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. Note that the embodiments described below do not limit the present invention, and not all of the elements and combinations thereof described in the embodiments are essential to the solution of the present invention. do not have.

[Description of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment]
Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2, first, the configuration of a gaming machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. The game machine 100 is a pachinko game in which a game ball is fired based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. It is a machine.

In the following explanation, the left and right direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "X direction", particularly the right direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "+X direction", and the left direction of the gaming machine 100 will be referred to as the "-X direction". Also called "direction". Further, the vertical direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "Y direction", and in particular, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Y direction", and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "-Y direction". Further, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "Z direction", in particular, the direction toward the back side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Z direction", and the direction toward the near side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Z direction". - Also called "Z direction".

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 that is attached to island equipment of a gaming parlor, and an inner frame that is rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 160. 170, and a glass frame 150 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 170. A glass member 151 is provided on the glass frame 150 so as to be detachable from the back side. Further, at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, a lock unit is provided for making the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 160, and for making the upper unit 180 described later detachable. 190 is provided, the details of which will be described later. Further, a glass frame release switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150 to detect that the glass frame 150 is opened, and a glass frame release switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the inner frame 170 to detect that the glass frame 150 is opened. An inner frame release switch (not shown) is provided for detecting that the inner frame has been opened.

The inner frame 170 is provided with the main mechanisms, various parts, boards, etc. that make up the game machine 100, and is also provided with the game board unit 102 in a detachable manner. A gaming area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the gaming board unit 102. This game area 106 includes a game ball falling area where game balls flow down, and a display screen area of the main display device 131.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board unit 102 includes a game board 102A constituting the game area 106, an accessory unit 102B including various movable accessories, a main display device 131, and an effect control board 320. It is composed of a production control board unit 102C and a main control board unit 102D including a main control board 300. Further, details of these constituent members constituting the game board unit 102 will be described later. Note that the game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is arranged in this opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the main display device 131. Further, in the game board unit 102, the side facing the player is also called the front side, and the back side (the opposite side to the front side) is also called the back side.

A production operation unit BSU is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 150. The performance operation unit BSU is provided with a sword handle unit 135 and a performance operation stick 136. Further, an upper plate 128 is provided on the back side of the production operation unit BSU, and a firing handle device 103 is provided on the lower right side of the production operation unit BSU. Further, an upper unit 180 is provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, which performs a predetermined related operation when a predetermined gaming state is entered. Although the details will be described later, the upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 and is configured to engage with the glass frame 150. A first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 are provided on both left and right sides of the glass frame 150 for displaying effects during gaming and non-gaming.

The upper tray 128 is formed with a ball flow path that is a flow path for game balls supplied from a ball rental machine (not shown) installed in parallel with the game machine 100 and game balls that are prize balls when winning a prize. , a tray for storing game balls to be fired into the game area 106. Further, a fullness detection switch 314 is provided in the middle of the ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a tray full error in which the upper tray 128 is full of game balls. Note that while the fullness detection switch 314 detects that the upper tray 128 is full, the payout of game balls by a prize ball payout device, etc., which will be described later, is stopped. Furthermore, the game balls stored in the upper tray 128 are led out to a firing rail (not shown), and guided to a guide rail (not shown) via the firing rail at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing handle device 103. , is fired into the game area 106 (game ball falling area). In this case, depending on how the player rotates the firing handle device 103, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 passes through the left route 106a or the right route 106b of the game ball falling area included in the game area 106. do. Specifically, when the player rotates the firing handle device 103 relatively weakly, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 can pass through the left route 106a. On the other hand, when the player rotates the firing handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 can pass through the right route 106b.

A sword handle unit 135 imitating the shape of the handle of a sword is arranged in the center of the performance operation unit BSU. The sword handle unit 135 is used to change the presentation mode through the player's operation, and also functions as an accessory that operates in various modes depending on predetermined game conditions to perform various presentations. Further, on the left side of the performance operation unit BSU, there is provided a performance operation stick 136 which is a joystick operated by the player to adjust the volume of the gaming machine 100, etc.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 106, there is an upper accessory unit 154 on the back side of the upper part, a lower accessory unit 156 at the bottom of the game ball flowing area, and there are two units sandwiched between these units and the game board 102A. A light guide panel unit 181 including a light guide panel disposed at a position covering these movable accessories and the main display device 131 is provided.

The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 are movable accessories (so-called gimmicks) provided in the accessory unit 102B. Various effects can be performed by moving the robot through motion. Further, the light guide panel unit 181 includes a light guide panel made of resin such as transparent acrylic, and a light emitting section for allowing light to enter the light guide panel. In the light guide panel unit 181, the effect display displayed on the main display device 131 is made visible through the light guide panel, and a part of the panel is made to emit light by light incident from the light emitting part, thereby displaying a design, etc. It is possible to display. In addition, in the conventional light guide panel unit, the light emitting part was provided in a structure that covered the end of the light guide panel, but in the light guide panel unit 181, the light guide panel is provided with a light emitting part that covers the end of the light guide panel. Since the light emitting section is provided so that light enters from the side surface of the light panel, the light emitting area of the light guide panel can be made wider than in the past. In this application, "movable accessory" is interpreted to mean a moving accessory. Furthermore, the term "yakubutsu" is interpreted in a broad sense to include both movable and immovable props.

A first starting device 112 having a starting area into which a game ball can enter is provided in an area approximately below the center of the gaming area 106. This first starting device 112 is a general winning device type winning device, and when a game ball wins, a jackpot random number is acquired, a jackpot determination is made, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out. . Moreover, above the first starting device 112, the game ball does not pass between the nails mainly in the middle of the left side route 106a in the game ball falling area, but enters the first starting device 112 by warping. A stage 140 is provided to facilitate the operation. Note that the game ball that has entered the stage 140 may return to the game ball flowing area from a predetermined notch in the stage 140 after staying on the stage 140.

Further, in the lower right area of the game area 106, a second starting device 115 having a starting area into which a game ball can enter is provided. The second starting device 115 is a so-called attacker type electric accessory, and is provided with a starting port at its lower part, and has a movable piece 115b above the starting port. It is movably controlled into a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is drawn into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided into the second starter 115 from the starter opening, and the game ball can easily enter the second starter 115. Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the game ball will not enter the starting hole, and the game ball will not be able to enter the second starting device 115. That is, in the second starting device 115, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, there is no chance of winning the game ball, and when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the chance of winning the game ball increases. In addition, when a game ball wins, the second starting device 115 acquires a jackpot random number and performs a jackpot determination, similar to the first starting device 112, and, for example, the same prize ball as the first starting device 112 (3 ) will be paid out.

In addition, in the area on the right side of the gaming area 106, there is a normal symbol activation gate 113b having a normal area through which game balls can pass, a first grand prize device 117 into which game balls can enter, and a first grand prize device 117 into which game balls can enter. A second grand prize winning device 127 is provided. When a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a winning random number is acquired and a winning determination is performed. Furthermore, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the prize ball will not be paid out based on the passage.

The first big winning device 117 is a so-called attacker type electric accessory, and has an opening at its lower part and a movable piece 117b above the opening. It is movably controlled into a protruding state in which it protrudes from the board 102A and a retracted state in which it is drawn into the game board 102A. Then, when the movable piece 117b enters the retracted state, the game ball is guided into the first big prize winning device 117 through the opening, and the game ball becomes able to win in the first big winning device 117 (this state is called "open" or "open"). (also called "open state"). Further, when a game ball enters the first big winning device 117, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in the protruding state, the game ball will not enter the opening, and the game ball will not be able to enter the first grand prize winning device 117 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state") ).

The second big prize winning device 127 is a so-called attacker type electric accessory, and has an opening at its lower part and a movable piece 127b above the opening. It is movably controlled into a protruding state in which it protrudes from the board 102A and a retracted state in which it is drawn into the game board 102A. Then, when the movable piece 127b enters the retracted state, the game ball is guided into the second grand prize winning device 127 through the opening, and the gaming ball becomes able to win in the second grand prize winning device 127 (this state is called "open" or "open"). (also called "open state"). Further, when a game ball enters the second grand prize winning device 127, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 127b is in the protruding state, the game ball will not enter the opening, and the game ball will not be able to enter the second grand prize winning device 127 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state" ).

Further, above the second big winning device 127, a winning assisting device (not shown) is provided. This winning assist device is configured such that when a plurality of game balls that have passed through the right route 106b of the gaming area 106 pass through the movable piece 127b in a closed state, they stay on the movable piece 127b for a predetermined time, The movable piece 127b is opened at predetermined time intervals to allow a plurality of staying game balls to enter the second grand prize winning device 127 at once, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, at the bottom of the gaming area 106, game balls that have not entered any of the first starting device 112, second starting device 115, first big winning device 117, and second big winning device 127 are discharged. An outlet 111 is provided for this purpose. Further, in the right area of the gaming area 106, a cover 116 is provided that covers the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 from the front side. This cover 116 is formed with a guide portion that protrudes toward the game board 102A in order to guide the game balls to the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127.

A main display device 131 consisting of a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like is provided approximately at the center of the gaming area 106, and this main display device 131 displays images during standby when no games are being played. , display images according to the progress of the game. Among them, a plurality of decorative symbols for notifying the jackpot determination result are variably displayed based on the winning of the game balls of the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, and a specific combination of decorative symbols (for example, 777, etc.) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed stop, a jackpot is notified as a jackpot determination result.

In other words, when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, the decorative pattern changes in the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display 120 or the second special pattern display 122, which will be described later. It is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the display, and is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. That is, the timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols by the main display device 131 and the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 are synchronized. Also, by displaying various images, characters, etc. during the fluctuating display of this decorative pattern, or by displaying a pre-reading effect of the pending display related to the special pattern, you may win a jackpot. It also gives players a sense of expectation.

In this embodiment, the main display device 131 is used as a liquid crystal display device, but a plasma display, an organic EL display, a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a rotating drum, etc. A display device may also be used.

As shown in FIG. 1, a display 125 is provided at the lower left side of the gaming area 106. The display 125 includes a normal symbol display 118, a normal symbol pending display 119, a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol pending display 123, and a second special symbol display 125. It has a special symbol reservation display 124. Details of the display 125 will be described later.

The main display device 131 is arranged approximately at the center of the game board unit 102, and three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and various effects are displayed. The effects displayed on the main display device 131 are executed based on a effect pattern described later. Hereinafter, the effects displayed on the main display device 131 will also be simply referred to as "display effects." In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative designs include numbers 1 to 9 and special designs.

In the display performance on the main display device 131, in the jackpot determination described later, if you win, that is, if it is a jackpot, three decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed, and a jackpot symbol array (for example, " 7,7,7" etc.) is displayed. In addition, in the display performance, if you fail in the jackpot judgment described later, that is, if you lose, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the end, and a losing symbol array (for example, "2, 5 ,1" etc.) is displayed. This allows the player to recognize the result of the jackpot determination.

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the firing handle device 103 is kept rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak batting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 106. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the firing handle device 103 is kept rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong batting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 106. Therefore, when the ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, or the second big winning device 127, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right.

The first starting device 112 is a starting device that is always open. On the other hand, the second starter 115 is normally closed by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second starting device 115 based on the determination result that the game ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b. In this case, a condition is created in which the game ball can easily enter the ball. When the game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are obtained, and the following four determinations can be performed. .
(1) Determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot determination).
(2) Determination of a symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) indicating whether or not it is a jackpot to notify the result of the jackpot determination on the display 125 (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot symbol determination).
(3) Determination of a symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot symbol) that is executed in the case of a jackpot in this jackpot symbol determination and represents the type of jackpot.
(4) In the display performance on the main display device 131, determining whether or not to perform reach (hereinafter also referred to as reach determination), and determining which variation pattern to use among multiple variation patterns (hereinafter, also referred to as reach determination). , also called fluctuation pattern determination).

Here, the "jackpot game" is a special game that opens the first grand prize device 117 or the second grand prize device 127. In addition, "reach" means that two of the three decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the main display device 131 are displayed in a stopped state, and these two decorative symbols form the three decorative symbols that constitute the jackpot symbol arrangement. This refers to a situation in which two of these conditions are included. For example, in the main display device 131, two of the three decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, and the two decorative patterns are in the same state. In this case, the decorative symbols that constitute two of the three decorative symbols that constitute the jackpot symbol arrangement are also called reach symbols.

In addition, in the following explanation, the above-mentioned four judgments that are executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first starting device 112 wins a prize are also referred to as "first special symbol judgment", and the game ball passing through the first starting device 115 is The above four judgments executed on the condition of winning a prize are also called "second special symbol judgment", and these judgments are also collectively called "special symbol judgment".

Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a normal symbol random number is acquired, and a determination is made as to whether or not to open the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115. Below, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b will also be referred to as "normal symbol determination." In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the probability of winning in normal symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining that the movable piece 115b is released, is designed to change depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100.

In the first big winning device 117, the movable piece 117b is opened according to the result of jackpot symbol determination. The first big winning device 117 is normally closed by this movable piece 117b. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the movable piece 117b is operated to open the first jackpot prize device 117. Therefore, by performing a "right-handed hit" during a jackpot game, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played. The movable piece 127b of the second big prize device 127 operates in substantially the same way as the first big prize device 117, and is opened during a jackpot game according to the result of the jackpot determination.

[Description of display 125]
As shown in FIG. 1, the display 125 mainly displays information regarding jackpot symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and includes a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, and a first special symbol pending display. 123, a second special symbol reservation display 124, a normal symbol display 118, and a normal symbol reservation display 119.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 120 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying it, and determines the jackpot symbol determination in the first special symbol determination based on the stopped and displayed special symbol. Announce the results. The first special symbol display 120 stops displaying, as a result of the jackpot symbol determination, a jackpot symbol that indicates a jackpot or a loss symbol that indicates that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. Ru.

When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 122 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying it, and determines the jackpot symbol determination in the second special symbol determination based on the stopped and displayed special symbol. Announce the results. On this second special symbol display 122, as a result of the jackpot symbol determination, a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot or a loss symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is displayed in a stopped state. Ru.

By the way, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a new game ball enters the first starting device 112, such as during a variable display of special symbols related to special symbol determination or during a jackpot game, the game machine 100 triggers a new prize based on this winning. 1. Special symbol determination and symbol variation display are not executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 is provided with a suspension function that suspends the first special symbol determination and stores four pieces of random number information for the first special symbol determination as one set of suspension information. The first special symbol reservation display 123 displays the number of reservation information for the first special symbol determination stored in this way. Similarly, the gaming machine 100 suspends the second special symbol determination when a new game ball enters the second starting device 115, such as during a variable display of special symbols related to the special symbol determination or during a jackpot game. It also has a hold function that stores four pieces of random number information for determining the second special symbol as a set of hold information. The second special symbol reservation display 124 displays the number of reservation information for second special symbol determination stored in this way.

When the normal symbol judgment is performed, the normal symbol display device 118 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying it, and notifies the judgment result of the normal symbol determination using the stopped and displayed normal symbol. By the way, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, such as during the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 118, the normal symbol determination and the variable display of the normal symbols related to the normal symbol determination may not be executed immediately. It has become. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 is provided with a suspension function that suspends the normal symbol determination and stores information on the normal symbol random number for the normal symbol determination as suspension information. The normal symbol reservation display 119 displays the number of reservation information for normal symbol determination stored in this way.

Note that the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment includes a right-handed ramp (not shown) and a round ramp (not shown). The right-hand hitting lamp lights up during a jackpot game state (to be described later) and a time-saving game state (to be described later), and recommends the player to play right (details will be described later). A round lamp is composed of one or more lamps. The round lamp changes from an off state to a on state when a jackpot is won. The round lamp, when lit, indicates the number of round games according to the type of jackpot at the time of jackpot. For example, if there are two round lamps, one round lamp lights up to indicate that the round game will be played four times (in other words, it is a 4R jackpot), and the other round lamp lights up. By lighting up, it is suggested that the round game will be played 16 times (that is, it is suggested that there is a 16R jackpot).

[Internal configuration of gaming machine 100]
The internal configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 3 to 4-3. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. FIG. 4-1 is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. 4-2 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table, and (A) is a diagram for determining the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (ball) of the game ball to the first starting device 112 (jackpot determination ), and (B) is a special 1 jackpot judgment table for judging (jackpot judgment) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning (ball) of the game ball to the second starting device 115. 2 This is a jackpot determination table. FIG. 4-3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300, a payout control board 310, an effect control board 320, an image control board 330, a lamp control board 340, a firing control board 350, and a power supply board 360.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 includes a one-chip microcomputer 301. The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b, and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 also includes an input port and an output port (both not shown) for main control. Furthermore, inputting a signal 302a for clearing the memory contents of the main RAM 301c or updating a set value (probability of determining a jackpot) which is a stage of advantageousness of the game, and setting described later by operation using a setting key. A setting key switch 302b for inputting a signal for transitioning to a change mode or setting confirmation mode, an information display 302c for displaying performance information and setting values that allow understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine, other electronic components, etc. has been implemented.

The information display 302c is composed of four 7-segment displays arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays from the right constitute set values and numerical values of performance information. A numerical segment is configured to display numerical information indicating. Note that static lighting is performed when setting values are displayed, and dynamic lighting is performed when performance information is displayed.

This main control input port includes a gate detection switch 303 that detects that a game ball has entered the normal symbol activation gate 113b, and a first start switch that detects that a game ball has entered the first starter device 112. A device detection switch 304a, a second starting device detection switch 304b that detects that a game ball has entered the second starting device 115, and a first winning device that detects that a gaming ball has entered the first big winning device 117. A detection switch 306a, a second winning device detection switch 306b that detects that a game ball enters the second big winning device 127, and a payout control board 310 are connected. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 305a for detecting abnormal magnetism from outside the gaming machine, a radio wave detection sensor 305b for detecting abnormal radio waves from outside the gaming machine, and an external magnetic field for the gaming machine. A vibration detection sensor 305c is connected to detect abnormal vibrations applied from other sources. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 through this input port for main control.

In addition, the main control output port includes a starter opening/closing solenoid 307 that opens and closes the movable piece 115b, a first big winning device opening/closing solenoid 308 that opens and closes the movable piece 117b, and a second big winning device opening and closing solenoid 308 that opens and closes the movable piece 127b. Winning device opening/closing solenoid 370, symbol displays 118, 120, 122 that display special symbols and normal symbols, symbol pending display 119 that displays the number of pending information for special symbol determination and the number of pending information for normal symbol determination. , 123, 124, a game information output terminal board 309 that outputs external information signals, a payout control board 310, and an effect control board 320 are connected. Various signals are output from the main control board 300 through this main control output port.

Note that the game information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting external information signals generated in the main control board 300 to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like. The game information output terminal board 309 is connected to the main control board 300 by wiring, and the game information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like.

In the one-chip microcomputer 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads the program stored in the main ROM 301b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device. , or send commands to other boards according to the results of arithmetic processing.

As shown in FIG. 4-1, the main ROM 301b stores game control programs and tables necessary for various games, such as a jackpot determination table T1, a jackpot symbol determination table T2, and a reach determination table. T3, a first variation pattern table T4, a second variation pattern table T5, and a normal symbol determination table T6 are stored. The jackpot determination table T1 is a table for making a jackpot determination based on jackpot random numbers. The jackpot determination table T1 includes two jackpot determination tables, namely, a special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and a special 2 jackpot determination table T1B.

As shown in Figure 4-2, the jackpot judgment table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). For reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column. The main CPU 110a refers to the special 1 jackpot determination table or the special 2 jackpot determination table, and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or "loss" based on the current setting value, probability state, and random value for jackpot determination. do. For example, according to the Special 1 Jackpot Judgment Table, when the set value is "1" and the normal gaming state is, 200 random numbers for jackpot judgment from "100" to "299" are judged as "jackpot". Ru. Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

The jackpot symbol determination table T2 is a table for performing jackpot symbol determination based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol determination table T2 includes two jackpot symbol determination tables, namely, the special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A and the special 2 jackpot symbol determination table T2B.

The reach determination table T3 is a table for performing reach determination based on the reach determination random number. The reach determination table T3 includes four reach determination tables (not shown), namely, the reach determination table for special 1 normal time, the reach determination table for special 1 probability change, the reach determination table for special 2 normal time, and the reach determination table for special 2 probability change. A reach determination table is included. These four reach determination tables are selected depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the special 1 normal reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach with the display performance based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The special 1-probability variable reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach with the display performance based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variable gaming state. Special 2 normal reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach with the display performance based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the non-probability variable gaming state. The special 2-probability variable reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach using decorative symbols in the display performance based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variable gaming state. In addition, details of various gaming states such as non-probability variable gaming state and probability variable gaming state will be described later.

The first fluctuation pattern table T4 is a table for performing fluctuation pattern determination based on fluctuation pattern random numbers. The first fluctuation pattern table T4 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, namely, the first special first normal time fluctuation pattern table T4A, the first special first probability variable time fluctuation pattern table T4B, and the first special second normal time fluctuation pattern table T4C. and a first special second probability time varying pattern table T4D. These four variable pattern tables can be selected depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the first special first normal time variation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The first special first probability variable time variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variable gaming state. The first special second normal time variation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The first special second probability variable time variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variable gaming state.

The second fluctuation pattern table T5 is a table for performing fluctuation pattern determination based on fluctuation pattern random numbers. The second fluctuation pattern table T5 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, namely, a second special first normal time fluctuation pattern table T5A, a second special first probability variable time fluctuation pattern table T5B, and a second special second normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C. and a second special 2-probability time-varying pattern table T5D. These four variable pattern tables can be selected depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the second special first normal time variation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The second special first probability variable time variation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variable gaming state. The second special second normal time variation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The second special second probability variable time variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variable gaming state.

One of the first fluctuation pattern table T4 and the second fluctuation pattern table T5 is selected at the time of fluctuation pattern determination, and they are not selected at the same time. The first fluctuation pattern table T4 is a table in which the average number of fluctuation seconds (average performance time) is shorter than the second fluctuation pattern table T5, and when the reservation order information at the time of acquisition, which will be described later, is "3" or "4". selected. The second fluctuation pattern table T5 is a table in which the average number of fluctuation seconds is longer than that of the first fluctuation pattern table T4, and is selected when acquisition hold order information, which will be described later, is "1" or "2".

These first variation pattern table T4 and second variation pattern table T5 have various variation patterns. Specifically, the pseudo consecutive performance, normal loss performance, normal reach (loss or hit) performance, SP reach (loss or hit) performance (development performance after execution of reach formation performance), SPSP reach (loss or win) performance ( A variation that combines various effects, such as a development effect after the execution of the SP reach effect), an SPSP reach revival (hit) effect, a effect in which a losing pattern sequence is formed, and a effect in which a jackpot pattern pattern is formed with a specific pattern. It's a pattern. Here, pseudo-continuous performance (or pseudo-continuous variation performance) means that during the variable display of special symbols, a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner again. This is a performance that repeats the display of fluctuations in a pseudo manner. In this case, in the pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the decorative symbols are slowed down without being temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. good.

The normal symbol determination table T6 is a table for performing normal symbol determination based on the regular symbol random numbers. Details of the above-mentioned jackpot determination table T1, jackpot symbol determination table T2, and normal symbol determination table T6 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4-3(A), the main RAM 301c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 301a, and has a plurality of storage areas, such as a pending information storage area 301cx, It has a pending information determination area 301cy. In addition, the main RAM 301c has a storage area (not shown) in which various flags (such as a variable probability game flag, a time-saving game flag, and a jackpot game flag, which will be described later), various recorded values, and the like are stored.

As shown in FIG. 4-3(B), the hold information storage area 301cx includes four hold information areas (a 1 pending information area, 2nd pending information area, 3rd pending information area, 4th pending information area), and 4 pending information areas (first pending information area, A second pending information area, a third pending information area, and a fourth pending information area) are provided.

In the reservation information area corresponding to the first special symbol of the reservation information storage area 301cx, the priority order of storage of reservation information is that the first reservation information area is given the highest priority and the reservation information is stored in the first reservation information area. If stored, then the second pending information area is given priority as a storage target, then the third pending information area is given priority as a storage target, and finally, the fourth pending information area is given priority as a storage target. selected. The same applies to the reservation information area corresponding to the second special symbol. In addition, in FIG. 4-3 (B), a "〇" is shown in the hold information area where hold information is stored, and a "-" is shown in the hold information area where hold information is not stored. It is shown.

The hold order information at the time of acquisition stored in the hold information area of the hold information storage area 301cx is information representing the hold order when hold information is acquired. Specifically, the hold order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the hold information area that is stored when hold information is acquired. For example, when hold information is acquired, if the hold information is stored only in the first hold information area, the hold information will be stored in the second hold information area, so the hold information will be stored in the hold order at the time of acquisition. The information becomes "2". When the hold information is acquired, if the hold information is stored in the first hold information area, the second hold information area, and the third hold information area, the hold information is stored in the fourth hold information area. Since it will be stored, the reservation order information at the time of acquisition will be "4". The reservation information determination area 301cy is a determination area where special symbol determination is performed based on reservation information.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 310 controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 310 includes a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU, payout ROM, and payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. The payout CPU executes a program stored in the payout ROM based on input signals from a payout ball measurement switch 311, a door open switch 312, a full detection switch 314, and a timer that detect whether or not game balls have been paid out. is read out and subjected to arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 300. Also, connected to the output side of the payout control board 310 is a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300, and also controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to issue a predetermined prize. Dispense the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU.

The performance control board 320 mainly controls various performances such as during gaming and on standby. This production control board 320 includes a sub CPU 320a, a sub ROM 320b, and a sub RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the production control board 320. . The sub CPU 320a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 320b and performs arithmetic processing based on various commands received from the main control board 300, various units, production operation stick 136, and input signals from the timer. Based on the processing, corresponding data is sent to the image control board 330 and lamp control board 340.

For example, upon receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 320a displays the main display device 131, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the audio output device 331, the sword handle unit 135, and the upper unit 180. , upper accessory unit 154, lower accessory unit 156, accessory mechanism section 158, light guide panel unit 181, presentation board lighting device 341 (board lamp), presentation frame lighting device 342 (frame lamp), etc. A performance pattern for executing the performance is determined, and a performance pattern designation command for executing the performance pattern is transmitted to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Details regarding the determination of this performance pattern will be described later. Further, the sub ROM 320b stores programs for performance control, data necessary for determining various games, and a plurality of tables. Details about these tables will be described later. Further, the sub-RAM 320c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 320a, and stores game status, performance patterns, decorative symbols, counting counters, firing operation information, and the like. Note that the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a plurality of storage areas. Details of these storage areas will be described later.

The image control board 330 includes an image CPU (not shown), a control ROM, a control RAM, a CGROM, a VRAM, a VDP (not shown) for controlling the image display of the main display device 131, an audio CPU, an audio ROM, and an audio RAM. . This image control board 330 is connected to the production control board 320 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally, and has a main display device 131, a first side display device 132, a second side display device 133, and an audio output on its output side. A device 331 is connected.

The image CPU controls the VDP to display a predetermined image based on commands received from the effect control board 320. The control RAM functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the image CPU, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM also stores programs for controlling the image CPU, animation patterns for displaying animations based on production patterns, animation scene information, and the like. The CGROM stores a large amount of image data such as decorative patterns and backgrounds to be displayed on the main display device 131, etc., and the image CPU reads a predetermined program based on various commands sent from the production control board 320. At the same time, predetermined image data stored in the CGROM is developed in the VRAM, and control is performed to display the image data developed in the VRAM on the main display device 131 or the like, thereby realizing a display effect. The audio ROM stores a large amount of audio data to be output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads a predetermined program based on various commands sent from the production control board 320, and 150, performs audio output control in the audio output devices 331 such as speakers provided in the first side display device 132 and the second side display device 133, and realizes audio performance.

The lamp control board 340 controls the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the light guide panel unit 181, and also controls the lamps provided on the decorative members of the game board unit 102. Control of the presentation board lighting device 341 (board lamp), and control of the presentation frame lighting device 342 (frame lamp) such as a lamp built into the firing handle device 103 or a lamp of a decorative member provided in the glass frame 150. and execute. Specifically, the lamp control board 340 drives and controls the motors and the like provided in each of the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the accessory mechanism section 158. By doing so, it is possible to realize a movable performance using the unit's movable accessories (movable objects). In addition, when the power is restored, for example, an initial operation is performed in which the movable accessory is moved in a series from the initial position to the advancing position to the initial position as described later. The lamp control board 340 also controls the light emitting part of the light guide panel unit 181 to realize a light emitting effect by the light guide panel, and also controls the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper accessory unit 154, and the lower accessory unit. Lighting effects can be realized by controlling lighting/blinking of the unit 156 and the effect board lighting device 341 (board lamp), and effect frame lighting by controlling lighting/blinking of the effect frame lighting device 342 (frame lamp). A lighting effect is realized by the device 342 (frame lamp). Note that the lamp control board 340 is connected to be able to receive predetermined signals, which will be described later, from the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the accessory mechanism section 158, and the like.

The firing control board 350 inputs touch signals from the touch sensor 351 provided on the firing handle device 103 and controls energization of the firing solenoid 353 and the ball feeding solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 352. I do. The touch sensor 351 is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the firing handle device 103, and when it detects that the player has touched the firing handle device 103, , outputs a touch signal to the firing control board 350 to permit energization of the firing solenoid 353. The firing volume 352 is composed of a variable resistor, divides a constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 352 by the variable resistor, and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control board 350. Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 353 is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control board 350. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute) because one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates once. That is, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds. Note that the touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and the voltage signal from the firing volume 352 are input to the production control board 320. Thereby, the performance control board 320 can detect the firing of the game ball.

The power supply board 360 includes a backup power supply made of a capacitor, and supplies power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100. Specifically, power supply voltage is supplied to the main control board 300, the payout control board 310, the production control board 320, and the firing control board 350. It also monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100 and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 300 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes to a high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operational, and when the power interruption detection signal goes to a low level, the main CPU 301a goes into a non-operational state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, but may be a battery, for example, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery may be used.

[List of processing on main control board 300]
The processing executed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 4-4. FIG. 4-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by the main control board 300.

As shown in FIG. 4-4, when the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 is supplied with power, it executes main processing based on the program stored in the main ROM 301b. Further, the main CPU 301a repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing at regular intervals (for example, every 4 milliseconds) during execution of the main processing. Various types of processing such as main processing and timer interrupt processing will be explained below.

[Explanation of main processing]
Main processing is processing for starting control of the game and initial operation of various drive sources such as movable accessories, and includes, for example, power-on processing, power restoration processing, RAM clearing processing, setting change processing, and setting confirmation. processing. The power-on process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on, etc., and in this process, the control state of the game is initialized, and the current gaming state (here, the non-time saving normal gaming state) is A power-on designation command indicating the gaming state) is transmitted to the payout control board 310 and the production control board 320. As a result, the performance control board 320 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized. The power recovery process is a process that is executed when the progress state (control state) of the game returns (recovers) to the state before the power cut and it becomes possible to resume the game from the state before the power cut. In this process, a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage is transmitted to the production control board 320. As a result, the production control board 320 performs a process to issue a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. RAM clear processing is processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the gaming RAM area other than the setting value area) based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 302a. A designated command is transmitted to the production control board 320. As a result, the production control board 320 performs processing for notifying RAM clearing. The setting change process is a setting for changing (updating) the setting value (probability of being judged as a jackpot in jackpot judgment), which is the stage of the advantage of the game, based on the operation of the setting key switch 302b or the RAM clear switch 302b. This is a process of transitioning to a change mode, and in this process, a setting change designation command is sent to the production control board 320. As a result, the production control board 320 performs a process for executing setting change notification to notify that the setting value is being changed (setting change mode). The setting confirmation process is a process of shifting to a setting confirmation mode in which a game clerk or the like confirms the setting values, and in this process, a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the production control board 320. Thereby, a process for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the production control board 320 (setting confirmation mode) is performed.

[Explanation of timer interrupt processing]
The random number update process is a process of updating various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers. The switch process is a process that is executed when a detection signal is input from each switch, and when the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 detects the entry of a ball, a jackpot random number, etc. is acquired and is stored as pending information. A starter switch process for storing, a gate switch process for acquiring and storing a normal symbol random number when a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, and a first jack process during a jackpot game (in the jackpot game state). A process including a first big prize device switch process for detecting a winning game ball in the winning device 117, and a second big prize device switch process for detecting a winning game ball in the second big prize device 127 during the jackpot gaming state. It is. Note that the starting device switch process includes a preliminary determination process that executes jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, etc. based on the pending information.

The special symbol processing is processing related to special symbols according to the processing results in the switch processing (first starting device 112, second starting device 115), and when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the pending information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c is A jackpot determination is made based on the reservation information shift process of shifting the reservation information and the reservation order information at the time of acquisition, and the jackpot random number of the reservation information shifted to the reservation information determination area 301cy in the reservation information shift process and the jackpot determination table T1. A jackpot determination process to be executed, a jackpot symbol determination process that determines a jackpot symbol (special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number included in the suspension information and the jackpot symbol determination table T2 when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and a suspension. reach determination processing that performs reach determination based on the reach random number included in the information and reach determination table T3; fluctuation pattern setting processing that sets a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number of the fluctuation pattern table and the pending information; This process includes a special symbol stop process in which the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 is stopped and displayed.

The normal symbol processing is processing related to normal symbols according to the processing result in the switch processing (normal symbol actuation gate 113b), and is based on the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol determination table T6 when there is pending information of the normal symbol. A normal symbol determination process for determining a normal symbol; a motion pattern setting process for setting a motion pattern of the movable piece 115b when a hit is determined in the normal symbol determination; This process includes an opening/closing member control process for controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115.

The big winning device opening control process is a process related to opening/closing control of the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127, and includes an opening pattern setting process for setting an opening pattern during the opening performance at the beginning of the big winning game. A game state setting process of turning off the jackpot game flag, turning on the time-saving game flag, etc. when the final ending performance of the jackpot game ends, and setting the time-saving variation number to a predetermined number (for example, 8000 times); This is a process that includes The payout process is a process that controls the payout of prize balls according to the detection result (winning of the game ball) in the switch process. The command transmission process is a process of transmitting to the performance control board 320 information necessary for determining the various commands and performance contents generated in the above process.

The abnormality determination process is a process for determining whether or not various errors have occurred, and transmitting an error-related designation command corresponding to the error, etc. that has occurred to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 320 executes various types of error notification processing. Various errors include, for example, a door opening error when the door opening switch 313 changes from an OFF state to an ON state, various switches such as the gate detection switch 303 are not connected (incorrect connection), etc. A switch connection error occurs when an abnormal state occurs, a magnetic error occurs when abnormal magnetism is detected for a predetermined period of time by the magnetic detection sensor 305a, and an abnormal radio wave is detected for a predetermined period of time by the radio wave detection sensor 305b. A radio wave error occurs when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 305c for a predetermined period of time, an abnormal winning error occurs when a game ball enters the grand prize opening when a special game is not in progress, An ejection error occurs when the number of game balls that enter the various winning holes does not match the number of game balls that are discharged from the winning ball channel through which the winning balls flow down, and the full detection switch 314 detects that the upper tray 128 is full. An error occurs when the ball is removed, an operation error occurs when the RAM clear switch 302a or the setting key switch 302b is operated while the game is being controlled, and a game ball misses the right route 106b when the game is in a non-variable gaming state. There are situations such as right-handed hitting when passing.

[Electrical configuration of production control board 320]
The electrical configuration of the production control board 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4-5 and 4-6. FIG. 4-5 is a block diagram showing details of the effect control board 320. FIG. 4-6 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. The production control board 320 determines a production pattern based on the commands (including variable patterns, etc.) sent from the main control board 300, and sends a production pattern designation command based on the production pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Send. As described above, the main display device 131 and the like are electrically connected to the image control board 330, and the sword handle unit 135 and the like are electrically connected to the lamp control board 340. With such a configuration, the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 can execute display effects, audio effects, lighting effects, and movable character effects based on the effect pattern designation command sent from the effect control board 320. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 4-5, the sub ROM 320b stores a basic display performance specification table TS1, a decorative symbol determination table TS2, and a chance up determination table TS3. The basic display performance specification table TS1 is based on the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300, and displays the above-mentioned normal loss performance, normal reach (loss or win) performance, SP reach (loss or win) performance, and SPSP reach (loss or win) performance. This is a table for specifying either the performance (win) performance or the SPSP reach revival (win) performance as the basic performance in the display performance (hereinafter also referred to as the basic display performance). In this embodiment, the variation patterns transmitted from the main control board 300 and the basic display effects have a one-to-one correspondence. Note that a plurality of basic display performances may be made to correspond to the fluctuation patterns, and the sub CPU 320a of the performance control board 320 may select the basic display performance by lottery. In this way, even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of the performance can be changed. Further, one basic display performance may be made to correspond to a plurality of variation patterns. The decorative symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in a fixed stop, and the ready-to-win symbol in the case of performing a ready-to-reach in a display performance based on a performance pattern. The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance-up effect in the display effect. Here, the chance-up performance is a performance that executes a display performance that is different from the normal performance to increase the expectation level of a jackpot compared to the normal performance.

As shown in FIG. 4-5, the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a reservation storage area 320c1 and a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3. Note that the sub-RAM 320c also has a flag storage area (not shown) in which predetermined flags and the like are stored. For example, this flag storage area stores a continuous execution effect flag, a pseudo continuous effect execution flag, etc., which will be described later. The reservation storage area 320c1 includes a first reservation area, a second reservation area, a third reservation area, and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first special symbol, and a first reservation area, a second reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol It is divided into eight areas: a reservation area, a third reservation area, and a fourth reservation area, and one reservation flag can be stored in each area. In the reservation area corresponding to the first special symbol of the reservation storage area 320c1, the priority order for storing reservation flags is that the first reservation area is given the highest priority and is the storage target, and the reservation flag is not stored in the first reservation area. For example, next, the second reservation area is selected as a storage target with priority, then the third reservation area is selected as a storage target with priority, and finally, the fourth reservation area is selected as a storage target. The same applies to the reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the production control board 320 receives a hold command from the main control board 300, it specifies the hold area in which the hold flag is stored in the hold storage area 320c1, and selects a hold area that should be stored preferentially next to the hold area. Store the pending flag in . However, if the hold command is received while the hold flag is stored in the fourth hold area, the hold flag is not stored. Furthermore, the priority order for erasing the pending flags is the opposite of the priority order for storing them, that is, the fourth pending area is given the highest priority and is targeted for deletion, and if no pending flags are stored in the fourth pending area. Next, the third reservation area is selected as a priority deletion target, then the second reservation area is prioritized as a deletion target, and finally, the first reservation area is selected as a deletion target. When the production control board 320 receives the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 300, it specifies the reservation area in which the reservation flag is stored in the reservation storage area 320c1, and erases the reservation flag in the reservation area that should be erased preferentially. . If no pending flag is stored in the first pending area, no erasure processing is performed.

As shown in FIG. 4-6, the advance determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing advance determination information (special symbols for advance determination, fluctuation patterns for advance determination, and reservation order information at the time of acquisition), and Four storage areas (a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area) are provided corresponding to the types of symbols. In addition, each storage area includes a jackpot judgment information column that stores jackpot judgment information based on the special symbol for preliminary judgment, a jackpot symbol information column that stores jackpot symbol information based on the preliminary judgment symbol, and a jackpot symbol information column that stores jackpot judgment information based on the special symbol for preliminary judgment. A variable pattern information column that stores variable pattern information based on the pattern, a pending order information column at the time of acquisition that stores information about the pending order at the time of acquisition, and continuous performance presence/absence information that stores continuous performance presence/absence information indicating whether or not continuous performance is activated. A column is provided. Although details will be described later, the continuous performance presence/absence information includes continuous performance activation information and continuous performance non-activation information.

The hold command transmitted from the main control board 300 includes preliminary determination information (a special symbol for preliminary determination, a variation pattern for preliminary determination, and reservation order information at the time of acquisition). The preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 stores these pieces of preliminary determination information in association with each other. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority order for storing advance determination information is that the first storage area is given the highest priority and is to be stored, and if the advance determination information is stored in the first storage area, then The second storage area is selected as a storage target with priority, then the third storage area is selected as a storage target with priority, and finally, the fourth storage area is selected as a storage target. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, in a state where the preliminary determination information has already been stored in the third storage area of the first special symbol, the preliminary determination information of the new first special symbol (specific symbol A, variation pattern 7B, pending order information at the time of acquisition "4") is added. ”) (see Figure 4-6), store information representing “4” in the acquisition hold order information field of the fourth storage area, and store “4” in the fluctuation pattern information field of the fourth storage area. Information representing "pattern 7B" is stored, information representing "specific symbol A" is stored in the jackpot symbol information column of the fourth storage area, and information representing "jackpot" is stored in the jackpot determination information column of the fourth storage area. do.

In addition, in FIG. 4-6, as the advance judgment information of the first storage area related to the first special symbol, the information of "lost" in the jackpot judgment information column and the information of "none" in the jackpot symbol information column correspond to the fluctuation pattern. Information representing "variation pattern 1" is stored in the information column, and information representing "3" is stored in the acquisition pending order information column. As the preliminary judgment information in the second storage area, the information of "Loss" in the jackpot judgment information column, the information of "None" in the jackpot symbol information column, and the information of "variation pattern 2AX" in the variation pattern information column, at the time of acquisition. Information representing "1" is stored in each pending order information column. As the preliminary determination information in the third storage area, the information of "Loss" in the jackpot determination information column, the information of "None" in the jackpot symbol information column, and the information of "variable pattern 4BX" in the variable pattern information column, at the time of acquisition. Information representing "2" is stored in each pending order information column. Further, in the continuous performance presence/absence information column, continuous performance activation information indicating whether or not to execute a continuous performance is stored in a prefetch process described later. In addition, in FIG. 4-6, "〇" is shown as continuous performance activation information, which is information indicating the activation of continuous performance, in the continuous performance presence/absence information column corresponding to the fourth storage area related to the first special symbol, and other In the storage area, "-" is shown as continuous performance non-activation information, which is information indicating that continuous performance is not activated.

[List of processing on the production control board 320]
The processing executed by the effect control board 320 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4-7. FIG. 4-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the production control board 320.

As shown in FIG. 4-7, when the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 is supplied with power, it executes the effect main process based on the program stored in the sub ROM 320b. Further, the sub CPU 320a repeatedly executes the effect timer interrupt process at regular intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) during execution of the effect main process. Below, various processes of the effect main process and the effect timer interrupt process will be explained.

[Explanation of main production process]
The effect main process is a process corresponding to the main process in the main control board 300, and includes, for example, a power-on notification process, a power recovery notification process, a RAM clear notification process, a setting change notification process, and a setting confirmation notification process. It is. The power-on notification process is a process for executing power-on notification based on the power-on designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The power restoration notification process is a process for executing power restoration notification based on the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The RAM clear notification process is a process for executing RAM clear notification based on the RAM clear designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The setting change notification process is a process for executing setting change notification based on the setting change designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The setting confirmation notification process is a process for executing setting confirmation notification based on the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a.

[Explanation of production timer interrupt processing]
The random number update process is a process that updates various random numbers used for presentation (for example, decorative pattern determination random numbers, chance-up random numbers). The command reception process is a process based on various commands etc. sent from the main control board 300, and includes a pre-reading process to determine whether to perform a continuous effect or a pseudo continuous effect based on a pending command, and a basic display effect. Performance pattern determination processing that determines a performance pattern based on the specified table TS1, decorative symbol determination table TS2, and chance up determination table TS3, and storage of a suspension flag in the suspension storage area 320c1 of the sub-RAM 320c when a suspension command is received. Hold processing that sets a hold display command for hold display on the main display device 131, and advance judgment that executes shift processing of advance judgment information in the advance judgment information storage area 320c3 of the sub RAM 320c when a fluctuation start command is received. information shift processing, normal symbol production processing which is a process for performing a production corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the main display device 131 according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination, and the main display device 131 based on the symbol confirmation command. The game includes a pattern confirmation process that is a process for displaying a decorative pattern that is changing at a fixed stop, a jackpot process that executes an opening effect, an ending effect, and a round effect during a jackpot game, and an error notification process that will be described later. It is processing. The production button process is a process of detecting input via the sword handle unit 135 or production operation stick 136 and performing a predetermined production. The command transmission process is a process of transmitting various commands generated in the various processes described above to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Here, the continuous performance is a performance that can be performed on the main display device 131, and is a performance that can be performed during the fluctuation start performance over a plurality of variable displays in the special symbol. This continuous performance may consist of only one type of performance, or may include multiple types of performance. If the continuous performance includes multiple types of performance, one of the multiple types of performance may be selected and executed. Further, the continuous performance may be executed for one variable display in the special symbol. Furthermore, the pseudo-continuous performance may be composed of only one type of performance, or may include multiple types of performance. If the pseudo-continuous performance includes multiple types of performance, one of the multiple types of performance may be selected and executed.

The error notification process is a process for executing various types of error notification according to the error system specification command etc. received by the sub CPU 320a, and executes error notification according to the type of the error system specification command etc. This process generates a notification instruction command for. Here, the "error system specification commands" include door open error specification command, switch connection error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, vibration error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, discharge error specification command, Includes commands for specifying ball-pull errors, operation error specification commands, and left-handed hitting status specification commands. Note that the details of each error notification mode according to each error type designation command will be described later.

[Configuration of upper unit 180]
The configuration of the upper unit 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5-1 to 5-3. 5-1 is a perspective view of the upper unit 180, and (A) is a diagram of the upper unit 180 fixed to the outer frame 160 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, (B) is a diagram in which the upper unit 180 is fixed only to the outer frame 160. FIG. 5-2 is a perspective view of the back of the upper unit 180, (A) is a perspective view of the right back, and (B) is a perspective view of the left back. 5-3 is a schematic diagram of the lantern member 1580 in the upper unit 180, (A) is a perspective view of the lantern member 1580, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the lantern member 1580 in an exploded state. .

As shown in FIG. 5-1, the upper unit 180 includes a first side part 1510 and a second side part 1530 in which an LED is provided, and a movable accessory on which a logo of predetermined characters is formed. It includes a character accessory 1550, a first support portion 1515 and a second support portion 1535 in which a first side portion 1510 and a second side portion 1530 are movably connected and fixed to the outer frame 160. .

The character accessory 1550 is composed of a main body part 1555 on which a logo of predetermined characters is formed, and a drive part 1570 for operating the main body part 1555 in a performance according to the game state. In the main body part 1555, a logo member on which a logo is formed is movable, and a movable accessory (not shown) is housed inside. The drive section 1570 includes a motor for operating the logo member and the movable accessory of the main body section 1580, a link mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the motor to the logo member and the movable accessory, and various components from the lamp control board 340. A unit control section (not shown) is provided for controlling operations of the upper unit 180 such as signal transmission and reception and power supply from the power supply board 360. Note that the main body portion 1555 is provided with an LED (not shown), and various light emitting effects are performed in effects depending on the gaming state.

The first side portion 1510 is slidably connected to the first support portion 1515 and has a character accessory 1550 fixed thereto. Further, the second side portion 1530 is slidably connected to the second support portion 1535, and a character accessory 1550 is fixed thereto. Further, each of the first side part 1510 and the second side part 1530 is provided with lantern members 1580 and 1585, which will be described later and have the shape of a lantern and are members for decoration that emit light depending on the gaming state. ing. An identification display section 1532 is provided on the side surface of the second side section 1530. The identification display section 1532 is a code that can be read by a predetermined terminal (for example, a QR code (registered trademark), etc., which displays information such as the model name on the predetermined terminal that has been read). The code section that is displayed, the caution section that displays precautions when wearing the device (e.g., "Caution! Finger pinching," etc.), and the name of the exact model to be installed (e.g., "Model ABC") etc.) is displayed, and the model name section. Note that the first side portion 1510 and the second side portion 1530 are provided with LEDs (not shown), and various light emitting effects are performed in effects depending on the gaming state. The first support section 1515 has a first rail section provided with a rail (not shown), a first side section 1510 fixed to the first support section 1515, and a first rail section (not shown) that is slidable along the rail of the first rail section. A sliding portion is provided. Furthermore, the second support portion 1535 includes a second rail portion provided with a rail (not shown), and a second rail portion (not shown) to which the second side portion 1530 is fixed and is slidable along the rail of the second rail portion. 2 sliding parts are provided.

As shown in FIG. 5-1(B), an upper unit 180 (see FIG. 5-1(A)) fixed to the outer frame 160 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, When removing the glass frame 150 from the glass frame 150 (when removing a part of the glass frame 150 that is fixed to the outer frame 160 but not covering a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150), the first The side part 1510, the second side part 1530 fixed to the second sliding part, and the character accessory 1550 fixed to the first side part 1510 and the second side part 1530 are integrated, and the 1 rail part and the second rail part of the second support part 1535 in an upward diagonal forward direction on the front surface of the gaming machine. In this way, by placing the upper unit 180 in the state shown in FIG. 5-1(B), the glass frame 150 is not covered by the character object 1550 of the upper unit 180, and can be opened and closed. It can be in a state of Note that details regarding the opening/closing structure of the glass frame 150 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 5-2(A), a first support mounting portion 1517 that is attached to the outer frame 160 is provided at the end of the first support support 1515. The first column attachment portion 1517 is provided with a first column attachment pin 1520 that is inserted into the outer frame 160 and a first column attachment piece 1525 that extends in the same direction as the first column attachment pin 1520. ing. Further, the first support mounting pin 1520 has a tapered shape by forming a taper at the tip, and a notch 1521 is provided in a portion where the taper is not formed. In the left region of the back surface of the drive unit 1570 of the character accessory 1550 that is attached to the glass frame 150, there is a first main body attachment pin 1590 that is inserted into the glass frame 150 and that fits into a first glass frame raised portion that will be described later. A first body fitting hole 1593 is provided. Further, the first main body attachment pin 1590 has a tapered shape by forming a taper at the tip, and a notch 1591 is provided in a portion where the taper is not formed.

As shown in FIG. 5-2(B), a second column attachment part 1537 having substantially the same configuration as the first column attachment part 1517 of the first column part 1515 is provided at the end of the second column part 1535. ing. The second column attachment portion 1537 includes a second column attachment pin 1540 having substantially the same shape as the first column attachment pin 1520 and a notch 1541 formed therein, and a second column attachment pin 1540 having approximately the same shape as the first column attachment piece 1525. A mounting piece 1545 is provided. In the right area of the back surface of the drive unit 1570 of the character object 1550 that covers the glass frame 150, there is a second body attachment pin 1595 in which a notch 1596 is formed in the same shape as the first body attachment pin 1590, and a second body attachment pin 1595, which will be described later. A second body fitting hole 1598 that fits into the second glass frame raised portion 1735 is provided.

Furthermore, an upper unit connector 1575 for electrically connecting to a control board or the like in the game board unit 102 is provided in the right area of the back surface of the drive unit 1570 of the character accessory 1550 that covers the glass frame 150. Further, the upper unit connector 1575 is provided with a spring (not shown), and is movable in the attachment/detachment direction. The upper unit connector 1575 having such a structure has a structure that allows it to be pulled or pressed in the attachment/detachment direction with a predetermined force.

As shown in FIG. 5-3(A), the lantern member 1580 is fixed to the front side of the first side part 1510, and although not described in detail, the lantern member 1585 is fixed to the front side of the second side part 1530. ing. The lantern member 1580 is a translucent member decorated with the letter "U" on the front side, and is a member for performing a light emitting effect by emitting light from an LED provided inside. Note that the lantern member 1585 has the same configuration as the lantern member 1580, and is used to perform the same light emitting effect.

As shown in FIG. 5-3(B), the lantern member 1580 has a back side lantern case part 1581a, a front side lantern case part 1581b, and a lantern board 1582. The back side lantern case part 1581a and the lantern board 1582 are fixed to the first side part 1510, and have a structure in which the lantern board 1582 is included when the front side lantern case part 1581b is fitted to the back side lantern case part 1581a. It is. In other words, the front lantern case portion 1581b is a detachable member of the upper unit 180. The lantern board 1582 also includes a plurality of LEDs, six reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f that emit signal light onto a detection object and receive and detect reflected light from the detection object, and these LEDs and reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f. A lantern control section is provided for controlling the operation of the sensor and the transmission and reception of various signals with the unit control section. Inside the front lantern case part 1581b, five reflective parts 1584a to 1584e are provided with detection objects (for example, aluminum members) that can be detected by reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f. The lantern control section of the lantern board 1582 receives a signal for the effect from the lamp control board 340 via the unit control section, causes the LED to perform a predetermined light emission effect, and also causes the reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f to perform a predetermined light emission effect. can be activated to transmit the detection results to the lamp control board 340 via the unit control section.

[Configuration of the upper parts of the glass frame 150, outer frame 160, and inner frame 170]
The configurations of the upper portions of the glass frame 150, outer frame 160, and inner frame 170, and the configuration of the lock unit 190 provided in the glass frame 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6-1 and 6-2. 6-1 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the upper part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160, and (A) is a schematic diagram of the structure of the upper part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed. (B) is a perspective view schematically showing the structure of the upper right portion of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed. 6-2 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the lock unit 190 of the glass frame 150, (A) is a diagram showing the lock unit 190 in a locked state, and (B) is a diagram showing the lock unit 190 in an unlocked state. It is a diagram. Note that FIG. 6-1 shows a state in which the upper unit 180 is removed from the gaming machine 100, so the gaming board connector 1620 provided in the accessory unit 102B of the gaming board unit 102 is exposed from the connector opening 1615. ing.

As shown in FIG. 6-1(A), the glass frame 150 has a first glass frame insertion hole 1600 into which the first main body mounting pin 1590 of the upper unit 180 is inserted, and a second main body mounting pin 1595 into which the second main body mounting pin 1595 is inserted. A second glass frame insertion hole 1610, a connector opening 1615 into which the upper unit connector 1575 is inserted, and an opening lever 1625 that is operated when opening the glass frame 150 are provided. The outer frame 160 has a first column fixing section 1650 to which the first column attaching section 1517 is attached, a second column fixing section 1660 to which the second column attaching section 1537 is attached, and a locked state in the outer frame locking mechanism described later. An outer frame lock release operation section 1675 is provided, which is operated when switching to the unlocked state.

As shown in FIG. 6-1(B), the second glass frame insertion hole 1610 includes a second glass frame insertion hole 1630 in which a rounded chamfer is formed on the opening edge, and a second glass frame insertion hole 1630 in which a rounded chamfer is formed on the opening edge. A raised portion 1635 is provided. The second glass frame insertion hole 1630 has a chamfered portion formed on the opening edge, making it easier to insert the second main body mounting pin 1595 along the chamfered portion compared to a hole without a chamfered portion. It becomes. Further, the second glass frame raised portion 1635 includes a protrusion that fits into the second main body fitting hole 1598 and a semicircular protrusion provided below the second glass frame insertion hole 1630. The semicircular protrusion is formed in the second glass frame raised portion 1635, so that when the second body attachment pin 1595 is inserted into the second glass frame insertion hole 1630, the second body attachment pin 1595 can be inserted into the second glass frame insertion hole 1630. This prevents the opening edge from sliding downward along the chamfered portion of the opening edge. In other words, the chamfered portion of the opening edge of the second glass frame insertion hole 1630 and the second glass frame raised portion 1635 serve as a positioning guide when inserting the second main body mounting pin 1595 into the second glass frame insertion hole 1630. Has a function.

Note that the first glass frame insertion hole 1600 has approximately the same structure as the second glass frame insertion hole 1610, and although not described in detail, the first glass frame insertion hole and the first glass frame raised portion are provided. It is being In addition, since the game board connector 1620 of the game board unit 102 attached to the inner frame 170 is disposed in the connector opening 1615, when the character accessory 1550 is attached to the glass frame 150, the upper unit connector 1575 can be fitted into the game board connector 1620. Further, the release lever 1625 is connected to the lock unit 190, and when the release lever 1625 is operated, the glass frame 150 can be opened. Note that the release lever 1625 is disposed between the character accessory 1550 and the glass frame 150 when the character accessory 1550 covers a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, so it cannot be operated. is in a difficult situation.

The second column fixing part 1660 is provided with a second outer frame insertion hole 1662, a second outer frame insertion piece 1665, a second outer frame receiving part 1667, and a second outer frame pressing part 1670. The second outer frame insertion hole 1662 has a chamfered portion formed on the opening edge, so that it is easier to insert the second column mounting pin 1540 along the chamfered portion compared to a hole in which a chamfered portion is not formed. It becomes. The second outer frame insertion piece 1665 is a wall portion extending upward from the opening of the second outer frame insertion hole 1662, and when the second support portion 1535 is attached, the second support mounting pin 1540 2 to prevent it from entering parts other than the outer frame insertion hole 1662. Further, the second outer frame pressing section 1670 is a member connected to an outer frame locking mechanism to be described later, and is pressed by the second column attachment piece 1545 when the second column section 1535 is attached.

Further, the second outer frame receiving portion 1667 has a function of supporting the upper unit 180 by bringing the bottom surface of the second support portion 1535 into contact with the second support portion 1535 when the second support portion 1535 is attached. This is a member that allows the second support mounting pin 1540 to be inserted into the second outer frame insertion hole 1662 while aligning the bottom surface of the second support support 1535 during installation. In other words, the second outer frame insertion hole 1662, the second outer frame insertion piece 1665, and the second outer frame receiving part 1667 are used for positioning when inserting the second column mounting pin 1540 into the second outer frame insertion hole 1662. It functions as a guide. Note that the first column fixing part 1650 has the same configuration as the second column fixing part 1660, and has a first outer frame insertion hole, a first outer frame insertion piece, a first outer frame receiving part, and a first outer frame insertion hole. A frame pressing section is provided.

[Configuration of locking mechanism of upper unit 180]
The locking mechanism in the upper unit 180 includes a glass frame locking mechanism using a lock unit 190 that can switch between a locked state and an unlocked state for the glass frame 150, and a glass frame locking mechanism that can switch between a locked state and an unlocked state for the outer frame 160. There is an outer frame locking mechanism that can switch between states. In particular, the glass frame locking mechanism is a locking mechanism for the glass frame 150 in the character accessory 1550 of the upper unit 180, and the outer frame locking mechanism is a locking mechanism for the outer frame 160 in the first support section 1515 and the second support section 1535 of the upper unit 180. It is a locking mechanism for The glass frame locking mechanism and the outer frame locking mechanism will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 6-2, the lock unit 190 constituting the glass frame locking mechanism is a mechanism provided on the back surface of the glass frame 150, and includes a rotating member 1680, a first link member 1681, and a second link member. 1685 and a third link member 1690. The rotating member 1680 is connected to a keyhole member provided in the glass frame 150, and is a member that rotates in conjunction with rotation of a predetermined key inserted into the keyhole of the keyhole member. The first link member 1681 is a member provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction on the right side surface of the glass frame 150 in response to the operation of the rotating member 1680, and is provided so as to be able to act on the second link member 1685. ing. The second link member 1685 is a member provided to interlock the third link member 1690 in accordance with the operation of the first link member 1681. The third link member 1690 is a member provided on the upper surface of the glass frame 150 so as to be operable in the left-right direction, and the third link member 1690 is provided so that the operation of the first link member 1681 is operable via the second link member 1685. There is. In addition, the biasing force supply unit 1688 is provided with a spring that generates a biasing force, and is connected to the first link member 1681 with a wire so that a downward biasing force is applied to the first link member 1681. There is. The sensor 1698 is a sensor that detects whether the lock unit 190 is in a locked state or an unlocked state according to the movement of the third link member 1690.

As shown in FIG. 6-2(A), when the lock unit 190 is in the locked state, the notch 1591 of the first main body mounting pin 1590 inserted into the first glass frame insertion hole 1600 is The left end 1693 of the third link member 1690 fits into the notch 1596 of the second main body attachment pin 1595 inserted into the second glass frame insertion hole 1610, and the right end of the third link member 1690 1695 is stuck. That is, when the lock unit 190 is in the locked state, the character accessory 1550 cannot be removed. In addition, in the lock unit 190 when the character accessory 1550 is not attached, a biasing force in the left direction is exerted on the third link member 1690 by a spring (not shown), so that the above-mentioned locked state is maintained. maintained.

As shown in FIG. 6-2(B), when the lock unit 190 is in the unlocked state, the left end 1693 of the third link member 1690 is aligned with the notch 1591 of the first main body mounting pin 1590. The right end portion 1695 of the third link member 1690 is not fitted into the notch portion 1596 of the second main body attachment pin 1595 either. That is, when the lock unit 190 is in the unlocked state, the character accessory 1550 can be removed.

Here, in the glass frame locking mechanism using the lock unit 190, the operation of each member when changing from the locked state to the unlocked state will be described. First, when a predetermined key inserted into the keyhole member is turned to the left, the rotating member 1680 is rotated to the left and the first link member 1681 is actuated upward. This movement of the first link member 1681 acts on the third link member 1690 via the second link member 1685, and the third link member 1690 operates in the right direction. In this way, by operating the third link member 1690 in the right direction, the left end portion 1693 of the third link member 1690 fits into the notch portion 1591 of the first body attachment pin 1590, and the second body attachment pin The right end 1695 of the third link member 1690 is released from the notch 1596 of the third link member 1695 . On the other hand, when attaching the character accessory 1550 to the glass frame 150, the lock unit 190 is in a locked state, and the first main body is attached to the first glass frame insertion hole 1600 and the second glass frame insertion hole 1610. Attachment pin 1590 and second body attachment pin 1595 will be inserted. At this time, since the inserted first body attachment pin 1590 and second body attachment pin 1595 have a tapered shape as described above, each of the left end portion 1693 and right end portion 1695 of the third link member 1690 is The third link member 1690 itself moves to the right so as to escape. Then, when the first body attachment pin 1590 and the second body attachment pin 1595 are inserted, the third link member 1690 is moved to the left by the biasing force, relative to the notch 1591 and the notch 1596. The left end 1693 and right end 1695 of the third link member 1690 are fitted, and the first body attachment pin 1590 and the second body attachment pin 1595 are locked.

The outer frame locking mechanism is a link mechanism composed of a first outer frame pressing part, a second outer frame pressing part 1670, and a plurality of members (see FIG. 6-1). The first support section 1515 and the second support section 1535 of the unit 180 can be switched into a locked state where they cannot be removed or an unlocked state where they can be removed by operating the outer frame lock release operation section 1675. . The outer frame locking mechanism is provided at a position sandwiched between the first column fixing part 1650 and the second column fixing part 1660 in the outer frame 160 with respect to the outer frame 160, and the outer frame locking mechanism When it is attached, the outer frame lock release operation part 1675 is not exposed by the character accessory 1550, and therefore cannot be operated. In other words, when removing the upper unit 180 from the outer frame 160, the character accessory 1550 is moved diagonally upward and forward on the front of the gaming machine so that the upper part of the glass frame 150 is not covered, and then the exposed By operating the outer frame lock release operation section 1675, the first column fixing section 1650 and the second column fixing section 1660 become unlocked, and the entire upper unit 180 is removed. Become.

Here, the electrical connection between the upper unit 180 and the game board unit 102 will be explained. First, the case where the upper unit 180 and the game board unit 102 are electrically disconnected, that is, the connection between the upper unit connector 1575 and the game board connector 1620 will be described. The upper unit connector 1575 is a male connector (see FIG. 5-2(B)) provided on the back of the upper unit 180, and the game board connector 1620 is a male connector provided on the top of the game board unit 102 (accessories unit 102B). The upper unit connector 1575 and the game board connector 1620 are shaped to fit into each other. Further, as described above, although the upper unit connector 1575 has a movable structure, the game board connector 1620 has a non-movable structure like the upper unit connector 1575. When the upper unit 180 is attached to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, the upper unit connector 1575 is fitted into the game board connector 1620 exposed from the connector opening 1615. Thus, the upper unit 180 can be supplied with power from the power supply board 360 via the game board unit 120, and the unit control section of the upper unit 180 and the lamp control board 340 are connected so that various signals can be transmitted and received.

Further, as described above, the upper unit connector 1575 has a predetermined movable range in the attachment/detachment direction by a spring (not shown), so that it can be pulled. Therefore, even if the lock unit 190 is unlocked and the character object 1550 is placed a little apart from the glass frame 150, the upper unit connector 1575 will not come off from the game board unit 102 and will not move against the glass frame 150. The upper unit connector 1575 will not come off from the game board connector 1620 unless the character accessory 1550 is separated by a predetermined distance (a range larger than the movable range of the upper unit connector 1575). In other words, if the gaming machine 100 is configured such that, for example, when a predetermined key is inserted into the keyhole of the lock unit 190 and turned to the left, the power supply from the power supply board 360 to the upper unit 180 is cut off, the character When moving the accessory 1550 diagonally upward and forward on the front of the gaming machine so as not to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, the power supply to the upper unit 180 is turned off by turning a predetermined key to the left. After being cut off, the upper unit connector 1575 is pulled out from the game board connector 1620 while being pulled. Therefore, with such a configuration, instantaneous interruption to the upper unit 180 is prevented, so for example, an instantaneous interruption to the upper unit 180 due to the character accessory 1550 being removed by mistake can be prevented. The configuration can be such that failures due to disconnections are prevented.

[Configuration of sword handle unit 135]
The configuration of the sword handle unit 135 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7-1 and 7-2. FIG. 7-1 is a front view of the sword handle unit 135. 7-2 is a schematic diagram of the sword handle unit 135, (A) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the sword handle unit 135, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the bottom surface of the sword handle unit 135. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 7-1 and 7-2, the sword handle unit 135 is provided with a sword handle portion 1700, an outer cover 1750, and a mechanism portion 1755. The sword handle part 1700 has a shape that imitates the shape of the handle part of a sword, and is configured to perform effects such as vibration according to the game state and to be operable by pressing or the like by the player. ing. The outer cover 1750 is configured to cover an opening 1880 formed in the glass frame 150 when attached to the lower part of the glass frame 150, which will be described later. The mechanism section 1755 includes a motor for operating the sword handle section 1700, a control section for driving the motor, emitting light from an LED (not shown), and transmitting and receiving various signals with the lamp control board 340, and the like. A case is provided. The mechanism section 1755 also includes a cable for connecting to a glass frame connector 1860 of the glass frame 150, which will be described later, in order to transmit and receive various signals between the control section and the lamp control board 340, and to supply power from the power supply board 360. A handle connector 1760 is provided. Further, the case of the mechanism section 1755 is provided with a first sword handle lock hole 1780 and a second sword handle lock hole 1770 for locking the sword handle unit 135 to the glass frame 150.

[Configuration of lower part of glass frame 150]
With reference to FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the structure of the portion of the lower part of the glass frame 150 to which the sword handle unit is attached will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a schematic top view of the structure at the bottom of the glass frame 150. 8-2 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the lower part of the glass frame 150, (A) is a bottom view of the lower part of the glass frame 150, and (B) is a rear view of the lower part of the glass frame 150. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at the bottom of the glass frame 150, two speakers 1820 and 1825, a production operation stick 136, an upper plate 128, and a mechanism part 1755 of the sword handle unit 135 are installed. A glass frame lower decoration part 1810 having a shape to enclose the mechanism part 1755 of the sword handle unit 135 is formed inside the opening part 1880 for fitting. Further, the glass frame lower decoration part 1810 is provided with a first sword handle fixing part 1885 on the bottom surface, a second sword handle fixing part 1895 on the back surface of the glass frame 150, and an internal glass frame connector 1860. . Furthermore, the first sword handle fixing part 1885 includes a pin-shaped part that projects upward from the bottom surface inside the opening part 1880 and two protrusions that extend radially from the center of the pin-shaped part. It is composed of a sword handle fixing pin 1887a and a first sword handle fixing switching part 1887b provided on the outside bottom surface of the glass frame 150. The first sword handle fixing part 1885 has a structure such that when the first sword handle fixing switching part 1887b is rotated, the connected first sword handle fixing pin 1887a also rotates. The second sword handle fixing part 1895 has the same structure as the first sword handle fixing part 1885, and is composed of a second sword handle fixing pin 1897a and a second sword handle fixing switching part 1897b.

When attaching the sword hilt unit 135 to the glass frame 150 having such a configuration, first connect the glass frame connector 1860 to the sword hilt connector 1760, and connect the mechanical part 1755 of the sword hilt unit 135 to the opening 1880 to attach the decoration under the glass frame. 1810. At this time, the mechanism part 1755 is set so that the first sword hilt fixing pin 1887a fits into the first sword hilt locking hole 1780, and the second sword hilt fixing pin 1897a fits into the second sword hilt locking hole 1770. It is inserted into the interior of the lower glass frame decoration part 1810. Then, the sword handle unit 135 is locked to the glass frame lower decoration part 1810 of the glass frame 150 by rotating the first sword handle fixing switching part 1887b and the second sword handle fixing switching part 1897b. In this way, when the sword hilt unit 135 is attached to the glass frame 150, since the glass frame connector 1860 and the sword hilt connector 1760 are connected, the sword hilt unit 135 can be supplied with power from the power supply board 360, and The control section of the sword handle unit 135 and the lamp control board 340 are connected to enable transmission and reception of various signals. Note that when removing the sword handle unit 135 from the lower glass frame decoration part 1810 of the glass frame 150, the second sword handle fixing switching part 1897b provided on the back side of the glass frame 150 (see FIG. 8-2(B)). ), it is necessary to open the glass frame 150 by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole member of the lock unit 190 described above.

[Configuration of game board unit 102]
The configuration of the game board unit 102 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-5. 9-1 is a perspective view of the front side of the game board unit 102, and FIG. 9-2 is a perspective view of the back side of the game board unit 102. FIG. 9-3 is a perspective view of the front side of the game board 102A. FIG. 9-4 is a perspective view of the front side of the accessory unit 102B. FIG. 9-5 is a perspective view of the back side of the main display device 131 in which the production control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the game board unit 102 includes a game board 102A, an accessory unit 102B, a main display device 131, an effect control board unit 102C, and a main control board unit 102D. , is composed of. The game board 102A is detachably attached to the accessory unit 102B on the front side of the game board unit 102. Further, the main display device 131 is detachably attached to the accessory unit 102B on the back side of the game board unit 102. Further, the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are each removably attached to the main display device 131 on the back side of the game board unit 102.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the front side of the game board 102A of the game board unit 102 is provided with one game board fixing part 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a in each square. These game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a each have substantially the same structure, and include a fixed switching part that is rotatably provided on the surface of the game board 102A, and a protruding part on the back surface of the game board 102A. The fixing pin includes a pin-shaped portion and two protrusions extending radially from the center of the pin-shaped portion. These game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a have a structure such that when each fixing switching part is rotated, each fixing pin connected on the back side of the game board 102A also rotates. The lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, 1918b provided in the accessory unit 102B for fitting the fixing pins of the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a will be described later. Furthermore, the game board connector 1620 is provided at the top of the accessory unit 102B of the game board unit 102, as described above, and has a shape that fits with the upper unit connector 1575. Unlike , it has a non-movable structure. Furthermore, on the front side of the accessory unit 102B of the game board unit 102, unit engaging portions 1922, which are portions pressed by unit pressing portions 2022, 2024 and unit fixing portions 2026, 2028, which will be described later, are provided in each of the squares. 1924, 1926, and 1928 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, a main display device 131 is provided on the back side of the game board unit 102 and is detachably attached to the accessory unit 102B. A board unit 102C and a main control board unit 102D are provided. Further, a relay board 1950 for relaying the power supplied from the power supply board 360 in the gaming machine 100 and various signals from the main control board 300 and the like is provided in the accessory unit 102B. The relay board 1950 is provided in a non-removable manner with respect to the accessory unit 102B, and is connected to each unit in the gaming machine 100 by a cable not shown. Furthermore, a space in which the main display device 131 is provided is formed between the relay board 1950 and various movable accessories in the accessory unit 102B, and the main display device 131 slides into the space. A display frame is provided for fitting into the frame by being placed in the display frame. Furthermore, the main display device 131 has an unlocked state that is removable or a lock state that is not removable by fitting into the display device frame and fitting to the accessory unit 102B. Lock switching portions 1970 and 1975 are provided that can be switched to.

[Configuration of game board 102A]
As shown in FIG. 9-3, the game board 102A is made of a transparent acrylic member, and has a plurality of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) arranged therein. These nails and windmills have the function of changing the movement of the game ball and guiding it to a predetermined winning hole. Also, game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a, first starting device 112, normal symbol activation gate 113b, second starting device 115, first big winning device 117, second big winning device 127, movable piece 115b , 117b, and 127b are provided. In addition, the game board 102A provided with each starting device etc. as mentioned above includes a gate detection switch 303 (not shown), a first starting device detection switch 304a, a second starting device detection switch 304b, and a first winning device detection switch. 306a, a second winning device detection switch 306b, a starting device opening/closing solenoid 307, a first grand prize device opening/closing solenoid 308, and a second grand prize device opening/closing solenoid 370 are also provided. Furthermore, the game board 102A is also provided with a display cover 1925A, which is a cover on which explanations of the contents suggested by various displays on the display 125 are written.

Note that in this embodiment, the game board 102A is formed to be transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game board 102A may be formed to be light-transmissive, or may be semi-transparent. Moreover, the game board 102A may be formed from a member other than an acrylic member, for example, a transparent plastic member.

[Configuration of accessory unit 102B]
As shown in FIG. 9-4, the accessory unit 102B includes an upper accessory unit 154, a lower accessory unit 156, and accessories that operate the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 in various ways. A mechanism section 158, a light guide panel unit 181, and unit engaging sections 1922, 1924, 1926, and 1928 are provided. Further, the accessory unit 102B is provided with a light emitting member 1925B, which is a member of the display 125 made up of a plurality of LEDs, at a position covered by the display cover 1925A of the game board 102A. Further, the accessory unit 102B is provided with lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, and 1918b. Here, a locking mechanism using the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a of the game board 102A and the lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, 1918b of the accessory unit 102B will be explained. When attaching the game board 102A to the accessory unit 102B, first install the game board fixing portions 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a so that each of the fixing pins fits into the lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, and 1918b. Then, by rotating each of the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a, the game board 102A can be locked with respect to the accessory unit 102B. In addition, in the accessory mechanism part 158, the rail part for operating the upper accessory unit 154 is covered with mechanism covers 155a and 155b with predetermined decorations so that it is not exposed.

[Configuration of main display device 131 etc.]
As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the production control board unit 102C, the production control board 320 is included in a production control board case 1990, and in the main control board unit 102D, the main control board 300 is included in the main control board case 1990. It was included in 1980. Further, the production control board case 1990 is fixed to the main display device 131 by a sub-fixing part (not shown), and is configured to be detachable by operating the sub-fixing part. Further, the main control board case 1980 is also fixed to the main display device 131 by a main fixing part (not shown), and is configured to be detachable by operating the main fixing part. In other words, the effect control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are each configured to be detachable from the main display device 131. Note that from the back side of the main display device 131, the information display device 302c mounted on the main control board 300 is visible while being enclosed in the main control board case 1980. The provided RAM clear switch 302a and setting key switch 302b can be operated.

[Configuration and operation mode of accessory mechanism section 158]
With reference to FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the configuration and operating mode of the accessory mechanism section 158 will be described here. FIG. 10-1(A) is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the accessory mechanism section 158 in a state where the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 are in the initial position, and FIG. 10-1(B) is , is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the accessory mechanism section 158 in a state where the upper accessory unit 154 is in the first position. FIG. 10-2(A) is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the accessory mechanism section 158 with the upper accessory unit 154 in the second position, and FIG. 10-2(B) is a schematic diagram showing the lower accessory mechanism unit 158. 156 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the accessory mechanism section 158 in a state where the accessory mechanism section 156 is in the advanced position.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the accessory mechanism section 158 includes an upper left motor 410 provided at the upper left of the accessory unit 102B, an upper left link section 415, and an upper left link section 415 provided at the left side of the accessory unit 102B. left rail section 430, left connecting section 435, upper right motor 460 provided on the upper right side of accessory unit 102B, upper right link section 465, right rail section 480 provided on the right side of accessory unit 102B, right connecting section part 485, a lower motor 510 provided at the lower part of the accessory unit 102B, a lower base part 530 provided at the lower part of the accessory unit 102B, a connecting band part 550, a lower link part 565, and a lower connecting part 585. There is.

The upper left link part 415 connects the upper left motor 410 and the upper accessory unit 154, and is configured to be interlocked with the drive of the upper left motor 410 by a gear (not shown). The left connecting part 435 connects the upper accessory unit 154 and the left rail part 430, and is configured to slide in the vertical direction along the rail of the left rail part 430. The upper right link part 465 connects the upper right motor 460 and the upper accessory unit 154, and is configured to be interlocked with the drive of the upper right motor 460 by a gear (not shown). The right connecting part 485 connects the upper accessory unit 154 and the right rail part 480, and is configured to slide in the vertical direction along the rail of the right rail part 480. The lower link portion 565 connects the lower base portion 530 and the lower accessory unit 156, and is configured to be interlocked with the drive of the lower motor 510 by a gear (not shown) provided on the lower base portion 530. The lower base portion 530 has a control portion (not shown) capable of transmitting and receiving various signals to and from the production control board 320 and the like. The lower connecting part 585 connects the lower accessory unit 156 and the right rail part 480, and is configured to slide in the vertical direction along the rail of the right rail part 480, and also connects the lower accessory unit 156 and the right rail part 480. It has a relay board (not shown) connected to the control section of the unit 156 so as to be able to transmit and receive various signals. The connection band section 550 connects the control section of the lower base section 530 and the relay board of the lower connection section 585 so that various signals can be transmitted and received.

The connection band portion 550 is composed of a flat band-shaped connection wire and a cover member that covers the connection wire. The connection line is a so-called flexible flat cable, and by electrically connecting the control unit of the lower base part 530 and the relay board of the lower connecting part 585, the production control board 320 and the lower part body part 750 can be controlled. The unit is connected to enable transmission and reception of various signals. The cover member is a member molded from resin that is flexible and transparent, and has a plurality of cuts extending across one plane and both sides substantially perpendicular to the direction of extension. . Moreover, the cut has a shape that is curved toward the direction of extension of the cover member. Furthermore, in the connection band portion 550 having such a configuration, when connecting the control portion of the lower base portion 530 and the relay board of the lower connecting portion 585, one plane in which the notch of the cover member is formed is bent. The other flat surface on which the cut is not formed is provided so as to serve as the outer circumferential surface when bending, and the other plane on which the notch is not formed is provided so as to serve as the inner circumferential surface when bending. With such a connection band portion 550, in the cover member, one plane side where the cut is formed is easy to bend when bending, but the other plane side where the cut is not formed is easy to bend when bending. This prevents the connecting wire from being bent excessively. In addition, when replacing the accessory decoration part etc. in the lower accessory unit 156 and connecting electrical wiring using the connection band part 550, the connection wire of the connection band part 550 is covered with a cover member. This also prevents damage to the connecting wire during replacement work.

As shown in FIG. 10-1(A), first, when the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 are in the initial position, the upper accessory unit 154 is in the uppermost position, and the lower accessory unit 154 is in the uppermost position. The accessory units 156 are at the lowest position, and a portion of each is visible from the opening 102AZ (for example, see FIG. 1). Next, as shown in FIG. 10-1(B), when the upper accessory unit 154 is in the first position, the upper accessory unit 154 moves approximately parallel from the initial position to the initial position. It is located at a lower position than that, and the whole can be visually recognized from the opening 102AZ. When the upper accessory unit 154 moves from the initial position to the first position, the upper left link part 415 extends downward by the drive of the upper left motor 410, and the left connecting part 435 slides downward along the left rail part 430. At the same time, the upper right link section 465 extends downward by the drive of the upper right motor 460, so that the right connecting section 485 slides downward along the right rail section 480.

As shown in FIG. 10-2(A), next, when the upper accessory unit 154 is in the second position, only the right side of the upper accessory unit 154 moves downward from the initial position, or the upper accessory unit 154 moves downward from the initial position. From the original position, only the left side has moved upward and is now in a diagonally tilted position, making the whole part visible from the opening 102AZ. When the upper accessory unit 154 moves from the initial position to the second position, the upper left motor 410 is not driven, but the upper right link part 465 extends downward due to the drive of the upper right motor 460, so that the right connecting part 485 moves to the right rail. 480 and slides downward along section 480. Further, when the upper accessory unit 154 moves from the first position to the second position, the upper left link part 415 is bent upward by the drive of the upper left motor 410, so that the left connecting part 435 is moved along the left rail part 430. Although it slides upward, the upper right motor 460 is not driven. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-2(B), when the lower accessory unit 156 is in the advanced position, the lower accessory unit 156 moves approximately parallel from the initial position and is compared to the initial position. It is in the upper position, and the whole can be visually recognized from the opening 102AZ. When the lower accessory unit 156 moves from the initial position to the advanced position, the lower link part 565 moves upward to lift the lower accessory unit 156 by the drive of the lower motor 510, so that the lower connecting part 585 moves to the right rail part. 480 upwards.

In the above description, the upper accessory unit 154 has been described as moving from the initial position to the first position, moving from the initial position to the second position, and moving from the first position to the second position. You may move by. For example, the upper accessory unit 154 may move from the second position to the first position, or may move from the first position or the second position to the initial position. Further, the upper accessory unit 154 may perform a so-called stirring effect in an operating mode in which the process of moving from the second position to the first position is repeated multiple times. Furthermore, the lower accessory unit 156 may also move in various manners, for example, in an operation manner in which the process of moving from the initial position to the advanced position is repeated multiple times, performing a so-called stirring effect. Good too. The upper accessory unit 154 at the first position or the second position and the lower accessory unit 156 at the advancing position are configured so that they do not touch or interfere with each other, and the movement of the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 are configured so that they do not touch or interfere with each other. An effect may be performed in which the movement of the unit 156 is performed substantially simultaneously.

[Configuration of upper accessory unit 154 and lower accessory unit 156]
The configurations of the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. FIG. 11-1(A) is a schematic view of the front surface of the upper accessory decoration part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154, and FIG. 11-1(B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the upper accessory decoration part 600. be. FIG. 11-2(A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the upper accessory main body part 650 of the upper accessory unit 154, and FIG. 11-2(B) is a schematic diagram of the internal configuration of the upper accessory main body part 650. It is a diagram. FIG. 11-3(A) is a schematic view of the front surface of the lower accessory decoration part 700 of the lower accessory unit 156, and FIG. 11-3(B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the accessory decoration part 700. be. FIG. 11-4(A) is a schematic view of the surface of the lower accessory main body part 750 of the lower accessory unit 156, and FIG. 11-4(B) is a schematic diagram of the internal configuration of the lower accessory main body 750. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the upper accessory unit 154 includes an upper accessory decoration part 600 with a predetermined decoration, an upper left link part 415 of the accessory mechanism part 158, and a left connecting part. 435, an upper right link portion 465, and a superior accessory body portion 650 connected to the right connecting portion 485. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4, the lower accessory unit 156 includes a lower accessory decoration section 700 with a predetermined decoration, a lower link section 565 of the accessory mechanism section 158, and a lower accessory mechanism section 158. The main body part 750 is connected to the connecting part 585. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the superior accessory decoration section 600 in the upper accessory unit 154 is removably provided with respect to the superior accessory main body section 650 connected to the accessory mechanism section 158, and The accessory decoration part 700 in the accessory unit 156 is detachably provided to the accessory main body part 750 connected to the accessory mechanism section 158.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the upper decoration part 600 includes a first upper decoration member 605, a second upper decoration member 610, a third upper decoration member 615, each of which is decorated with a predetermined decoration. It is equipped with The first upper decorative member 605 is configured to transmit light from a plurality of LEDs 653 of the upper accessory main body section 650, which will be described later. The second upper decorative member 610 is a decoration with a tire motif, and is configured to be rotatable. The third upper decorative member 615 is a decoration with a motif of an exhaust pipe of a motorcycle, and is configured to repeatedly move up and down in conjunction with the rotation of the second upper decorative member 610.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(B), the upper decoration part 600 also includes, on the back side, an upper decoration rotation shaft part 620, four reflection parts 630a to 630d, a first upper decoration locking part 640, and a first upper decoration locking part 640. It includes two upper decorative locking parts 645 and two upper decorative fitting parts 647 and 648. The upper decorative rotating shaft part 620 is a rotating shaft configured to be interlocked with the second upper decorative member 610 and the third upper decorative member 615 by a gear part (not shown), and rotates to rotate the second upper decorative member 610. As it rotates, the third upper decorative member moves up and down repeatedly. The first top decoration locking part 640 and the second top decoration locking part 645 are locked to the top decoration main body part 650 when the top decoration part 600 is attached to the top decoration main body part 650. The detailed structure will be described later. The two upper ornament fitting parts 647 and 648 are parts into which a part of the upper ornament main body part 650 is fitted when the upper ornament decoration part 600 is attached to the upper ornament main body part 650. The four reflecting portions 630a to 630d are locations where a detection object (for example, an aluminum member) that can be detected by reflective sensors 680a to 680d, which will be described later, is provided. Furthermore, an identification display section 632 is provided on the back surface of the accessory decoration section 600. The identification display section 632 has the same configuration as the identification display section 1532 of the upper unit 180 described above, and is composed of a code section, a caution section, and a model name section.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(A), next, the upper main body part 650 has a plurality of LEDs 653 on the upper main body surface part 651 covered by the upper part decorative part 600, and a plurality of LEDs 653, which are connected to the detection object. Four reflective sensors 680a to 680d that emit signal light and receive and detect reflected light from a detection object are provided, and a first upper body sliding section 660 and a second upper body sliding section 665 are provided. , a portion of the upper body pressing portion 670, the upper body rotating shaft portion 675, the first upper body locking portion 690, and the second upper body locking portion 695 are exposed. In addition, in the upper main body surface part 651, on the back surface where the plurality of LEDs 653 etc. are not provided, a control part (not shown) is provided which is connected to the production control board 320 so as to be able to transmit and receive various signals.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the upper body part 650 also includes an upper body motor 655 and an upper body gear mechanism 678 composed of a plurality of gears. The upper body gear mechanism 678 is configured such that the first upper body sliding part 660, the second upper body sliding part 665, and the upper body rotating shaft part 675 operate when the upper body motor 655 is driven. . The first upper body sliding part 660 and the second upper body sliding part 665 are formed with rack gears that mesh with a gear connected to the upper body pressing part 670, and when the upper body motor 655 is driven, the upper body It is configured to move in parallel in the left-right direction via a gear mechanism 678. The upper body pressing portion 670 is a member extending from one of the plurality of gears constituting the upper body gear mechanism 678, and is provided so as to be pressable from the surface of the upper body surface portion 651. The upper body rotation shaft portion 675 is a member extending from one of the plurality of gears constituting the upper body gear mechanism 678, and is a member that is a decorative accessory attached from the surface of the upper body surface portion 651. It is provided so as to fit with the upper decorative rotating shaft portion 620 of the portion 600. The first upper body locking part 690 and the second upper body locking part 695 are members that lock onto the upper accessory decoration part 600 when the upper accessory decoration part 600 is attached. This will be discussed later. Note that the upper body pressing portion 670 operates so that the upper body rotating shaft portion 675 operates when not pressed, while operating the first upper body sliding portion 660 and the second upper body sliding portion when pressed. The transmission mode of the driving force of the upper main body motor 655 in the upper main body gear mechanism 678 can be changed such that the upper main body gear mechanism 678 operates the upper main body motor 655 .

As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the accessory decoration section 700 next has a first lower decoration member 705 and a second lower decoration member 710, each of which has a predetermined decoration, on its surface. We are prepared. The first lower decorative member 705 is configured to transmit light from a plurality of auxiliary object light source sections 783 of the auxiliary object main body section 750, which will be described later. The second lower decorative member 710 is a decoration with a motif of a belt buckle, and is configured to be rotatable.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), the lower decoration rotation shaft part 720, the four reflection parts 730a to 730d, the first lower decoration locking part 740, and the It includes two lower decoration locking parts 745 and two lower decoration fitting parts 747 and 748. The lower decorative rotating shaft portion 720 is a rotating shaft configured to interlock with the second lower decorative member 710, and when rotated, the second lower decorative member 710 rotates. The first lower decoration locking part 740 and the second lower decoration locking part 745 are locked to the lower accessory main body part 750 when the lower accessory decoration part 700 is attached to the lower accessory main body part 750. The detailed structure will be described later. The two lower decorative fitting parts 747 and 748 are parts into which a part of the lower accessory main body part 750 is fitted when the lower accessory decoration part 700 is attached to the lower accessory main body part 750. The four reflective parts 730a to 730d are locations where detection objects (for example, aluminum members) that can be detected by reflective sensors 780a to 780d, which will be described later, are provided. Furthermore, an identification display section 732 is provided on the back surface of the accessory decoration section 700. The identification display section 732 has the same configuration as the above-described identification display section 1532 of the upper unit 180 and the identification display section 632 of the accessory decoration section 600, and is composed of a code section, a caution section, and a model name section. ing.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), on the front side of the main body part 750, a lower main body surface part 751 covered by the decorative part 700 has a plurality of LEDs 753 and a detection object. Four reflective sensors 780a to 780d that emit signal light and receive and detect reflected light from a detection object are provided, and a first lower body rotation shaft portion 770 and a second lower body rotation shaft portion 775 are provided. , a portion of the first lower body locking portion 790 and the second lower body locking portion 795 are exposed. In addition, in the lower main body surface part 751, on the back side where the plurality of LEDs 753 etc. are not provided, various signals are transmitted and received with the production control board 320 via the relay board of the lower connecting part 585 and the control part of the lower base part 530. A control section (not shown) that can be connected is provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the auxiliary body part 750 is also provided with a lower body motor 755 and a lower body gear mechanism 778 composed of a plurality of gears. The lower body gear mechanism 778 is configured such that the first lower body rotation shaft portion 770 and the second lower body rotation shaft portion 775 are operated when the lower body motor 755 is driven. The first lower body rotating shaft portion 770 is a member extending from one of the plurality of gears that constitute the lower body gear mechanism 778. The second lower body rotation shaft portion 775 is a member extending from one of the plurality of gears constituting the lower body gear mechanism 778, and is a member attached to the surface of the lower body surface portion 751. It is provided so as to fit with the lower decoration rotating shaft part 720 of the object decoration part 700. The first lower body locking part 790 and the second lower body locking part 795 are members that lock to the lower part decoration part 700 when the lower part decoration part 700 is attached. This will be discussed later.

With reference to FIG. 11-5, a method for attaching and detaching the superior accessory decoration section 600 to the superior accessory main body portion 650 in the superior accessory unit 154 will be described. In the upper accessory unit 154, when attaching and detaching the upper accessory decoration part 600 to the upper accessory main body part 650, the state of the first upper decoration locking part 640 and the first upper main body locking part 690, It is also necessary to switch the states of the second upper decorative locking portion 645 and the second upper main body locking portion 695 to a locked state or an unlocked state. FIG. 11-5(A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the second upper decorative locking portion 645 and the second upper main body locking portion 695 of the upper accessory unit 154 are in a locked state, and FIG. -5(B) is a perspective view showing a state in which the second upper decorative locking portion 645 and the second upper main body locking portion 695 are in an unlocked state. Note that the locking mechanism using the second upper decorative locking part 645 and the second upper main body locking part 695 described below is the same as the locking mechanism using the first upper decorative locking part 640 and the first upper main body locking part 690. , have the same configuration as the locking mechanism formed by the first lower decoration locking part 740 and the first lower body locking part 790, and the locking mechanism formed by the second lower decoration locking part 745 and the second lower body locking part 795. be.

As shown in FIG. 11-5(A), when the superior accessory decoration part 600 is attached to the superior accessory main body part 650 in the superior accessory unit 154 and is in the locked state, the second upper accessory The decorative locking part 645 locks with the second upper body locked part 696 of the upper accessory main body part 650, and the second upper body locking part 695 locks with the second upper decoration of the second upper decoration locking part 645. It will be locked to the locked portion 646. Note that the second upper decorative locking portion 645 and the second upper main body locking portion 695 are maintained in the locked state because a biasing force is applied to the second upper body locking portion 645 and the second upper main body locking portion 695 in the direction of the locked state by springs (not shown) in each of them. . Moreover, a part of the upper accessory body part 650 is fitted into the two upper decoration fitting parts 647 and 648 of the upper accessory decoration part 600.

As shown in FIG. 11-5(B), when the superior accessory decoration part 600 is removed from the superior accessory main body part 650 in the superior accessory unit 154, the locked state is changed to the unlocked state. , after the second upper body locking portion 695 is not locked to the second upper decoration locked portion 646 of the second upper decoration locking portion 645, the second upper decoration locking portion 645 is moved upward. This results in a state in which the accessory main body section 650 is not engaged with the second upper body engaged section 696. Also, in the locking mechanism using the first upper decoration locking part 640 and the first upper main body locking part 690, after the locking mechanism is set to the unlocked state, the upper decoration fitting part 647 and 648 that are By extracting a part of the accessory main body part 650, the accessory decoration part 600 can be removed from the accessory main body part 650. That is, when attaching and detaching the superior accessory decoration part 600 from the superior accessory main body part 650 in the superior accessory unit 154, the locking mechanism by the first upper decoration locking part 640 and the first upper main body locking part 690 and the first upper decoration locking part 690 are used. The locking mechanism formed by the second upper decorative locking portion 645 and the second upper decorative locking portion 695 must be switched to a locked state or an unlocked state. In addition, when attaching and detaching the accessory decoration part 700 from the accessory main body part 750 in the accessory unit 156, a locking mechanism by the first lower decoration locking part 740 and the first lower main body locking part 790, and The locking mechanism formed by the second lower decorative locking portion 745 and the second lower body locking portion 795 must be switched to a locked state or an unlocked state.

[Configuration of superior accessory decoration section 800 and inferior accessory decoration section 900]
As described above, in the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156, the upper accessory decoration part 600 and the lower accessory decoration part 700 can be attached and removed. This means that the decorative portion 700 can be replaced as a mounting member. Here, with reference to FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2, a superior accessory decoration section 800 has a different configuration from the superior accessory decoration section 600, and a lower accessory decoration section 800 has a different configuration from the inferior accessory decoration section 700. The configuration of accessory decoration section 900 will be explained. FIG. 12-1(A) is a schematic diagram of the front surface of the accessory decoration part 800, and FIG. 12-1(B) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the accessory decoration part 800 in the state shown in (A). FIG. 12-1(C) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the accessory decoration part 800, and FIG. 12-1(D) shows the accessory decoration part 800 in the state shown in (C). FIG. FIG. 12-2(A) is a schematic diagram of the front surface of the accessory decoration part 900, and FIG. 12-2(B) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the accessory decoration part 900 in the state shown in (A). FIG. 12-2(C) is a schematic view of the surface of the accessory decoration part 900, and FIG. 12-2(D) is a diagram of the accessory decoration part 900 in the state shown in (C). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the upper decoration part 800 includes a first upper decoration member 805 and a second upper decoration member 810, each of which is decorated with a predetermined decoration. The first upper decorative member 805 is configured to transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 653 of the upper accessory body 650, and is decorated in the form of light (see FIG. 12-1(C)), which will be described later. .) has been applied. The second upper decorative member 810 is a diamond-shaped decoration provided so as to cover a part of the first upper decorative member 805, and is configured to be movable so as to be divided into four parts.

As shown in FIG. 12-1(B), the upper decoration part 800 also has an upper decoration projection part 820, a first upper decoration sliding part 823, a second upper decoration sliding part 825, 4 on the back side. It includes four reflecting parts 830a to 830d, a first upper decorative locking part 840, a second upper decorative locking part 845, and two upper decorative fitting parts (not shown). The upper decoration protrusion 820 is a member that presses the upper body pressing part 670 when the upper accessory decoration part 800 is attached to the upper accessory main body part 650. The first top decoration sliding part 823 and the second top decoration sliding part 825 are slidable members configured to be interlocked with the second top decoration member 810 by a gear part (not shown), and cannot be slid. As a result, the second upper decorative member 810 operates to be divided into four parts. The first top decoration locking part 840 and the second top decoration locking part 845 have the same configuration as the first top decoration locking part 640 and the second top decoration locking part 645 of the above-mentioned upper decoration part 600. The four reflecting parts 830a to 830d have the same configuration as the four reflecting parts 630a to 630d of the above-mentioned accessory decoration part 600. In other words, when the upper accessory decoration part 800 having such a configuration is attached to the upper accessory main body part 650, the upper main body pressing part 670 of the upper accessory main body part 650 is pressed by the upper decoration protrusion 820. At the same time, the first upper decorative sliding part 823 fits into the first upper main body sliding part 660, and the second upper decorative sliding part 825 fits into the second upper main body sliding part 665. .

As shown in FIGS. 12-1(C) and (D), when the upper accessory decoration part 800 is attached to the upper accessory main body part 650, the upper decoration protrusion 820 Since the upper body pressing part 670 of the main body part 650 is pressed, the first upper body sliding part 660 and the second upper body sliding part 665 of the upper body part 650 will slide in the left-right direction. . In addition, in the upper accessory decoration part 800, the first upper decoration sliding part 823 fits into the first upper body sliding part 660, and the second upper decoration sliding part 825 fits into the second upper body sliding part 660. Since it is fitted into the moving part 665, the first upper decorative sliding part 823 and the second upper decorative sliding part 825 slide in the left-right direction, so that the second upper decorative member 810 is divided into four parts. The first upper decorative member 805 is activated to make a part of the covered first decorative member 805 visible.

As shown in FIG. 12-2(A), next, the accessory decoration section 900 includes a first lower decoration member 905 and a second lower decoration member 910, each of which is decorated with a predetermined decoration. The first lower decorative member 905 is configured to transmit light from the plurality of accessory light source sections 783 of the accessory main body section 750. The second lower decorative member 910 is a predetermined type of decoration, and is configured to rotate and deform.

As shown in FIG. 12-2(B), the accessory decoration part 900 also includes, on the back side, a lower decoration rotating shaft part 920, four reflection parts 930a to 930d, a first lower decoration locking part 940, a lower decoration rotation shaft part 920, a first lower decoration locking part 940, It includes two lower decoration locking parts 945 and two lower decoration fitting parts (not shown). The lower decorative rotating shaft portion 720 is a rotating shaft configured to be interlocked with the second lower decorative member 910 by a gear portion (not shown), and when rotated, the second lower decorative member 910 rotates and deforms. Become. The first lower decoration locking part 940 and the second lower decoration locking part 945 have the same configuration as the first lower decoration locking part 740 and the second lower decoration locking part 745 of the accessory decoration part 700 described above. The four reflecting parts 930a to 930d have the same configuration as the four reflecting parts 730a to 730d of the above-mentioned accessory decorative part 700. That is, when the accessory decoration part 900 having such a configuration is attached to the accessory main body part 750, the lower decoration rotating shaft part 920 will fit into the first lower main body rotating shaft part 770. .

As shown in FIGS. 12-2(C) and (D), when the upper accessory decoration part 800 is attached to the upper accessory main body part 650, the lower decoration rotating shaft part 920 Since it is fitted to the lower body rotating shaft portion 770, the lower decorative rotating shaft portion 920 rotates, and the second lower decorative member 910 rotates and deforms.

[Attachment and detachment of various members in gaming machine 100]
Attachment and detachment of various members in the gaming machine 100 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-5. FIG. 13-1 is a diagram illustrating the movement of the character accessory 1550 during the attachment/detachment operation of the upper unit 180, and (A) shows a state in which the upper part of the glass frame 150 is partially covered by the character accessory 1550. It is a schematic diagram, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state where a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is not covered by the character accessory 1550. FIG. 13-2 is a schematic diagram of the glass frame 150 in an open state. 13-3 is a schematic diagram with the glass frame 150 opened, (A) is a schematic diagram with only the game board 102A removed, and (B) is a diagram with the game board unit 102 removed. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 13-4 is a schematic diagram of the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 in an open state. FIG. 13-5 is a schematic diagram with the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 open, and (A) is a schematic diagram with the production control board unit 102C and main control board unit 102D removed. B) is a schematic diagram with the main display device 131 removed.

[Attachment and detachment of upper unit 180]
As shown in FIG. 13-1(A), the upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 with the character unit 1550 covering a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150. In the upper unit 180, the character accessory 1550 covers a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, and the first support portion 1515 and the second support portion 1535 are attached to the outer frame 160. In this way, when the upper unit 180 is attached, a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is covered by the character accessory 1550, and the character accessory 1550, the first side part 1510, and the second side part 1530 Since the first support portion 1515 and the second support portion 1535 are integrally connected, the glass frame 150 cannot be opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(B), when removing the attached upper unit 180, first turn a predetermined key inserted into the keyhole member to the left to unlock the lock unit 190. Then, the character accessory 1550 is moved diagonally upward and forward on the front of the gaming machine. At this time, the character accessory 1550 moves upward along the rails of the first support section 1515 and the second support section 1535 together with the first side section 1510 and the second side section 1530. At this time, the first support portion 1515 and the second support portion 1535 are attached to the outer frame 160. In this way, when the first side part 1510, the second side part 1530, and the character accessory 1550 are moved as one, the glass frame 150 becomes openable. Further, when a predetermined key inserted into the keyhole member is turned to the left, the power supply from the game board unit 102 to the upper unit 180 is cut off. Note that when only the character accessory 1550 is moved in this way, the character accessory 1550 may return to its original position (the position shown in Figure 13-1(A)), so A character accessory fixing member (not shown) may be provided for fixing the character accessory 1550 (to prevent it from returning to its original position). By using such a character accessory fixing member, when attaching and detaching the upper unit 180 to the gaming machine 100 after moving the character accessory 1550, the operator can prevent the character accessory 1550 from falling, etc. Since you can work while doing the work, you can prevent your fingers from being pinched by falling character objects.

[Attachment and detachment of game board unit 102]
As shown in FIG. 13-2, in the game machine 100, when the glass frame 150 is opened after moving the character unit 1550 of the upper unit 180, the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a, unit pressing part 2022, 2024, and unit fixing parts 2026, 2028 are exposed and become operable. In this state, when the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a are operated, only the game board 102A can be removed from the game board unit 102, and when the unit fixing parts 2026 and 2028 are operated, the game board unit 102 can be removed from the inner frame 170. Here, the configurations of the unit pressing parts 2022, 2024 and the unit fixing parts 2026, 2028 will be explained. The unit pressing parts 2022 and 2024 serve to sandwich the left side of the accessory unit 102B by pressing the unit engaging parts 1922 and 1924 provided on the left side of the accessory unit 102B disposed on the inner frame 170. This is a member that fixes the object unit 102B so that it does not fall out from the inner frame 170. On the other hand, the unit fixing parts 2026 and 2028 prevent the accessory unit 102B from coming off the inner frame 170 by pressing the unit engaging parts 1926 and 1928 provided on the right side of the accessory unit 102B of the game board unit 102. It is a lever-shaped member that is placed in a locked state so as to prevent this from happening, and is configured such that it can be switched to a locked state by pushing the lever and to an unlocked state by pulling the lever.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(A), when only the game board 102A is removed from the game board unit 102, the upper accessory decoration part 600 in the upper accessory unit 154 can be attached and removed, and the lower accessory decoration part 600 in the lower accessory unit 156 can be attached and removed. Accessory decoration part 700 can be attached and detached. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-3(A) and (B), when removing the accessory unit 102B from the inner frame 170, first operate the unit fixing parts 2026 and 2028 of the inner frame 170 to bring it into the unlocked state. to make the right side of the accessory unit 102B removable from the inner frame. Then, by moving the accessory unit 102B diagonally forward to the right, the state in which it is not pinched by the unit pressing portions 2022 and 2024 is changed, and the accessory unit 102B can be removed from the inner frame 170. Note that the accessory unit 102B can be removed as a unit with the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D attached. Furthermore, even when the game board 102A is attached to the accessory unit 102B, when the glass frame 150 is opened, the unit fixing parts 2026 and 2028 are exposed for operation, so the entire game board unit 102 is exposed. It is also possible to remove it from the inner frame 170.

As shown in FIG. 13-4, in the gaming machine 100, when the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened after moving the character unit 1550 of the upper unit 180, the back side of the gaming board unit 102 is exposed. , the production control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D can be removed. In such a state, it is impossible to remove only one of the production control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D, or to remove both the production control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D. It becomes possible. Note that even if only the inner frame 170 is opened in a state where the glass frame 150 is integrated with the inner frame 170, the same state as described above will occur, and the back side of the game board unit 102 will be exposed. Furthermore, an inner frame board unit 2030 having a power supply board 360 and the like is provided at the lower part of the inner frame 170. Moreover, when the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened in this way, the information display device 302c (see FIG. 9-5) mounted on the main control board 300 is enclosed in the main control board case 1980. The RAM clear switch 302a and setting key switch 302b (see FIG. 9-5) provided on the main control board 300 can be operated, and the power switch provided on the power supply board 360 can be operated. becomes. Note that the operation of the setting key switch 302b is an operation in which a predetermined key is inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting key switch 302b and rotated to turn the setting key switch 302b ON or OFF.

Here, the procedures of operations for executing RAM clear processing, operations for executing setting change processing, and operations for executing setting confirmation processing will be described. First, to clear the RAM, turn off the setting key switch 302b, leave the RAM clear switch 302a on, and then turn on the power switch. This can be executed by keeping the clear switch 302a in the ON state. After these operations, execution of RAM clear notification, which will be described later, is started, and the information display 302c performs an initial operation (repeating all lights on and all lights off for 5 seconds), and then displays the current performance. Display numerical values regarding information. Next, to change the settings, turn on the setting key switch 302b, keep the RAM clear switch 302a on, and then turn on the power switch (for about 3 seconds after turning on the power switch, It can be started (transferred to the setting change mode) by keeping the RAM clear switch 302a in the ON state. After these operations, execution of setting change notification, which will be described later, is started, and the information display 302c displays the current setting value. Note that at this time, the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the RAM clear switch 302a, and the information display 302c displays the changed setting value. Then, when the setting key switch 302b is turned OFF, the setting change notification (setting change mode) described later ends, and the RAM clear notification described later starts, and the information display 302c performs the same initial operation as described above. and then displays numerical values related to current performance information. Next, the setting confirmation process is started by turning on the setting key switch 302b, keeping the RAM clear switch 302a in the ON state, and turning on the power switch (shifting to setting confirmation mode). Can be done. After these operations, execution of setting confirmation notification, which will be described later, is started, and the information display 302c displays the current setting value. Note that at this time, the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the RAM clear switch 302a, and the information display 302c displays the changed setting value. Then, when the setting key switch 302b is turned OFF, the setting confirmation notification (setting confirmation mode) described later ends, and the power restoration process (power restoration notification described later) is started, and the information display 302c is displayed in the same manner as described above. performs initial operations and then displays numerical values related to current performance information. In this way, in the gaming machine 100, as long as the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are open, operations for executing RAM clear processing, setting change processing, and setting confirmation processing are possible. Moreover, if only the inner frame 170 is opened while the glass frame 150 is integrated with the inner frame 170, operations for executing RAM clear processing, setting change processing, and setting confirmation processing become possible. That is, even if the glass frame 150 is in a closed state, if the inner frame 170 is in an open state, operations for executing RAM clear processing, setting change processing, and setting confirmation processing are possible. Therefore, to paraphrase the above content, there are two cases: when the inner frame 170 is in an open state and the glass frame 150 is in an open state, and when the inner frame 170 is in a closed state but the glass frame 150 is in an open state. RAM clear processing, setting change processing, and The operation for executing the setting confirmation process becomes possible.

As shown in FIGS. 13-5(A) and (B), the effect control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D can be removed from the main display device 131. Further, the main display device 131 can be removed from the accessory unit 102B by sliding the main display device 131 toward the end opposite to the end where the relay board 1950 is provided. In addition, by sliding the main display device 131 to which the production control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are attached, the production control board unit 102C, the main control board unit 102D, and the main display device 131 can be integrated into the interior. It can also be removed from the frame 170.

[Replacement of superior decoration part and inferior decoration part]
In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment configured as described above, various removably provided members can be replaced. In particular, various members that are not fixed with screws or the like and can be attached or detached without using tools such as a screwdriver can be replaced. For example, when changing a model other than the gaming machine 100 to the gaming machine 100, the glass frame 150, outer frame 160, inner frame 170, etc. of the gaming machine remain as they are, and after replacing the main control board 300 and the effect control board 320, , the superior accessory decoration section 600, and the inferior accessory decoration section 700 can also be replaced from those of the model before change to these members corresponding to the gaming machine 100. When replacing the game machine in this way, as described above, turn off the power of the gaming machine and perform the replacement work, and when the replacement work is completed and the power is turned on, the control section of the upper main body surface part 651 and the lower main body surface part A predetermined signal is transmitted from the control section 751 to the production control board 320 via the lamp control board 340. Then, the production control board 320 executes a determination process based on the received predetermined signal, and determines whether or not the superior decoration part 600 and the inferior decoration part 700 replaced by the replacement work are properly attached. and whether it is accurate or not. In addition, since the production control board 320 executes the production main processing etc. when the gaming machine 100 is turned on as it is after executing the determination process, in the gaming machine 100, for example, the first starting device 112 etc. When a game ball enters the main display device 131, the main display device 131 displays changes in decorative symbols, and the game becomes ready for play.

Here, the determination processing for the above-mentioned superior accessory decoration section 600 and inferior accessory decoration section 700 will be described in more detail below. First, the predetermined signal is a 4-bit signal generated by the control section of the upper body surface section 651 and the control section of the lower body surface section 751. This is because each of the four reflective sensors 680a to 680d (see FIG. 11-2) on the upper main body surface section 651, etc. irradiates signal light onto the back surface of the upper accessory decoration section 600, etc. This is a signal indicating the detection result of which position of the reflective sensors 680a to 680d is irradiated with reflected light from the decorative part 600 or the like. In the 4-bit signal, for example, when the reflective sensor 680a detects reflected light, the 0th bit becomes "1", and when the reflective sensor 680b detects reflected light, the 1st bit becomes "1", and the reflective sensor 680c When the reflective sensor 680d detects reflected light, the second bit becomes "1", and when the reflective sensor 680d detects reflected light, the third bit becomes "1". Note that the bit corresponding to the reflective sensor that did not detect reflected light indicates "0".

In such a configuration, more specifically, generation of a predetermined signal and determination by the effect control base 320 will be described below. For example, in the four reflective parts 630a to 630d (see FIG. 11-1) in the decorative part 600, the three reflective parts 630a to 630c are provided with detection objects, and the reflective part 630d is provided with detection objects. No object is provided. In this case, when the signal light is irradiated from the reflective sensors 680a to 680d to the back surface of the decorative part 600, unless there is a false detection due to intrusion of external light, the reflective sensors other than the reflective sensor 680d 680a to 680c detect the reflected light from the reflecting parts 630a to 630c. Then, the control section of the superior object main body section 650 generates a 4-bit signal of "0111" based on the detection results of each of the reflective sensors 680a to 680d. The generated signal is transmitted from the control section of the superior object main body section 650 to the production control board 320 via the lamp control board 340. In other words, since the reflective sensors 680a to 680d can detect the reflective parts 630a to 630d without directly contacting them, the reflective sensors 680a to 680d and the reflective parts 630a to 630c can be used in this way. This detection method can also be said to be a so-called non-contact detection method.

The performance control board 320 stores in advance numerical data "0111" in the sub ROM 320d as verification information when the accessory decoration part 600 is attached. When the effect control board 320 receives the 4-bit signal "0111" generated by the control unit of the superior object main body section 650 as described above, the effect decoration section 600 uses the collation information "0111". , the process of determining whether or not the parts are correctly mounted and whether or not the parts are correctly mounted is executed. In this case, the received 4-bit signal "0111" and the verification information "0111" match in all bit correspondence numbers, so the production control board 320 confirms that the attached superior accessory decoration part 600 is correctly attached. It was determined that the results were both accurate and accurate. Further, for example, when the upper accessory decoration part 600 is not attached or when the locking mechanism in the upper accessory decoration part 600 is in an unlocked state, all or any of the reflective sensors 680a to 680d do not receive the reflected light. may not be detected, and the control section of the superior body section 650 may not be able to generate a 4-bit signal. In such a case, the production control board 320 determines that the attached upper decoration part 600 is not properly attached, and executes upper decoration part non-installation error notification (installation error notification), which will be described later. Generates an error specification command for upper decorative part not installed. Furthermore, for example, if the performance control board 320 is replaced due to a change in model or specification, the verification information stored in the sub-ROM becomes "0011" corresponding to the superior decoration part 800. Assume. In this case, when the superior accessory decoration section 600 is attached, a 4-bit signal of "0111" is generated by the control section of the superior accessory main body section 650 as described above, and the signal is transmitted to the effect control board 320. The production control board 320 that received this 4-bit signal "0111" compares the signal with the collation information "0011" and determines that the corresponding numerical value of the 3rd bit is different, and displays the attached superior decoration. The part 600 determines that the part 600 is different from the original upper part decoration part 800 and is not accurate, and the part 600 determines that the part 600 is different from the original upper part decoration part 800 and is not accurate, and sends an upper part decoration part 800 to execute the upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification (installation error notification) to be described later. Generates a decorative part incorrect attachment error specification command. Note that the determination process for replacing the minor accessory decoration part 700, etc. is also substantially the same as the determination process for replacing the superior accessory decoration part 600, etc. described above.

[Aspects of installation error notification regarding the decorative part of superior accessories]
With reference to FIG. 14-1, modes of upper decorative part uninstalled error notification and upper decorative part incorrectly installed error notification, which are installation error notifications regarding the upper decorative part 600 in the gaming machine 100 described above, will be specifically explained. . FIG. 14-1 is a diagram showing a mode of attachment error notification, (A) is a diagram showing a mode of top decoration part not attached error notification, and (B) is a figure showing a mode of top decoration part incorrect attachment error notification. FIG. 6C is a diagram illustrating the timing of output in upper decoration part non-installation error notification and upper decoration part erroneous installation error notification.

As shown in FIG. 14-1(A), in the upper decoration part non-installation error notification, the installation error display 2020a is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decoration pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The wearing error display 2020a is displayed in a position (for example, the upper left corner) where the visibility of decorative patterns etc. on the main display device 131 is not obstructed, and suggests that the superior accessory decoration part 600 is not properly worn. An error code "○○-□" expressed as a number is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs audio for specifying the determined component, such as "Superior item error." Furthermore, in the upper decoration part not installed error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) blinks, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) blinks. 341) is off. Then, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 blinks. Note that the upper decoration part not attached error notification is continuously executed until the upper decoration part 600 is normally attached (the error is resolved). Further, the frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may flash in a predetermined color or at a predetermined interval in an upper decoration part non-installation error mode corresponding to the upper decoration part non-installation error notification. When such upper decoration part non-installation error notification is executed, the worker who replaces the member can easily recognize that the replaced member is not reliably installed.

As shown in FIG. 14-1(B), in the case of upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, the attachment error display 2020b is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2020b is displayed in a position (for example, the upper right corner) where the visibility of decorative patterns etc. on the main display device 131 is not obstructed, and is a number indicating that the superior accessory decoration part 600 is not the correct member. The error code "○○-△" is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs audio for specifying the determined component, such as "Superior item error." Furthermore, in the upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) blinks, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) blinks. 341) is off. Then, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 blinks. Note that the upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification is continuously executed until the correct upper decoration part is normally attached (the error is resolved). Further, the frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may flash in a predetermined color or at a predetermined interval in an upper decorative part erroneous attachment error mode corresponding to upper decorative part erroneous attachment error notification. When such upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification is executed, the worker who replaces the member can easily recognize that the replaced member is not the correct member.

As shown in FIG. 14-1(C), the above-described upper decoration part non-installation error notification and upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification may be executed and terminated at a predetermined timing. For example, when the production control board 130 receives an error-type designation command corresponding to an upper decorative part not installed error or an upper decorative part incorrectly installed error (t0), the installation error display 2020a or the installation error display 2020b on the main display device 131 is displayed. , the audio output device 331 starts outputting a voice saying "Superior product error", etc., turns off the panel lamp, and causes the frame lamp to blink (repeating on and off at 250ms intervals). ) and lighting in the upper unit may be performed. Then, when the upper decorative part not installed error or the upper decorative part incorrectly installed error is resolved and one second has elapsed (t2) from the time when the production control board 130 receives a command corresponding to the resolution of the error (t1), , the output of the attachment error display 2020a or the attachment error display 2020b on the main display device 131 is finished, the output of audio etc. is finished on the audio output device 331, the blinking of the frame lamp is finished, and the upper decoration part is not attached. The error notification or the upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification may be terminated. That is, in the upper decorative part non-installation error notification and the upper decorative part incorrectly installed error notification, the notification may be performed at a predetermined period even if the error is resolved. When such upper decorative part uninstalled error notification and upper decorative part incorrectly installed error notification are executed, the notification continues for a predetermined period and then ends after the error is resolved, so the operator who replaces the part It is possible to reliably recognize that the problem of the replaced member not being installed securely or not being the correct member has been resolved.

Moreover, although the upper decoration part non-installation error notification and the upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification are executed in different manners on the main display device 131 and the like, they may be performed in the same manner. For example, in the upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, the main display device 131 may display the same attachment error display 2020a as the upper decoration part non-installation error notification. With such notification, the operator can easily recognize that some kind of error has occurred due to the replacement work of the upper accessory decoration part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154.

[Aspects of installation error notification regarding the accessory decoration part]
With reference to FIG. 14-2, modes of lower decoration part uninstallation error notification and lower decoration part incorrect installation error notification, which are installation error notifications regarding the accessory decoration part 700 in the gaming machine 100 described above, will be specifically explained. . FIG. 14-2 is a diagram showing a mode of attachment error notification, (A) is a diagram showing a mode of lower decorative part not attached error notification, and (B) is a figure showing a mode of lower decoration part incorrect attachment error notification. It is a figure showing an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 14-2(A), in the lower decorative part non-installation error notification, the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2030a along with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2030a is displayed at a position where the visibility of decorative patterns etc. on the main display device 131 is not obstructed (for example, at the lower left corner above the reserved icon display area), and when the accessory decoration section 700 is normal. An error code "XX-□", which is represented by numbers, etc., is displayed, indicating that the device is not installed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs audio for specifying the determined member, such as "It is a servant error." Furthermore, in the lower decoration part non-installation error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) blinks, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) blinks. 341) is off. Then, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 blinks. Note that the lower decoration part not installed error notification is continuously executed until the lower decoration part 700 is normally installed (the error is resolved). Further, the frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may flash in a predetermined color or at a predetermined interval in a lower decoration part non-installation error mode corresponding to the lower decoration part non-installation error notification. When such lower decoration part non-installation error notification is executed, the worker replacing the member can easily recognize that the replaced member is not reliably installed.

As shown in FIG. 14-2(B), in the case of the lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, the attachment error display 2030b is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2030b is displayed in a position (for example, the lower right corner) where the visibility of decorative patterns etc. on the main display device 131 is not obstructed, and is a number indicating that the accessory decoration part 700 is not an appropriate member. The error code "XX-△" is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs audio for specifying the determined member, such as "It is a servant error." Furthermore, in the case of a lower decoration incorrect installation error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) blinks, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) blinks. 341) is off. Then, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 blinks. Note that the lower decoration part incorrect attachment error notification is continuously executed until the correct lower decoration part is normally attached (the error is resolved). Further, the frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may flash in a predetermined luminescent color or at a predetermined interval in a lower decoration part incorrect installation error mode corresponding to the lower decoration part incorrect installation error notification. When such lower decoration part incorrect attachment error notification is executed, the worker who replaces the member can easily recognize that the replaced member is not the correct member.

Furthermore, although the lower decoration part non-installation error notification and the lower decoration part incorrect installation error notification are executed in different manners on the main display device 131 and the like, they may be performed in the same manner. For example, in the lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, the main display device 131 may display the same attachment error display 2030a as the lower decorative part non-installation error notification. With such notification, the operator can easily recognize that some kind of error has occurred due to the replacement work of the accessory decoration part 700 of the lower accessory unit 156. Furthermore, for the lower decoration part not installed error notification and the lower decoration part incorrectly installed error notification, similar to the above-mentioned upper decoration part not installed error notification, the notification is executed within a predetermined period even if the error is resolved. You can also use it as

[How to replace the front lantern case and notify the installation error]
Next, the above-mentioned replacement of the front lantern case portion 1581b, etc., determination processing, and installation error notification will be described in more detail below. Similar to the above-mentioned accessory decoration part 600, for example, when changing a model other than the gaming machine 100 to the gaming machine 100, the glass frame 150, outer frame 160, inner frame 170, etc. of the gaming machine can be left as they are. After replacing the main control board 300 and the production control board 320, it is also possible to replace the front lantern case part 1581b etc. from those of the model before the change to these parts corresponding to the gaming machine 100. The procedure for replacing the front lantern case part 1581b etc. and the mode of notification of a mounting error are almost the same as the procedure of replacing the work and the mode of notifying a mounting error in the above-mentioned upper accessory decoration section 600 etc., so the details will not be explained. The explanation will be omitted, and detailed explanations will be given for different matters. The predetermined signal in the determination process when replacing the front lantern case part 1581b etc. is a 6-bit signal generated by the lantern control part, unlike the above-mentioned superior decoration part 600 etc. The sensors 1583a to 1583f emit signal light to the back surface of the front lantern case part 1581b, and the detection result is shown as to which position of the reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f is irradiated with reflected light from the front lantern case part 1581b side. It's a signal. Specifically, in the 6-bit signal, when the reflective sensor 1583a detects reflected light, the 0th bit becomes "1", and when the reflective sensor 1583b detects reflected light, the 1st bit becomes "1", and the reflected light is detected. When the reflective sensor 1583c detects reflected light, the 2nd bit becomes "1", when the reflective sensor 1583d detects reflected light, the 3rd bit becomes "1", and when the reflective sensor 1583e detects reflected light, the 4th bit becomes "1". becomes "1", and when the reflective sensor 1583f detects the reflected light, the 5th bit becomes "1". Note that the bit corresponding to the reflective sensor that did not detect reflected light indicates "0". Then, the effect control board 320, like the above-mentioned accessory decoration section 600, etc., executes a mounting error notification such as a lantern not installed error notification or a lantern incorrectly installed error notification based on the result of the determination process. When such a lantern not installed error notification or a lantern incorrectly installed error notification is executed, the worker replacing the part will be able to confirm that the replaced part is not properly installed or that the replaced part is not the correct part. can be easily recognized.

[Replacement of upper unit etc. and installation error notification mode]
Next, the above-mentioned replacement of the upper unit 180 and sword handle unit 135, determination processing, and installation error notification will be described in more detail below. Similar to the above-mentioned accessory decoration part 600, for example, when changing a model other than the gaming machine 100 to the gaming machine 100, the glass frame 150, outer frame 160, inner frame 170, etc. of the gaming machine can be left as they are. After replacing the main control board 300 and the effect control board 320, it is also possible to replace the upper unit 180 and the like from the model before the change to a unit compatible with the gaming machine 100. Note that the procedure for replacing the upper unit 180 etc. is substantially the same as the procedure for replacing the above-mentioned accessory decorative part 600 etc., so a detailed explanation will be omitted. The predetermined signal in the determination process when replacing the upper unit 180 etc. is a 6-bit signal, which is model-specific and stored in the ROM in the control unit of the upper unit 180 (or the control unit of the sword hilt unit 135). It is a signal according to information. When each unit is attached to the glass frame 150, outer frame 160, inner frame 170, etc. of the gaming machine and power supply to the gaming machine is started, the IC installed in the control section in each unit is stored in the ROM. The machine-specific information is read out from the machine-specific information, and a 6-bit length signal corresponding to the model-specific information is transmitted to the production control board 320 via the unit control section and the lamp control board 340. For example, the 6-bit length signal corresponding to the model-specific information of the upper unit 180 is "011111".

Here, aspects of determination processing and attachment error notification when replacing the upper unit 180 will be described. For example, the effect control board 320 stores numerical data "011111" in advance in the sub ROM 320d as verification information when the upper unit 180 is attached. When the production control board 320 receives the 6-bit signal "011111" transmitted from the control section of the upper unit 180 as described above, the production control board 320 uses the verification information "011111" to determine whether the upper unit 180 is properly installed. A determination process is executed to determine whether or not the parts are properly installed. In this example, the received 6-bit signal "011111" and the verification information "011111" match in all bit correspondence numbers, so the effect control board 320 indicates that the installed upper unit 180 is correctly installed. It was judged that it was both accurate and accurate. Furthermore, for example, if the upper unit 180 is not installed or if the upper unit connector 1575 of the upper unit 180 is not securely fitted to the game board connector 1620, the production control board 320 may not be able to receive the 6-bit signal. be. In such a case, the production control board 320 determines that the upper unit 180 is not properly installed, and issues an upper unit non-installation error to execute an upper unit non-installation error notification (installation error notification) to be described later. Generates the specified command. Furthermore, on the other hand, it is assumed that the verification information stored in the sub ROM 320d has become "001111" due to, for example, replacing the performance control board 320 due to a change in model or a change in specifications. Even in this case, when the upper unit 180 is attached, the 6-bit signal "011111" is transmitted from the control section of the upper unit 180 to the effect control board 320 as described above. The production control board 320 that received the 6-bit signal "011111" compared the signal with the verification information "001111" and determined that the corresponding numerical values of the 5th bit were different, and the mounted upper unit 180 It is determined that the upper unit is different from the original upper unit and is not accurate, and an upper unit incorrect installation error specification command is generated to execute the upper unit incorrect installation error notification (installation error notification) described later. .

[Aspects of installation error notification regarding upper unit]
With reference to FIG. 14-3, modes of upper unit non-installation error notification and upper unit incorrect installation error notification, which are installation error notifications regarding the upper unit 180 in the gaming machine 100 described above, will be specifically described. FIG. 14-3 is a diagram showing a mode of installation error notification, (A) is a diagram showing a mode of upper unit non-installation error notification, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode of upper unit incorrect installation error notification. FIG. Note that the manner of installation error notification described below relates to the upper unit 180, but if the upper unit 180 is removed from the gaming machine, such as the sword handle unit 135, first side display device 132, second side display device 133, etc. Similar mounting error notification may be performed for replaceable members, units, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 14-3(A), in the upper unit non-installation error notification, a mounting error display 2050a is displayed on the main display device 131 together with a decorative pattern, a pending icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2050a is displayed at a position (for example, the center of the upper end) where the visibility of decorative patterns etc. on the main display device 131 is not obstructed, and includes numbers or the like that indicate that the upper unit 180 is not installed properly. The error code "●●-□" is displayed. Further, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs audio for identifying the determined member, such as "Upper unit error." Further, in the upper unit non-installation error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) is turned off, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 342 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) is turned off. ) is blinking. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation (for example, an operation that covers (superimposes) a part of the attachment error display 2050a). , the upper unit 180 is off. Note that the upper unit non-installation error notification is continuously executed until the upper unit 180 is normally installed (the error is resolved). Further, the frame lamp and the panel lamp may emit light in a predetermined color or blink at predetermined intervals in an upper unit non-installation error mode corresponding to the upper unit non-installation error notification. When such upper unit non-installation error notification is executed, the worker replacing the member can easily recognize that the replaced member is not reliably installed. Furthermore, the installation error display 2050a in the upper unit non-installation error notification is displayed in the upper area of the main display device 131 in a position close to the upper unit 180, so it is an error notification regarding the upper unit 180. can also be easily recognized. Furthermore, in the upper unit non-installation error notification, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, so even if the installation error is related to a replaceable member, the upper accessory unit It can also be easily recognized that this is not a mounting error regarding the unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156.

As shown in FIG. 14-3(B), in the upper unit incorrect installation error notification, the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2050b along with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2050b is displayed at a position where the visibility of decorative patterns etc. on the main display device 131 is not obstructed (for example, at the center of the upper end), and is displayed with a number or the like indicating that the upper unit 180 is not the correct member. The error code “●●-△” is displayed. Further, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs audio for identifying the determined member, such as "Upper unit error." Furthermore, in the upper unit incorrect installation error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) is turned off, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 342 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) is turned off. ) is blinking. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation (for example, an operation that covers (superimposes) a part of the attachment error display 2050b). , the upper unit 180 is off. Note that the upper unit incorrect installation error notification is continuously executed until the correct upper unit is normally installed (the error is resolved). Further, the board lamp may emit light in a predetermined color or blink at a predetermined interval in an upper unit incorrect installation error mode corresponding to upper unit incorrect installation error notification. When such upper unit incorrect installation error notification is executed, the worker replacing the member can easily recognize that the replaced member is not the correct member. Furthermore, since the mounting error display 2050b in the upper unit incorrect mounting error notification is displayed in the upper area of the main display device 131 in a position close to the upper unit 180, it is an error notification regarding the upper unit 180. can also be easily recognized. Furthermore, in the upper unit incorrect installation error notification, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, so even if the installation error is related to a replaceable member, the upper accessory unit It can also be easily recognized that this is not a mounting error regarding the unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156.

Furthermore, although the upper unit non-installation error notification and the upper unit incorrect installation error notification are executed in different manners on the main display device 131 and the like, they may be performed in the same manner. For example, in the upper unit incorrect installation error notification, the main display device 131 may display the installation error display 2050a similar to the upper unit non-installation error notification. With this type of notification, the operator can easily recognize that some kind of error has occurred due to the replacement work of the upper unit 180. Furthermore, in the upper unit not installed error notification and the upper unit incorrectly installed error notification, similar to the above-mentioned upper decoration part not installed error notification, even if the error is resolved, the notification may be executed at a predetermined period. good.

[Other aspects of installation error notification]
Referring to FIG. 14-4, other aspects of the installation error notification regarding the superior accessory decoration part 600 in the gaming machine 100 described above will be specifically explained. FIG. 14-4 is a diagram showing other aspects of the installation error notification, (A) is a diagram showing another aspect of the upper decoration part not installed error notification, and (B) is a diagram showing another aspect of the upper decoration part error notification. It is a figure which showed the other aspect of attachment error notification, and (C) is the figure which showed the other aspect of upper decorative part non-installation error indication.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(A), first, in this upper decoration part not installed error notification, the main display device 131 displays the upper decoration part not installed error notification (see FIG. 14-1). A mounting error display 2060a is displayed at the position. However, the installation error display 2060a may display, for example, "Superior item: Not installed", which specifically suggests that the superior item decoration part 600 is not properly installed. . It is assumed that the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, the board lamp, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the upper unit 180 operate in the same manner as the above-mentioned upper decorative part non-installation error notification. When such upper decoration part non-installation error notification is executed, the worker replacing the member can specifically and more easily recognize that the replaced member is not reliably installed. In addition, the above-mentioned installation error displays such as the lower decoration part not installed error notification, the lantern not installed error notification, and the upper unit not installed error notification also specifically indicate that each member, etc. is not installed properly. The contents may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(B), next, in this upper decoration incorrect installation error notification, the installation error display 2060b is displayed on the main display device 131 in a size that covers the decoration pattern. It's okay. In addition, the installation error display 2060b may specifically indicate that the model of the game machine and the installed parts are incorrect, for example, ``This game machine is ``model ABC.'' The ``superior product'' is It may be possible to display the message ``This is for model XYZ and is not accurate.''. It is assumed that the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, the panel lamp, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the upper unit 180 operate in the same manner as the above-described upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification. When this kind of upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification is executed, the worker replacing the part will not only be able to specifically and easily recognize that the replaced part is not the correct part, but also will be able to confirm that the replaced part is not the correct part. If so, you can recognize the exact parts that need to be replaced. In other words, it is possible to prompt the worker performing the replacement work to replace the appropriate member again, thereby leading to the replacement work with the appropriate member. In addition, in the installation error display of the above-mentioned lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lantern incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification, it is similarly specified that the model of the gaming machine and the installed member are incorrect. It may also be possible to display content that is specifically suggested.

Here, we will discuss the above-mentioned determination process and the determination process for making it possible to notify the installation error by displaying the installation error with content that specifically suggests that the model of the gaming machine and the attached component are not accurate. The different processing procedures will be explained. First, for example, a plurality of collation information corresponding to each of a plurality of specifications is stored in advance in the production control board, and correct collation information is determined. Then, the predetermined signal received from the replaced component is compared with the verification information to determine whether or not it is the correct component, and if the received predetermined signal does not match the correct verification information. In this case, a model corresponding to matching information that matches the received predetermined signal is specified, and the above-mentioned notification is executed. More specifically, in the first embodiment described above, the sub ROM 320d of the production control board 320 contains "011111" for "model ABC", "011110" for "model OPQ", and "model XYZ" as verification information. It is assumed that a table of numerical data associated with a plurality of models such as "011100" is stored, and it is defined that the control board 320 is of "model ABC". For example, when the accessory decoration part of "model XYZ" is installed, the effect control board 320 compares the predetermined signal "011100" received from the control section of the accessory main body part with the verification information. The predetermined signal is treated as being different from "011111" of "model ABC" and matching "011100" of "model XYZ". Then, the effect control board 320 causes the main display device 131 to display a mounting error display 2260b.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (C), next, in this upper decoration part unattached error notification, the decoration pattern, the pending icon display area, the icon display area, etc. on the main display device 131 are not displayed at all. The mounting error display 2060c may be displayed in a large size. If the installation error display 2060c is displayed like this, an error code represented by a number or the like indicating that the superior accessory decoration part is not installed correctly will cause the entire display area of the main display device 131 to become black. Since it is displayed in white characters on a black background, it is possible to draw attention only to the mounting error display 2060c. It is assumed that the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, the board lamp, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the upper unit 180 operate in the same manner as the above-mentioned upper decorative part non-installation error notification. In addition, in the installation error display for the lower decoration part not installed error notification, lantern not installed error notification, and upper unit not installed error notification mentioned above, each component is similarly installed normally with white characters on a black background. It may also be possible to display content specifically suggesting that the Further, the above-mentioned mounting error display for the lower decorative part incorrect mounting error notification, the lantern incorrect mounting error notification, and the upper unit incorrect mounting error notification may be performed in a similar manner. In this installation error display, the contents displayed in white text include contents that specifically suggest that each component, etc. is not properly installed, and information that indicates that the model of the gaming machine and the installed component are not accurate. It may be content that specifically suggests that.

Here, a case will be described in which a mounting error notification regarding two or more units among the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, the upper unit 180, etc. is executed. First, in the mounting error display displayed on the main display device 131, a mounting error display 2020a (2020b) regarding the upper accessory unit 154, a mounting error display 2030a (2030b) regarding the lower accessory unit 156, and a mounting error display 2030a (2030b) regarding the upper unit 180. Since the mounting error displays 2050a and 2050b are displayed at different positions on the main display device 131, they can be displayed at the same time. Specifically, when the power is turned on after the replacement work, if the lower accessory decorative part 700 is not installed properly and an upper unit different from the correct upper unit 180 is installed, the main display device 131 In this case, a mounting error display 2030a is displayed at the lower left corner above the pending icon display area, and a mounting error display 2050b is displayed at the center of the upper end. In this case, the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) may alternately and repeatedly output sounds such as "Lower accessory error" and "Upper unit error." With this type of installation error notification, a worker replacing a component can easily recognize which component, etc. has an error among a plurality of components, etc. that have been replaced.

Further, when a plurality of mounting error notifications are executed, the priority may be set to be different for each mounting error notification. For example, the mounting error notification regarding the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may have a higher priority than the mounting error notification regarding the upper unit 180. Specifically, when the power is turned on after the replacement work, if the lower accessory decorative part 700 is not installed properly and an upper unit different from the correct upper unit 180 is installed, the main display device 131 In this case, the installation error display 2030a is displayed in the lower left corner above the hold icon display area, and the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a voice saying "Lower accessory error." It's okay. Thereafter, when the mounting error related to the lower accessory unit 156 is resolved, the mounting error display 2030a disappears from the main display device 131, the mounting error display 2050b is displayed at the center of the upper end, and the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) may output a voice saying "Upper unit error." With this type of installation error notification, the worker who replaces parts can easily and reliably recognize which of the multiple replaced parts has caused an error. Therefore, the operator can be urged to reliably carry out the replacement work again.

Furthermore, for example, when replacing the mounting member etc. as described above, there may be an exchange mode in which the state of the gaming machine 100 is changed to a state where the mounting member etc. can be replaced, or after replacing the mounting member etc. There may also be a check mode for operating and confirming a unit or the like to which a replaceable mounting member or the like is attached. For example, in the game machine 100, immediately after turning on the power, the RAM clear switch 302a is pressed for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 3 seconds) or more to enter the exchange mode. It's okay. More specifically, for example, when the gaming machine 100 enters the exchange mode, a message such as "In exchange mode" is output on the main display device 131, and a unit, etc. to which a replacement member or the like is installed or to be replaced is displayed. It may be moved to a replacement position (for example, an intermediate position between the initial position and the advanced position) where the replacement work can be easily performed. In addition, by pressing the RAM clear switch for a predetermined number of seconds (e.g., 3 seconds) or more during the replacement mode after the replacement work is completed, the replacement mode is terminated, and the check mode is activated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 15 seconds). It may also be possible to move to . More specifically, for example, when the gaming machine 100 enters the check mode, a message such as "In the check mode" is output on the main display device 131, and a unit, etc. to which replacement parts or the like are installed or to be replaced is displayed. In order to determine whether or not the unit operates normally, the unit or the like (for example, including various solenoids other than the unit) may be operated for a predetermined period of time. Note that during the exchange mode, operations in the gaming machine 100 other than predetermined operations (such as movement to a replacement position) of a unit to which a replacement member or the like is attached or replaced may be restricted. Further, the movement of the unit, etc. to the exchange position during the exchange mode may be made to move at a slower speed than the speed of the normal movable performance.

In the above-mentioned plurality of mounting error notifications, the frame lamp, panel lamp, etc. during which the mounting error notification is being executed have a unique light emission mode (a combination of lighting, blinking, and turning off) corresponding to each mounting error notification. However, if the game is started while the installation error notification is being executed (when special symbols and decorative symbols start changing based on winnings, etc.), it will be considered that the installation error notification is in progress. may perform different light emission modes. Specifically, for example, frame lamps, board lamps, etc. that were lit or blinking during execution of the installation error notification may be turned off when the game is started. In addition, in the light emission mode during execution of the installation error notification and the light emission mode after the start of the game, only a part of the frame lamp or board lamp is lit, and the remaining frame lamp or board lamp is turned off. There may be. In other words, frame lamps, board lamps, etc. are emitted during the installation error notification, during the installation error notification and the game is being played, and during the normal game (when the installation error notification is not being executed). The embodiments may be different. In such a mode, since the light emitting manner of the frame lamp is different between when the mounting error notification is being executed and when the game is being played, the player can easily recognize that the mounting error notification is being executed.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper unit 180, superior accessory decoration section 600, and subordinate accessory decoration section 700, which are replaceable members, are composed of a code section, a caution section, and a model name section. Since the identification display section is provided, the worker can work while checking the display on the identification display section. Specifically, the worker can perform the work with caution by checking the display in the caution section of the identification display. In addition, for example, in a mounting error notification (see FIGS. 14-1 to 14-3) that indicates that the mounted member is not the correct member, such as upper decorative part incorrect mounting error notification, an error code is displayed. In the mounting error display in which is displayed, it may not be possible to determine the model name, etc., corresponding to the member, etc. that the operator has mounted. Even in such a case, by checking the output display and model name section of a predetermined terminal that has read the code section, it is possible to confirm the model name, etc. that corresponds to the component attached by the worker. This can lead to work that allows for the installation of accurate parts.

[Relationship between various notifications and attachment error notification]
The relationship between various notifications and the above-mentioned attachment error notification will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-9. FIG. 15-1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between power restoration notification and attachment error notification. FIG. 15-2 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between RAM clear notification and mounting error notification. FIG. 15-3 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and attachment error notification. FIG. 15-4 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between door opening error notification and mounting error notification. FIG. 15-5 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and attachment error notification. FIG. 15-6 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between switch connection error notification and attachment error notification. FIG. 15-7 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between vibration error notification and the like and mounting error notification. FIG. 15-8 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the plate full error notification and the mounting error notification. FIG. 15-9 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between left-handed player notification and mounting error notification.

First, various notifications to explain the relationship with installation error notifications are power recovery notifications, RAM clear notifications, settings change notifications, settings confirmation notifications, and errors in response to error system specification commands, among the various notifications described above. It is a notification. In addition, notifications according to the error system specification commands include door open error notification according to the door open error specification command, switch connection error notification according to the switch connection error specification command, and magnetic error notification according to the error system specification command mentioned above. Magnetic error notification according to the specified command, radio error notification according to the radio error specification command, vibration error notification according to the vibration error specification command, abnormal winning error notification according to the abnormal prize error specification command, according to the ejection error specification command These are the ball ejecting error notification in response to a ball removal error designation command, and the left-handed batting error notification in response to a left-handed batting state designation command. Below, the relationship between the mounting error notification and these various notifications will be explained in detail.

[Relationship between power recovery notification and installation error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-1(A), for example, when the power is restored from a power outage in response to the occurrence of a magnetic error or the like during a game such as when special symbols are changing or during a round game, the production control board 320 A power restoration notification is executed to make the user recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. In the power restoration notification, a power restoration display 2081 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with a decorative pattern, a pending icon display area, and the icon display area. The power recovery display 2081 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "Power is being restored" indicating that the power is being restored. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a voice indicating that the power is being restored, such as "Power is being restored" (for example, it may be a power restoration notification sound such as a buzzer). Output. Furthermore, in the power restoration notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) blinks, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) also blinks. are doing. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is lit. Note that the power restoration notification may include displaying the power restoration display 2081 on the main display device 131 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), or displaying audio etc. on the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 may be outputted for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). Further, the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 may emit light in a predetermined color or blink at a predetermined interval, such as a power recovery mode corresponding to a power recovery notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-1(B), for example, when a worker operates a power switch or the like to restore power, the worker touches the upper accessory unit 154 and the upper accessory decoration part 600 is not properly attached. If it is determined that there is no upper decoration part installed error notification is executed preferentially even though the power recovery notification is executed during the period. Note that the manner of notifying the error that the upper decoration part is not attached is the same as described above, and therefore detailed explanation will be omitted. At this time, the display mode on the main display device 131, the output mode on the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), the light emission mode on the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 In the operation mode, the mode for notifying the error that the upper decoration part is not attached is preferentially executed. For example, if the error is resolved due to the superior decoration part 600 being normally attached during the period in which the power restoration notification is originally executed, the above-mentioned power restoration notification (Fig. 15-1 (A )). In other words, the superior article non-installation error notification has a higher priority than the power recovery notification. Although the relationship between the power restoration notification and the upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been explained here, the power restoration notification and other installation error notifications (installation error notification in the upper unit 180, etc.) can also be given the same priority. Good too. In this way, if installation error notifications such as upper decorative part not installed error notifications are given priority over power recovery notifications, workers will be notified of installation errors such as replaceable parts not being securely installed. You can reliably and easily recognize what you are doing.

Furthermore, on the other hand, the power supply recovery notification may be executed with priority over the installation error notification such as the upper decoration part non-installation error notification. Specifically, during the period in which the power restoration notification is executed, the power restoration notification (Fig. 15-1 (A)) is executed with priority, and after the period ends, the installation error notification (for example, Fig. 15-1 (A)) is executed with priority. 1(B) etc.) may be executed. In other words, the power restoration notification may have a higher priority than the superior article non-installation error notification. Even if the power recovery notification is given priority over the installation error notification in this way, the operator can reliably and easily confirm that an installation error has occurred, such as a replaceable member not being securely installed. can be recognized. Furthermore, even if the installation error notification is performed with priority over the power recovery notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the panel lamp , may be executed in a manner corresponding to the power restoration notification. On the other hand, even if the power recovery notification is executed with priority over the installation error notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the panel lamp In this case, the process may be executed in a manner corresponding to the mounting error notification. In this manner, the operator can easily recognize that the power is being restored and that a mounting error has occurred.

[Relationship between RAM clear notification and installation error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-2(A), for example, when the RAM clear switch is pressed when the power is turned on, the effect control board 320 executes RAM clear notification to make it aware that the RAM is being cleared. In the RAM clear notification, a RAM clear display 2082 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with a decorative pattern (for example, an initial decorative pattern "135" when the power is turned on, etc.), a pending icon display area, and the icon display area. The RAM clear display 2082 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative patterns on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "RAM clearing" indicating that the RAM clearing process is in progress. Furthermore, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound indicating that the RAM clearing process is in progress, such as "RAM clearing in progress" (RAM clear notification sound such as a buzzer sound). Furthermore, in the RAM clear notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is lit, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is also lit. are doing. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is lit. Note that the RAM clear notification may include displaying the RAM clear display 2082 on the main display device 131 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), or displaying the audio etc. on the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds). The frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 may be outputted for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 may be made to blink for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). Further, the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit 180 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined luminescent color or at predetermined intervals, such as a RAM clear mode corresponding to RAM clear notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-2(B), for example, when a worker operates a power switch or a RAM clear switch to clear the RAM, the upper accessory unit 154 is touched and the upper accessory decoration part 600 is damaged. If it is determined that the upper decorative part is not attached, the main display device 131 displays a RAM clear display 2082 for RAM clear notification and a mounting error display 2020a for upper decorative part non-installation error notification. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit, upper unit 180, etc., the RAM clear notification is Although the above mode is preferentially executed, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform the initial operation or the like. In other words, the RAM clear notification has a higher priority than the superior article non-installation error notification. For example, if the error is resolved due to the superior accessory decoration part 600 being normally attached during the period when the RAM clear notification is being executed, the attachment error display 2020a on the main display device 131 is not displayed. becomes. Although the relationship between the RAM clear notification and the upper decoration part non-installation error notification has been explained here, the RAM clear notification and other installation error notifications (installation error notification in the upper unit 180, etc.) can also be given the same priority. Good too. In this way, even when the RAM clear notification is in progress, if at least a part of the installation error notifications, such as the top decoration part not installed error notification, is executed, the operator may be notified that a replaceable member is not securely installed, etc. It is possible to reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that the RAM is being cleared. On the other hand, similarly to the case where the power recovery notification is given priority over the installation error notification as described above, the installation error notification may be performed after the RAM clear notification.

[Relationship between setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and attachment error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-3(A), when the setting change process is executed, the production control board 320 changes the settings in order to recognize that the setting value is being changed (setting change mode). Execute notification. In the setting change notification, the main display device 131 displays a full-sized setting change display 2083a consisting of characters such as "Settings changing" indicating that the setting values are being changed. Furthermore, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound indicating that the power source is being changed, such as "Settings are being changed" (settings change notification sound such as a buzzer sound). Furthermore, in the setting change notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) is turned off, but the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 342 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) is turned off. ) is blinking. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. Note that, as described above, the setting change notification continues until the setting key switch 302b is turned off. Further, the board lamp may flash in a predetermined color or at predetermined intervals, such as a setting change mode corresponding to a setting change notification (setting change mode).

As shown in FIG. 15-3(B), when the setting confirmation process is executed, the production control board 320 confirms the settings in order to recognize that the setting values are being confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Execute notification. In the setting confirmation notification, the main display device 131 displays a full-size setting confirmation display 2083b consisting of characters such as "Setting confirmation in progress" indicating that the setting values are being confirmed. Furthermore, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound indicating that the power source is being changed, such as "Setting confirmation in progress" (setting confirmation notification sound such as a buzzer sound). Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) is turned off, but the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 342 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) is turned off. ) is blinking. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. Note that, as described above, the setting confirmation notification continues until the setting key switch 302b is turned off. Further, the board lamp may emit light in a predetermined color or blink at predetermined intervals, such as a setting confirmation mode corresponding to a setting confirmation notification (setting confirmation mode). Additionally, if the sword hilt unit 135 (effect button) etc. is operated while the setting confirmation notification is being executed, the main display device 131 will display a history list of changes to the setting values (for example, the date and time of the change, the date and time before the change, etc.). A list of changed setting values) may be displayed.

Here, for example, when the operator operates the setting key switch 302b, RAM clear switch 302a, etc. to change or confirm settings, the upper accessory unit 154 may be touched and the upper accessory decoration part 600 may not be properly attached. Even if it is determined that the upper decorative part is not installed, the installation error notification such as the upper decoration part not installed error notification is not executed, and the installation error notification is executed after the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are executed. In other words, the setting change notification and setting confirmation notification have a higher priority than the superior article non-installation error notification. Note that after the setting change notification ends, RAM clear notification is executed as described above, so if the installation error is not resolved, the main display device 131 during RAM clear notification will indicate that the upper decorative part is not installed. When the error notification installation error display 2020a is displayed (see Figure 15-2 (B)), the operator can confirm that an installation error has occurred, such as a replaceable member not being securely installed. This can be recognized reliably and easily. In addition, after the setting confirmation notification ends, the power recovery notification is executed as described above, so if the installation error has not been resolved, the upper decorative part non-installation error notification will be executed with priority ( (See FIG. 15-1(B).), the operator can reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error, such as a replaceable member not being securely mounted, has occurred. Although the relationship between the setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been described here, the same applies to other installation error notifications (installation error notification in the upper unit 180, etc.). Good too. Note that while the setting change notification and setting confirmation notification are being executed, the game is in a setting change mode, etc., and a setting change process is being executed, so the game cannot be played.

[Relationship between door open error notification and installation error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-4(A), for example, when the glass frame 150 or the like is opened due to a jam of game balls during a game such as when special symbols are changing or during a round game (door open switch 312 is ON) ), the effect control board 320 executes door opening error notification in order to make the user recognize that the glass frame 150 etc. are being opened. In the door open error notification, the door open display 2084 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the pending icon display area, and the icon display area. The door open display 2084 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "Door is open" indicating that the glass frame 150 etc. are being opened. be done. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) indicates that the glass frame 150, etc. is open, such as "The door is open" (this may be a door open notification sound such as a buzzer sound). Audio etc. are output. Furthermore, in the door open error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) blinks, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) blinks. The lights are off. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is blinking. Note that the door open error notification is continuously executed until the open glass frame 150 and the like are closed (the door open switch 312 is turned off). Further, the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 may emit light in a predetermined color or blink at a predetermined interval, such as a door opening mode corresponding to a door opening error notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-4(B), for example, when the door is opened, if the upper accessory unit 154 is touched and it is determined that the upper accessory decoration part 600 is not properly attached, a door opening error notification is issued. Even though it is during the period in which the upper decorative part is not installed error notification is executed with priority. Note that the manner of notifying the error that the upper decoration part is not attached is the same as described above, and therefore detailed explanation will be omitted. At this time, the display mode on the main display device 131, the output mode on the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), the light emission mode on the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 In the operation mode, the mode for notifying the error that the upper decoration part is not attached is preferentially executed. For example, if the error is resolved by attaching the decorative part 600 normally while the door is open, the above-mentioned door open error notification (Figure 15-4 (A)) to move to. In other words, the superior article non-installation error notification has a higher priority than the door opening error notification. Although the relationship between the door opening error notification and the upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been explained here, the door opening error notification and other installation error notifications (such as installation error notification in the upper unit 180) have the same priority. You can also do this. In this way, when installation error notifications such as upper decorative part not installed error notifications are given priority over door open error notifications, the operator can detect installation errors such as replaceable parts not being securely installed. It is possible to reliably and easily recognize what is occurring.

Furthermore, on the other hand, the door opening error notification may be performed with priority over the installation error notification such as the upper decoration part non-installation error notification. Specifically, during the period when the installation error notification can be executed, the door open error notification (FIG. 15-4 (A)) is executed with priority, and after the end of the period, the installation error notification (for example, FIG. -4(B) etc.) may be executed. Even if the door open error notification is given priority over the installation error notification in this way, the operator can easily and reliably confirm that an installation error has occurred, such as a replaceable member not being securely installed. can be recognized. Furthermore, even if the installation error notification is performed with priority over the door open error notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the panel lamp In this case, the process may be executed in a manner corresponding to the door opening error notification. On the other hand, even if the door opening error notification is executed with priority over the installation error notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the panel lamp is executed. In one case, it may be executed in a manner corresponding to a mounting error notification. In this manner, the operator can easily recognize that the power is being restored and that a mounting error has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 15-4(C), for example, as described above, if it is determined that the superior decoration part 600 is not properly attached during the door opening error notification, the main display device 131 displays the door A mounting error display 2020a may be displayed together with the door open display 2084 to notify of an opening error, as well as a mounting error display 2020a to notify of an error in which the upper decorative part is not mounted. At this time, the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit 180, etc., is the mode of door open error notification. may be executed preferentially, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform the initial operation or the like. In other words, the door open error notification may have a higher priority than the superior article non-installation error notification. For example, if the error is resolved because the superior accessory decoration part 600 is normally attached during the period when the door opening error notification is being executed, the attachment error display 2020a on the main display device 131 is disabled. It may also be displayed. Although the relationship between the door opening error notification and the upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been explained here, the door opening error notification and other installation error notifications (installation error notification in the upper unit 180, etc.) have the same priority. You can also do this. In this way, even if a door opening error is being notified, if at least a part of the installation error notification, such as the top decoration part not installed error notification, is executed, the operator may be notified that a replaceable member is not securely installed, etc. It is possible to reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that the glass frame 150 or the like is being opened.

[Relationship between magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and attachment error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-5(A), for example, if abnormal magnetism from outside the gaming machine is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 305a, or if the magnetic detection sensor 305a is unconnected or incorrectly connected, etc. When an abnormality is detected, the production control board 320 executes magnetic error notification to make the user recognize that a magnetic error has occurred. In the magnetic error notification, the main display device 131 displays a full-sized magnetic error display 2085a consisting of characters such as "Magnetic Sensor Error" indicating that a magnetic error is occurring. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound indicating that a magnetic error is occurring, such as "Magnetic error" (for example, it may be a magnetic error notification sound such as a buzzer). is output. Furthermore, in the magnetic error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) is blinking, but the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 342 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) is blinking. ) is off. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. Note that the magnetic error notification continues until the power is turned off. In addition, in the case of magnetic error notification when the magnetic detection switch 305a is not connected, etc., the magnetic error notification may be terminated by normally connecting the magnetic detection switch 305a, but even if the magnetic detection switch 305a is connected normally, the magnetic error notification is For example, the magnetic error notification may be continuously executed for 5 seconds). Furthermore, in the magnetic error notification, the magnetic error display 2085a covers all of the decorative patterns, etc., so the decorative patterns, etc. were not visible, but the magnetic error display 2085a covers at least a part of the decorative patterns, etc. In such a manner, at least a part of the decorative pattern etc. may be made visible. While the magnetic error notification is in progress, the operation sound of the sword handle unit 135 etc. (production button), the sound effect of the pending change when winning a prize, and the frame lamp, board lamp, etc. during normal gaming are heard. Light emission may be limited. In addition, when a magnetic error occurs during a game, for example, the upper accessory unit 154 etc. which is in the middle of a movable presentation may be stopped or continued, but the main display device 131 may display a completely black screen. It may also be displayed. Furthermore, the frame lamp and panel lamp may flash in a predetermined color or at a predetermined interval such as a magnetic error mode corresponding to a magnetic error notification, or may emit light in a light emission mode such as the various mounting error notifications described above. may be the same as Furthermore, the timing of the output of audio etc. in the audio output device 331 may be a predetermined timing such as a magnetic error mode corresponding to a magnetic error notification, or may be the same as the timing of various mounting error notifications etc. described above. There may be.

As shown in FIG. 15-5(B), the above-described magnetic error notification may be executed and terminated at a predetermined timing. For example, when the magnetic detection sensor 305a detects magnetism for a period of 500 ms (the magnetic detection signal is detected for 500 ms) and the production control board 130 receives an error system designation command corresponding to the magnetic error (t0), the main display device 131 The magnetic error display 2085a starts outputting the magnetic error display 2085a, the audio output device 331 starts outputting the voice "Magnetic error" and a siren sound, turns off the panel lamp, and causes the frame lamp to blink red (250ms). It is also possible to perform a mode of repeating on and off at intervals). In addition, during the period (t0 to t1) from when the production control board 130 receives the error system designation command corresponding to the magnetic error until 0.4 seconds have elapsed, the game information output terminal board 309 outputs ON for 200ms. However, the output may be repeatedly turned off for 200 ms thereafter. Then, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the production control board 130 received the error system designation command corresponding to the magnetic error (t2), the output of the magnetic error display 2085a on the main display device 131 is ended, and the output of the magnetic error display 2085a is finished on the audio output device. The output of the voice and siren sound saying "Magnetic error" at 331 may be terminated, the red flashing of the frame lamp may be terminated, and the magnetic error notification may be terminated. Note that in this magnetic error notification as well, the notification may be continued for a predetermined period even if the error is resolved, similar to the above-mentioned upper decoration part not attached error notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-5(C), when an abnormal radio wave from outside the gaming machine is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 305b during a game, or an abnormality such as disconnection or incorrect connection in the radio wave detection sensor 305b occurs. If detected, the production control board 320 executes a radio wave error notification in order to make the user aware that a radio wave error has occurred. In the radio wave error notification, the main display device 131 displays a full-sized radio wave error display 2085b consisting of characters such as "Radio wave sensor error" indicating that a radio wave error is occurring. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound indicating that a radio wave error is occurring, such as "Radio wave error" (for example, it may be a radio wave error notification sound such as a buzzer sound). is output. Furthermore, in the radio wave error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) is blinking, but the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 342 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) is blinking. ) is off. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. Note that the radio wave error notification continues until the power is turned off. Furthermore, in the case of radio wave error notification when the radio wave detection switch 305b is not connected, etc., the radio wave error notification may be terminated by normally connecting the radio wave detection switch 305b. For example, the radio wave error notification may be continuously executed for 5 seconds). Furthermore, in the radio wave error notification, the radio wave error display 2085b covers all the decorative patterns, etc., so the decorative patterns, etc. were not visible, but the radio wave error display 2085b covers at least a part of the decorative patterns, etc. In such a manner, at least a part of the decorative pattern etc. may be made visible. During the execution of the radio wave error notification, the operation sound of the sword handle unit 135 etc. (production button), the sound effect of the pending change when winning a prize, and the frame lamp and board lamp etc. in the mode during normal gaming are heard. Light emission may be limited. In addition, when a radio wave error occurs during a game, for example, the upper part unit 154 etc. which is in the middle of a movable presentation may be stopped or continued, but the main display device 131 may display a completely black screen. It may also be displayed. Furthermore, the frame lamp and panel lamp may flash in a predetermined color or at a predetermined interval such as a radio wave error mode corresponding to a radio wave error notification, or may emit light in a light emission mode such as the various mounting error notifications described above. may be the same as Furthermore, the timing of the output of audio etc. in the audio output device 331 may be a predetermined timing such as a radio wave error mode corresponding to a radio wave error notification, or may be the same as the timing of various mounting error notifications etc. described above. There may be.

Here, for example, even if it is determined that the upper ornamental part 600 is not properly attached due to a malfunction of the upper ornamental unit 154 due to aging while a magnetic error or a radio wave error occurs, the upper ornamental part is not attached. A mounting error notification such as an error notification is not performed, but a mounting error notification is performed after a magnetic error notification or a radio wave error notification is performed. In other words, since abnormalities related to the magnetic detection switch 305a and radio wave detection switch 305b, such as magnetic errors and radio wave errors, are more serious errors than attachment errors, magnetic error notifications and radio wave error notifications are more important than attachment error notifications. The priority is high. Note that while the magnetic error notification and the radio wave error notification are being executed, a serious error such as a magnetic error is occurring, so the game cannot be played.

As shown in FIG. 15-5(D), if a radio wave error occurs while a magnetic error occurs, the main display device 131 displays a magnetic error display 2085c and a radio wave error display 2085d. good. Specifically, while only a magnetic error is occurring, only the magnetic error notification (Figure 15-5 (A)) is executed, and if a radio wave error occurs while a magnetic error is occurring, the magnetic error display 2085c and the radio wave error display are displayed. 2085d is displayed. At this time, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) alternately outputs two types of audio: "Magnetic error" and "Radio wave error." Further, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.) is blinking, but the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.) is off. There is. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. Note that if a magnetic error occurs while a radio wave error is occurring, the radio wave error notification mode changes to a mode in which a magnetic error display 2085c and a radio wave error display 2085d are displayed. In other words, since magnetic errors and radio errors are both serious errors, the priority of magnetic error notification and radio error notification is almost the same, and the error notification corresponding to the error that occurred first is given first. It will be executed. With such a notification mode, even if two or more serious errors occur, the player or game manager can reliably and easily recognize the occurrence of two or more serious errors. Note that abnormalities such as disconnection or incorrect connection in the magnetic detection sensor 305a and the radio wave detection sensor 305b include, for example, specifically, when the terminal on the main control board 300 is connected to the magnetic detection sensor 305a. At the same time, the magnetic detection sensor 305a may be connected to a terminal to which the radio wave detection sensor 305b would normally be connected.

Furthermore, since magnetic errors are more serious than radio errors, magnetic error notifications may be given higher priority than radio error notifications. Specifically, if a magnetic error occurs while a radio error occurs, execution of the radio error notification may be stopped and only the magnetic error notification may be executed. Also, at this time, although the main display device 131 is in such a mode that the magnetic error display 2085c and the radio wave error display 2085d are displayed, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) makes a sound such as "Magnetic error". etc. may be output. In this manner, the player and game manager can reliably and easily recognize the occurrence of a more serious error.

In addition, while the magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification is being executed, the error notification is executed on the main display device 131 etc., and the symbol holding display 119, 123, 124 (sub holding display that displays the presence or absence of holding, etc.) (not shown)) can also be set not to be displayed. Further, when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the performance that has been put on hold may be executed as a normal game without issuing an error notification. Furthermore, on the other hand, in a state where a magnetic error or a radio wave error is detected, the symbol retention display 119, 123, 124 (sub-retention display (not shown) that displays the presence or absence of reservation, etc.) continues to display the symbol retention. It may be made executable. Even if the power is turned off during execution of magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification and then restored, the main display device 131, audio output device 331, frame lamp, panel lamp, etc. Error notification may also be executed. Further, if reset recovery is performed while the error notification is being executed, normal recovery may be performed.

[Relationship between switch connection error notification and installation error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-6(A), for example, when an abnormality such as disconnection or incorrect connection is detected in any of the various switches such as the gate detection switch 303, the production control board 320 A switch connection error notification is executed to make the user aware that one of the devices is abnormal. In the switch connection error notification, a switch error display 2086 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the pending icon display area, and the icon display area. The switch error display 2086 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and includes the words "Switch Abnormality" indicating that an abnormality is occurring in one of the various switches. Is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) indicates that an abnormality is occurring in one of the various switches such as "Switch error" (for example, a switch error notification sound such as a buzzer sound may be used). A sound etc. that suggests this is output is output. Furthermore, in the switch connection error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is turned off, and the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. It's blinking. The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. Note that the switch connection error notification is continuously executed until the abnormality of the switch in which the abnormality has been detected is resolved (the abnormality of all switches is resolved). Further, the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined color or at predetermined intervals, such as in a switch connection error mode corresponding to switch connection error notification. Further, while the switch connection error notification is being executed, an abnormality is occurring in one of the various switches, and therefore the game cannot be played normally.

As shown in FIG. 15-6(B), the above-described switch connection error notification may be executed and terminated at a predetermined timing. For example, due to disconnection of various switches (when the magnetic detection sensor 305a is turned on for 1 second), 100 ms has passed since the production control board 130 received an error system designation command corresponding to the switch connection error (t0). At time (t1), the main display device 131 starts outputting the switch error display 2086, the audio output device 331 starts outputting a repeating sound of "Switch error" and a siren sound for 5 seconds, and the board The lamp may be turned off and the frame lamp may blink red (a mode in which it repeats on and off at intervals of 250 ms). Then, when the disconnections of the various switches are resolved and the production control board 130 receives the error system termination designation command corresponding to the switch connection error (t2), the main display device 131 outputs the switch connection error display 2086. , the audio output device 331 outputs the repeated sound of "Switch error" and a 5-second siren sound, the frame lamp stops blinking red, and the switch connection error notification ends. You can also do this.

As shown in FIG. 15-6(C), for example, when replacing the performance control board 320, etc., one of the various switches may be connected incorrectly, and the upper accessory unit 154 may be touched, resulting in the upper accessory unit being damaged. If it is determined that the decorative part 600 is not normally attached, the main display device 131 displays a switch error display 2086 to notify of a switch connection error and a mounting error display 2020a to notify of an upper decorative part not attached error. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820 etc.) which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit, upper unit 180, etc., for example, switch connection The error notification mode may be preferentially executed, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform initial operations or the like. In other words, the switch connection error notification has a higher priority than the superior article non-installation error notification. For example, if only the error is resolved because the superior accessory decoration part 600 is normally attached during the period when the switch connection error notification is being executed, the attachment error display 2020a on the main display device 131 is displayed. It will be hidden. Although the relationship between the switch connection error notification and the upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been described here, the same aspect applies to the switch connection error notification and other installation error notifications (such as installation error notification in the upper unit 180) priority). In this way, even if a switch connection error is being reported, if at least a part of the installation error notification, such as the top decoration part not installed error notification, is executed, the operator may be notified that a replaceable member is not securely installed, etc. It is possible to reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that an abnormality is occurring in one of the various switches. On the other hand, similarly to the case where the power recovery notification is given priority over the installation error notification as described above, the installation error notification may be performed after the switch connection error notification.

As mentioned above, when various switches are not connected, the above-mentioned switch connection error notification is executed, but depending on the type of switch that is not connected, the error notification is The modes and priorities may be set differently. For example, a switch connection error notification when the magnetic detection sensor 305a and the radio wave detection sensor 305b are not connected has a higher priority than a switch connection error notification when other switches are not connected. It may be set so that In addition, when the reflective sensors 680a to 680d and the reflective sensors 780a to 780d are not connected to the main control board 300 or the production control board 320, error notification is performed in the same manner as the switch connection error notification described above. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the above-mentioned switch connection error notification is a mode when various switches are disconnected during the game, but the same mode also applies when various switches are disconnected when the power is turned on. Connection error notification may be executed. Timings at which the various switches become disconnected include during the execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance, during the execution of various performances such as the SP reach performance including the operation of movable accessories, during the execution of the jackpot performance, etc. Even if various switches become disconnected at such timing, the switch error display 2086 is displayed on the main display device 131 and the audio output device 331 is displayed in the same manner as the switch connection error notification described above. It may also be possible to perform output, etc. On the other hand, if the main control board 300 and the production control board 320 are not connected, or if the main display device 131 and the main control board 300 or the production control board 320 are not connected, the main control board 300 If the and game information output terminal board 309 are not connected, or if the payout control board 310 and the main control board 300 are not connected, the payout control board 310 or the main control board 300 and the ball lending machine If the switch becomes disconnected, etc., the above-mentioned switch disconnection error notification may not be executed.

[Relationship between vibration error notification, etc. and attachment error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-7(A), for example, when abnormal vibrations from the outside of the gaming machine are detected by the vibration detection sensor 305c during a game, the performance control board 320 detects that abnormal vibrations are occurring. A vibration error notification is executed to make the user aware of the error. Specifically, in the vibration error notification, an "abnormal vibration error" is displayed on the main display device 131 in a size that covers most of the table decoration pattern along with the decoration pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. A vibration error display 2087a consisting of characters such as "." is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) indicates that abnormal vibration is occurring, such as "Abnormal vibration error" (for example, it may be a vibration error notification sound such as an alarm sound). Audio etc. are output. Furthermore, in the vibration error notification, the frame lamp blinks, the board lamp is off, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 The lights are off. Note that the vibration error notification may be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after abnormal vibration is detected, and the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 are configured to perform vibration error notification. It is also possible to perform lighting or blinking in a predetermined luminescent color or at predetermined intervals, such as a corresponding vibration error mode. It should be noted that while the vibration error notification is being executed, it is possible to proceed with the game, but due to the occurrence of abnormal vibrations, the proceeding of the game may become impossible for a predetermined period of time. For example, it is detected that abnormal vibrations are occurring, and it is determined that the upper accessory decoration part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154 has shifted due to the abnormal vibration and is not properly attached. In this case, the main display device 131 displays a vibration error display 2087a as well as a mounting error display 2020a informing you of an error that the upper decorative part is not mounted. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit, upper unit 180, etc., for example, a vibration error occurs. The notification mode may be preferentially executed, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform the initial operation or the like. In other words, the vibration error notification has a higher priority than the superior article non-installation error notification. For example, when the attachment error display 2020a is displayed together with the vibration error display 2087a on the main display device 131, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the vibration error notification is stopped and the upper decoration part is not attached. Error notification may also be executed. Note that although the relationship between the vibration error notification and the upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been described here, the vibration error notification and other installation error notifications (installation error notification in the upper unit 180, etc.) also have a similar aspect (priority level). ). In this way, even when a vibration error is being reported, if at least a part of the installation error notification, such as the top decoration part not installed error notification, is executed, the operator will be notified that a replaceable member has not been properly installed, etc. It is possible to reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that abnormal vibrations are occurring. On the other hand, similarly to the case where the power recovery notification is given priority over the installation error notification as described above, the installation error notification may be performed after the vibration error notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-7(B), for example, if a winning is detected by the first winning device detection switch 306a etc. when the special game is not in progress due to a malfunction of the first big winning device 117 etc. due to aging, the production The control board 320 executes abnormal winning notification in order to make the player recognize that an abnormal winning has occurred. Specifically, in the abnormal winning notification, an "abnormal winning error" is displayed on the main display device 131 in a size that covers most of the front decorative pattern along with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. An abnormal winning display 2087b consisting of characters such as . In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred, such as "Abnormal winning error" (for example, it may be an abnormal winning notification sound such as an alarm sound). is output. Furthermore, in the abnormal winning notification, the frame lamp is blinking, the board lamp is off, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is The lights are off. The abnormal winning notification may be executed until the power is turned off, and the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 may emit light in a predetermined color or in a certain abnormal winning mode corresponding to the abnormal winning notification. It is also possible to turn on or blink at intervals of . Further, while the abnormal winning prize notification is being executed, the game can be continued, but since an abnormal winning has occurred, the game may not be able to proceed for a predetermined period of time. For example, if an abnormal winning is detected and it is determined that the upper accessory decorative part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154 is not properly attached due to a malfunction due to aging, an abnormal winning is displayed on the main display device 131. Along with 2087b, a mounting error display 2020a to notify an error that the upper decorative part is not mounted is displayed. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit, upper unit 180, etc., for example, abnormal winnings The notification mode may be preferentially executed, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform the initial operation or the like. In other words, the abnormal winning prize notification has a higher priority than the superior item non-installation error notification. For example, when the attachment error display 2020a is displayed together with the abnormal prize display 2087b on the main display device 131, if the power is restored but the problem with the upper accessory unit 154 is not resolved, the abnormal prize notification is stopped. Then, the upper decoration part non-installation error notification may be executed. Although the relationship between the abnormal winning notification and the upper decoration part not installed error notification has been explained here, the abnormal winning notification and other installation error notifications (installation error notification in the upper unit 180, etc.) are similar (priority level). ). In this way, even when an abnormal prize is being notified, if at least a part of the installation error notification, such as the top decoration part not installed error notification, is executed, the operator will be able to confirm that the replaceable member is not properly installed, etc. It is possible to surely and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that an abnormal winning has occurred. On the other hand, similarly to the case where the power recovery notification is executed preferentially over the installation error notification as described above, the installation error notification may be executed after the abnormal winning notification.

As shown in Figure 15-7 (C), for example, due to a malfunction due to aging in the winning ball flow path, etc., the number of game balls that have entered the various winning holes and the number of game balls that are discharged from the winning ball flow path that allows the winning balls to flow down. If the numbers do not match, the performance control board 320 executes a discharge error notification in order to make it aware that abnormal discharge of game balls has occurred. Specifically, in the ejection error notification, a message such as "ejection error" is displayed on the main display device 131 in a size that covers most of the table decoration pattern along with the decoration pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. A discharge error display 2087c consisting of characters is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) indicates that abnormal ejection of game balls has occurred, such as "Ejection error" (for example, it may be an ejection error notification sound such as an alarm sound). Audio etc. are output. Furthermore, in the discharge error notification, the frame lamp blinks, the board lamp is off, the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 do not perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 The lights are off. Note that the ejection error notification may be executed until the power is turned off, and the frame lamp, panel lamp, and upper unit 180 emit light in a predetermined color or in a predetermined ejection error mode corresponding to the ejection error notification. It is also possible to turn on or blink at intervals of . Further, while the ejection error notification is being executed, abnormal ejection of game balls has occurred, so the game cannot be played. For example, it is detected that the game ball is abnormally ejected due to a malfunction caused by aging, and it is determined that the upper accessory decoration part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154 is not properly attached due to a malfunction caused by aging. In this case, the main display device 131 displays a mounting error display 2020a to notify an error that the upper decorative part is not mounted together with the ejection error display 2087c. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit, upper unit 180, etc., for example, an ejection error occurs. The notification mode may be preferentially executed, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform the initial operation or the like. In other words, the discharge error notification has a higher priority than the superior article non-installation error notification. For example, when the attachment error display 2020a is displayed together with the ejection error display 2087c on the main display device 131, if the power is restored but the problem with the upper accessory unit 154 is not resolved, the ejection error notification is stopped. Then, the upper decoration part non-installation error notification may be executed. Although the relationship between the ejection error notification and the upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been explained here, the same manner (priority ). In this way, even when an ejection error is being reported, if at least a part of the installation error notification such as the upper decoration part not installed error notification is executed, the operator will be able to confirm that the replaceable member is not properly installed, etc. To surely and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that abnormal ejection of game balls has occurred. On the other hand, similarly to the case where the power recovery notification is given priority over the installation error notification as described above, the installation error notification may be performed after the ejection error notification.

[Relationship between plate full error notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-8(A), for example, when the full detection switch 314 detects that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls, the production control board 320 A tray full error notification is executed to urge the player to remove game balls from the tray 128. In the plate full error notification, the plate full display 2088 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the pending icon display area, and the icon display area. The tray full display 2088 is displayed in a size that covers at least a part of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays the words "Please remove the ball" to urge the player to remove the game ball from the upper tray 128. Ru. Further, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a voice or the like that urges the player to remove the game ball from the upper tray 128, such as "Please remove the ball." Furthermore, in the tray full error notification, the frame lamp (the presentation frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.), the board lamp (the presentation board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102 etc.), the upper accessory The unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the upper unit 180 are capable of performing effects in light emitting modes and operating modes depending on the gaming state at that time. Note that the tray full error notification is continuously executed until the game balls are removed from the upper tray 128 and the full state is detected based on the detection by the full detection switch 314. Further, the frame lamp, the panel lamp, and the upper unit 180 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined color or at a predetermined interval, such as a plate full error mode corresponding to a plate full error notification. Further, while the tray full error notification is being executed, although the game is possible, the payout of game balls such as prize balls is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 15-8(B), for example, it is detected that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls, and the upper accessory decoration part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154 is damaged due to a malfunction due to aging. If it is determined that the upper decorative part is not attached normally, the main display device 131 displays a plate full display 2088 to notify the plate full error and a mounting error display 2020a to notify the upper decorative part not attached error. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820 etc.) which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit, upper unit 180, etc., for example, the upper decoration The mode of notifying the part not installed error may be preferentially executed, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform initial operation or the like. In other words, the superior item not installed error notification has a higher priority than the plate full error notification. For example, if it is detected that the full state of the upper plate 128 is resolved during the period in which the upper decoration part not installed error notification is being executed, the full plate display 2088 on the main display device 131 is not displayed. becomes. Although the relationship between the plate full error notification and the upper decorative part not installed error notification has been explained here, the same aspect (priority degree). In this way, if at least a part of the plate full error notification is executed even during installation error notification such as upper decoration part not installed error notification, the operator or player can be sure that the replaceable member is not installed. It is possible to reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred, such as not being properly loaded, and that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls. At this time, in addition to displaying the plate full display 2088 on the main display device 131, a voice prompting the user to remove the game ball from the upper tray 128 such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed on the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.). etc. may be output. In this manner, the player can more reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls.

[Relationship between left-handed player notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-9(A), for example, if it is detected that the game ball has passed the right route 106b during the non-probability variable gaming state, the performance control board 320 A left-handed hit notification is executed to encourage left-handed hitting so that the game ball passes along the route 106a. In the left-handed hitting notification, the left-handed hitting display 2089 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the pending icon display area, and the icon display area. The left-handed batting display 2089 is displayed in a size that covers at least a portion of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "left-handed batting←" to encourage left-handed batting. Further, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound that urges the player to change from right-handed to left-handed batting, such as "Please return to left-handed batting." Furthermore, in the left-handed play notification, a frame lamp (a presentation frame illumination device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 etc.), a board lamp (a presentation board illumination device 341 provided on a game board unit 102 etc.), an upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the upper unit 180 are capable of performing effects in light emitting modes and operating modes depending on the gaming state at that time. Note that the left-handed hit notification is continuously executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the passage of the game ball on the right side route 106b is detected. Further, the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit 180 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined color or at predetermined intervals, such as in a left-handed manner corresponding to left-handed hitting notification. Further, while the left-handed hit notification is being executed, normal games can be played.

As shown in FIG. 15-9(B), for example, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the right route 106b during a non-probability variable gaming state, and the upper accessory unit 154 is damaged due to a malfunction due to aging. If it is determined that the upper decorative part 600 is not normally attached, the main display device 131 displays a left-handed hit display 2089 to notify the left-handed hit and an attachment error display 2020a to notify the upper decorative part not attached error. . At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820 etc.) which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, panel lamp, upper unit, upper unit 180, etc., for example, the upper decoration The mode of notifying the part not installed error may be preferentially executed, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform initial operation or the like. In other words, the superior item non-installation error notification has a higher priority than the left-handed hitting notification. Then, for example, if a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed during the period in which the upper decoration part non-installation error notification is being executed, the left-handed hit display 2089 on the main display device 131 is hidden. Although the relationship between left-handed notification and upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been explained here, the same manner (priority ). In this way, if at least a part of the left-handed hit notification is executed even during installation error notification such as upper decorative part uninstallation error notification, the operator or player will be able to confirm that the replaceable member is securely installed. It is possible to reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred, such as not playing the game, and that the player is playing right-handed despite being in a non-probability variable gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 15-9(C), for example, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the right route 106b during a non-probability variable gaming state, and the upper accessory unit 154 is damaged due to a malfunction due to aging. If it is determined that the superior accessory decoration part 600 is not properly attached, the main display device 131 displays the left-handed batting display 2089 as well as the left-handed batting notification 2089, as well as the left-handed batting display 2089, similar to the state described in FIG. A mounting error display 2020a is displayed to inform you of a decorative part not being mounted error. However, at this time, unlike the mode explained in FIG. 15-9(B), the output mode of the audio output device 331, which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp and panel lamp, etc. For example, the left-handed hit notification mode may be preferentially executed, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not perform initial operation or the like. For example, if a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed during the period in which the upper decoration part non-installation error notification is being executed, and if the installation error has not been resolved, the left side of the main display device 131 The typing display 2089 may be hidden, and the output mode of the audio output device 331, the light emission mode of the frame lamp and the board lamp, etc. may be set to the top not installed error mode. In other words, the left-handed player notification may have a higher priority than the superior item non-installation error notification. Although the relationship between the left-handed notification and the upper decorative part non-installation error notification has been explained here, the same manner (priority ). In this manner, the player can more reliably and easily recognize that a mounting error has occurred and that he/she is playing right-handed despite being in a non-probability variable gaming state. Can be done.

[Explanation of output priorities for various notifications, etc.]
With reference to FIGS. 15-10, an example of the output priority of the various notifications and mounting error notifications described above will be described. FIG. 15-10 is a diagram explaining the output priority of various notifications, etc., and (A) is a diagram explaining the output priority of the frame lamp/board lamp in various notifications, etc. B) is a diagram illustrating output priorities in the audio output device for various notifications, etc.;

As shown in Figure 15-10 (A), the output priority of the frame lamp/panel lamp for various notifications, etc. is set, for example, by dividing the various notifications into three groups with different priorities. may have been done. For example, notifications of "priority 1", which has the highest priority, include upper unit incorrect installation error notification, upper decoration part not installed error notification, upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, and lower decoration There may also be an incorrect attachment error notification. Further, the next highest priority "Priority 2" notification may include a power recovery notification, a RAM clear notification, a setting change notification, and a setting confirmation notification. The notifications of "Priority 3", which has the lowest priority, include upper unit not installed error notification, door open error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, switch connection error notification, vibration error notification, abnormal winning notification, There may also be a discharge error notification and a plate full error notification. For example, in the case where various notifications are executed overlappingly with such priority, the frame lamp/board lamp may be immediately executed in a mode of notification with a high priority. In addition, with such priority, for example, if notifications with the same priority are executed twice, the mode of the notification that is executed first will be executed with priority in the frame lamp/board lamp. It's okay. Furthermore, for example, if notifications with different priorities are executed overlappingly, and when the high-priority notification ends and the low-priority notification is being executed, the frame lamp/board lamp , a new notification with a lower priority may be started. Furthermore, in this priority, notifications corresponding to various events may be included in addition to the above-mentioned notifications, for example, the upper unit 180, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, the accessory mechanism part The notification regarding the operation error in 158 may be set as "Priority 8". When various notifications, etc. are output with such priority, notifications regarding important errors, etc. that may hinder the progress of the game are given priority, so game machine administrators etc. It is possible to more accurately understand the occurrence of

As shown in FIG. 15-10(B), the output priority of the audio output device 331 for various notifications etc. may be set such that, for example, various notifications etc. have different priorities. good. For example, the highest priority "priority 1" notification is a RAM clear notification, the next highest priority "priority 2" notification is a power restoration notification, and the next highest priority notification is a "priority 2" notification. The notification with the highest "priority level 3" may be the upper unit erroneous attachment error notification, and the notification with the next highest priority level, "priority level 4", may be set to be the abnormal prize notification. In addition, the next highest priority "Priority 5" notification is a magnetic error notification, the next highest priority "Priority 6" notification is an ejection error notification, and the next highest priority The notification with "priority 7", which has the highest priority, may be a door open error notification, and the notification with "priority 8," which has the next highest priority, may be a switch connection error notification. For example, when various notifications are executed overlappingly with such priority, the audio output device 331 may immediately execute the notification with a high priority. In addition, with such priority, for example, when the same notification is executed repeatedly, the audio output device 331 is configured to immediately execute a new notification in the middle of the notification that has been executed previously. You can also do this. Furthermore, for example, if notifications with different priorities are executed overlappingly, and when the notification with the higher priority ends and the notification with the lower priority is being executed, the audio output device 331 , a new notification with a lower priority may be started. Note that if the output on the display device 131 for a notification with a high priority continues after the output on the audio output device 331 for a notification with a high priority is finished, the output on the audio output device 331 for a new notification continues. Output may not start. Furthermore, after the output from the audio output device 331, the system may be restored with a new predetermined command or may be restored to the state before the notification. Furthermore, in this priority, notifications corresponding to various events may be included in addition to the above-mentioned notifications, for example, the upper unit 180, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, the accessory mechanism part The notification regarding the operation error in 158 may be set as "Priority 8". When various notifications, etc. are output with such priority, notifications regarding important errors, etc. that may hinder the progress of the game are given priority, so game machine administrators etc. It is possible to more accurately understand the occurrence of

[Explanation of output modes on the main display device for various notifications, etc.]
With reference to FIGS. 15-11, an example of the manner in which the above-described various notifications and attachment error notifications are output on the main display device 131 will be described. 15-11 is a diagram illustrating the output mode of the main display device 131 for various notifications, etc., and (A) is a diagram illustrating the output mode of the main display device 131 for various notifications, (B) is a diagram illustrating an output mode on the main display device 131 when notifying a mounting error.

As shown in FIG. 15-11(A), for example, each display consisting of characters displayed on the main display device 131 in various notifications does not overlap with each other even if the notifications overlap. It may also be output to the location. Further, these displays may be output so as not to cover all of the various patterns such as decorative patterns displayed on the main display device 131. Further, these displays may be output with a transparency of 25% so that various images displayed on the main display device 131 can be viewed. Specifically, at the top is a door open display 2084x that is output as a door open error notification, below that is a magnetic error display 2085ax that is output as a magnetic error notification, and below that is a radio error display 2085bx that is output as a radio error notification. , Below that is a switch error display 2086x that is output as a switch connection error notification, below that is a vibration error display 2087ax that is output as a vibration error notification, below that is an abnormal winning display 2087bx that is output as an abnormal winning notification, and below that is an abnormal winning display 2087bx that is output as an abnormal winning notification. A discharge error display 2087cx that is output as a discharge error notification may be provided, and a plate full display 2088x that is output as a plate full error notification below the discharge error display 2087cx. Note that although these displays are output to the main display device 131, they may be output to the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. Moreover, when performing a plurality of notifications, these displays may be made to be notified according to the priorities of the various notifications described above.

As shown in FIG. 15-11(B), for example, various mounting error displays displayed on the main display device 131 in response to various mounting error notifications may be displayed at positions that do not overlap, even if the notifications overlap. It may also be possible to have it output to . Further, these displays may be output so as not to cover all of the various patterns such as decorative patterns displayed on the main display device 131. Further, these displays may be output with a transparency of 25% so that various images displayed on the main display device 131 can be viewed. Specifically, at the top is a mounting error display 2020ax that is output when the upper decorative part is not installed error notification, below that is a mounting error display 2020bx that is output when the upper decorative part is incorrectly installed error notification, and below that is the lower decorative part not installed error display. A mounting error display 2030ax that is output when a mounting error is reported, below that a mounting error display 2030bx that is output when a lower decorative part is incorrectly mounted, and below that a mounting error display 2050ax that is output when an upper unit is not mounted error notice is displayed. A mounting error display 2050bx that is output as upper unit incorrect mounting error notification may be provided below. Although these displays are output to the main display device 131, they may be output to the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. Moreover, when performing a plurality of notifications, these displays may be made to be notified according to the priorities of the various notifications described above.

In addition, if another error occurs while the decoration error notification or various error notifications are being executed, a predetermined notification unit among the plurality of notification units (such as the main display device 131) that executes the decoration error notification etc. It may be possible to execute the error notifications corresponding to the errors in parallel, and a specific notification means may be able to give priority to the decoration error notifications and the like over the error notifications corresponding to other errors.
In addition, in the above description, a case has been described in which the decoration error notification by the predetermined notification means and the second abnormality notification by the specific notification means are executed in parallel. If a fraud is detected, the decorative patterns, small designs, numbers on hold, volume adjustment images, etc. that were displayed before the fraud may be hidden, and an error notification for the fraud may be given priority on the entire screen. . Also, while magnetic error notification or radio error notification is being performed, decorative patterns, background effects, digit hold, volume adjustment images, etc. are displayed on the main display device 131, and the main display device 131, audio output device 331, frame lamp, panel Magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification in the manner described above may be performed using a lamp.

[Description of gaming machine 200 of second embodiment]
Next, the configuration of a gaming machine 200 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-1 to 16-7. FIG. 16-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 200 of the second embodiment. FIG. 16-2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 200 showing the configuration of the gaming machine 200. FIG. 16-3 is a diagram showing functional blocks of the gaming machine 200. FIG. 16-4 is an overall schematic diagram of the management system in the gaming machine 200. FIG. 16-5 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 200 showing a state in which the glass frame 2150 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2160. 16-6 are back views of the gaming machine 200, (A) is a view with the back cover 2600 attached, and (B) is a view with the back cover 2600 removed. 16-7 are schematic diagrams of the decoration unit 2180, (A) is a perspective view of the decoration unit 2180, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the decoration unit 2180 in a removed state.

The gaming machine 200 is defined as a so-called managed gaming machine, and is composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board, and circulates a certain number of gaming balls within the machine itself. This is a gaming machine that does not require direct payouts to players. An IC card unit (hereinafter referred to as dedicated unit 2300) dedicated to managed gaming machines has the same functions as conventional IC card units, but also has a fraud monitoring function for gaming machines 200 and a function to display game ball information in an easy-to-understand manner to players. It is possible to play games by connecting to the Internet. Note that the game ball lending and return switch is provided in the dedicated unit 2300. In the following description of the gaming machine 200, detailed explanations of those having the same configuration as the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2, the gaming machine 200 includes a gaming board 2102, an outer frame 2160 serving as a gaming machine frame, a glass frame 2150 provided with a back mechanism section 2170 and a front decoration 2120, and an operation section. 2130 and a glass member 2151. The game board 2102 has a game area formed therein, and is provided with various movable accessories (not shown), a starting device, a winning device, a game board presentation LED, a main liquid crystal display 2327, etc. It is removably attached to the The back mechanism section 2170 is formed in a frame corresponding to the inner frame of the gaming machine frame, and includes a firing mechanism 2190, a game ball circulation mechanism 2380, a connection terminal board 2370, a frame control board 2340, and a power supply unit 2360, which will be described later. A ball polishing mechanism 2385, an iron ball detection mechanism 2650, and the like are provided. The glass frame 2150 is provided with a front decoration 2120, speakers 2132, 2133, and a decoration unit 2180 to be described later. The operation section 2130 is provided with a counting switch 2136, a game ball number display device 2125, a frame audio notification device 2131, a handle 2103, and a production switch unit 2135, which will be described later. The glass member 2151 is colorless and transparent, and is configured so that the position of the game ball on the game board 2102 can be confirmed without obstructing the view of the entire structure of the game board 2102.

As shown in FIG. 16-3, the gaming machine 200 includes a main control board 2310, an effect control board 2320, a firing control board 2350, and a power supply unit 2360, which have the same configuration as the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment. There is. The gaming machine 200 also includes a frame control board 2340 having a one-chip microcomputer including a frame control CPU, frame control ROM, and frame control RAM (not shown). Further, the frame control board 2340 includes an input port and an output port (both not shown) for control. This input port includes various detection switches similar to those in the game machine 100 of the first embodiment, a counting switch 2136 to be described later, a game ball circulation mechanism 2380, a connection terminal board 2370, a ball polishing mechanism 2385, a main control board 2310, and A launch control board 2350 is connected. In addition, the control output ports include a counting switch 2136, which will be described later, a game ball number display device 2125, a frame audio notification device 2131, a game ball circulation mechanism 2380, a connection terminal board 2370, a ball polishing mechanism 2385, and a main control board 2310. , and a launch control board 2350 are connected. Note that the connection terminal board 2370 is a board for outputting various information signals generated in the frame control board 2340 to a dedicated unit 2300, which will be described later. The output port of the main control board 2310 is connected to a frame control board 2340, an effect control board 2320, and a main display/winning display board 2315 for controlling a symbol display (not shown). The output port of the performance control board 2320 includes a frame performance LED board 2322 for controlling a plurality of LEDs provided on the front decoration 2120, and a frame performance LED board 2322 for controlling the movable accessories and LEDs (not shown) provided on the game board 2102. A game board presentation board 2325, a main liquid crystal display 2327, etc. are connected. A launch adjustment board 2355 for controlling the launch device, which will be described later, is connected to an output port of the launch control board 2350.

The performance display monitor 2345 is composed of a 7-segment LED mounted on the frame control board 2340, and displays performance data (number of game balls acquired per minute (base value), role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, etc.), game balls, etc. It displays the number (number of game balls acquired), the error code of the gaming machine 200 that has occurred, etc. Note that the performance data is data obtained by calculation by the frame control CPU on the frame control board 2340 based on information from the main CPU on the main control board 2310. In addition, the number of game balls (number of acquired game balls) is information obtained by being counted by the main CPU, and is displayed on the performance display monitor 2345 when the frame control CPU receives the information from the main CPU. This is information that makes it possible.

Note that the gaming machine 200 is a gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, but unlike the gaming machine 100, the upper tray 128 (see FIG. 1) is not provided, and the player can It is not possible to touch the game ball directly. The number of balls lent out from the dedicated unit 2300, the number of fired balls, the number of game balls acquired, etc. are electromagnetically recorded and managed by the CPU of the frame control board 2340, and displayed on the game ball number display device 2125. When the game ends, by pressing the counting switch 2136, the number of game balls managed by the gaming machine 200 is transmitted to the dedicated unit 2300, and the management is transferred. Note that the game balls used are non-magnetic ones. The minimum number of game balls necessary for firing in the game machine 200 alone is circulated within the main body, and a firing mechanism 2190, a ball polishing mechanism 2385, and a game ball circulation mechanism 2380 are provided in the middle of the circulation. Although the firing mechanism 2190 has the same firing performance as the game machine 100 of the first embodiment, it is provided in the back mechanism section 2170 so as to be located at the upper left of the game board 2102. In the ball polishing mechanism 2385, a polishing cloth for removing dirt from game balls is stored in a cassette, and this cassette is replaced at regular intervals. In gaming machine 200, performance information, gaming machine installation information, and fraud monitoring information are transmitted to dedicated unit 2300, and from dedicated unit 2300 to gaming machine information center 2450, which will be described later. Note that the information output to the hall computer 2402 is output from the dedicated unit 2300, and a commercial power source (100V) is used as the power source. The gaming machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300 are connected by a dedicated unit cable for communicating the number of game balls, etc., and communicate according to the frame control board-dedicated unit interface (hereinafter referred to as "dedicated PIF") protocol.

As shown in FIG. 16-4, the management system in the gaming machine 200 is a system in which a sales office 2400, a data center 2420, and a gaming machine information center 2450 mutually transmit and receive various data for management. The office 2400 has a plurality of gaming machines 200 and a dedicated unit 2300, as well as a hall computer 2402 and a management computer 2405 for managing the plurality of gaming machines 200 and the like. In the dedicated unit 2300, an SC board for transmitting confidential information such as performance information among the gaming machine information received from the gaming machine 200 to the gaming machine information center 2450 is incorporated in the unit control section, and the SC board and the gaming machine Encrypted communication is performed with the information center 2450, and decryption is not possible during the communication. Note that the various information output from the game information output terminal board 309 (see FIG. 3) in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment is received by the dedicated unit 2300 via the dedicated PIF, and is sent from the dedicated unit 2300. It is designed to output to the hall computer 2402, receives various gaming machine information from the gaming machine 200, performs counting management, and monitors gaming balls. The management computer 2405 is installed in the business office 2400 and connected to a data center 2420 outside the business office 2400, receives encrypted confidential information transmitted from the SC board, and transmits it to the data center 2420. It is something. The data center 2420 is configured to transmit the encrypted confidential information transmitted from the SC board to the game machine information center 2450 without any modification.

The gaming machine information center 2450 is an information center that centrally manages various information outside the office 2400, and includes a machine history server 2452, a fraud monitoring server 2453, a performance information server 2455, a player information server 2457, etc. ing. The machine history server 2452 is a server for managing information regarding the movement history of the gaming machines 200 installed at the business office 2400 and the gaming machines 200 reinstalled at the business office 2400 due to second-hand movement. In this way, the information regarding the movement history is grasped (monitored) until the game machine 200 is finally disposed of, so that the game machine 200 installed through a route different from the official distribution route can be detected and the final By identifying the owner, illegal dumping can be suppressed. Specifically, when installing a new game machine, the game machine manufacturer first requests the control chip supplier to purchase chips for the main board, and then the control chip supplier purchases each control chip sold to the game machine manufacturer. The chip manufacturing information (chip ID number, etc.) is registered in the machine history server 2452, and then the gaming machine manufacturer records the manufacturing information of the gaming board and frame, the manufacturing information of each control chip (chip ID number, etc.) at the time of shipping the gaming machine. ), shipping information such as delivery destination office information is registered, and when the game machine 200 shipped from the manufacturer is installed at the business office 2400 and the power is turned on, the game machine 200 is shipped via the dedicated unit 2300. The chip ID numbers of the main and frame control chips are automatically transmitted to the machine history server 2452, and the installation confirmation and installation period of the gaming machine 200 are managed. In addition, when a game machine 200 that has been confirmed to have been installed is removed during a second-hand move, the dedicated unit 2300 notifies the machine history server 2452 of a communication disconnection error, and if the game machine 200 is installed at a new office after the second-hand move, When this happens, the chip ID number and the like are sent to the device history server 2452 in the same way as described above, and the name of the office to which the device was moved is also updated, making it possible to confirm that the device has been moved to a used vehicle. Further, at the time of removal or disposal, when the gaming machine 200 removed from the business office 2400 is disposed of by a disposal company, the gaming machine manufacturer registers the disposal information in the machine history server 2452. Note that if the chip ID number of a gaming machine removed from the business office 2400 is not sent to the machine history server 2452 even after a certain period of time, the business office 2400 may store it in a warehouse or have a means to contact the gaming machine manufacturer. It is determined that the item has been disposed of by a processing company that does not exist, and it is possible to confirm whether the item has been stored in a warehouse or disposed of by checking with the final office 2400 where it was installed.

The fraud monitoring server 2453 is a server for receiving information such as performance information, player information, fraud monitoring information, and installation information of the gaming machine 200, and also receives encrypted communication between the gaming machine information center 2450 and the dedicated unit 2300. It generates communication keys and decrypts received information to achieve this. Further, it is also possible to determine fraud monitoring information and notify peripheral equipment including the hall computer 2402 via the dedicated unit 2300 in the business office 2400. The performance information server 2455 is a server that centrally manages performance information of each gaming machine 200 installed in the business office 2400. The player information server 2457 collects information on the declaration items listed in the declaration form from each gaming machine 200 installed at business offices nationwide, based on the declaration form from the self and his family regarding addiction measures. It is a server for managing games, and its purpose is to restrict games when a player reaches a declared limit (amount spent, number of games played, playing time, etc.). Specifically, a third-party organization received and aggregated player information such as amount spent, number of games played, playing time, membership card ID number, etc. from each dedicated unit 2300 installed at business offices nationwide. Based on the information, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the declared limit has been exceeded when the complainant enters the store and plays games, making it possible to implement gaming restrictions at business offices nationwide.

As shown in FIGS. 16-5 and 16-6, the firing device is a device that fires less than 100 game balls one ball per minute by driving a firing solenoid in the firing device, and the firing mechanism 2190, a handle 2103, etc., and has a touch detection function, a firing stop function, a firing strength adjustment function, a launch strength adjustment function, etc. In addition, the handle 2103 includes a firing stop button, firing stop switch, handle lever, touch sensor, handle volume, and ring (not shown), and the firing mechanism 2190 includes a valve, firing solenoid, firing pad, and pestle (not shown). has been done. Note that the game ball cannot be launched unless the player directly operates it. The touch detection function is a function that detects whether the player is touching the handle 2103 using a touch sensor. The firing stop function means that when a touch state is not detected, when the firing stop switch is pressed, when the game ball number display device 2125 is counting, when the game ball number is "0", When the firing stop signal is output from the main control board 2310, when the connection signal generated from the dedicated unit power supply of the dedicated unit 2300 is not output, and when an error that causes the firing to stop is detected, the game This is a function to stop the ball from being fired. The firing strength adjustment function is a function that adjusts the strength of the handle volume provided inside the handle 2103 by operating the handle 2103, and fires the game ball to an arbitrary position on the game board surface. The launch strength adjustment function is a function that adjusts the launch strength voltage when the handle lever is at the home position by adjusting the variable resistor mounted on the launch adjustment board 2355. Specifically, when the player operates the handle 2103, the firing solenoid can be activated, stopped, and the firing intensity can be changed, and when the firing stop button is operated, the game balls can be fired one by one. For example, when the player is touching the ring of the handle 2103, the touch sensor connected to the ring outputs a detection signal to the firing control board 2355, and when the firing control board 2355 detects this signal, it outputs a detection signal to the firing solenoid. It becomes possible to conduct electricity. Note that if the player is not touching the ring of the handle 2103, the firing solenoid cannot be energized regardless of the state of the handle 2103. Before the player turns the handle lever, the firing stop button is pressed and the firing stop switch is pressed down by the handle lever, and when the player turns the handle lever, the firing stop switch is released. , the detection voltage of the handle volume changes, and the strength of the current applied to the firing solenoid changes depending on the angle of rotation. As a result, the flight distance of the game ball changes, and the player can shoot the game ball to any position on the game board. Furthermore, if the touch sensor detects the player's operation, the handle volume is turned clockwise, and the firing stop switch is in the open state, the firing solenoid can be energized. Note that if the player presses the firing stop button during the game, the firing solenoid will not be energized regardless of the state of the handle 2103, the player will stop pressing the firing stop button, and the firing stop switch will be in the open state. When this happens, the firing solenoid can be energized. The firing mechanism 2190 can fire the game ball onto the game board when the firing solenoid can be energized by the firing permission signal from the main control board 2310 and the various states of the handle 2103 caused by direct operation by the player. Can be done. Further, when the firing solenoid is activated, a subtraction reference signal is outputted from the firing control board 2355 to the frame control board 2340. Note that the subtraction reference signal serves as a reference for energizing the subtraction solenoid in the subtraction mechanism. When the firing solenoid is driven, the pestle is actuated to fire the game ball stopped at the launch pad, and the fired game ball passes through the valve and is fired onto the game board. The valve is designed to return to its normal position after the game ball passes through it.

As shown in FIG. 16-5, the game ball count display device 2125 has a structure that allows the player to easily check the display contents, and displays the number of game balls that have been added or subtracted and an error code. This device consists of a display, a subtraction mechanism and a counting switch mounted on the back of the firing mechanism. In addition, the subtraction mechanism is composed of a subtraction solenoid, a subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, a subtraction mechanism exit sensor, and a movable piece, the counting switch is composed of an LED display section, a photosensor detection section, and the game ball number display is an LED. It is composed of a display section. Furthermore, the game ball number display device 2125 has functions such as an addition function, a subtraction function, a game ball number display function, and an error display function. The addition function is a function that adds the received number of rental balls when receiving a rental notification from the dedicated unit 2300, or adds the received number of acquired game balls when receiving the number of acquired game balls from the main control board 2310. It is. The subtraction function is a subtraction mechanism provided in the subtraction mechanism that subtracts the counted number of balls sent to the dedicated unit 2300 when the counting switch is pressed, or when the subtraction solenoid is operated to send game balls to the launch pad. This is a function that subtracts 1 from the number of game balls using the entrance sensor. The game ball number display function is a function that displays the number of game balls added and subtracted using the addition and subtraction functions.The error display function is a function that displays the number of game balls and an error code alternately when an error occurs. This is a function to Specifically, the subtraction mechanism converts a game ball recorded by an electromagnetic method into a real ball by energizing a subtraction solenoid and moving a movable piece using the subtraction reference signal as a reference, and sends the game ball to a shooting mechanism to release the game ball. When the ball passes the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, the number of game balls is subtracted and displayed on the game ball number display. For example, if there is a game ball at the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, no game ball at the subtraction mechanism exit sensor, and the number of game balls is present, the subtraction solenoid is energized after outputting the subtraction reference signal. When the subtraction solenoid is energized, the movable piece is activated to move one game ball into the movable piece, and the game ball that has entered the movable piece is moved to the launch pad of the firing mechanism. will be sent out. Further, when the subtraction solenoid is energized and the game ball moves to the movable piece, the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor detects passage of one game ball. Then, the game ball number display device 2125 subtracts one ball from the game ball number by detecting passage of the game ball with the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, and displays the result on the game ball number display. Furthermore, when the energization to the subtraction solenoid is stopped, the game balls sent out to the firing mechanism 2190 are detected by the subtraction mechanism exit sensor. Further, when the count switch is supplied with a count for confirming the connection of the dedicated unit, the photosensor detection section and the LED display section become operable. When the photosensor detection section and the LED display section are in an operable state and the number of game balls is not "0", the state is in a state where counting is possible, and the LED display section becomes a state where counting is possible. In this way, when the counting switch is pressed and the photosensor detecting unit detects occlusion when counting is possible, the frame control board subtracts the counted number of balls sent in the counted ball notification from the number of game balls, and the game starts. This will be displayed on the pitch count display. Note that while the counting switch is being pressed, the LED display section displays that counting is in progress. The game ball number display displays the added and subtracted number of game balls, and when an error occurs, alternately displays the number of game balls and an error code.

As shown in FIG. 16-6(B), the power supply unit 2360 is provided at the bottom of the back mechanism section 2170, and includes an AC100V input section, an ACDC converter section, a main system power generation section, a sub system power generation section, and an overflow power supply section. It is composed of a load output cutoff section and a DC output section, and has functions such as a main system power generation function, a sub system power generation function, a display function, and a switch function. The main system power generation function is a function that generates main system power from AC 100V and supplies it to the main control board 2310 via the frame control board 2340. Note that the DC 24V used for the gaming machine slot is generated within the slot control board 2340 and supplied from the slot control board 2340. The sub-system power generation function is a function that generates a sub-power system from AC100V and supplies it from the power supply unit 2360 to the game board. Note that the power used in the front decoration 2120 and the operation unit 2130 is supplied via the game board 2102. The display function is a function that displays the power supply status by mounting an LED on each of the main system power supply and the sub system power supply. The switch function is a function to switch between supplying and cutting off AC100V using the main switch installed. Specifically, the AC 100V input section supplies the input AC 100V to the ACDC converter section through a main switch, fuse, line filter, and rush current protection. The main switch is used to cut off the power, the fuse is used to protect against short circuits, and the line filter is used to remove noise.A noise filter for noise removal is used for the AC100V FG. Relays are also used for inrush current protection, and varistors and spark killers are used for surge and overvoltage protection. The ACDC converter section adopts a switching method using an LLC resonant converter using an isolation transformer.The AC voltage supplied from the AC100V input section is rectified and smoothed by a diode bridge and a capacitor, and the primary side Generate a DC voltage. The generated DC voltage is chopped by a switching power supply control IC and FET, and output as a square wave voltage to the secondary side via an isolation transformer. The square wave voltage output to the secondary side is rectified and smoothed by a rectifier diode and a capacitor to generate 36V power. Note that an FB circuit for stabilizing power supply operation and an efficiency improvement circuit for increasing the power factor are provided. The main system power generation section generates the power from DC 36V generated by the ACDC converter section, and is equipped with an overcurrent protection function for each power supply system. Further, various types of power are generated by a DC/DC converter or a switching regulator, or supplied via a fuse. The sub-system power generating section generates the sub-system power from the power generated by the ACDC converter section in the same way as the main system power, and is equipped with an overcurrent protection function for each power system. Further, various types of power are generated by a DC/DC converter or supplied via a fuse and an FET switch. The overload output cutoff section limits the total output of the power supply unit to a predetermined value by detecting the current value of the power generated by the ACDC converter section. When the total output exceeds a predetermined value for a certain period of time, the sub-system power supply stops outputting, but the main system power supply continues to output without stopping. The DC output section displays the power supply status on each of the main system power supply and sub system power supply using the mounted LED, and is equipped with an overvoltage protection function for each power supply system.

The main control board 2310 has a gaming machine frame open state detection function, a firing stop function, a fraud detection function, a backup function, and the like. The open state detection function of the gaming machine frame is a function of detecting the open state of the glass frame 2150 and the back mechanism section 2170 of the gaming machine frame using the glass frame release switch and the back mechanism section release switch. The firing stop function is a function that outputs a firing stop signal to the frame control board 2340 when firing is to be stopped, and the fraud detection function is a function that outputs a serial signal (command format) to the frame control board 2340 when a predetermined fraud is detected. ). In addition, the backup function is a function that stores the gaming state in the RAM when a power outage detection signal output from the backup circuit in the frame control board 2340 is detected, and the jackpot state (including the number of rounds), high probability, This is a function to back up the time saving state, random values in the reserved memory (special symbols, normal symbols), normal electric accessories, first class special electric accessories, error states, etc. Note that the recovery process is executed depending on the pressed state of the RAM clear switch mounted on the frame control board 2340 when the power is turned on.

The main control board 2310 also includes an acquired ball equivalent information storage area, which is a storage area for storing acquired ball equivalent information, in a main RAM (not shown). The acquired ball equivalent information represents the number of game balls paid out to the player based on winnings in the big winning device or the like during the jackpot game state. The number represented by the acquired ball equivalent information stored in the acquired ball equivalent information storage area (also called the acquired ball equivalent number) is, for example, when one game ball enters the grand prize winning device, the number of prize balls (for example, 15). That is, the number represented by the acquired ball equivalent information is the value obtained by multiplying the number of game balls that entered the big winning device by the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state. The acquired ball equivalent information stored in the acquired ball equivalent information storage area is reset (erased) by the main CPU when the time-saving gaming state ends. Therefore, the number represented by this acquired ball equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state at the time of the first jackpot, and the number of gaming balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state at the time of the first jackpot, and the case where the player shifts to the jackpot gaming state again before the end of the time-saving gaming state after the first jackpot. This is the sum of the number of game balls paid out. That is, the number equivalent to the number of balls paid out while the time-saving gaming state continues is increased by the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state each time the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

The production control board 2320 includes an acquired ball equivalent information storage area, which is a storage area for storing acquired ball equivalent information by executing an acquired ball equivalent information storage process, in a sub-RAM (not shown). Specifically, as the acquired ball equivalent information storage process, when an acquired ball equivalent information command from the main control board 2310 is received, a process of storing the acquired ball equivalent information represented by the command is executed. Note that the acquired ball equivalent information is information that is overwritten and saved each time an acquired ball equivalent information command is transmitted.

As shown in FIG. 16-6(A), the frame control board 2340 is provided at the bottom of the back mechanism section 2170 and covered by a back cover 2600, and controls the number of game balls. It has a communication function with the board 2310, a communication function with the dedicated unit 2300, a firing permission signal generation function, a power supply generation function, a backup function, an error detection function, and the like. The communication function with the main control board 2310 means that the frame control CPU receives the number of acquired game balls, game machine installation information, hole control information, and fraud monitoring information, and the firing stop signal is This is a function to receive data without using the CPU. Note that the reception results of each piece of information are transmitted from the slot control CPU. The communication function with the dedicated unit 2300 is such that the rental notification is received by the frame control CPU, and the connection signal generated from the VL (power supply for the dedicated unit) of the dedicated unit is transmitted without going through the CPU. This is a function to receive data. Note that the slot control CPU transmits counting notifications, gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hole control information, fraud monitoring information, and lending receipt results. Generation of the launch permission signal means that the launch stop signal from the main control board 2310 has been released, that the connection signal generated from the VL (dedicated unit power supply) of the dedicated unit has been output, and that the launch stop signal has been released. This function generates a launch permission signal and outputs it to the launch control board 2350 when there is no error in the gaming machine 200. The power generation function is a function that stores power supplied from the power supply unit 2360 in a capacitor mounted on the frame control board 2340 and uses it as a backup power source for the main control board 2310 and the frame control board 2340. . Further, from the power supplied from the power supply unit 2360, power used only by the gaming machine frame is generated. The backup function is a function that uses a backup circuit to monitor the power supplied from the power supply unit 2360, and when a drop in power is detected, sends a power failure detection signal to the main control board 2310 and stores the gaming state in the RAM. It is. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, recovery processing is also performed depending on the pressed state of the game ball clear switch and the RAM clear switch. Specifically, when the game ball clear switch is pressed, the game ball number information is set to the initial state, and when it is not pressed, the game ball number information is returned to the state before the power was cut off using information stored in the RAM. Further, when the RAM clear switch is pressed, the game information is set to an initial state, and when it is not pressed, the game information is returned to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM. Note that items backed up on the frame control board 2340 include information on the number of game balls, game information, performance information, and the like.

The error detection function of the frame control board 2340 is a function that detects a predetermined error based on the status of each device and mechanism, such as a dedicated PIF cable disconnection error that is the detection of disconnection between the dedicated unit 2300 and the gaming machine frame. , a communication no response error between the gaming machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300, which is the detection of no response in communication between the dedicated unit 2300 and the gaming machine frame, and a detection of no response or no connection in the communication between the gaming board 2102 and the gaming machine frame. Communication error within the game machine, subtraction mechanism entrance sensor error when the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor detects ball clogging or malfunction of the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, ball polishing mechanism error when the polishing motor does not rotate, An abnormality in the game ball circulation mechanism is detected when the lifting motor does not rotate, an error in the ejecting ball path is detected as a ball clogging between the ejecting ball path and the ball polishing mechanism 2385, and a ball clogging between the winning ball path and the ball polishing mechanism 2385. Detection of winning ball passage abnormality, detection of ball clogging in the ball polishing mechanism 2385, ball polishing mechanism passage abnormality, detection of ball clogging in the game ball circulation mechanism 2380, game ball circulation mechanism passage abnormality, ball polishing A cassette not installed error is the detection of a cassette not being installed in the mechanism 2385, an over game ball number error where the number of game balls exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40,000), and an under circulating ball number error which is the detection of an insufficient number of circulating balls. , detection of excessive number of circulating balls error, detection of abnormality of various sensors (winning passage counting sensor, non-winning passage counting sensor, ball passage ball clogging monitoring sensor, polishing entrance sensor or lifting entrance sensor) There is an abnormality in the proximity sensor of the gaming machine frame. The fraud detection function is a function that detects predetermined fraud based on the state of each device and mechanism. For example, the detection of opening of the glass frame 2150 is the detection of opening of the glass frame 2150, and the detection of the opening of the back mechanism section 2170 is the detection of fraud. Detection of unauthorized radio waves, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves in the gaming machine slot, clearing of the number of playing balls, which is the detection of the number of playing balls cleared, and the number of winning balls detected by the main control board 2310 and winnings detected by the frame control board 2340. An abnormality in the number of winning balls where the difference in the number of balls is greater than a predetermined number of balls (for example, 100), and the difference between the number of fired balls and the total number of returned balls (winning path count sensor + non-winning path count sensor) is a predetermined number of balls. There are abnormalities in the number of winning balls (for example, 100) or more, small ball detection that is the detection of balls that are smaller than a predetermined size, and iron ball detection that is the detection of iron balls. In addition, operations after error detection or fraud detection include notifying a summary of the abnormality using the frame audio notification mechanism 2131, displaying an error code using the game ball count display device 2125, and stopping the subtraction mechanism to stop the game. It is possible to notify the user of the abnormality through a speaker, display the error on the LCD, or turn on an illumination so that the abnormality can be easily recognized from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 16-6(B), the ball polishing mechanism 2385 is a mechanism for polishing the game balls in the gaming machine 200 provided at the lower part of the back mechanism section 2170, and is controlled by the frame control board 2340. A cassette equipped with a polishing cloth automatically polishes game balls. The ball polishing mechanism 2385 also includes a polishing motor (not shown), a cassette motor, a cassette, a ball inlet, a ball outlet, a cassette switch, a polishing motor sensor, a polishing inlet sensor, a polishing relay board, a movable piece, a ball extraction lever, a discharge passage, and a ball. Consists of a discharge port. Furthermore, the ball polishing mechanism 2385 has a ball polishing function, a polishing motor rotation detection function, and a cassette detection function. The ball polishing function is a function of polishing a game ball by driving a polishing motor and moving the game ball so as to press it against a polishing cloth. The polishing cloth is mounted on a cassette so that it can be replaced, and the cassette motor is driven to wind up the cloth at regular intervals. The polishing motor rotation detection function is a function of detecting the rotation of the polishing motor using a polishing motor sensor. The cassette detection function is a function of detecting the presence or absence of a cassette carrying a polishing cloth using a cassette switch. The ball polishing mechanism 2385 has a structure that automatically winds up the wiping part at the same time as polishing the game ball, and it is possible to replace the cassette that needs to be replaced due to its lifespan. The detected cassette is detected. Specifically, when a game ball enters from the ball entrance, the ball polishing mechanism 2385 detects the game ball using the polishing entrance sensor, drives the polishing motor and the cassette motor, and detects the rotation of the polishing motor using the polishing motor sensor. Furthermore, when the push plate presses the cassette switch, it is detected that the cassette is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 16-6(A) and (B), the game ball circulation mechanism 2380 is provided on the left side of the back mechanism section 2170, and drives the lifting motor in the gaming machine 200 to move the game balls. This is a mechanism that circulates game balls by moving them to the firing mechanism 2190. The game ball circulation mechanism 2380 is composed of a ball inlet, a lifting entrance sensor, a lifting motor, a screw, a lifting relay board, a lifting motor sensor board, and a lifting exit sensor (not shown). Furthermore, the game ball circulation mechanism 2380 has a lifting function that drives a lifting motor to move the game balls to the firing mechanism, and a lifting motor rotation detection function that detects the rotation of the lifting motor with a lifting motor sensor. has. Specifically, the game ball circulation mechanism 2380 drives the lifting motor when a game ball enters from the ball entrance and the lifting entrance sensor detects the game ball. When the lifting motor rotates, the lifting motor sensor board detects the rotation of the motor through a slit in the gear. When the lifting motor is driven, a motor gear provided in the lifting motor rotates, and when the motor gear rotates, the gear rotates in conjunction with the rotation, and the screw gear rotates. The screw gear is equipped with a screw, and when the screw gear rotates, the screw rotates, and as the screw rotates, the game ball is conveyed to the upper part of the gaming machine 200, and after being conveyed, it is delivered to the firing mechanism 2190. It will be. The game balls entering from the ball inlet are aligned, and when the ball feeding cam rotates due to the drive of the lifting motor, the game balls are taken into the ball feeding cam, transported, and delivered to the screw.

Although not shown, the outer frame security mechanism is a mechanism that prevents foreign objects from being inserted through the gap between the gaming machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300, and includes the right plate, left plate, right security plate, and left security plate in the outer frame. Consists of screws and fixing screws. The outer frame security mechanism is installed by loosening the fixing screws, moving the right security plate and left security plate to the adjustable range, and then tightening the fixing screws to fix the right security plate and left security plate. It is something that At this time, it is possible to move until it collides with the surrounding environment or as far as the movement range in the holes of the right security plate and the left security plate.

As shown in FIG. 16-6(B), the iron ball detection mechanism 2650 is provided at the lower part of the back mechanism section 2170, and is composed of a ball passage (not shown), a ball clogging monitoring sensor, a release lever, and a magnet. This mechanism uses a magnet to stop the supply of game balls to the ball polishing mechanism, and detects iron balls using a ball clogging sensor in the ball path. Note that upon detection of the iron ball, the frame control board 2340 transmits fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 2300. Furthermore, as a detection cancellation function, by operating a release lever in the ball polishing mechanism 2385, the game ball is released from being attracted to the magnet, and it is also possible to cancel the detection of the iron ball. Specifically, when an iron ball enters the gaming machine 200, the iron ball detection mechanism 2650 holds the iron ball using a magnet attached to the tip of the release lever. Then, the game balls and iron balls in the ball path stay in the path, and the frame control board 2340 detects this with the ball path ball clogging monitoring sensor. Note that by moving the release lever in the release direction of the arrow, the iron ball will be separated from the magnet and the ball jammed state will be released.

As shown in FIG. 16-5, the frame audio notification mechanism 2131 is provided at the lower part of the operation unit 2130, and is a mechanism that performs audio notification in response to the frame notification command output from the frame control board 2340. It consists only of a voice annunciator. Specifically, the slot audio notification mechanism 2131 provides audio notification contents such as clearing the game balls, calling an attendant, and counting, in response to the slot notification command output by the slot control board 2340. Notify repeatedly. However, the notification that the counting has been completed and the reminder to forget to remove the card will be notified only once, rather than repeatedly.

Although not shown, the door opening detection mechanism is a mechanism for detecting opening of the door of the gaming machine 200, and is composed of a glass frame opening switch, a sheet metal, a switch holder, and a back mechanism opening switch. Further, the door open detection mechanism includes a glass frame open detection function that detects opening and closing of the glass frame 2150 using a glass frame open switch, and a back mechanism section open detection function that detects opening and closing of the back mechanism section 2170 using a back mechanism section open switch. It is a mechanism that has . Note that the frame control board 2340 is configured to transmit fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 2300 in response to detection of opening of the glass frame 2150 or detection of opening of the back mechanism section 2170. Specifically, the door open detection mechanism is such that when the glass frame 2150 is in the closed state, the glass frame open switch of the back mechanism section 2170 is pressed by the sheet metal of the glass frame 2150 and is in the depressed state, and when the glass frame 2150 is in the open state, the glass frame open switch When the release switch is in the non-pressed state, the open state is detected by the glass frame release switch, and the back mechanism release switch of the back mechanism part 2170 is pressed against the switch of the outer frame 2160 when the back mechanism part 2170 is in the closed state. When the back mechanism section 2170 is pressed and becomes a pressed state, and the back mechanism section release switch becomes a non-pressed state with the back mechanism section 2170 in an open state, the open state is detected by the back mechanism section release switch.

Although not shown, the radio wave detection mechanism is a mechanism that detects abnormal radio waves using a frame radio wave sensor. When abnormal radio waves are detected, fraud monitoring information is transmitted by the frame control board 2340 to the dedicated unit 2300. .

Although not shown, the ball extraction mechanism is a mechanism for ejecting game balls inside the game machine 200 to the outside of the game machine 200, and includes a game ball circulation mechanism 2380, a firing device, an iron ball detection mechanism 2650, a ball polishing mechanism 2385, and a frame control. It is constituted by a ball removal switch mounted on the board 2340. The ball ejecting function in the ball ejecting mechanism is such that when a firing permission signal is generated by the frame control board 2340 and the number of game balls is "0" and the power is turned on while pressing the ball ejecting switch, the ball ejecting by firing occurs. If the game becomes possible and the number of game balls is other than "0", the ball cannot be removed. Note that while this function is in operation, communication between the gaming machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300 is also disabled. Specifically, when the ball removal mechanism is in a state where the ball removal is possible, when the ball removal lever of the ball polishing mechanism is set in the ejection direction, the movable piece that was blocking the ejection passage moves to the top, opening the ejection passage. be done. Then, by firing the game balls with the discharge passage open, the game balls that have circulated through the game ball circulation mechanism 2380, the firing device, and the iron ball detection mechanism 2650 are discharged from the discharge port of the ball polishing mechanism 2385. It's about to happen.

As shown in FIG. 16-5, the production switch unit 2135 includes a vibration motor, a weight, a spring, a production button, a production switch, an upper adjustment button, a lower adjustment button, a left adjustment button, a right adjustment button, a production board, and a production switch board. It is composed of an upper adjustment switch, a lower adjustment switch, a left adjustment switch, and a right adjustment switch mounted on the controller, and is used to select and determine the performance of the gaming machine 200 by the player's operation, and to control the signals from the performance control board 2320. The effect is to make the production button vibrate. In addition, the production switch unit 2135 has a production selection function that allows production to be selected by operating the upper adjustment button, lower adjustment button, left adjustment button, and right adjustment button, and a vibration motor is driven by a signal from the production control board 2320. It has functions such as a performance function that uses vibration to vibrate the performance button, and a performance determination function that allows the performance to be determined by operating the performance button. Specifically, with the adjustment switch, when the upper part of the adjustment button is pressed, the upper part of the adjustment button moves and the upper part of the adjustment switch is pressed down, and when you stop pressing it, the reaction force on the adjustment switch returns the upper part of the adjustment button to its normal state. Return to Further, the structure is such that when the lower adjustment button is pressed, the lower adjustment switch is interlocked, when the left adjustment button is pressed, the left adjustment switch is interlocked, and when the right adjustment button is pressed, the right adjustment switch is interlocked. Furthermore, when the vibration motor rotates, the weight press-fitted into the vibration motor shaft becomes eccentric, causing the production button to vibrate. Furthermore, when the production button is pressed, the light shielding plate connected to the production button moves, the production switch detects the depression of the production button, and when the production button is stopped, the reaction force of the four springs returns to the normal state. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 16-7(A) and (B), the decoration unit 2180 is a member provided at the upper part of the glass frame 2150 to cover the upper LED 2720 provided at the upper part of the front decoration 2120. A translucent member with a predetermined decoration unique to the model of the gaming machine 200 is formed on the front side. When such a decoration unit 2180 is provided, by causing the covered upper LED 2720 to emit light, a light emitting effect is performed in which a predetermined decorative part unique to the model of the gaming machine 200 is emitting light. It happens. Although not shown in detail, the decorative unit 2180 is partially sandwiched between the glass frame 2150 and the outer frame 2160, and is removable when the glass frame 2150 is opened with a predetermined key. Further, around the upper LED 2720 of the front decoration 2120, six reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f are provided that irradiate a detection object with signal light and receive and detect reflected light from the detection object. Furthermore, the decoration unit 2180 is provided with five reflective parts 2184a to 2184e, each of which has a detection object (for example, an aluminum member) that can be detected by the reflective sensors 2183 and 2183a to 2183f inside. The upper LED 2720 and the reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f are controlled by a gaming machine performance LED board 2322 that is connected to the performance control board 2320 so as to be able to send and receive various signals, and the reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f can be activated to transmit the detection results to the performance control board 2320 via the gaming machine performance LED board 2322.

[Replacement of components in gaming machine 200]
Also in the gaming machine 200 of the second embodiment configured as described above, various removably provided members can be replaced like the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment. For example, it is possible to replace the decoration unit 2180 and the effect control board 2320 from those with the specifications before the change (for example, those with a different design) to these members corresponding to the specifications of the gaming machine 100. When the decoration unit 2180 is replaced in this way, a predetermined signal is transmitted from the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322 to the performance control board 2320 based on the detection results by the six reflective sensors 2183. Then, the production control board 2320 executes a determination process based on the received predetermined signal, and determines whether or not the decoration unit 2180 replaced by the replacement work is accurate.

Here, the determination processing for the decoration unit 2180 and the like described above will be described in more detail below. The predetermined signal is a 6-bit signal generated by the gaming machine frame production LED board 2322, and similarly to the first embodiment described above, the six reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f are connected to the back surface of the decoration unit 2180. This is a signal indicating a detection result as to which position of the reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f is irradiated with the reflected light from the decoration unit 2180 side.

Referring to FIG. 16-7(B), specifically, in front decoration 2120 and decoration unit 2180, there are five reflective parts 2184a to 2184e for six reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f; The 6-bit signal generated by the gaming machine frame production LED board 2322 based on the detection results of the reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f is "011111". Next, the generated signal is transmitted from the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322 to the performance control board 2320. When the production control board 320 receives the 6-bit signal "011111" generated by the gaming machine frame production LED board 2322, the production control board 320 uses the collation information "011111" stored in the sub-ROM in advance, A process for determining whether or not the decoration unit 2180 is an appropriate mounting component is executed. In the case of this example, the received 6-bit signal "011111" and the verification information "011111" match in all bit correspondence values, so the effect control board 2320 can confirm that the installed decoration unit 2180 is accurate. It is determined that

On the other hand, it is assumed that, for example, the performance control board 2320 is replaced due to a change in model, a change in specifications, etc., and the collation information stored in the sub-ROM becomes "001111". Even in this case, when the decoration unit 2180 is attached, the 6-bit signal "011111" is generated by the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322 as described above, and the signal is transmitted to the performance control board 2320. In this case, the effect control board 2320 determines that the attached decoration unit 2180 is not accurate because the received 6-bit signal "001111" and the verification information "011111" do not match. As a result, the effect control board 2320 displays installation error displays 2050a to 2050c as shown in FIGS. Notify the outside that there is no such thing. In addition, the effect control board 2320 may output a sound from the speakers 2132 and 2133 indicating that the mounting members are different, or cause the upper LED 2720 of the front decoration 2120 to emit light in a manner indicating that the mounting members are different. You can also execute it by In this way, by comparing the 6-bit signal generated using the detection results of the reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f with the verification information stored unique to the model or specifications, it is possible to determine whether or not the correct part has been replaced. This makes it possible to ensure that the operator of the replacement work is aware of this.

Note that in the first and second embodiments described above, it is preferable to avoid a configuration in which all bit-corresponding numerical values such as "000000" and "111111" have the same value as the 6-bit signal and the verification information. For example, there is a risk that a 6-bit signal of "000000" may be generated due to a failure in the reflected light detection function of the reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f and 2183a to 2183f, or a 6-bit signal transmitted from the lantern control unit due to the influence of noise, etc. This is because there is a possibility that all the numbers may be rewritten to "111111". If a configuration of "000000" or "111111" is adopted as the 6-bit signal and verification information, it will not only be difficult to identify the cause of these failures or defects, but also cause problems if incorrect components are installed. Regardless, there is a possibility that the production control boards 320 and 2320 will not make an error determination.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, a 6-bit signal is used as the predetermined signal, but the bit length of the signal is not limited to 6 bits. With a 1-bit length configuration, two types of signals, “0” and “1”, can be output, and with an 8-bit length configuration, two types of “0” and “1” x 8 factorials = 256 types of signals can be output. It becomes possible. The bit length of the signal may be set as appropriate, taking into consideration the number of planned model changes, the number of types of sales specifications, and the like.

[Other embodiments]
In the above-described embodiment, the results of the determination processing by the production control board 320 etc. are displayed on the main display device 131 etc. such as the installation error display 2050a, the output of audio from the speaker 1820 etc., and various lighting (LED). In this embodiment, the notification is made by emitting light emitted from a computer, etc., but any other method may be used as long as it can be reliably recognized by the worker performing the replacement work. Specifically, for example, in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment described above, the main display device 131 is configured such that the display related to the display such as the decorative pattern, the pending display, the variable icon, etc. is not obstructed from obstructing the visibility. It may also be possible to display a message that the mounting member is different (for example, a display such as the mounting error display 2050b) over the entire display area of the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. In addition, if the component to be replaced is a unit equipped with lighting such as an LED, only the lighting such as the LED of the unit will be replaced if the judgment result of the judgment processing by the production control board 320 etc. is determined to be inaccurate. It may also be a mode in which it emits light. Specifically, for example, in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment described above, when the upper unit 180 is replaced and it is determined that it is not an appropriate member in the determination processing of the performance control board 320, the upper unit 180 Although the LED of the game machine 100 emits light, other lights provided in the gaming machine 100 may not emit light. According to this aspect, since only the incorrect members emit light after the replacement work, the operator can accurately recognize the incorrect members.

In the above-described embodiment, the result of the determination process in the effect control board 320 etc. is that although the installation error display 2050a etc. is displayed on the main display device 131 etc., effects such as changes in decorative symbols are displayed and the game is not completed. The machine 100 etc. was in a state where games could be played. In other words, in the above-described embodiment, only by displaying the installation error display 2050a etc. on the main display device 131 etc. in a state in which the game can be executed, the operator can recognize that the parts have not been replaced with the correct parts. However, any mode may be used as long as it is easier for the operator to recognize. For example, if the performance control board determines in the determination process that the correct member is not attached, it may change to a mode such as a replacement mode that more clearly urges the operator to replace the member again. More specifically, in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, when changing to the exchange mode, the performance control board 320 displays the exchange mode on the main display device 131, and performs accurate determination processing. The members determined not to be activated may be controlled not to operate. Further, for example, suppose that the member to be replaced is a member that, when the power is turned on after being replaced, moves to a position where it is difficult to perform the replacement work compared to the position where it was replaced. If it is determined that the determination process for such a member is not accurate, the effect control board may move this member to a position where it is easy to replace the member when the change mode is changed. Furthermore, in a gaming machine that can be changed to the exchange mode in this way, the replacement work of parts may be made possible only in the exchange mode.

In the above-described embodiment, the method for detecting whether or not a member is accurate is a method of combining a reflective sensor and a detection object, which is a so-called non-contact reflected wave detection method. Any method may be used as long as the detected portion can be detected using the formula. Here, in the above-described embodiment, a specific method that can be adopted as a detection method for the lantern member 1580 of the gaming machine 100 and the decoration unit 2180 of the gaming machine 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a table explaining various detection methods as other embodiments.

As shown in FIG. 17, detection methods according to other embodiments include a magnetic force detection method, a color detection method, and an ID detection method. The magnetic force detection method uses a Hall IC as the detection sensor and a magnet as the detection object, and detects the Hall voltage generated by the current flowing through the Hall element of the Hall IC and the magnetic field of the magnet. This method detects the presence or absence of a magnet. Note that in the magnetic force detection method, since the Hall voltage increases in proportion to the magnetic flux density, the distance that can be detected by the Hall IC can be adjusted depending on the strength of the magnetic force in the magnet of the detection object. If such a magnetic force detection method is adopted in the decoration unit 2180 of the gaming machine 200 described above, the front decoration 2120 will be provided with six Hall ICs, and the decoration unit 2180 will be provided with five magnets. The predetermined signal used in the determination process is a signal based on the detection result of the presence or absence of a magnet at the corresponding position on the decoration unit 2180 side, which is detected by the six Hall ICs.

In addition, the color detection method is a method that uses a color sensor as the detection sensor and a colored sticker as the detection object, and calculates the ratio of color values from the reflected light of the projected light on the colored sticker. This method identifies the color patterns of colored stickers. Note that in the color detection method, since it is possible to identify each color pattern of a color sticker, by changing the color pattern for each of a plurality of color stickers, it is possible to make many types of identification possible. When such a color detection method is adopted in the decoration unit 2180 of the gaming machine 200 described above, for example, the front decoration 2120 is provided with one color sensor and a white LED for light projection, and the decoration unit 2180 is provided with one color sticker. can be provided. The predetermined signal used in the determination process is a signal based on the color pattern of the color sticker on the decoration unit 2180 side, which is detected by the color sensor. More specifically, the sub ROM of the production control board 2320 stores information based on color pattern XXX, which is a predetermined color pattern, as verification information. Then, assuming that the color sticker of the decoration unit 2180 is of the color pattern XYZ, the production control board 2320 uses the received signal based on the color pattern XYZ as a predetermined signal based on the detection of the replaced decoration unit 2180 for comparison. The determination process is performed based on the information. In this case, since the signal based on the received color pattern It will be determined that it is not a member.

Furthermore, the ID detection method uses a reader circuit equipped with a reader/writer and an antenna as a detection sensor, and an IC tag (for example, RFID (Radio Frequency Identifier)) equipped with a coiled antenna as a detection object. This is a method in which a reader circuit reads ID information stored in an IC tag using short-range wireless communication. Note that, since the IC tag is constituted by a one-chip integrated circuit, the amount of information that can be stored in the IC tag can be increased depending on the integrated circuit. If such an ID detection method is adopted in the decoration unit 2180 of the gaming machine 200 described above, for example, one reader circuit can be provided in the front decoration 2120, and one IC tag can be provided in the decoration unit 2180. can. The predetermined signal used in the determination process is a signal based on the ID information stored in the IC tag. More specifically, ID information X, which is predetermined ID information, is stored in the sub ROM of the production control board 2320 as verification information. Then, assuming that the ID information stored in the IC tag of the decoration unit 2180 is ID information Y, the production control board 2320 collates it with the ID information Y received as a predetermined signal by detecting the replaced decoration unit 2180. The determination process is executed based on the information on the In this case, the received ID information Y and the ID information It will be done.

Note that instead of the color detection method and ID detection method described above, a barcode reading method that uses a barcode reader as the detection sensor and a barcode sticker on which the barcode is printed as the detection object may be used. good. When such a barcode reading method is adopted in the decoration unit 2180 of the gaming machine 200 described above, for example, one barcode reader is provided in the front decoration 2120, and one barcode sticker is provided in the decoration unit 2180. can do. Further, the predetermined signal, the verification information, and the determination processing in the production control board 2320 can be similar to the color detection method and ID detection method described above.

In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the installed member replaced by the operator is the correct member is detected after the replacement work, and the result of the determination process based on the detection result is notified, thereby indicating whether the installed member replaced by the operator is the correct member. In addition, these replaceable mounting members may be provided with an identification display that is visible to the operator. For example, this identification display may be unique depending on the model and specifications, and may be a display expressed by numbers, letters, symbols, etc. provided on the surface of the member such as by stamping so that it can be identified. If such an identification display is provided on the mounting member to be replaced, the operator can visually confirm whether or not the combination of members is correct before performing the replacement work. In other words, if the gaming machine is equipped with a replaceable mounting member provided with such an identification member, it is possible to further prevent mounting of an incorrect member during replacement work.

In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the mounting member is the correct member is detected after the replacement work and is notified on the main display device, etc., but in addition, the mounting member to be replaced is attached. The structure may be such that it cannot be installed in a certain position. Specifically, the mounting member may have a structure in which unevenness is formed at the mounting position and the mounting member so that the mounting member can be fitted with the appropriate member. In particular, if the unevenness is unique depending on the model and specifications, even if an incorrect member is attempted to be attached, the unevenness will not fit with each other and the installation will not be possible. In other words, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a member from being replaced with an incorrect member, and it is possible to further prevent attachment of an incorrect member during the replacement work. Further, the configuration of such an aspect may be adopted for the sword handle unit 135 in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment described above. For example, the first sword hilt lock hole 1780 and the second sword hilt lock hole 1770 of the sword hilt unit 135 are formed into different shapes for each model, and the first sword hilt fixing pin 1887a and the second sword hilt fixing pin 1887a of the glass frame 150 are formed. The pin 1897b may also be formed in a different shape for each model so as to correspond to the first sword handle lock hole 1780 and the second sword handle lock hole 1770. More specifically, the shapes of the first sword hilt locking hole 1780 and the second sword hilt locking hole 1770 of the sword hilt unit 135, and the shapes of the first sword hilt fixing pin 1887a and the second sword hilt fixing pin 1897b of the glass frame 150. The shapes of "Model XXX" and "Model YYY" are different, and the first sword hilt lock hole 1780 and second sword hilt lock hole 1770 of "Model XXX" are different from those of "Model YYY". There is an embodiment in which the first sword handle fixing pin 1887a and the second sword handle fixing pin 1897b are configured so that they do not fit into each other. In other words, the configuration is such that the sword handle unit 135 of "Model XXX" cannot be attached to the glass frame 150 of "Model YYY".

In the sword handle unit 135 and the upper unit 180 in the above-described embodiment, the determination process was executed by the production control board 320 based on predetermined signals from the control unit of the drive unit 1570 and the control unit of the mechanism unit 1755. However, other detection means may be provided on these removable members. Specifically, a reflective part is provided at the location where the mounting member is attached, a reflective sensor is provided on the mounting member side such as the sword handle unit, and the detection result is transmitted from the mounting member to the performance control board 320. Good too. Even with such a configuration, it is determined whether the replaced sword handle unit or the like is accurate during the replacement work, and the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that whether or not it is an accurate member is determined using the production control board or the like, but it may be possible to make the determination using a predetermined terminal. For example, a code is displayed on a part to be replaced, and when photographed with a camera on a predetermined terminal, predetermined information is displayed, and by photographing the code, it is possible to determine whether or not the part is accurate. It may also be displayed on a predetermined terminal. In addition, image data of the entire gaming machine with the correct parts installed is stored on a predetermined server external to the gaming machine, and the image data and the gaming machine after replacement work taken with the camera of a predetermined terminal are stored. A method may also be used in which it is determined whether or not the correct member is attached by image processing that compares the entire image. With such a system, the operator of the replacement work can easily know the result of the determination as to whether or not the part is the correct one.

[Features of this embodiment]

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300, the performance control board 320, which is the control means for controlling the game, and the plurality of notification means capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. A main display device 131, an audio output device 331, a production board lighting device 341, a production frame lighting device 342, a game board connector 1620 that is a plurality of detection means capable of detecting predetermined information, and reflective sensors 680a to 680d. , 780a to 780d, the control means is capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state by a plurality of detection means, and the plurality of notification means are capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state. , upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification (FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), which are first abnormality notifications based on the detection of the first abnormal state. It is possible to perform the second abnormality notification based on the detection of the second abnormal state, which is upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (FIG. 14-1 (B) etc.). , when the first abnormal state is resolved during the execution of the first abnormality notification by a predetermined detection means among the plurality of detection means, the first abnormality notification in progress is continuously notified for a predetermined period (Fig. 14-1 (C )). With such a gaming machine, the replacement operator can, for example, detect an abnormality due to the replacement work, since the first abnormality notification by the notification means is continuously executed for a predetermined period even after the first abnormal state is resolved. Even if a situation occurs, it can be recognized more reliably and easily than in the past. In addition, in the above, the first abnormality notification is a state corresponding to the top decoration part not installed error notification etc., and the second abnormality notification is the state corresponding to the top decoration part incorrect installation error notification etc. For example, the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (in particular, a state corresponding to switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, an operator can more easily recognize that an abnormal state has occurred than in a conventional gaming machine, as described above.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300, the performance control board 320, which is the control means for controlling the game, and the plurality of notification means capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. A main display device 131, an audio output device 331, a production board lighting device 341, a production frame lighting device 342, a game board connector 1620 that is a plurality of detection means capable of detecting predetermined information, and reflective sensors 680a to 680d. , 780a to 780d, the control means is capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state by a plurality of detection means, and the plurality of notification means are capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state. , upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification (FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), which are first abnormality notifications based on the detection of the first abnormal state. It is possible to perform the second abnormality notification based on the detection of the second abnormal state, which is upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (FIG. 14-1 (B) etc.). , the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be configured to have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the removable member can confirm that, for example, the correct removable member is not properly installed by the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is easier to recognize whether the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state, such as whether the game machine is attached or not, are occurring. Further, for example, if the second abnormal state is a more serious abnormality than the first abnormal state in terms of the progress of the game, the priority of the second abnormality notification can be set higher than the first abnormality notification. Therefore, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the second abnormal condition at a more accurate timing than in the past. In addition, in the above, the first abnormal state is a state corresponding to the upper decorative part not installed error notification, etc., and the second abnormal state is a state corresponding to the upper decorative part incorrectly installed error notification, etc. For example, the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (in particular, a state corresponding to switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, an operator can more easily recognize whether or not the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state are occurring, compared to conventional gaming machines, as described above. .

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 which is the control means for controlling the game, the effect control board 320, the upper unit 180 which is the first means capable of executing the effect, The accessory unit 102B, which is the second means to which the superior accessory decoration part 600 and the inferior accessory decoration part 700 can be attached, the superior accessory main body part 650, and the inferior accessory main body part 750, can perform notification in a predetermined manner. A main display device 131, a voice output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, a presentation frame lighting device 342, which are a plurality of notification means, and a game board connector, which is a detection device capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second device. 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, and 780a to 780d, the second means includes a third means different from the first means, such as an upper accessory decoration part 800, a lower accessory decoration part 900, etc. When the third means is attached to the second means, the control means is configured to notify the upper decorative part incorrect attachment error alarm and the lower decorative part by the reporting means based on the detection by the detection means. It is possible to provide a configuration in which notification of incorrect installation errors and notification of incorrect installation of upper unit (as shown in FIG. 14-1(B), etc.) can be executed. In such a gaming machine, the abnormality notification by the notification means allows the replacement worker to, for example, replace the member attached to the second means during the replacement work with the third means that is different from the first means, which is the correct member. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is possible to easily recognize this at a more accurate timing. In addition, in the above, the first means is the removable superior accessory decoration part 600, etc., the second means is the superior accessory main body part 650, etc., and the third means is the superior accessory decoration part 800, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first means may be various switches, the second means may be the main control board 300 and the effect control board 320 to which the various switches are connected, and the third means may be Various switches different from the first means may be used. Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, an operator can easily recognize that an abnormal state has occurred at a more accurate timing than in conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 which is the control means for controlling the game, the effect control board 320, the upper unit 180 which is the first means capable of executing the effect, The accessory unit 102B, which is the second means to which the superior accessory decoration part 600 and the inferior accessory decoration part 700 can be attached, the superior accessory main body part 650, and the inferior accessory main body part 750, can perform notification in a predetermined manner. A main display device 131, a voice output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, a presentation frame lighting device 342, which are a plurality of notification means, and a game board connector, which is a detection device capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second device. 1620, a gaming machine equipped with reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, wherein the second means includes a third means different from the first means, an upper accessory decoration part 800 and a lower accessory decoration part 900. When the third means is attached to the second means and the third means is attached to the third means, the control means is configured to detect the incorrect attachment of the upper decorative part by the first abnormality notification based on the detection by the detection means. It is possible to perform error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), and if a predetermined abnormal state is different from the abnormal installation state, the notification means It is possible to execute the second abnormality notification, which is different from the first abnormality notification, such as upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, and upper unit not installed error notification (FIG. 14-1 (A) etc.). , the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be configured to have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the replacement operator can use the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means to determine whether, for example, the correct removable member has been correctly installed with respect to the removable member installed during the replacement work. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is possible to more easily recognize whether or not an abnormal installation state and a predetermined abnormal state are occurring. Furthermore, for example, if the predetermined abnormal condition is a more serious abnormality than the abnormal installation condition in the progress of the game, the priority of the second abnormality notification can be set higher than the first abnormality notification. , an operator can easily grasp the occurrence of a predetermined abnormal condition at a more accurate timing than in the past. In addition, in the above description, the predetermined abnormal state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part not attached error notification, etc., but the predetermined abnormal state is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined abnormal state can be a state corresponding to various notifications It may be in any of the following states (in particular, states corresponding to switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, an operator can more easily recognize whether or not an abnormal installation state and a predetermined abnormal state are occurring, compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 which is the control means for controlling the game, the effect control board 320, the upper unit 180 which is the first means capable of executing the effect, The accessory unit 102B, which is the second means to which the superior accessory decoration part 600 and the inferior accessory decoration part 700 can be attached, the superior accessory main body part 650, and the inferior accessory main body part 750, can perform notification in a predetermined manner. The main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the presentation board lighting device 341, the presentation frame lighting device 342, which are notification means, and the game board connector 1620, which is a detection device capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means, In a game machine equipped with reflective sensors 680a to 680d and 780a to 780d, it is possible to attach a third means different from the first means, such as an upper accessory decoration part 800 and a lower accessory decoration part 900, to the second means. When the first means is in a first attachment abnormal state where the first means is not normally attached, the control means is configured to issue a first abnormality notification, that is, an upper decoration part not installed error notification, by the notification means, based on the detection by the detection means. , lower decorative part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification (Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and when the second installation abnormal state is in which the third means is installed, the detection means Based on the detection, the notification means generates second abnormality notifications different from the first abnormality notification, such as upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Figure 14-1 ( B) etc.) can be configured to be executable. In such a gaming machine, the replacement operator can use the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means to determine, for example, whether or not the correct part has been correctly installed with respect to the parts installed during the replacement work. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is easier to recognize whether the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state are occurring. In addition, in the above description, the first abnormal installation state is a state corresponding to a top decorative part not installed error notification, etc., and the second installation abnormal state is a state corresponding to a top decorative part incorrect installation error notification, etc. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and, for example, the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (in particular, a state corresponding to switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, an operator can easily recognize whether or not the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. Can be done.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 which is the control means for controlling the game, the effect control board 320, the upper unit 180 which is the first means capable of executing the effect, The accessory unit 102B, which is the second means to which the superior accessory decoration part 600 and the inferior accessory decoration part 700 can be attached, the superior accessory main body part 650, and the inferior accessory main body part 750, can perform notification in a predetermined manner. The main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the presentation board lighting device 341, the presentation frame lighting device 342, which are notification means, and the game board connector 1620, which is a detection device capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means, In a game machine equipped with reflective sensors 680a to 680d and 780a to 780d, it is possible to attach a third means different from the first means, such as an upper accessory decoration part 800 and a lower accessory decoration part 900, to the second means. When the first means is in a first attachment abnormal state where the first means is not normally attached, the control means is configured to issue a first abnormality notification, that is, an upper decoration part not installed error notification, by the notification means, based on the detection by the detection means. , lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification (see FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and when the second installation abnormal state is in which the third means is installed, the notification means Accordingly, it is possible to execute the second abnormality notification which is different from the first abnormality notification, which is the upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, the lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and the upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Fig. 14-1 (B) etc.). If there is a predetermined abnormal state different from the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state, the notification means can execute various notifications (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) as the third abnormality notification. The first abnormality notification or the second abnormality notification and the third abnormality notification can be configured to have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the replacement operator can use the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means to determine, for example, whether or not the correct part has been correctly installed with respect to the parts installed during the replacement work. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is easier to recognize whether the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state are occurring. For example, if the predetermined abnormal condition is a more serious abnormality than the first abnormal condition and the second abnormal condition in the progress of the game, the priority of notification in the third abnormal condition is changed to the first abnormal condition. Alternatively, since it can be executed at a higher level than the second abnormality notification, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of a predetermined abnormal state at a more accurate timing than before. In addition, in the above description, the first abnormal installation state is a state corresponding to a top decorative part not installed error notification, etc., and the second installation abnormal state is a state corresponding to a top decorative part incorrect installation error notification, etc. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and, for example, the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (in particular, a state corresponding to switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, an operator can easily recognize whether or not the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. Can be done.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a removable member, the upper part decoration part 600, and the lower An accessory decoration part 700, an accessory unit 102B which is a main body member to which a removable member is attached, a superior accessory main body part 650, an inferior accessory main body part 750, and a main accessory unit which is a notification means capable of executing a notification in a predetermined manner. The main body member includes a display device 131, an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, and a presentation frame lighting device 342, and a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information regarding the detachable member. It has reflective sensors 680a to 680d and 780a to 780d, and when a first predetermined event based on predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred, the control means notifies the predetermined event by the notification means. It is possible to perform a decoration part not installed error notification, a lower decoration part not installed error notification, and an upper unit not installed error notification (see FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and a second notification based on predetermined information detected by the detection means. When a predetermined event occurs, the notification means notifies the user of a predetermined event, which is upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Figure 14-1 (B), etc.) can be made into an executable configuration. In such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the removable member can check, for example, whether or not the correct removable member has been correctly installed, based on a predetermined event notification by the notification means. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is easier to recognize whether or not the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred. In particular, in the audio output device 331, for example, the upper decoration part uninstalled error notification and the upper decoration part incorrectly installed error notification have the same output content that allows the target of a predetermined event to be identified, so that the operator can can be easily recognized. In addition, in the above, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part not attached error notification, etc., and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, etc. For example, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the operator can more easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. .

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a removable member, the upper part decoration part 600, and the lower An accessory decoration part 700, an accessory unit 102B which is a main body member to which a removable member is attached, a superior accessory main body part 650, an inferior accessory main body part 750, and a main accessory unit which is a notification means capable of executing a notification in a predetermined manner. The main body member includes a display device 131, an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, and a presentation frame lighting device 342, and a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information regarding the detachable member. It has reflective sensors 680a to 680d and 780a to 780d, and when a first predetermined event based on predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred, the control means notifies the predetermined event by the notification means. It is possible to perform a decoration part not installed error notification, a lower decoration part not installed error notification, and an upper unit not installed error notification (see FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and a second notification based on predetermined information detected by the detection means. When a predetermined event occurs, the notification means notifies the user of a predetermined event, which is upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Figure 14-1 (B), etc.) can be executed, and if a third predetermined event different from the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event has occurred, the notification means will issue various notifications (Fig. 15-1 to FIG. 15-11) can be executed, and the configuration can be configured such that predetermined event notification and specific event notification have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the removable member can check, for example, whether or not the correct removable member has been correctly installed, based on a predetermined event notification by the notification means. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is easier to recognize whether or not the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred. In particular, in the audio output device 331, for example, the upper decoration part uninstalled error notification and the upper decoration part incorrectly installed error notification have the same output content that allows the target of a predetermined event to be identified, so that the operator can can be easily recognized. Furthermore, for example, if the third predetermined event is an abnormality that is more serious than the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event in the progress of the game, the notification priority in the specific event notification may be set higher than the predetermined event notification. Since it can be executed at a higher level, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the third predetermined event at a more accurate timing than before. In addition, in the above, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part not attached error notification, etc., and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, etc. For example, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the operator can more easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. .

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a removable member, the upper part decoration part 600, and the lower An accessory decoration part 700, an accessory unit 102B which is a main body member to which a removable member is attached, a superior accessory main body part 650, an inferior accessory main body part 750, and a main accessory unit which is a notification means capable of executing a notification in a predetermined manner. The main body member includes a display device 131, an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, and a presentation frame lighting device 342, and a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information regarding the detachable member. It has reflective sensors 680a to 680d and 780a to 780d, and when a first predetermined event based on predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred, the control means causes the notification means to notify the predetermined first event. It is possible to perform certain upper decorative part uninstalled error notifications, lower decorative part uninstalled error notifications, and upper unit uninstalled error notifications (FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), based on predetermined information detected by the detection means. When the second predetermined event has occurred, the notification means notifies the user of the second predetermined event, which is upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Figure 14-1). B) etc.) can be configured to be executable. In such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the removable member can, for example, confirm that the correct removable member is correctly installed by the first event notification and the second event notification by the notification means. It is easier to recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event, such as whether the game machine is attached or not, have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. In addition, in the above, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part not attached error notification, etc., and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, etc. For example, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the operator can more easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. .

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a detachable member, the upper part decoration part 600, and the lower An accessory decoration part 700, an accessory unit 102B which is a main body member to which a removable member is attached, a superior accessory main body part 650, an inferior accessory main body part 750, and a main accessory unit which is a notification means capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. The main body member includes a display device 131, an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, and a presentation frame lighting device 342, and a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable member. It has reflective sensors 680a to 680d and 780a to 780d, and when a first predetermined event based on predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred, the control means causes the notification means to notify the predetermined first event. It is possible to perform certain upper decoration part not installed error notifications, lower decoration part not installed error notifications, and upper unit not installed error notifications (such as FIG. 14-1 (A)), based on predetermined information detected by the detection means. When the second predetermined event has occurred, the notification means notifies the user of the second predetermined event, which is upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Figure 14-1). B) etc.), and if a third predetermined event different from the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event has occurred, a third predetermined event different from the first event notification and the second event notification is generated by the notification means. It is possible to execute various kinds of event notifications (Figures 15-1 to 15-11), and it is possible to have an executable configuration in which the first event notification and the third event notification have different priorities. . In such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the removable member can, for example, confirm that the correct removable member is correctly installed by the first event notification and the second event notification by the notification means. It is easier to recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event, such as whether the game machine is attached or not, have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. Furthermore, since the first event notification and the second event notification are notifications in different forms, the worker can more easily recognize that the first predetermined event or the second predetermined event has occurred. . Furthermore, for example, if the third predetermined event is an abnormality that is more serious than the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event in the progress of the game, the notification priority of the specific event notification may be set higher than the first event notification. Since it can be executed at a higher level, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the third predetermined event at a more accurate timing than before. In addition, in the above, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part not attached error notification, etc., and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to the upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, etc. For example, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the operator can more easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. .

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 which is the control means for controlling the game, the effect control board 320, the upper unit 180 which is the first means capable of executing the effect, A superior accessory decoration part 600, a lower accessory decoration part 700, an accessory unit 102B which is a second means different from the first means, a superior accessory main body part 650, a lower accessory main body part 750, and a predetermined aspect. A main display device 131, a voice output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, a presentation frame lighting device 342, which are a plurality of notification means capable of executing notifications, and a detection means capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means. In a game machine equipped with a certain game board connector 1620 and reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, the control means is configured to detect a mounting error, which is an abnormality notification, by the notification means when the second means is in a predetermined abnormal state. It is possible to create a configuration in which notifications (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) can be executed. In such a gaming machine, the worker who replaces the removable member can check, for example, whether or not the correct removable member has been correctly installed, based on the abnormality notification by the notification means. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is easier to recognize whether a predetermined abnormal state has occurred. In addition, in the above, the predetermined abnormal state is a state corresponding to a mounting error notification, but the predetermined abnormal state is not limited to this, for example, the predetermined abnormal state can be any state corresponding to various notifications (especially , a state corresponding to switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, an operator can more easily recognize whether or not a predetermined abnormal state has occurred, as compared to conventional gaming machines, as described above.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 which is the control means for controlling the game, the effect control board 320, the upper unit 180 which is the first means capable of executing the effect, The accessory unit 102B, which is the second means to which the superior accessory decoration part 600 and the inferior accessory decoration part 700 can be attached, the superior accessory main body part 650, and the inferior accessory main body part 750, can perform notification in a predetermined manner. A main display device 131, a voice output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, a presentation frame lighting device 342, which are a plurality of notification means, and a first detection device capable of detecting first information regarding a second device, which is a game device. In a gaming machine equipped with a board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, and an effect control board 320 that is a second detection means capable of detecting second information different from first information regarding the two means. When the attachment state of the first means is a predetermined first abnormal state, the control means is configured to cause the notification means to issue a first abnormality notification, that is, an upper decoration part not installed error notification, and a lower decoration part uninstalled error notification based on the detection by the first detection means. It is possible to notify the error that the decorative part is not installed and the error that the upper unit is not installed (see FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and when the second abnormal state is a predetermined second abnormal state that is different from the first abnormal state, the second detecting means Based on the detection, the notification means can execute the second abnormality notification, which is upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (FIG. 14-1 (B) etc.). The first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be configured to have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the replacement operator can use the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means to determine, for example, whether or not the correct part has been correctly installed with respect to the parts installed during the replacement work. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is possible to more easily recognize whether the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state are occurring. Further, for example, if the first abnormal state is a more serious abnormality than the second abnormal state in the progress of the game, the priority of the first abnormality notification can be set higher than the second abnormality notification. Therefore, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the first abnormal state at a more accurate timing than in the past. In addition, in the above, the first abnormal state is a state corresponding to the upper decorative part not installed error notification, etc., and the second abnormal state is a state corresponding to the upper decorative part incorrectly installed error notification, etc. For example, the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (in particular, a state corresponding to switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, an operator can more easily recognize whether or not the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state are occurring, compared to conventional gaming machines, as described above. .

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320 is the performance control means that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 320 is controlled by the performance control means and is attached and detached in a predetermined procedure. The upper unit 180, the upper accessory decoration part 600, the lower accessory decoration part 700, which are the performance members configured to be able to perform the same, and the accessory unit 102B, which is the main body member to which the performance members are attached, which are controlled by the performance control means, and the upper part. Accessories main body part 650, subordinate parts main body part 750, main display device 131 which is a notification means that is controlled by production control means and can execute notification in a predetermined manner, audio output device 331, production board lighting device 341 , a production frame illumination device 342, and the main body member has a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the production member, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, and a production frame lighting device 342. When the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of the first predetermined event, the control means causes the notification means to issue a mounting error notification (FIG. 14-) which is a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event. 1 to FIG. 14-4), and when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs, the notification means makes various notifications as a second event notification corresponding to the second predetermined event. (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) can be configured to be executable. In such a gaming machine, for example, by the first event notification by the notification means, the replacement worker can check whether or not the performance member installed by the replacement work is properly installed. It can be easily recognized compared to machines. Furthermore, the second event notification by the notification means allows the operator to more easily recognize whether or not a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event has occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320 is the performance control means that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 320 is controlled by the performance control means and is attached and detached in a predetermined procedure. The upper unit 180, the upper accessory decoration part 600, the lower accessory decoration part 700, which are the performance members configured to be able to perform the same, and the accessory unit 102B, which is the main body member to which the performance members are attached, which are controlled by the performance control means, and the upper part. Accessories main body part 650, subordinate parts main body part 750, main display device 131 which is a notification means that is controlled by production control means and can execute notification in a predetermined manner, audio output device 331, production board lighting device 341 , a production frame illumination device 342, and the main body member has a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the production member, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, and a production frame lighting device 342. When the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of the first predetermined event, the control means causes the notification means to issue a mounting error notification (FIG. 14-) which is a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event. 1 to FIG. 14-4), and when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs, the notification means makes various notifications as a second event notification corresponding to the second predetermined event. (Fig. 15-1 to Fig. 15-11) is executable, and if a third predetermined event different from the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occurs, the notification means responds to the third predetermined event. It is possible to execute various notifications (Figures 15-1 to 15-11) as the third event notification, and it is possible to execute the notifications so that the priority order of the notifications is different between the first event notification and the third event notification. can be configured. In such a gaming machine, for example, by the first event notification by the notification means, the replacement worker can check whether or not the performance member installed by the replacement work is properly installed. It can be easily recognized compared to machines. Further, by the second event notification and the third event notification by the notification means, the operator can check whether or not not only the second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event but also the third predetermined event has occurred. It can be easily recognized compared to other gaming machines. Further, for example, if the third predetermined event is a more serious abnormality in the progress of the game than the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event, the priority of notification in the third event notification is changed to the first event notification and the second predetermined event. Since this can be executed at a higher level than the second event notification, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the third predetermined event at a more accurate timing than before.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320 is the performance control means that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 320 is controlled by the performance control means and is attached and detached in a predetermined procedure. The upper unit 180, which is a first performance member, is configured to be able to control the progress of the game. An upper accessory unit 154, a lower accessory unit 156, which are second performance members that execute a predetermined mode of operation performance according to A main display device 131, an audio output device 331, a production board lighting device 341, and a production frame lighting device 342 are provided, and the main body member is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the first production member. The production control means includes a panel connector 1620, and when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a predetermined event, the production control means causes the upper unit to issue a predetermined event notification corresponding to the predetermined event by the notification means. To make it possible to perform installation error notification and upper unit erroneous installation error notification (Fig. 14-3), and to allow the second effect member to operate in a predetermined manner regardless of whether or not a predetermined event occurs. Can be done. In such a gaming machine, by notifying a predetermined event by the notification means, the replacement worker can check, for example, whether the first performance member installed during the replacement work is the correct member or not. The presence or absence of a predetermined event can be recognized more easily than in conventional gaming machines. In addition, by performing the initial operation etc. by the second effect member regardless of whether or not the predetermined event occurs, for example, if no abnormality etc. to the second effect member has occurred, the operator can It is easier to recognize that no abnormality has occurred than in the past.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320 is the performance control means that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 320 is controlled by the performance control means and is attached and detached in a predetermined procedure. The upper unit 180, which is a first performance member, is configured to be able to control the progress of the game. An upper accessory unit 154, a lower accessory unit 156, which are second performance members that execute a predetermined mode of operation performance according to A main display device 131, an audio output device 331, a production board lighting device 341, and a production frame lighting device 342 are provided, and the main body member is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the first production member. The performance control means includes a board connector 1620, and when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of the first predetermined event, the production control means causes the notification means to issue a first event notification according to the first predetermined event. A certain upper unit non-installation error notification and upper unit incorrect installation error notification (Figure 14-3) can be executed, and the second effect member operates in a predetermined manner regardless of whether or not the first predetermined event occurs. If possible, and there is an occurrence of a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event, the notification means will issue various notifications (Figs. 15-1 to 15-1) as a second event notification corresponding to the second predetermined event. 11) can be executed, and can be configured such that the first event notification and the second event notification have different notification priorities. In such a gaming machine, the first event notification by the notification means allows the replacement operator to check, for example, whether the first performance member installed during the replacement work is the correct member or not. The presence or absence of the first predetermined event can be more easily recognized than in conventional gaming machines. In addition, by performing the initial operation etc. by the second effect member regardless of whether or not the first predetermined event occurs, for example, if no abnormality etc. to the second effect member has occurred, the operator can: It is easier to recognize that the abnormality has not occurred than in the past. Furthermore, the second event notification by the notification means allows the operator to more easily recognize whether or not a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event has occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. For example, if the second predetermined event is a more serious abnormality than the first predetermined event in the progress of the game, the priority of the second event notification can be set higher than the first event notification. Therefore, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the second predetermined event at a more accurate timing than before.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 is the game control means that controls the progress of the game, and the effect is the effect control means that controls the effect according to the progress of the game. The control board 320, the accessory unit 102B, which is a main body member controlled by the performance control means, the upper accessory main body part 650, the lower accessory main body part 750, and the performance that is controlled by the performance control means and can be attached to and detached from the main body member. The upper unit 180, the upper part decoration part 600, the lower part decoration part 700, which are the members, the main display device 131 which is the notification means which is controlled by the production control means and can execute a predetermined notification, the audio output device 331, The performance control means includes a performance board lighting device 341, a performance frame lighting device 342, and an identification display section 1532, 632, 732 that is a display section that displays predetermined information regarding attaching and detaching the performance member. It is possible to perform an attachment judgment as to whether or not the effect member is normally attached to the main body member, and if it is determined in the attachment judgment that the effect member is not attached normally and is in an abnormal state, the abnormal state is detected by the notification means. It is possible to create a configuration in which mounting error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4), which is an abnormality notification corresponding to the above, can be executed. With such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the production member can easily perform the replacement work based on the predetermined information on the display compared to conventional gaming machines that do not have such a display. can do. Moreover, the abnormality notification by the notification means allows the replacement operator to more easily recognize whether or not the performance member installed during the replacement work is properly installed than in conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the main control board 300 is the game control means that controls the progress of the game, and the effect is the effect control means that controls the effect according to the progress of the game. The control board 320, the accessory unit 102B, which is a main body member controlled by the performance control means, the upper accessory main body part 650, the lower accessory main body part 750, and the performance that is controlled by the performance control means and can be attached to and detached from the main body member. The upper unit 180, the upper part decoration part 600, the lower part decoration part 700, which are the members, the main display device 131 which is the notification means which is controlled by the production control means and can execute a predetermined notification, the audio output device 331, The performance control means includes a performance board lighting device 341, a performance frame lighting device 342, and an identification display section 1532, 632, 732 that is a display section that displays predetermined information regarding attaching and detaching the performance member. It is possible to perform an attachment judgment as to whether or not the effect member is normally attached to the main body member, and if it is determined in the attachment judgment that the effect member is not normally attached, which is the first abnormal state, the notification means It is possible to execute a mounting error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4), which is the first abnormality notification corresponding to the first abnormal state, and to determine whether or not the second abnormal state is different from the first abnormal state. It is possible to perform an abnormality determination, and when it is determined that a second abnormal state is present in the abnormality determination, various types of notifications (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) as the second abnormality notification can be performed by the notification means. , the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be configured to have different notification priorities. With such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the production member can easily perform the replacement work based on the predetermined information on the display compared to conventional gaming machines that do not have such a display. can do. Moreover, the first abnormality notification by the notification means allows the replacement worker to easily recognize whether or not the effect member installed by the replacement work is normally installed, compared to conventional gaming machines. Furthermore, the second abnormality notification by the notification means allows the operator to more easily recognize whether or not a second abnormality different from the first abnormality has occurred compared to conventional gaming machines. For example, if the second abnormality is a more serious abnormality than the first abnormality in the progress of the game, the second abnormality notification can be performed with a higher priority, so the operator can Also, the occurrence of the second abnormality can be easily detected at an appropriate timing.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the inner frame, which is the first frame, is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 160, which is the gaming machine frame, and can be maintained in the closed state or the open state. 170, a glass frame 150 which is a second frame that is rotatably supported with respect to the first frame and can be maintained in a closed state or an open state, and a probability that a special game advantageous to the player will be executed is determined. A RAM clear switch 302a and a setting key switch 302b are provided as setting means capable of setting a set value to a predetermined value, and the setting means has a first frame in an open state and a second frame in an open state. In this case, the set value can be set to a predetermined value, and when the first frame is in a closed state but the second frame is in an open state, the set value can be set to a predetermined value. be able to. With such a gaming machine, the operator only needs to open the second frame, the glass frame 150, regardless of whether the first frame, the inner frame 170, is open or closed. Since it is possible to change the setting values due to replacement work in accordance with changes in machine specifications, etc., it is necessary to open both the first and second frames to make it impossible to change the setting values. The work can be performed more easily than in the past.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the inner frame, which is the first frame, is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 160, which is the gaming machine frame, and can be maintained in the closed state or the open state. 170, a glass frame 150 which is a second frame that is rotatably supported relative to the first frame and can be maintained in a closed state or an open state, and a probability that a special game advantageous to the player will be executed is determined. A RAM clear switch 302a and a setting key switch 302b are provided as setting means capable of setting a set value to a predetermined value, and the setting means has a first frame in an open state and a second frame in an open state. In this case, the set value can be set to a predetermined value, and when the first frame is open but the second frame is closed, the set value can be set to a predetermined value. be able to. With such a gaming machine, the operator can start playing the game by opening the first frame, the inner frame 170, regardless of whether the second frame, the glass frame 150, is open or closed. Since it is possible to change the setting values due to replacement work in accordance with changes in machine specifications, etc., it is necessary to open both the first and second frames to make it impossible to change the setting values. The work can be done more easily than in the past.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a removable member, the upper part decoration part 600, and the lower An accessory decoration part 700, an accessory unit 102B which is a main body member to which a removable member is attached, a superior accessory main body part 650, an inferior accessory main body part 750, and a main accessory unit which is a notification means capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. Display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342, and a RAM clear switch 302a that is a setting means that can set a setting value that determines the probability that a special game will be executed. A setting key switch 302b, the main body member has a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable member, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, and 780a to 780d, and the control means includes: When the first predetermined event for which the setting value can be set in the setting means has occurred, the notification means can execute a setting change notification (FIG. 15-3), which is a specific event notification, and the detection means can detect the first predetermined event. If a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information has occurred, the notification means can issue a mounting error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4), which is a predetermined event notification different from the specific event notification. In this case, when the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occur, the notification means can be configured to execute a specific event notification without executing the predetermined event notification. . In such a gaming machine, when the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occur, the notification means executes the setting change notification without executing the installation error notification, so the operator can: Setting change notifications, which are more important than installation error notifications in the progress of the game, can be recognized more easily than before. In addition, in the above, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to a setting change, and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to a mounting error notification. However, the first predetermined event is not limited to this, for example, may be any event corresponding to the mounting error notification and various notifications, and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to the mounting error notification and various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a detachable member, the upper part decoration part 600, and the lower An accessory decoration part 700, an accessory unit 102B which is a main body member to which a removable member is attached, a superior accessory main body part 650, an inferior accessory main body part 750, and a main accessory unit which is a notification means capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. The main body member includes a display device 131, an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, and a presentation frame lighting device 342, and a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable member. It has reflective sensors 680a to 680d and 780a to 780d, and the control means causes a first predetermined event based on predetermined information detected by the detection means and a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event to occur. In this case, the configuration can be configured such that the notification means can execute predetermined event notifications such as attachment error notification and switch connection error notification (FIG. 15-6(C)). In such a gaming machine, for example, when a first predetermined event corresponding to a mounting error notification and a second predetermined event corresponding to a switch connection error notification are occurring, the notification means may generate a mounting error notification as well as a second predetermined event corresponding to a switch connection error notification. Since the switch connection error notification is executed, the operator can more easily recognize both the installation error notification and the switch connection error notification, which are important in the progress of the game, than in the past. In addition, in the above description, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to a mounting error notification, and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to a switch connection error notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first predetermined event The predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications, and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to the mounting error notification and various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the radio wave detection sensor 305b, which is the first detection means capable of detecting the first fraud from outside the gaming machine, and the second A magnetic detection sensor 305a which is a second detection means capable of detecting fraud, a main control board 300 and an effect control board 320 which are control means for controlling the game, and a plurality of notification means capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. In a gaming machine equipped with a main display device 131, an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, and a presentation frame lighting device 342, the control means detects a first abnormality based on detection by the first detection device. In this case, the notifying means can execute a radio wave error notification which is the first abnormality notification, and if it is a second abnormality based on the detection by the second detection means, the notifying means can execute the magnetic error notification which is the second abnormality notification. If it is executable, the first abnormality and the second abnormality have both occurred, and the first abnormality occurs before the second abnormality, the first abnormality notification is sent when the second abnormality occurs. The configuration can be configured such that it is executed for a predetermined period even if the program is executed. With such a gaming machine, even if both the first and second abnormalities occur, the first abnormality that occurred first will be executed for a predetermined period of time, so the operator can It is possible to accurately grasp serious abnormalities in the progress of the game.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the radio wave detection sensor 305b, which is the first detection means capable of detecting the first fraud from outside the gaming machine, and the second A magnetic detection sensor 305a which is a second detection means capable of detecting fraud, a main control board 300 and an effect control board 320 which are control means for controlling the game, and a plurality of notification means capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. In a gaming machine equipped with a main display device 131, an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, and a presentation frame lighting device 342, the control means detects a first abnormality based on detection by the first detection device. In some cases, the notifying means can execute a radio wave error notification which is the first abnormality notification in a predetermined manner, and if it is a second abnormality based on the detection by the second detection means, the notifying means can execute the second abnormality notification in the predetermined manner. Magnetic error notification, which is abnormality notification, can be executed, and the second abnormality notification can be configured to have a higher priority than the first abnormality notification. In such a gaming machine, for example, if the second abnormality is a more serious abnormality than the first abnormality in the progress of the game, the priority of notification in the second abnormality notification is changed to the first abnormality notification. Since the second abnormal state can be executed at a higher level than before, the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the second abnormal state at a more accurate timing than before.

[Third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 18 to 37.
(gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 18, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, like the conventional gaming machine, the game goes from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot gaming" and then to the "time-saving gaming state (first advantageous gaming state)". In the case of transition ((a) → (ii)) and in the "time-saving gaming state (first advantageous gaming state or second advantageous gaming state)", when it is determined to be a jackpot by the jackpot determination process, a "jackpot game" is executed. On the other hand, if it is not determined that there is a jackpot, there is a case where the game shifts to the "normal gaming state" ((e)). Furthermore, unlike conventional gaming machines, when a ``predetermined condition is satisfied'' in the ``normal gaming state'', the system shifts to the ``time-saving gaming state (second advantageous gaming state)'' without going through a jackpot game ((b) ). In addition, when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "time-saving gaming state" via the "jackpot gaming", the possible number of games in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state)" is, for example, "80 times". or "100 times", and the possible number of games in the "low-probability time-saving game state (second time-saving game state)" is a predetermined number of times, such as "80 times" or "100 times". . On the other hand, in the case of transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state or fourth time-saving gaming state)" without passing through the "jackpot game", the possible number of games may be reduced to, for example, " 700 times.” In other words, the number of games that can be played when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot game" and then to the "time-saving gaming state" is greater than the number of games that can be played without going from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot game". The relationship is such that the number of times the game can be played in the "time saving gaming state" is greater when the player shifts to the "time saving gaming state". For example, in this embodiment, the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal gaming state is approximately 3.8 times or less of the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the setting value is "1"). The number of times that the game can be played may be set as "700 times" in the third time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state. The first time-saving gaming state and/or the second time-saving gaming state may be referred to as a first advantageous gaming state. The third time-saving gaming state and/or the fourth time-saving gaming state may be referred to as a second advantageous gaming state.

Further, the number of times that the game can be played in the "fourth time-saving game state" may be set to be different depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the "time-saving gaming state", the number of times the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed may be greater than when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the "normal gaming state"; The number of times may be reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, "establishment of a predetermined condition" means that a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition are set. The first predetermined condition is a case where the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times of variable display of special symbols executed from the "starting point", reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with an area for counting and storing the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)". When the cumulative number of times "n" counted and stored reaches a predetermined number of times, the game will shift from the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state)". It has become. In addition, the second predetermined condition is a case where the game stops at a preset "time saving symbol (specific losing symbol)", and in this case, from the "normal gaming state" to the "low probability time saving gaming state (fourth time saving symbol)". The game mode is now set to ``game state''. Note that the rate at which the "time saving symbols" are determined may be any rate. For example, the probability may be the same as or similar to the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is harder to determine than the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is easier to determine. good. Furthermore, "establishment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition, or may include two conditions, or may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition. Conditions other than the above conditions may be provided.

In addition, as the predetermined number of times under the first predetermined condition, an arbitrary number of times can be set according to the probability of being determined to be a jackpot for each set value. For example, in this embodiment, the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal gaming state is approximately 2.5 times or more the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the setting value is "4"), and approximately The predetermined number of times may be set to "800 (times)" so as to be 3.0 times or less. Further, as the "starting point", for example, the time when the "jackpot game" ends, or the time when the RAM is cleared, such as when changing the settings described above, can be set. In other words, in the area of the main RAM 301c that counts and stores the cumulative number of times "n", the cumulative number of times "n" is counted and stored at the time of transition to the "jackpot game" or the end of the "jackpot game" or when the RAM is cleared. Initialization processing will be executed. In addition, as the "time-saving symbol" of the second predetermined condition, a plurality of types of symbols may be set in advance, and the number of times that the game can be played in time-saving game state 4 is set to a different number of times for each type of "time-saving symbol". You can leave it there.

Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with information for deciding whether or not to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who play the game blindly. Also, for example, if the predetermined number of times is about 800 (times), it is possible to provide relief to players who have not been able to get a jackpot for a long time.
Since it is possible to take measures to prevent players from quitting playing games, etc. Furthermore, when transitioning to the "time-saving gaming state" due to "establishment of a predetermined condition", the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is lower than the case of shifting to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state)" through the "jackpot game". Since the number of times you can play in the "time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state or fourth time-saving gaming state)" increases, it will make you want to actively play the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" This makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Example of production in normal gaming state)
An example of a variation performance in the normal game state will be described below.

(Production pattern - normal pattern)
The effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 131 in the normal gaming state is a normal one that basically consists of an identification section consisting of a numerical section (identification number) and a decorative section consisting of decorations such as characters and frames. The pattern is set. The normal symbol may be used in common in different production modes, but for example, the normal symbol may be different in the first variation route and the second variation route, which will be described later, or may be different in production mode A and production mode B. A plurality of types of normal symbols may be set, such as using normal symbols of different modes. For example, in the first variable path shown in FIG. 19, the normal symbol as the performance symbol 70a includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and the background of the character. It is composed of a decoration section consisting of a decorative pattern effect image ZE, and an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric section (identification characters). In the second variation path shown in FIG. 20, the normal pattern as the production pattern 70a includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG made of a predetermined character, and a decoration part made of a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character; It is composed of an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character), and even if it has the same identification number as the first fluctuation path, its aspect is different. Note that the normal symbols used in the normal gaming state are not limited to those consisting of the above-mentioned decorative part (character image, etc.) and identification part, but may also be simple structures consisting of only the identification part or the identification part and a symbol frame. There may be. Moreover, a decorative part (character, etc.) may be arranged within the identification part (number) as a normal pattern.

(Production design - unique design)
As the production pattern 70a, a special pattern may be set in addition to the normal pattern which has an identification part (identification information) with numbers such as "1" to "9" or symbols such as "A" to "Z". good. Examples of specific patterns include, for example, a change pattern that is stopped and displayed to suggest (notify) the occurrence of an icon change notice (a first change pattern that indicates that the pending icon changes to a display mode with one level of high expectations; It is possible to set a second change pattern indicating that the pending icon changes to a display mode with a high level of expectation, a pseudo continuous pattern that suggests (announces) the occurrence of a pseudo continuous effect by being displayed in a stopped state. .

In the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the performance modes set in a plurality of types are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion).

Note that even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the basic flow is the same as the normal gaming state. Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 120, the first special symbol reservation display 123, and the sub-first fluctuation display (not shown) ), the sub-first reservation display (not shown), the first reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern, and the first starting device 112, respectively. 2 special symbol storage designation command, 2nd special symbol, 2nd special symbol display 122, 2nd special symbol reservation display 124, sub 2nd fluctuation display (not shown), sub 2nd reservation display (not shown) ), the second pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting device 115. In the special game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the performance modes set in a plurality of types are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion). Further, it is assumed that the effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 131 in a specific game state is composed only of an identification part consisting of a number part (identification character). The matters exemplified in the normal gaming state may be applied to the special gaming state, and the matters exemplified in the special gaming state may be applied to the normal gaming state.

(Variable effect example 1)
FIG. 19 shows the case of production mode A in the normal gaming state.

When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command (start time CD) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol The variable display of the first lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display starts (see FIG. 19(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120.

On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left-center right column is displayed in a variable manner along a vertical scrolling variable path that flows from top to bottom. Further, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner along a variable path in which the numbers change on the spot. Note that the first lamp pattern and the first special pattern are displayed in a variable manner along a variable path due to light emission (blinking) of one or more LEDs or a change in the light emission position. In this way, the variation path of the performance symbol 70a is different from the special symbol TZ, the first lamp symbol, and the first special symbol.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column temporarily stop in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 19(b)). In this way, during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol 70a is to be stopped, the shaking motion of the performance symbol 70a itself during the temporary stop, and the fluctuation motion (performance motion) of the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE. A fluctuation stop suggestion performance including the above is executed.

In this way, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance and the fluctuation stop display of the performance symbol 70a can be executed. Note that the fluctuation suggestion performance may be a period from the start of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance until the performance symbol 70a is displayed to stop fluctuation. In addition, unless otherwise specified, the "fluctuating stop display" of the performance symbol 70a includes a temporary stop state of the performance symbol 70a, and is not limited to a permanent stop state in which the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 19(c)), and the sub-first On the variable display, the first lamp pattern stops in a losing manner (for example, turns off).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as partially operating the decorative part and enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 19(d)). reference). In this manner, when the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, a variation start performance including a swinging motion of the performance pattern 70 and a performance motion such as moving the arm of the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a is executed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 19(e)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance, a fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed, and the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a losing mode ("164") in a fluctuating stop state. Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 19(f)).

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 19(g)), and the sub-first On the variable display, the first lamp pattern stops in a losing manner (for example, turns off).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display is started. At this time, the variation start performance of the performance pattern 70a is executed, and the performance pattern 70a scrolls (see FIG. 19(h)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 19(i)).

In this way, in performance mode A, the variation performance of the first variation path in which the performance pattern 70a flows from top to bottom is repeated. Moreover, the fluctuation start performance and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the first fluctuation route performance are basically repeated unless a special performance such as a look-ahead performance or an instigation is executed.

(Variable effect example 2)
FIG. 20 shows the case of performance mode B in the normal gaming state.

When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command (start time CD) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display starts (see FIG. 20(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120.

On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left-center right column is displayed in a variable manner along a variable path flowing in a horizontal annular shape. Further, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner along a variable path in which the numbers change on the spot. Here, the combination of the variable paths in the left middle right column in production mode B is conveniently referred to as a second variable path. Note that the first lamp pattern and the first special pattern are displayed in a variable manner along a variable path due to light emission (blinking) of one or more LEDs or a change in the light emission position. In this way, the second fluctuation path of the performance symbol 70a is different from the special symbol TZ, the first lamp symbol, and the first special symbol. Even in the variation presentation of the second variation route, the variation route and the variation display mode of the special symbol TZ, the first lamp symbol, and the first special symbol are the same as in the case of the variation production of the first variation route.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column temporarily stop in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, a part of the character image CG constituting the production pattern 70a moves (arm ), and the pattern effect image ZE performs a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 20(b)). In this way, during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is to be stopped, the shaking motion of the production pattern 70a itself at the time of temporary stop, a part of the motion of the character image CG (performance motion), and the pattern effect image A fluctuation stop suggestion performance including a ZE fluctuation motion (performance motion) is executed. Therefore, even in the variation performance of the second variation route, the variation stop suggestion performance and the variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period.

During the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance in the same manner as the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route may be performed, but in the embodiment, in the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the first fluctuation The variation stop suggestion performance is executed in different manners between the route and the second variation route. By doing this, the impression can be changed not only by different fluctuation paths but also by different fluctuation stop suggestion performances, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, the performance elements that constitute the fluctuation stop suggestion performance (for example, the performance (changes) such as the swinging or rotation of the performance pattern 70a itself, and the performance elements that constitute the performance pattern 70a) All aspects of the operations (changes) of design components such as character images and identification parts, effects such as light emission, and effects and effects attached to the production pattern 70a, operations (changes) of incidental elements such as letters, effects such as light emission) May be different. Between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, some aspects of the performance elements that make up the fluctuation stop suggestion performance are different (for example, the movement mode of the character image, etc.), and other parts of the performance elements (for example, the oscillation of the performance pattern 70a) are different. etc.) may be in the same manner.

The different aspects of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may mean that the timing at which the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed is different, or the length of the execution period of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is different. Moreover, the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the first fluctuation route and the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the second fluctuation route may be the same length or may be different lengths.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 20(c)), and the sub-first On the variable display, the first lamp pattern stops in a losing manner (for example, turns off).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory actions such as a part of the character image CG being moved, or the whole or part thereof being shaken or expanded/reduced (see FIG. 20(d)). . In this way, when the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate (during the fluctuation start period), a fluctuation start performance including a shaking motion of the performance pattern 70 and a performance motion such as moving the neck of the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a is executed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 20(e)).

In the variation start period of the variation production of the second variation route, a variation start production in the same manner as the variation production of the first variation route may be performed, but in the embodiment, in the variation start period, the variation production of the first variation route and Different types of variation start effects are executed for the two variation routes. By doing this, the impression can be changed not only by different fluctuation paths but also by different fluctuation start effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, the performance elements that make up the fluctuation start performance (for example, the effects of movements (changes) such as swings and rotations of the performance pattern 70a itself, and the characters that make up the performance pattern 70a) All aspects of the operations (changes) of design elements such as images and identification parts, effects such as light emission, and operations (changes) of incidental elements such as effects and characters attached to the production pattern 70a and effects such as light emission) are different. You can leave it there. Between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, some aspects of the performance elements that make up the fluctuation start performance are different (for example, the movement manner of the character image, etc.), and other parts of the performance elements (for example, the oscillation manner of the performance pattern 70a) are different. etc.) may be in the same manner.

The variation start performance being different may mean that the timing at which the variation start performance is executed is different, or the length of the execution period of the fluctuation start performance is different. Further, the variation start period of the first variable route and the variation start period of the second variable route may be the same length or may be different lengths.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, a variation stop suggestion effect is executed. In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 20(f)).

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 20(g)), and the sub-first On the variable display, the first lamp pattern stops in a losing manner (for example, turns off).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display is started. At this time, the variation start performance of the performance symbol 70a is executed, and the performance symbol 70a is scrolled (see FIG. 20(h)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 20(i)).

In this manner, in the performance mode B, the variable performance of the second variable path in which the performance symbol 70a flows in a horizontal annular shape is repeated. In performance mode B, the performance symbols 70a in the left row and the performance symbols 70a in the right row flow in directions symmetrical to each other in an annular fluctuating path with the top and bottom as axes. In performance mode B, the performance symbols 70a in the middle row are annular fluctuating paths like those in the left and right rows, but the axis of the fluctuating paths in the middle row is tilted, so that the way the fluctuating path is seen by the player is different. The left and right columns are different.

The gaming machine of the embodiment has a production mode A in which a first variation route (vertical scroll) in which the production symbols 70a vary from top to bottom can be executed, and a production mode A in which the production symbols 70a can perform a variation route in production mode A. It has a performance mode B in which a variable performance of a second variable path (circular scroll) that varies in a different circular pattern can be executed. In this way, by having a plurality of types of variable routes, it is possible to make the player feel a big difference in impression depending on the difference in the variable route, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

As described above, in the variation production of the first variation route of vertical scrolling, it is possible to execute a specific sound production that outputs the stop sound A (specific sound) during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. It is. In the variation performance of the second variation path of the annular scroll, it is possible to perform a specific sound production in which a stop sound B (specific sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. Further, different types of specific sound effects can be executed in the case of the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling and the case of the variable effect of the second variable path of annular scroll. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the fluctuating paths and improve the interest of the game. Here, the different aspects include differences in content such as the tone color of the stop sound, volume, execution timing, execution period, etc.

In performance mode A, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column have the same variable path (vertical scrolling). On the other hand, in performance mode B, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows have the same fluctuating path (circular scroll), but the performance symbols 70a in the middle row have different fluctuating paths from those in the left and right rows, and are the same. Multiple types of variable paths are mixed in the variable performance. In this way, when performing a variable performance using multiple rows of performance symbols 70a, if there are multiple types of variable paths, it is possible to give the player a unique impression and improve the player's interest. .

In the variation start period of production mode B, a variation start production in the same manner as production mode A may be performed, but in the embodiment, in the variation start period, variation start in different manners in production mode A and production mode B. It is designed to perform a performance. Furthermore, between different production modes, the production elements that make up the variable start production (for example, the effects (changes) of movements such as swinging and rotation of the production design itself, and the character images and identification parts that make up the production design) All the aspects of the actions (changes) of the design components such as, the effects such as light emission, the actions (changes) of accompanying elements such as effects and characters attached to the presentation design, and the effects such as light emission) may be different. Between different production modes, some aspects of the production elements that make up the fluctuation start production may differ (for example, the movement mode of the character image), and other parts of the production elements (for example, the oscillation mode of the production pattern, etc.) may differ. The same aspect may be sufficient.

As in the embodiment, by performing different types of variation start productions between variation productions with different variation paths, it is possible to make the player feel a big difference in impression, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. .

In the variation stop suggestion period of production mode B, the variation stop suggestion production may be performed in the same manner as production mode A, but in the embodiment, in the variation stop suggestion period, production mode A and production mode B have different modes. It is designed to perform a motion that suggests the stop of fluctuation. Furthermore, between different production modes, performance elements that make up the fluctuation/stop suggestion production (for example, effects such as movements (changes) such as swinging or rotation of the production pattern itself, character images and identification that make up the production pattern) All aspects of the actions (changes) of design constituent elements such as parts, effects such as light emission, and actions (changes) of accompanying elements such as effects and characters attached to the production design and effects such as light emission) may be different. . Between different production modes, some aspects of the production elements that make up the fluctuation stop suggestion production may differ (for example, the movement mode of the character image, etc.), and other parts of the production elements (for example, the oscillation mode of the production pattern, etc.) may be in the same manner.

As in the embodiment, by performing different types of fluctuation stop suggestion performances between fluctuation performances with different fluctuation paths, it is possible to make the player feel a big difference in impression, and improve the player's interest. can.

(Example of fluctuation path)
The variable path is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scroll or annular scroll, for example, horizontal scrolling in which the effect pattern 70a flows from right to left or left to right, back and forth scrolling in which the effect pattern appears from the back of the screen to the front, It can be configured singly or in combination, such as an axial scroll in which the performance symbol 70a rotates on a horizontal axis or a vertical axis, an annular scroll centered on the front and rear axes, a roulette scroll in which a roulette wheel rotates, etc.

Here, the term "fluctuation paths are the same" means that the direction of fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a, the magnitude of the fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a, the shape of the path recognized by the fluctuation of the performance symbol, etc. are the same, and the fluctuation paths overlap. I don't mean that it is. That is, in the example 1 of variable effects shown in FIG. 19, the effect symbols 70a in the right-center left column are displayed in different locations, but the direction of the variable display flows from the top to the bottom, and the direction of the variable display flows from the top to the bottom of the screen. Since the size and shape of the fluctuating displays are the same, it is said that the fluctuating paths of the performance symbols 70a in the right middle left column are the same. The variation paths being different means that one or more of the direction of variation of the production pattern 70a, the magnitude of variation of the production pattern 70a, the shape of the path recognized by the variation of the production pattern, etc. are different.

In the variation performance example 1 shown in FIG. 19, the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate as it fluctuates from top to bottom, and the fluctuation speed increases, and after the performance pattern 70a fluctuates from top to bottom at high speed, the fluctuation speed decreases. It consists of a single fluctuating path in which the performance pattern 70a that has fluctuated from top to bottom temporarily stops at a predetermined position.

In the variation production example 2 shown in FIG. 20, the production pattern 70a starts to fluctuate by fluctuating diagonally downward, the variation speed increases, and after the production pattern 70a fluctuates at high speed in an annular shape, the variation speed decreases and the variation speed decreases diagonally upward. It is composed of a fluctuating path in which the effect pattern 70a that has fluctuated from the beginning temporarily stops at a predetermined position. The variable path in the left column is a trajectory that rotates clockwise, and the variable paths in the middle and right columns are trajectories that rotate counterclockwise. In this way, as in the variation production example 2 shown in FIG. 20, the direction, size, and shape of the variation route may vary depending on the row of production symbols 70a.

The fluctuating route refers to the route that the moving performance symbol 70a follows (or appears to travel) in the fluctuating performance, and the fluctuating route itself may be displayed on the screen, but as in the embodiment, the fluctuating route itself is displayed. You don't have to. The fluctuating route can be grasped by the effect pattern 70a in which the identification information is distinguishable (low speed rotation) or the effect pattern 70a in which the identification information is indiscernible (high speed rotation). Further, it is also possible to make the player recognize that the performance pattern 70a is changing, including outside the screen, by the performance pattern 70a displayed on the screen or the silhouette of the performance pattern 70a. Note that the fluctuation path can also be divided into the following.
- The starting route that the stopped performance symbol 70a takes when it starts moving The stopped performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate and (gradually) accelerates until the identification information of the performance symbol 70a becomes indistinguishable. , or the starting route until it goes out of the screen, the stopping route that the fluctuating production pattern 70a takes until it stops (almost stops), the fluctuating production pattern 70a (gradually) decelerates, and the production The stopping route until the identification information of the symbol 70a changes from unidentifiable to discernible and stops (determined stop or provisional stop), or until the production symbol 70a that appears from outside the screen stops (determined stop or provisional stop). Intermediate route of the effect pattern 70a in the middle of fluctuation A route along which the silhouette of the effect pattern 70a whose identification information is indistinguishable, or a route that appears from outside the screen until it exits the screen, A effect that covers part or all of the screen (e.g. Routes recognized after cut-in images, eye-catches, etc.)

The variable path may be configured by combining a plurality of aspects. For example, when the production pattern 70a moves from top to bottom, it starts to fluctuate and the variation speed increases, and after the production pattern 70a fluctuates at high speed in a circular pattern, the variation speed decreases and the production changes from the back of the screen to the front. The pattern 70a can be configured with a plurality of variable paths, such as temporarily stopping at a predetermined position. In this way, the variable path may change midway.

Regarding the fluctuating performance, there is a start period from when the performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate until before it fluctuates at high speed, a high-speed fluctuation period during which the performance symbol 70a rapidly fluctuates, and a period in which the performance symbol 70a displays a fluctuation stop display (fixed stop or A detailed explanation will be given in terms of the suspension suggestion period until temporary suspension (temporary suspension). Although presentation mode A is shown as an example, presentation mode B may be similar to presentation mode A.

(Preview performance)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (which may also include pre-reading) that make you expect (suggest) a jackpot (transition to a jackpot game). It has become. In the normal game state and the advantageous game state, a dedicated preview performance may be set for each, a common preview performance may be set, or a combination of these may be set. In addition, the number of types of preview effects that can be executed in a normal gaming state is greater than the number of types of preview effects that can be executed in an advantageous gaming state, or vice versa. The game state and the advantageous game state may be different. For example, if the number of types of preview effects that can be executed in a normal gaming state is greater than the number of types of preview effects that can be executed in an advantageous gaming state, expectations will be It is possible to create a sense of excitement and attract players even in the normal gaming state. Note that the number of types of advance notice effects may be the same in the normal game state and the advantageous game state.

As shown in FIG. 21, the preview effects include, for example, a lighting effect such as a starting lamp (Figure 21(a)), a holding change effect (Figures 21(b), 21-5), and an effect. The character action change effect of the pattern 70a (FIG. 21(a)), the pseudo-notice effect (FIG. 21(c)) that suggests that the pattern 70a will continue to fluctuate, and the buttons such as vibration and light emission of the operation button 135 Examples include a performance (FIG. 21-2(a)) and a movable accessory performance (FIG. 21-2(b)) such as the operation and light emission of the movable accessories 73 and 74. The hold change effect is not limited to changing the color, shape, etc. of the hold icon, but may also change the color, shape, etc. of the icon (FIG. 21-5).

As shown in Figure 21-7, the effect (represented by an arrow pointing toward the hold icon in the embodiment) that suggests a change in the hold icon (the icon) is displayed using mini-characters, icons, symbols, effects, etc., and sound effects. May be executed. Then, when the action production is successful, a pending change production is executed in which the shape and color of the pending icon (the icon) changes, and when the action production fails, the execution of the pending change production is restricted. Good too. In addition to suggesting a change in the pending icon, a performance that suggests a change in an element (for example, the form of a performance pattern) that can be recognized by the player may be referred to as an action performance.

As the preview effect, an image such as a cut-in image (cut-in video) may be displayed as shown in FIG. 21-3. In the example in Figure 21-3, the second cut-in image is displayed with higher expectations than the first cut-in image, and the third cut-in image is displayed with higher expectations than the second cut-in image. Although this is the mode in which this is done, it is not necessary to change the level of expectation. Further, in the example of FIG. 21-3, the first preview performance is performed with a blue effect, the second preview performance is performed with a green effect, and the third preview performance is performed with a red effect. In this way, when a production that includes the same medium (for example, a cut-in image or effect) is performed repeatedly, a production in which the content recognized (displayed) by the medium changes in stages is particularly referred to as a change production or a step-up production. There is.

An example of the preview effect is a look-ahead chance effect (light-emission display effect when the chance figure stops) (FIG. 21-6). In the look-ahead chance production (luminous display display when chance production stops), instead of making the numbers follow a certain rule such as "556" or "667", the numbers of the odd numbered symbols among the production symbols are made red. , the numbers of the even symbols are set as blue, and the same color symbols such as "135" and "357" where all the numbers of the three production symbols 70a are red are temporarily stopped (stop display), or "246" and "468" are displayed. It is also possible to temporarily stop (stop display) the same-color symbols in which all the numbers of the three performance symbols 70a are blue, and in this case, the red color The jackpot expectation level may be higher when the same color symbols are temporarily stopped.

Here, when the look ahead chance effect is executed, the same color symbol stop sound may be output during the variable stop suggestion period until the same color symbol is temporarily stopped (stop display). In this case, the stop sound may be the same as the stop sound output during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a other than the same color symbols, but it may be different. By making the stop sound that is output during the fluctuating stop suggestion period in which symbols of the same color are displayed as fluctuating stops different from the stop sound that is output during the fluctuating stop suggesting period of the performance symbols 70a other than the same color symbols, expectations for players can be improved. It is possible to increase the feeling of playing the game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the look-ahead chance production (light-emission display production when chance production stops), a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three production symbols 70a at the timing when the three (3 rows) production symbols 70a on the left-center right temporarily stop. Instead of performing a production that outputs an effect sound effect, a production that temporarily stops each time the three (3 rows) production symbols 70a on the left-center right temporarily stop in order (for example, every time a bounce display is performed). By displaying an effect image around the pattern 70a and outputting a light emitting effect sound effect (for example, every 0.5 seconds), the timing at which the three (three rows) of the effect images 70a on the left-center right side will emit light. may be different.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a look-ahead chance effect, while in a specific game state where a right-handed image is displayed (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state), the look-ahead chance look effect is executed. You may choose not to do so.

As a preview performance, a performance using a combination of figures (characters), letters, symbols, patterns (for example, a zebra pattern), etc. is sometimes referred to as a group performance. For example, FIG. 21-4 illustrates a group effect in which a plurality of symbols (face symbols) descend from top to bottom. The group effect in FIG. 21-4 is a combination of figures of the same type (face figures with the same expression), but may also be a combination of figures of different types (face figures with different expressions). However, even if it is a combination of different types of figures with different motifs (such as a face figure and a flower figure), it is preferable to align the figures with the same motif (face figure) because it gives a sense of unity. In this way, the examples in Figures 21-4(a), 21-4(b), and 21-4(c) are produced using different shapes, but the motif of the face is the same, so the group preview It can be said that the motif is the same.

The preview performance may be performed in different ways in different modes. Further, the same type of preview performance may be used in different modes. When such a notice performance is particularly distinguished, it is sometimes referred to as a mode common notice.

The preview performance may be repeatedly executed in one or more variable performances. When repeatedly executing a preview effect, as shown in Figure 21-3, the display contents may be changed in stages, such as the first time using a blue display, the second time using a green display, and the third time displaying a red display. It may also be used as a change effect (step-up effect) that changes expectations.

The preview effect may be executed using each part of the game machine 1, such as a light emitting device of a game board, a light emitting device of a game frame, a movable object, a firing device, and the like.

The preview performance can be performed at various timings. For example, the performance may be executed over a predetermined period, starting before the start of the fluctuation performance, during the fluctuation start period in the fluctuation performance, during the high-speed fluctuation period in the fluctuation performance, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation performance, after the fluctuation performance, etc.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation start period and a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the number of pending memories.

(Fluctuation start period - If the number of pending memories is a predetermined number)
When the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, 1), after the character image CG of the left column production pattern 70a performs a production motion of moving the arm (see FIG. 22 (a1)), the left column production pattern 70a Once it swings upward, it starts to fluctuate downward (see FIG. 22(b1)). In synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the performance symbols 70a in the left column, a fluctuation start sound such as a "pop" is outputted from the audio output device 331. Next, after the character image CG of the middle row production pattern 70a performs a production motion of moving its arm (see FIG. 22 (b1)), the middle row production pattern 70a swings upward once and then swings downward. start (see FIG. 22(c1)). A fluctuation start sound such as a "pop" is outputted from the audio output device 331 in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the middle row production pattern 70a. Next, after the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a in the right row performs a performance motion of moving its arm (see FIG. 22(c1)), the performance pattern 70a in the right row swings upward once and then swings downward. start (see FIG. 22(d1)). At the same time as the performance symbols 70a in the right row start to fluctuate, the audio output device 331 outputs a fluctuating start sound such as "pop". In this way, when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number, during the fluctuation start period, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column start to fluctuate with a shifted timing, and the fluctuation start performance is executed with a shifted timing.

(Fluctuation start period - When the number of reserved memories is a specific number)
When the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, 4), after the character image CG of the effect pattern 70a in the left center right column performs the effect movement of moving the arm (see FIG. 22 (a2)), the character image CG of the left center right column The performance pattern 70a once swings upward and then starts to swing downward (see FIG. 22(b2)). At this time, in accordance with the start of the variation of the production symbol 70a, a variation start sound different from that when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number, such as "popon", is output from the audio output device 331. In this way, when the number of pending memories is a specific number, the production symbols 70a in the left middle right column start to fluctuate at the same time (or in a shorter period than when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number), The fluctuation start effect is executed at the same timing (or in a shorter period than when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number). The variation start period is shorter for a variation effect in which the number of pending memories is a specific number than in a variation effect in which the number of pending memories is a predetermined number.

In the embodiment, as the variation start production, a sound production that outputs a variation start sound can be executed. The sound performance of the fluctuation start performance when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number is different from the sound performance of the fluctuation start performance when the number of pending memories is a specific number. In the embodiment, in the variation effect of the first variable route by vertical scrolling and the variable effect of the second variable route by circular scrolling, there are two cases in which the number of pending memories is a predetermined number and the case where there is a specific number of pending memories. It is possible to perform different types of variation start effects in a variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect. Note that although sound effects have been cited as examples of different aspects, effects such as the movement of the effect pattern 70a itself, effects such as the effects of the constituent elements of the effect pattern 70a, effects such as the effects of the accompanying elements of the effect pattern 70a, etc. The aspects may be different. For example, even if different or the same actions are performed, a variable start effect with a specific number of pending memories has a shorter duration than a variable start effect with a predetermined number of pending memories. It can be said that the length and shortness of the performance period are also different.

As described above, when starting a variation effect, it is possible to execute a variation start effect in either of the first variation route of vertical scrolling and the second variation route of annular scroll. In the variation performance of the first variation route of vertical scrolling, there are two cases: a case where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one), and a case where the number of pending memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, four, which is more than the predetermined number). In this case, different types of variation start effects can be executed during the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect. In addition, in the variable performance of the second variable path of the annular scroll, there are cases where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one), and cases where the number of pending memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, four, which is more than the predetermined number). In some cases, different types of variation start effects can be executed during a variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect.

By doing this, it is possible to change the expectation and presentation of the variable start performance depending on whether the number of pending memories is a predetermined number or the number of pending memories is a specific number, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, when there is a specific number of pending memories greater than a predetermined number, by simplifying or shortening the variable start performance, the speed of playing the game can be improved and the player's interest can be improved.

(High-speed fluctuation period)
In the high-speed fluctuation period, the performance symbol 70a (identification information of the performance symbol 70a) becomes indiscernible or difficult. During the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation path may be indicated by displaying a trajectory such as a silhouette or a line of the performance pattern 70a, but the fluctuation path may be indicated by displaying the fluctuation path of the performance pattern 70a displayed during the fluctuation start period and/or the fluctuation stop suggestion period. , the player may be given the illusion that the performance symbols 70a are fluctuating along a predetermined fluctuating path. During the high-speed fluctuation period, various effects (cut-ins, mini-character effects, effects, etc.) are performed over the variable path or in place of the variable path. Here, during the high-speed fluctuation period, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to shift to a more advantageous gaming state as the range overlapping the fluctuation route is wider.

(Fluctuation stop suggestion period)
The variable stop suggestion period is not only the period until the performance symbol 70a is fixedly stopped (actual stop), but may also be the period until the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the period of the provisional stop state. That is, since the performance symbol 70a may repeatedly temporarily stop during the fluctuation performance, there may be a plurality of fluctuation stop suggestion periods during the fluctuation period. A stop suggestion performance may be performed during the variable stop suggestion period.

(Fluctuation stop suggestion period - When the number of pending memories is a predetermined number)
A case where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one) will be explained. On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left-center right column is displayed in a variable manner along a vertical scrolling path that flows from top to bottom (see FIG. 24(a1)). . When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbols 70a in the left row temporarily stop (see FIG. 24(b1)). At this time, the performance pattern 70a in the left row moves slightly too far down from the temporary stop position and then returns to the top and temporarily stops. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the production pattern 70a in the left row slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down the predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG forming the production pattern 70a And a fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the symbol effect image ZE performs a fluctuation motion (performance motion) is executed. It should be noted that a stop sound effect (for example, "ton") is executed from the audio output device when the effect pattern 70a in the left row is temporarily stopped.

Next, the performance symbols 70a in the right row temporarily stop (see FIG. 24(c1)). At this time, the performance symbol 70a in the right row moves slightly too far down from the temporary stop position and then returns to the top and temporarily stops. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the production pattern 70a in the right row slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down the predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG forming the production pattern 70a And a fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the symbol effect image ZE performs a fluctuation motion (performance motion) is executed. It should be noted that when the right row performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, a stop sound performance (for example, "ton") is executed from the audio output device.

Next, the production pattern 70a in the middle row temporarily stops (see FIG. 24(d1)). At this time, the performance pattern 70a in the middle row moves slightly too far down from the temporary stop position and then returns to the top and temporarily stops. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the production pattern 70a in the middle row slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down the predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG forming the production pattern 70a And a fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the symbol effect image ZE performs a fluctuation motion (performance motion) is executed. It should be noted that when the middle row of performance symbols 70a is temporarily stopped, a stop sound performance (for example, "ton") is executed from the audio output device.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable production is performed, The performance symbol 70a which had been temporarily stopped comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 24(e1)).

In this way, when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the performance symbol 70a in the left middle right column is temporarily stopped with a shifted timing, and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed with a shifted timing. Ru.

(Stop suggestion period - If the number of reserved memories is a specific number)
A case where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, four) will be explained. On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left-center right column is displayed in a variable manner along a vertical scrolling path that flows from top to bottom (see FIG. 24 (a2)). . When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column temporarily stop (see FIG. 24(b1)). At this time, the effect pattern 70a in the left middle right column moves slightly too far down from the temporary stop position and then returns to the top and temporarily stops. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the production symbols 70a in each row slightly swing motion (swing display) so as to move up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped images SG forming the production symbols 70a And a fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the symbol effect image ZE performs a fluctuation motion (performance motion) is executed. It should be noted that when the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, a stop sound performance (for example, "tone") different from that when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number is executed from the audio output device.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable production is performed, The performance symbol 70a which had been temporarily stopped comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 24(e1)).

In this way, when the number of pending memories is a specific number, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column are displayed at the same timing during the fluctuation stop suggestion period (or in a shorter period than when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number). At the same time as being temporarily stopped, a fluctuating stop suggestion effect is executed at the same timing (or in a shorter period than when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number). The variation stop suggestion period is shorter for a variation performance with a specific number of pending memories than for a variation performance with a predetermined number of pending memories.

In the embodiment, it is possible to perform a sound performance that outputs a fluctuation stop sound as the fluctuation stop suggestion performance. The sound performance of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number is different from the sound performance of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance when the number of pending memories is a specific number. In the embodiment, in the variation effect of the first variable route by vertical scrolling and the variable effect of the second variable route by circular scrolling, there are two cases in which the number of pending memories is a predetermined number and the case where there is a specific number of pending memories. It is possible to execute different types of fluctuation stop suggestion performances in a fluctuation stop suggestion period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance. Note that although sound effects have been cited as examples of different aspects, effects such as the movement of the effect pattern 70a itself, effects such as the effects of the constituent elements of the effect pattern 70a, effects such as the effects of the accompanying elements of the effect pattern 70a, etc. The aspects may be different. For example, even if different or the same actions are performed, a fluctuating stop suggesting performance when there is a specific number of suspended memories is longer than a fluctuating stop suggesting performance when there is a predetermined number of suspended memories. It can be said that the length of the performance period is also different, such as being short.

By doing this, the expectation and presentation of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be changed depending on whether the number of pending memories is a predetermined number or the number of pending memories is a specific number, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, when there is a specific number of pending memories greater than a predetermined number, by simplifying or shortening the fluctuating stop suggestion performance, the speed of playing the game can be improved and the player's interest can be improved.

In the variation performance of the first variation route of vertical scrolling, when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number, a specific sound performance of a pattern in which the stop sounds of each column are successively heard as, for example, "ton-ton-ton" is executed. In the variation presentation of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when the number of pending memories is a specific number different from a predetermined number, a pattern specific sound presentation in which stop sounds of each column are combined to sound like a "tone", for example, is executed.
In the variable effect of the second variable path of the annular scroll, when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number, a specific sound effect with a pattern in which the stop sounds of each column are sequentially heard as, for example, "tan-tan-tan" is executed. In the variable presentation of the second variable path of the annular scroll, when the reserved memory is a specific number different from a predetermined number, a pattern specific sound presentation in which the stop sounds of each column are combined and sounds like a "turn", for example, is executed.
In this way, in the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling and the variable effect of the second variable path of annular scroll, there are cases where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number and cases where the number of pending memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number. , and executes specific sound productions with different patterns.
By doing so, the expectation and atmosphere of the specific sound performance can be changed depending on whether the number of pending memories is a predetermined number or the number of pending memories is a specific number, and the player's interest can be improved. In particular, when there is a specific number of pending memories greater than a predetermined number, by simplifying or shortening the specific sound performance, the speed of playing the game can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

In either of the first variable path of vertical scrolling and the second variable path of annular scroll, the variable start effect can be executed in the variable start period when starting the variable effect. The variation start production includes a basic first mode using the production pattern 70a itself, constituent elements of the production pattern 70, and elements attached to the production pattern 70a, and a basic first mode using the aforementioned basic first mode and changing colors, etc. , by adding effects etc. to the first mode, or in addition to or in place of the basic first mode, for example, by performing preview effects as shown in FIGS. 21-1 to 21-7, etc. and a second mode (a second mode different from the first mode) with different expectations. In addition, the variation start effect of the second aspect may be a same color pattern (same color chance eye). As shown in FIG. 22-2 (a1), in the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route, as the fluctuation start performance of the first aspect, the character image forming the performance pattern 70a performs a performance action of moving its arm. It looks like this. As shown in FIG. 22-2 (a2), in the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path, as the fluctuation start performance of the first aspect, the character image forming the performance pattern 70a performs a performance motion of moving its head. It looks like this. As shown in FIG. 22-2 (a3), in the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path, as the fluctuation start performance of the second aspect, in addition to the performance movement in which the character image forming the performance pattern 70a moves its arm, The effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 22-2 (a4), in the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route, as the fluctuation start performance of the second aspect, in addition to the performance movement in which the character image forming the performance pattern 70a moves its head. The effect is displayed.

The fluctuation start effect of the second aspect may be set as a so-called look-ahead (targeting a predetermined reserved memory, the expectation level of transition to a jackpot is high, or the effect of stimulating a transition to a jackpot is likely to be executed), It may be unrelated to read-ahead.

In the variation effect of the first variation route of vertical scrolling, the variation start effect of the second aspect is executed more than when the variation start effect of the first aspect is executed in the variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start effect. In this case, the predetermined effect that makes the player expect a big win is more likely to be executed. In addition, in the variation effect of the second variation route of the annular scroll, the variation start of the second aspect is more effective than the case where the variation start effect of the first aspect is executed during the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect. When the performance is executed, the predetermined performance that makes the player expect a big win is more likely to be executed. Even if the fluctuation paths are different in this way, the relationship between the fluctuation start performance and the predetermined performance is set to be the same. By doing this, it is possible to increase the level of expectation for a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, when a preview performance is executed as the fluctuation start performance of the second aspect, a preview performance related to the fluctuation start period or another preview performance is performed at a timing after the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation start period, during the high-speed fluctuation period. Or, it is more likely to be executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period. Even if the preview performance is not executed as the fluctuation start performance in the second aspect, the preview performance as shown in FIGS. 21 to 21-7 may be performed at a timing after the fluctuation start performance during the fluctuation start period, for example. This is likely to be executed during the high-speed fluctuation period or the fluctuation stop suggestion period. When prefetching is set, the related variation start effects and predetermined effects of the second aspect are more likely to be executed than when prefetching is not set. The predetermined effects may include development effects, cut-in effects such as audio and images, step-up effects, pending icons, and other color change effects. The degree of expectation may be higher for a predetermined effect (for example, a red effect, etc.) to be executed after that than for the variation start effect (for example, a blue effect, etc.) in the second aspect.

In the embodiment, it is possible to perform different variations of the variation start effect for the first variation route and the second variation route. In this case, it is possible to add additional effects in the same manner to the first variable route and the second variable route.

The variation start performance includes, for example, a mode in which the performance pattern 70a performs one action, in which the performance pattern 70a moves upward from a stop position, moves downward, and scrolls vertically. The variation start effect is, for example, a mode in which the effect pattern 70a performs two actions, in which the effect pattern 70a moves upward from the stop position, rotates around the vertical axis, then moves downward, and scrolls vertically. There is. Note that the number of actions may be three or more.
The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the fluctuation start performance may be the same whether it is a fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route or a fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route. The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variation start performance may be different between the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation path and the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path. In this case, the number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variation start performance may be smaller or larger in the variation display of the second variation route than in the variation production of the first variation route. .

The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variation start performance may be the same whether it is a fluctuation performance in the normal gaming state or a fluctuation performance in the advantageous gaming state. The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variation start performance may be different between the variation performance and the variation performance of the advantageous gaming state. In this case, the number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variable start performance may be smaller or larger in the variable performance in the advantageous gaming state than in the variable performance in the normal game state.

In the fluctuating stop suggestion performance, for example, the performance pattern 70a moves from top to bottom, passes a stop position, moves back to the stop position, and is displayed as a fluctuating stop.The performance pattern 70a performs one action. There are certain aspects.
In the fluctuating stop suggestion performance, for example, the performance pattern 70a moves from top to bottom, passes a stop position, moves back to the stop position, rotates around the vertical axis, and then is displayed as a fluctuating stop. There is a mode in which the performance pattern 70a performs two actions. Note that the number of actions may be three or more.
The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be the same whether it is a fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route or a fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route. The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variation stop suggestion performance may be different between the variation performance of the first variation route and the variation performance of the second variation route. In this case, the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route is better than the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route, regardless of whether the number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is smaller or larger. good.

The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be the same whether it is a fluctuation performance in the normal gaming state or a fluctuation performance in the advantageous gaming state, but The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variation stop suggestion performance may be different between the fluctuation performance of the variable performance and the fluctuation performance of the advantageous gaming state. In this case, the number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance symbol 70a in the variation stop suggestion performance may be smaller or larger in the variation performance in the advantageous gaming state than in the variation performance in the normal game state.

Note that the action of the performance pattern 70a includes the movement of the entire performance pattern 70a (scaling, movement, rotation, etc.), and the constituent elements of the performance pattern 70a (for example, a part or the whole of an identification part such as a number, a decoration part such as a character, etc.) These include operations (enlargement/contraction, movement, rotation, etc.), elements associated with the production pattern 70a (for example, effects, light emission, etc.), and the like.

The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation start performance may be the same as the number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance, but the performance in the fluctuation start performance The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the variation stop suggestion performance may be greater than the number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the pattern 70a.
The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the variation stop suggestion performance may be smaller than the number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the variation start performance.
The number of actions based on the elements of the performance pattern 70a such as decoration may be greater in the variation stop suggestion production than in the variation start production.
The number of actions (the number of types of actions) due to elements of the performance pattern 70a such as decoration may be smaller in the variation stop suggestion production than in the variation start production.

The number of actions (type of action) of the variable start performance is determined depending on whether the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one) or the number of pending memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, four, which is more than the predetermined number). However, it is better to have a specific number of reserved memories different from the predetermined number (for example, 4, which is more than the predetermined number) than to have a predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 1). The number of actions (number of types of actions) in the variation start performance may be small.
The number of actions (the number of types of actions) of the variable start effect is better when the number of pending memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, four, which is more than the predetermined number) than when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one). ) may be large.

The number of actions in the fluctuating stop suggestion performance (actions However, it is better to have a specific number of reserved memories different from the predetermined number (for example, 4, which is more than the predetermined number) than to have a predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 1). , the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the variation stop suggestion performance may be small.
The number of actions (type of action) of the fluctuating stop suggestion performance is better when the number of pending memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, four, which is more than the predetermined number) than when the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one). number) may be large.

(Variable effect example 3)
FIG. 25(a) shows the case of production mode A in the normal gaming state. The production pattern 70a in the left middle right row temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 25(b)). In this way, when the effect pattern 70a moves toward a fluctuation stop (stop suggestion period), the shaking motion of the effect pattern 70a itself at the time of temporary stop, and the wavering motion (effect movement) of the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE are controlled. A fluctuation stop suggestion effect including this is executed.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 25(b)), and the sub-first On the variable display, the first lamp pattern stops in a losing manner (for example, turns off).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 25(c)). reference). In this manner, when the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, a variation start performance including a swinging motion of the performance pattern 70 and a performance motion such as moving the arm of the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a is executed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 25(c)).

When the variable effect is being executed on the vertical scrolling variable path, a predetermined switching effect (predetermined effect) is executed (see FIG. 25(d)). In the switching effect of the embodiment, a predetermined effect image is enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen where the variable effect is being executed in the vertical scrolling variable path (FIG. 25(c)), covering the silhouette of the effect pattern 70a, etc. Hide the vertical scrolling path (see FIG. 25(d)). Further, a predetermined performance action (for example, waving a hand, etc.) using a predetermined performance image is performed, and a predetermined conversion sound performance is executed. In the embodiment, the pending icon including the icon disappears in the switching performance, but the icon or the pending icon may be displayed in the switching performance.

Then, when the predetermined performance image disappears (end of switching performance), on the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left middle right column fluctuates in a horizontal annular fluctuating path. is displayed (FIG. 25(e)). In this way, after the switching effect is executed, the variable path of vertical scrolling changes to the variable path of annular scrolling. Furthermore, mode B, which is the mode name associated with the second variable route, is displayed on the screen. Note that the mode name is deleted after a predetermined number of variable effects have been performed.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column temporarily stop in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, a part of the character image CG constituting the production pattern 70a moves (arm ), and the pattern effect image ZE performs a fluctuation motion (direction motion). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 25(f)). In this way, when the effect pattern 70a is heading towards a fluctuation stop (fluctuating stop suggestion period in a variable effect), the shaking motion of the effect pattern 70a itself during the temporary stop, the movement of a part of the character image CG (effect movement), and A fluctuation stop suggestion performance including a fluctuation motion (performance motion) of the symbol effect image ZE is executed.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 120. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode ("164") (see FIG. 25(g)), and the sub-first On the variable display, the first lamp pattern stops in a losing manner (for example, turns off).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 120. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display is started. At this time, the variation start performance of the performance pattern 70a is executed, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled (see FIG. 25(h)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 25(i)).

In the embodiment, it is possible to execute a switching effect from the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling to the variable effect of the second variable path of circular scrolling. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort caused by switching the variable route and improve the feeling of anticipation due to the switching of the variable route.

Even if the mode name linked to the variable route is not displayed on the screen, after executing the switching performance such as eye-catching, the mode name linked to the variable route after executing the switching performance can be displayed.

Even if a mode name linked to a variable route is displayed on the screen, the mode name can be deleted during a period when a switching effect such as an eye catch is being executed. Then, after executing the switching effect, it is possible to display the mode name linked to the variable path after executing the switching effect.

The mode name can be displayed in multiple fluctuating effects once or twice or more after the display starts, or it can be displayed all the time except for a predetermined period such as the execution period of a switching effect. There may be.

A switching effect may be executed from the variable effect of the second variable path of circular scrolling to the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling. Here, it does not matter whether the mode of switching effect when switching from vertical scrolling to circular scrolling and the mode of switching effect when switching from circular scrolling to vertical scrolling are the same or different. It's okay. Note that even if the switching effect is executed, the variable route may not be switched. For example, if the switching effects are the same, it will be difficult to tell which variable path will be changed, which can attract the player's interest. Moreover, if the switching effect is in a different manner, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation in the switching destination.

In the fluctuation start period of the first fluctuation route, the first fluctuation start effect can be executed, and in the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the first fluctuation path, the first fluctuation stop suggestion effect can be executed. In the fluctuation start period of the second fluctuation route, a second fluctuation start performance that is different from the first fluctuation start performance can be executed, and in the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the second fluctuation route, the first fluctuation It is possible to perform a second fluctuating stop suggestion performance that is different from the stop suggestion performance. Then, when the switching effect is executed, it is preferable to make the switching effect easier to execute than the case where the variable route is not switched. In this case, it may always be switched. Even if the first variation start effect is executed, when the switching effect is executed, the second variation stop suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than the first variation stop suggestion effect during the variation stop suggestion period. can do. Even if the second fluctuation start performance is executed, when the switching performance is executed, the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance is more likely to be executed than the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance during the fluctuation stop suggestion period. can do.

In the example of FIG. 25, the change path is changed by executing the switching effect during the high-speed change period, but the timing of changing the change path (execution of the change effect such as eye catch) is not limited to this, and changes can be made at various timings. Route changes (execution of switching effects such as eye-catching) are possible.

In the example in Figure 25-2, a switching effect is executed during the fluctuation start period, and after the switching effect ends, the first variable path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second variable path (circular scroll) are A high-speed scrolling state is entered (high-speed fluctuation period), and after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation route, a fluctuation stop display is performed with the effect pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation route.

In the example in Figure 25-3, a switching effect is executed during the fluctuation start period, and after the switching effect ends, the first variable path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second variable path (circular scroll) are Without going through a high-speed scrolling state (high-speed fluctuation period), after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation path, the performance pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation path is displayed in a fluctuation stop state. Here, after the end of the switching effect, there is a state of high-speed scrolling (high-speed variation period) on the first variation route (vertical scroll) before the switching production and the changed second variation route (circular scroll), or a suggestion that variation is stopped. The effect pattern 70a according to the second variation route may be displayed in a variable and stopped state without a period of time (when the switching effect disappears, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable and stopped state (temporarily stopped)).

In the example shown in Figure 25-4, the switching effect is executed at the same time as the start of the change, and after the change effect ends, the first change path (vertical scroll) before the change change and the changed second change path (circular scroll) are performed. A high-speed scrolling state is entered (high-speed fluctuation period), and after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation route, a fluctuation stop display is performed with the effect pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation route. In FIG. 25-4, the variation start effect corresponding to the first variation route is not executed (the start of variation of the first variation route is not visible), and when the switching effect disappears, the route is changed to the second variation route.

In the example in Figure 25-5, the switching performance is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, and after the switching performance ends, the first fluctuation route (vertical scroll) before the switching performance and the changed second fluctuation route (circular scroll) are Without going through a high-speed scrolling state (high-speed fluctuation period), after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation path, the performance pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation path is displayed in a fluctuation stop state. Here, after the end of the switching effect, there is a state of high-speed scrolling (high-speed variation period) on the first variation route (vertical scroll) before the switching production and the changed second variation route (circular scroll), or a suggestion that variation is stopped. The effect pattern 70a according to the second variation route may be displayed in a variable and stopped state without a period of time (when the switching effect disappears, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable and stopped state (temporarily stopped)).

In the example shown in Figure 25-6, the switching effect is executed at the same time as the variation starts, and after the switching effect ends, the first variation route (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second variation route (circular scroll) are executed. After executing the corresponding fluctuation start effect, a high-speed scrolling state (high-speed fluctuation period) is entered, and after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation path, the movement changes with the performance pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation path. Stop display. In Figure 25-4, the variation start effect corresponding to the first variation route is not executed (the start of variation of the first variation route is not visible), and when the switching effect disappears, it corresponds to the second variation route (circular scroll). The variation starts with the effect pattern 70a.

The route has been changed to the second variable route.

Even if a switching effect is executed, the variation route is not changed, and the variation effect is executed on the variation route before the change effect, and there is a case where the change effect is executed and the variation effect is performed on a variation route different from the variation route before the change effect. There may be cases where the In this case, the mode of the switching effect that changes the variable route and the mode of the switching effect that does not change the variable route may be the same or different.

In the embodiment, even if the switching effect is executed and the variable path is changed, the special symbol TZ in the variable effect of the variable path before the change and the special symbol in the variable effect of the variable path after the change. TZ is displayed in a common pattern (for example, numbers), is displayed in a common fluctuation path (for example, in a manner in which the numbers change on the spot), and is displayed in a common manner in which the fluctuation starts (for example, the movement of numbers, etc.) ), and has a common variation-stopping mode (for example, there is no effect such as movement of numbers).

In a variable presentation using the presentation pattern 70a in a mode corresponding to the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), it corresponds to a second variable path (for example, circular scroll) that is different from the first variable path (after the switching effect is executed). It is possible to display the effect pattern 70a in a fixed manner. In a variation performance in which a variation start production in a mode corresponding to the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) is executed, (after the switching production is executed) a second variation route (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first variation route (for example, an annular scroll) is executed. ) It is possible to perform a variation stop suggestion performance in a mode corresponding to the above.

(Variable effect example 4 - continuous effect)
FIG. 26 shows a case where a continuous performance performed in one or more variable performances is executed as a type of look-ahead performance targeting the fourth pending memory (target pending memory). It should be noted that the continuous effect can be executed by a variable effect of a first variable path of vertical scrolling and a variable effect of a second variable path of circular scrolling, and can be performed by variable effects of a plurality of types of variable paths.

When the variable effect is started based on the pending memory three items before the target pending memory, the first continuous effect in which the cut-in image A is displayed on the screen is executed during the start period (FIG. 26(b)) ). When the variable effect is started based on the pending memory two items before the target pending memory, the second continuous effect in which the cut-in image B is displayed on the screen is executed during the start period (FIG. 26(c)) ). When the variable effect is started based on the pending memory that is one previous to the target pending memory, the third continuous effect in which the cut-in image C is displayed on the screen is executed during the start period (FIG. 26(d)) ). Then, when the variable effect is started based on the target pending memory, the fourth continuous effect in which the cut-in image D is displayed on the screen is executed during the start period (FIG. 26(e)).

Continuous effects can be performed with different levels of expectation depending on the color, effect, content, etc., for example, a cut-in image with red text has higher expectations than a cut-in image with blue text. At this time, the level of expectation for the second performance may be higher than that for the first performance, performances with the same level of expectation may be performed consecutively, or performances with different levels of expectation may be combined. Further, the continuous performance may be performed by repeatedly performing the same type of performance, or may be performed by combining different types of performance. For example, a continuous performance may be assembled with a plurality of performances so as to constitute one story.

Although a case has been described in which a continuous performance is performed in the variable performance of the first variable route, continuous performance may also be performed in the variable performance of the second variable route. The continuous performance executed in the variable performance of the first variable route may be referred to as the first continuous performance, and the continuous performance performed in the variable performance of the second fluctuation route may be referred to as the second continuous performance.

In the embodiment, in a period in which the first continuous effect is executed and also in a variable start period that includes an execution period of a variable start effect in a variable effect of a variable path of vertical scrolling, annular scrolling is performed from the first variable path of vertical scrolling. It is possible to restrict switching to the second fluctuation path. During the period in which the second continuous effect is executed, and in the variable start period that includes the execution period of the variable start effect in the variable effect of the variable path of the annular scroll, from the second variable path of the annular scroll to the first of the vertical scroll. Although switching to the variable path may be possible, in the embodiment, switching from the second variable path of the annular scroll to the first variable path of the vertical scroll is also restricted. In this way, by restricting the switching of the variable route to the period when the continuous performance is executed and the fluctuation start period overlap, the expectation that the continuous performance will be continuously performed is not hindered by the switching of the variable route. This can improve the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, switching of the variable route is restricted during the period when the continuous performance is being performed. In place of this, during the period in which the first continuous performance is executed, during the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route, the switching from the first fluctuation route to the second fluctuation route may be performed. Restrictions, or restrictions on switching from the second variable route to the first variable route during the period in which the second continuous performance is executed, during the variable start period that includes the execution period of the variable start effect in the variable effect of the second variable route. , may be possible.

In the embodiment, switching of the fluctuation path is limited in the fluctuation start period, but it is possible to restrict the switching of the fluctuation path in the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + the fluctuation stop suggestion period. , switching of the variable route may be restricted during the execution period of the continuous performance.

In the embodiment, the above-described switching effect (predetermined effect) is executed during a period in which the first continuous effect is executed and in a start period that includes an execution period of a variation start effect in the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling. Can be restricted. Even if it is possible to execute the above-mentioned switching effect (predetermined effect) during the period in which the second continuous effect is executed and in the start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start effect in the variable effect of the second variable path of the annular scroll. However, in the embodiment, execution of the switching effect (predetermined effect) described above is restricted. By restricting the execution of the switching performance in the start period during the period in which the continuous performance is performed, the feeling of expectation that the continuous performance will be continuously performed is not disturbed by the switching of the variable path. This can improve the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, execution of switching effects is restricted during a period in which continuous effects are being executed. In place of this, during the period in which the first continuous performance is executed, during the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route, the execution of the switching performance is restricted, or the second continuous performance is In the period in which the changeover effect is executed, it may be possible to limit the execution of the switching effect during the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect in the variation effect of the second variation route.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching effect is limited to the fluctuation start period, but it is limited to the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + the fluctuation stop suggestion period. , the execution of the switching effect may be restricted during the execution period of the continuous effect.

(Variable effect example 5 - Role object movement effect)
FIG. 27 shows a case where an operation performance of the movable accessory 73 performed in one or more variable performances is executed as a type of look-ahead performance targeting the fourth pending memory (target pending memory). In addition, the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 can be performed by the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route of the vertical scroll and the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route of the annular scroll, and can be performed by the fluctuation performance of multiple types of fluctuation routes. It is.

When the variation performance is started based on the pending memory three items before the target pending memory, the first operation performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed during the variation start period (FIG. 27(b)). When the variable performance is started based on the pending memory two items before the target pending memory, the second operation performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed during the variable start period (FIG. 27(c)). When the variable performance is started based on the pending memory one item before the target pending memory, the third operation performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed during the variable start period (FIG. 27(d)). Then, when the variable effect is started based on the target pending memory, the fourth operation effect of the movable accessory 73 is executed during the variable start period (FIG. 27(e)).

The movement performance of the movable accessory 73 can be performed with different levels of expectation depending on the color, effect, and operation content (number of times, operation width, etc.), for example, the expectation level is higher for red light emission than for blue light emission. It is. At this time, the level of expectation for the second performance may be higher than that for the first performance, performances with the same level of expectation may be performed consecutively, or performances with different levels of expectation may be combined. Furthermore, the action effects may be performed repeatedly in the same manner, or may be performed in combination with effects in different manners. For example, a continuous performance may be assembled with a plurality of performances so as to gradually increase expectations.

In the embodiment, the first variation of the vertical scroll is performed during a period in which the operation production of the movable accessory 73 is executed, and in a variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start production in the variation production of the first variation route of the vertical scroll. It is possible to restrict switching from the path to the second variable path of the annular scroll. From the second fluctuation path of the annular scroll during the period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed, and in the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path of the annular scroll. Although switching to the first variable path of vertical scrolling may be possible, in the embodiment, switching from the second variable path of annular scroll to the first variable path of vertical scrolling is also restricted. In this way, by restricting the switching of the fluctuation path during the period when the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed and the fluctuation start period, the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is continuously executed. Expectations are not hindered by switching fluctuating paths. This can improve the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, switching of the variable path is restricted during a period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is being performed. Instead, during the period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed, and in the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route, the second fluctuation is changed from the first fluctuation route. During the period in which the restriction on switching to the route or the operation effect of the movable accessory 73 is executed, and the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect in the variable effect of the second variable route, the second variable route It may also be possible to restrict switching from the first variable path to the first variable path.

In the embodiment, switching of the fluctuation path is restricted in the fluctuation start period, but in any of the entire fluctuation period, high-speed fluctuation period, fluctuation stop suggestion period, start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or high-speed fluctuation period + fluctuation stop suggestion period, Switching of the variable path may be restricted during the execution period of the movement performance of the movable accessory 73.

In the embodiment, the above-mentioned switching effect (predetermined effect) is performed during a period in which the operation effect of the movable accessory 73 is executed, and during a variable start period that includes an execution period of the variable start effect in the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling. ) can be restricted. The above-mentioned switching performance (predetermined performance) is executed during the period in which the operation performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed and during the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path of the annular scroll. However, in the embodiment, during the period during which the movement effect of the movable accessory 73 is executed, and during the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect in the variation effect of the second variation route of the annular scroll. , the execution of the aforementioned switching effect (predetermined effect) is restricted. In this way, by restricting the execution of the switching performance during the fluctuation start period during the period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is performed, the expectation that the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 will continue to be performed can be increased. Not hindered by switching variable paths. This can improve the player's interest.

In the embodiment, execution of the switching performance is restricted during a period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is being performed. Instead, during the period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory 73 is executed, the execution of the switching performance may be restricted, or the movement In the period in which the action performance of the accessory 73 is executed, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the switching performance during the fluctuation start period including the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching effect is limited to the fluctuation start period, but it is limited to the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + the fluctuation stop suggestion period. , the execution of the switching effect may be restricted during the execution period of the movement effect of the movable accessory 73.

(Variable effect example 6 - Button operation suggestion effect)
FIG. 28 shows a case where, as a type of performance, an operation suggestion performance that prompts the player to operate the operation button 135 is executed on the screen. It should be noted that the operation suggestion performance can be executed with a variation performance of a first variation route of vertical scrolling and a variation production of a second variation route of annular scroll, and can be performed with variation production of a plurality of types of variation routes.

Assume that in the variable performance, an operation suggestion performance that prompts the player to operate the operation button 135 is executed on the screen (FIG. 28(a)). A predetermined operation validity period is set for the operation suggestion performance, and when the operation button 135 is operated during the operation validity period, the button operation is reflected in the content of the performance. In the embodiment, the valid operation period is set as a countdown display (FIGS. 28(a) to 28(c)), and the operation button 135 is operated when the count is "3". In the embodiment, when the operation button 135 is operated, a predetermined image effect is executed on the screen (FIG. 28(d)).

In the embodiment, during the period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed, and during the variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start effect in the variation effect of the first variation route of the vertical scroll, the annular scroll is moved from the vertical scroll variation route. Switching to variable paths can be restricted. During the period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed, and during the variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start effect in the variation effect on the second variation route of the annular scroll, the second variation route of the annular scroll to the first variation of the vertical scroll Although it may be possible to switch to the first variation route, in the embodiment, the variation is performed during the period in which the operation suggestion production is executed and also includes the execution period of the variation start production in the variation production of the second variation route of the annular scroll. During the start period, switching from the second variable path of circular scrolling to the first variable path of vertical scrolling is restricted. In this manner, by restricting the switching of the variable route during the return start period during the period in which the operation suggestion performance is performed, the expectation that the operation suggestion performance will continue to be performed is not hindered by the switching of the variable route. This can improve the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, switching of the variable route is restricted during the period in which the operation suggestion performance is executed. Instead of this, during the period in which the operation suggestion performance is executed, and in the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route, the first fluctuation route is switched to the second fluctuation route. or switching from the second variation route to the first variation route during the period in which the operation suggestion production is executed and during the variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start production in the variation production of the second variation route. Either of the following restrictions may be possible.

In the embodiment, switching of the fluctuation path is limited in the fluctuation start period, but it is possible to restrict the switching of the fluctuation path in the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + the fluctuation stop suggestion period. , switching of the variable route may be restricted during the execution period of the operation suggestion effect.

In the embodiment, the above-mentioned switching effect (predetermined effect) is executed during a period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed and during a variation start period that includes an execution period of the variation start effect in the variation effect of the first variation route of vertical scrolling. It is possible to limit The above-mentioned switching effect (predetermined effect) can be executed during the period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed and during the variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start effect in the variation effect of the second variation route of the annular scroll. However, in the embodiment, the aforementioned switching effect ( Execution of predetermined effects) is restricted. In this way, by restricting the execution of the switching effect during the period when the operation suggestion effect overlaps with the fluctuation start period, the expectation that the operation suggestion effect will continue to be performed can be reduced by switching the variation path. Not hinder. This can improve the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, execution of the switching effect is restricted during the period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed. Instead, during the period in which the operation suggestion performance is executed, the execution of the switching performance is restricted or the operation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route. In the period during which the changeover effect is performed, it may be possible to limit the execution of the switching effect during the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect in the variation effect of the second variation route.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching effect is limited to the fluctuation start period, but it is limited to the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + the fluctuation stop suggestion period. , execution of the switching effect may be restricted during the execution period of the operation suggestion effect.

When executing a switching effect (for example, an eye catch) in the variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), the continuous effect performed in one or more variable effects may be restricted.
When performing a switching effect (such as an eye catch) in a variable effect on the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), it may be possible to limit the execution of continuous effects performed in one or more variable effects. .
Whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), when performing a switching effect (e.g. eye catch etc.) in the variable effect, one or more Execution of continuous performances performed in variable performances may be restricted.

In the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), when performing a switching production (for example, eye catch, etc.), execution of the movement production of the movable accessory 73 may be restricted.
In the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), when performing a switching effect (for example, eye catch, etc.), execution of the operation effect of the movable accessory 73 may be restricted.
When performing a switching effect (for example, an eye catch) in a variable effect, whether it is the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), the movable accessory 73 is activated. Execution of the performance may be restricted.

When executing a switching effect (such as an eye catch) in the variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), execution of an operation suggestion effect that prompts an operation of the operation button 135 may be restricted.
When executing a switching effect (for example, an eye catch) in the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), execution of an operation suggestion effect that prompts an operation of the operation button 135 may be restricted.
When performing a switching effect (such as an eye catch) in a variable effect, whether it is the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), the operation button 135 must be operated. Execution of the prompting operation suggestion effect may be restricted.

In the variable performance of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), when changing to another variable route, execution of continuous performance performed in one or more variable performances may be restricted.
In the variable performance of the second variable route (for example, circular scroll), when changing to another variable route, execution of continuous performance performed in one or more variable performances may be restricted.
Whether it is the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), when changing to another variable route in a variable effect, in one or more variable effects. Execution of continuous effects may be restricted.

In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), when changing to another variation route, execution of the operation performance of the movable accessory 73 may be restricted.
In the variable performance of the second variable route (for example, an annular scroll), when changing to another variable route, execution of the operation performance of the movable accessory 73 may be restricted.
Whether it is the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), when changing to another variable route in the variable effect, the movement effect of the movable accessory 73 is executed. May be restricted.

In the variation presentation of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), when changing to another variation route, execution of the operation suggestion production that prompts the operation of the operation button 135 may be restricted.
In the variation presentation of the second variation route (for example, annular scroll), when changing to another variation route, execution of the operation suggestion production that prompts the operation of the operation button 135 may be restricted.
When changing to another variable route in a variable effect, whether it is the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable route (for example, circular scroll), operation suggestion display that prompts the operation of the operation button 135 Execution may be restricted.

When a continuous performance performed in one or more variable performances, an operation performance of the movable accessory 73, or an operation suggestion performance that prompts the operation of the operation button 135 is executed, the above-mentioned fluctuation route is limited. In addition to the execution of changes and switching effects, other things may be restricted, such as the stop sound of symbols such as symbols of the same color, the output of sound, the production of light emission, effects, etc.

Restrictions on changing the fluctuating route or performing switching performances include continuous performances performed in one or more fluctuating performances, operation performances of the movable accessory 73, or operation suggestion performances that prompt the operation of the operation button 135. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be other cases, such as a case where the player is in a predetermined (for example, advantageous for the player) zone (execution of a suggestive effect suggesting a transition to the zone).

When a switching effect (such as an eye catch for changing a variable route) is being executed, execution of a pending icon or a pending changing effect in which the color or shape of the icon changes may be restricted.
When a switching effect (such as an eye catch for changing a variable route) is being executed, execution of an action effect that suggests execution of a pending change effect in which a pending icon or the color or shape of the icon changes may be restricted.
When a switching effect (such as an eye catch for changing a fluctuating route) is being executed, execution of a reach promotion effect that suggests or makes you expect a reach may be restricted.
Even if the above-mentioned effects are restricted when a switching effect (such as an eye catch for changing the variable route) is executed, the winning sound (including changing sounds) that is output when a game ball wins a prize. ) may be executed.

A fluctuating performance of the variable route after the execution of the switching performance may be more likely to be executed than a fluctuating performance of the fluctuating route before the execution of the switching performance, which suggests or makes you expect a reach.
Rather than a reach-promoting performance that suggests or expects a reach, which is performed in a fluctuating performance on a fluctuating route before the execution of a switching performance, it is more likely that it will become a reach, which is performed in a fluctuating performance on a fluctuating route after the execution of a switching performance. A reach promotion effect that suggests or makes the player expect a reach may be more likely to result in an advantageous situation for the player (establishment of a reach, etc.).
Rather than a reach-promoting performance that suggests or expects a reach, which is performed in a fluctuating performance on a fluctuating route before the execution of a switching performance, it is more likely that it will become a reach, which is performed in a fluctuating performance on a fluctuating route after the execution of a switching performance. A reach-promoting effect that suggests or makes the player expect a reach may be more likely to be executed than a reach-promoting effect that makes the player expect an advantageous state (establishment of a reach, etc.).

(Variable performance example 7 - pseudo continuous performance)
Variation effect example 7 shown in FIG. 29 is a case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed. Here, "pseudo continuous performance" means that for a jackpot determination based on winning (ball hitting) one starting device (first starting device 112, second starting device 115), it is as if multiple presentation symbols are used. In order to make it appear as if the fluctuation display of 70a has been executed, within the special figure fluctuation time determined for one winning (ball) to the starting device (first starting device 112, second starting device 115). This is a special form of fluctuating display of performance symbols in which a re-fluctuation display in which all the performance symbols 70a temporarily stop and then start fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times. In addition, it may also be referred to as a fluctuating continuous performance or a continuous performance. Although the case of the normal gaming state is mentioned, it may also be applied to the advantageous gaming state.

(First fluctuation path)
For example, when the performance symbol 70a is fluctuating on the first fluctuation route (FIG. 29(a1)), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol 70a in the left row and the performance symbol 70a in the right row temporarily change. Stop. At this time, during the stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left column and the right column, the variation stop suggestion production of mode A corresponding to the first variation route is executed. In addition, as one type of variation stop suggestion production of mode A, stop sound A is output when the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns temporarily stop (FIG. 29 (b1). As a type of effect that suggests the stoppage of fluctuation of the effect patterns 70a in the row, a effect movement (for example, waving a stick) of a character image that is a component of the effect image 70a is performed.Furthermore, the entire effect pattern 70a in the left and right columns is , a movement performance that sways up and down is performed.

In the middle row, the unique symbol "NEXT" arrives as the performance symbol 70a on the first variable path (FIG. 29(c1)). During the stop suggestion period when the unique symbols in the middle row temporarily stop at a predetermined position, a fluctuating stop suggestion performance by the unique symbols is executed. The variation stop suggestion performance of the unique symbol is executed in a mode T different from the mode A of the variation stop suggestion production of the first variation route. In addition, as a type of variation stop suggestion production in the mode T, a stop sound T in a mode different from that when the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns temporarily stop is output (FIG. 29 (d1). At this time, The unique symbols in the row are different from the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows in that the action effects of the constituent elements of the unique symbols are not executed. Similarly to the production pattern 70a in the left row, it may be in a temporary stop state with a production motion that swings up and down, but in the embodiment, a production motion in which the entire unique symbol in the middle row is expanded or contracted is performed. The performance operation mode is different between the right column and the left column.

In the embodiment, when the unique symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo continuous performance: success), the performance symbol 70a is varied again after a predetermined fluctuating continuous performance is executed (FIG. 29(e1)). Note that the continuous fluctuation performance may be omitted. In addition, in the embodiment, if the unique symbol does not temporarily stop (pseudo-sequential performance: failure), for example, because the unique symbol has gone too far, a normal symbol is displayed as the middle row performance symbol 70a, and a mode that matches the fluctuation path A is shown. The variation stop suggestion effect of A is executed.

(Second fluctuation path)
For example, when the performance symbol 70a is fluctuating on the second fluctuation route (FIG. 29 (a2)), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation performance, the performance symbol 70a in the left row and the performance symbol 70a in the right row temporarily change. Stop. At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns, the variation stop suggestion performance of mode B corresponding to the second variation path is executed. In addition, as one type of variation stop suggestion effect of mode B, stop sound B is output when the effect symbols 70a in the left and right columns temporarily stop (FIG. 29(b2). As a type of effect that suggests the stop of fluctuation of the effect pattern 70a in the row, a effect movement (for example, waving) of a character image that is a component of the effect pattern 70a is performed.Furthermore, the entire effect pattern 70a in the left and right columns is , an up-and-down motion performance is performed.In this way, here, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode B is different from the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode A.

In the middle row, the unique symbol "NEXT" as the performance symbol 70a arrives not on the second fluctuating route of the annular scroll but on the first fluctuating route of the vertical scroll (FIG. 29(c2)). During the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the unique symbol in the middle row is displayed as a fluctuation stop at a predetermined position, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance using the unique symbol is executed. The variation stop suggestion performance of the unique symbol is executed in a mode T different from the mode B of the variation stop suggestion production of the second variation route. In addition, as a type of variation stop suggestion production in the mode T, a stop sound T in a mode different from that when the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns temporarily stop is output (FIG. 29 (d2). At this time, The unique symbols in the row are different from the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows in that the action effects of the constituent elements of the unique symbols are not executed. Similarly to the production pattern 70a in the left row, it may be in a temporary stop state with a production motion that swings up and down, but in the embodiment, a production motion in which the entire unique symbol in the middle row is expanded or contracted is performed. The performance operation mode is different between the right column and the left column.

In the embodiment, when the unique symbol temporarily stops (pseudo-continuous performance: success), the performance symbol 70a is re-varied after a predetermined fluctuating continuous performance is executed (FIG. 29(e2)). Note that the continuous fluctuation performance may be omitted. In addition, in the embodiment, if the unique symbol does not temporarily stop (pseudo-series performance: failure), for example, because the unique symbol has gone too far, a normal symbol is displayed as the middle row performance symbol 70a, and a mode that matches the fluctuation path B is shown. The variation stop suggestion effect of B is executed.

Although not shown, in a fluctuating performance that includes a pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-variation), the left and right symbols "X" and "Y" (or "X" and "X") stops, the middle symbol "NEXT" stops, and the left and right middle symbols temporarily stop in the predetermined mode "X, NEXT, Y" (or "X, NEXT, X"), then the left and right By restarting the symbol inside, a pseudo-run is performed, and the number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) is the number of pseudo-runs.

Here, when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, it is easier to execute the case of transitioning to the ready-to-win performance than the case of not transitioning to the ready-to-win performance. In addition, for example, the re-fluctuation after executing the second pseudo-sequential effect is easier to transition to the reach effect than the re-fluctuation after executing the first pseudo-sequential effect, and the number of times the pseudo-sequential effect is repeated The greater the number, the easier it is to execute the reach effect.

Then, before temporarily stopping the production pattern 70a in the left and right middle rows with the final temporary stop mode "XXX" (hit pattern), for example, in "SP Reach", a mission failure is performed, and in "SPSP Reach", a battle is performed. After performing a presentation of defeat, a temporary stop is made in the pre-final temporary stop mode "XYX" corresponding to a loss of reach, and a revival that suggests that the pre-final temporary stop mode "XYX" will be restored to the final temporary stop mode "XXX". Suggestion effects can be executed (for example, see FIG. 37), and in other words, the system may be configured such that there are cases in which revival suggestion effects are executed and cases in which they are not executed.

For example, (1) from a temporary stop state where the left and right middle symbols are in the pre-final stop mode "XYX", (2) a revival suggestion effect is executed, and then (3) the left and right middle symbols are in the pre-final temporary stop mode "XYX". XYX'' is restored to the final temporary stop mode "XXX," and the final temporary stop mode "XXX" is used for temporary stop. (4) The final temporary stop mode "XXX" is used as the stop mode to perform the actual stop.

Also, the jackpots may be advantageous to the player in the order of second jackpot < third jackpot < first jackpot. For example, the stopping pattern corresponding to the first jackpot is "777", and the stopping pattern corresponding to the second jackpot is "777". Examples include "222," "444," "666," and "888," and the stopping modes corresponding to the third jackpot are "111," "333," "555," and "999."

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, before the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", the final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" corresponding to the second or third jackpot is ”, and from the final temporary stop mode “XaXaXa” (“222” etc.) corresponding to the second jackpot, the final temporary stop mode “XXX” (“333” etc.) corresponding to the third jackpot or the first jackpot. or "777"), and from the final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" (such as "333") corresponding to the third jackpot, to the final temporary suspension mode "XXX" (corresponding to the first jackpot). It is possible to execute a promotion suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of promotion to "777"), that is, it may be configured such that there are cases where the promotion suggestion effect is executed and cases where it is not executed.

For example, (1) the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows are temporarily stopped in the pre-end temporary stop mode "222", (2) the promotion suggestion performance is executed, and then (3) the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows are Temporary stop is performed in the final temporary stop mode "222" which is the same as the pre-final temporary stop mode, and (4) the final temporary stop mode "222" is used as the stop mode to perform the actual stop. Alternatively, (2) after the promotion suggestion performance is executed, (5) the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop in the final temporary stop mode "333", which is one step up from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and (6) The final temporary stop mode "333" is used as the stop mode to perform the actual stop. Alternatively, (2) after the promotion suggestion performance is executed, (7) the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop in the final temporary stop mode "777", which is two steps up from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and (8) The final temporary stop mode "777" may be used as the stop mode for the final stop.

In addition, (1) the symbols on the left and right are in the pre-final temporary stop mode "333" from the temporary stop state, (2) the promotion suggestion effect is executed, and then (3) the left and right middle symbols are in the pre-final temporary stop mode. Temporary stop is performed using the same final temporary stop mode "333", and (4) the final temporary stop mode "333" is used as the stop mode to perform a permanent stop. Alternatively, (2) after the promotion suggestion effect is executed, (5) the symbols on the left and right center temporarily stop in the final temporary stop mode "777" which is one step up from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and (6) that final temporary stop mode. The main stop may be performed using the stop mode "777" as the stop mode.

Therefore, in a variable performance in which a promotion suggestion performance is performed, if the final temporary suspension mode "XXX" is not promoted from the pre-final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" through the promotion suggestion production, the pre-final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" is If the final temporary suspension mode "XXX" is set to be the same as the originally determined suspension mode and is promoted from the final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" through a promotion suggestion effect, the final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" However, the stopping mode may be set to be the same as the stopping mode corresponding to a jackpot that is less advantageous than the jackpot corresponding to the initially determined stopping mode.

The fluctuation stop suggestion performance includes performance elements in the performance pattern 70a, such as performance such as the movement of the performance pattern 70a itself, performance such as the movement of the constituent elements of the performance pattern 70a, and performance such as the appearance of incidental elements accompanying the performance pattern 70a. , performance elements based on images on the screen other than the performance design 70a, performance elements using output devices other than the screen such as the audio output device 331 and the light emitting device, etc. can be executed alone or in combination.
Even if the production pattern 70a is a unique pattern, the fluctuation stop suggestion effect includes effects such as the movement of the specific pattern itself, effects such as the movement of constituent elements of the specific pattern, and the appearance of incidental elements accompanying the specific pattern. Execute performance elements in a unique design such as the performance of a unique design, performance elements using images on a screen other than the unique design, performance elements using an output device other than the screen such as the audio output device 331 or a light emitting device, etc., singly or in combination. You may also do so.

As mentioned above, in the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a in the variation production of the first variation route of vertical scrolling is stopped, the variation stop suggestion production of mode A and the variation stop display of the production pattern 70a are performed. It is doable. In addition, in the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a in the variation production of the second variation route of the annular scroll is stopped, the variation stop suggestion production and production symbol of the mode B different from the mode A of the first variation route. It is possible to execute the fluctuation stop display of 70a.

In the embodiment, in the variation production of the first variation route of vertical scrolling, for example, after a pseudo continuous production (specific production) in which the production symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, a fluctuation stop suggestion by the normal symbol is performed. It is possible to perform a variation stop suggestion performance in a mode T different from the mode A of the effect. Further, in the variation performance of the second variation route of the annular scroll, a mode B different from mode A of the first variation route is executed as a variation stop suggestion production using a normal symbol. However, in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path of the annular scroll, for example, after a pseudo continuous performance (specific performance) in which the performance symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance using the normal symbol is executed. It is possible to perform a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from the mode B of . That is, in either the first variation route or the second variation route, if a pseudo continuous production (specific production) in which the production symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, the mode of the first variation route A variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from mode A and mode B of the second variation route is executed. In addition, regardless of whether the first variation route or the second variation route, if a pseudo continuous production (specific production) in which the production symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, the variation in the common aspect T It can also be said that a stop suggestion effect is executed. In this way, by executing the variation stop suggestion performance of the mode T different from the mode A and mode B, the value of the pseudo-continuous performance (specific performance) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Here, the different aspects include differences in production content, production period, number of production elements, presence or absence of production, etc.

In the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, for example, after a pseudo continuous performance (specific performance) in which the performance symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, mode A of a variation stop suggestion performance using the normal symbol. In the execution of a variation stop suggestion production in a different mode T, or in the variation production of the second variation path of the annular scroll, for example, a pseudo continuous production (specific production) in which the production pattern 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol. After the execution, either one of the mode B of the variation stop suggestion performance using the normal symbol and the execution of the variation stop suggestion production of a different mode T may be performed. For example, only when a pseudo continuous effect is executed on the first variation route, the variation stop suggestion effect of aspect T is performed, whereas after the pseudo continuous effect is executed on the second variation route, aspect B and aspect Examples include executing a variation stop suggestion performance in a mode different from T, restricting execution of part or all of the variation stop suggestion production, and executing a variation stop suggestion production in mode B. Note that the above relationship between the first variable route and the second variable route may be interchanged.

As an example of a specific performance, we have cited a pseudo-continuous performance in which the performance symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a special symbol, but this is not limited to, for example, a transformation performance such as an eye catch used to change a fluctuating path, or an SP In order to execute a return performance to return to the normal performance state (attracting the player's attention) from a reach performance or SPSP reach performance, and other performances performed in a fluctuation performance, and a variation stop suggestion performance of mode T. It can also be used as a key.

In the embodiment, when the variation stop suggestion effect of aspect T is executed, a pseudo continuous effect (specific effect) is executed, so that the variation stop of aspect A or aspect B without pseudo continuous effect (specific effect) is executed. The ready-to-reach performance is more likely to be executed when the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is performed with a pseudo-continuous performance (specific performance), rather than when the suggestion performance is performed. When the performance symbols 70a in the left-center right row are aligned to become a "hit", it is assumed that the performance symbols 70a in the left row and the performance symbols 70a in the right row are aligned and the ready-to-win performance is executed. Then, when the performance symbols 70a in the left-center right column are aligned and a "hit" is reached, the normal gaming state shifts to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is better to change from a normal gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (time saving, jackpot, etc.) when the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is executed than when the variation stop suggestion production of mode A or mode B is executed. It can be said that it is easy to migrate. If it is in the time-saving gaming state, the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the jackpot is better when the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is executed than when the variation stop suggestion production of mode A or mode B is executed. It can be said that it is easy to do.

In the embodiment, in the variation presentation of the variation presentation of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, the normal mode is set during the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion presentation until the execution of the variation stop display of the presentation pattern 70a. When the variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from the mode A is executed, it is easier to shift to a game state advantageous to the player than when the variation stop suggestion performance of the mode T is not executed. In the variation production of the variation production on the second variation route of the annular scroll, mode B, which is the normal mode, and mode B during the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion production until the execution of the variation stop display of the production pattern 70a. When the variation stop suggestion performance of a different aspect T is executed, it is easier for the player to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player than when the variation stop suggestion performance of the aspect T is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation level that the variation stop suggestion effect of mode T will be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the variation presentation of the variation presentation of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, mode A which is the normal mode during the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion presentation until the execution of the variation stop display of the production pattern 70a. It is easier for the player to shift to an advantageous gaming state when the variation stop suggestion effect with a different aspect T is executed than when the variation stop suggestion effect with the aspect T is not executed. In the variation production of the variation production of the second variation route, in the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion production to the execution of the variation stop display of the production pattern 70a, a mode T different from mode B which is the normal mode. Even if it is more difficult to shift to a game state advantageous to the player when the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed than when the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of aspect T is not executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player. The ease of migration may be the same. Note that the above relationship between the first variable route and the second variable route may be interchanged.

According to the example of FIG. 29, it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance (predetermined performance) of the same motif, regardless of whether it is a variable performance on the first variable route or a variable performance on the second variable route. In the embodiment, the same singular symbol is used in the pseudo-continuous presentation for both the variable presentation of the first variable path and the variable presentation of the second variable path, but the unique pattern of the first variable path and the second Even if part or all of the shape etc. is different from the unique pattern of the fluctuation path, it can be said that the motifs are the same, such as when the content suggesting the continuation (development) of fluctuation is the same. The advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous for the player is when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable effect of the second variable path than when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable effect of the first variable path. It may be made easier to migrate. By doing this, the degree of expectation changes depending on what type of variable route variable performance is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Not limited to the above relationship, it is more advantageous for the player when a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable effect of the first variable path than when a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable effect of the second variable path. It may be possible to make it easier to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 29-2, execution of part or all of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect may be restricted during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the unique symbol in the middle row is displayed as a fluctuation stop at a predetermined position. In the embodiment, during the variation stop suggestion period of the unique symbol, the output of a stop sound and the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance by the constituent elements of the unique symbol are restricted. In the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, for example, after a pseudo continuous performance (specific performance) in which the performance symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of the unique symbol is executed. It is possible to limit the variation and stop display of the unique symbol (FIG. 29-2 (a1) to (e1)). In the variation performance of the second variation path of the annular scroll, for example, after a pseudo continuous performance (specific performance) in which the performance symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of the unique symbol is executed. It is possible to perform a variable stop display of a unique symbol by restricting (FIG. 29-2 (a2) to (e2)). By doing this, the value of the pseudo-continuous performance can be increased by the difference between the performance after the pseudo-continuous performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the variation production of the first variation route of vertical scrolling, for example, after a pseudo continuous production (specific production) in which the production symbol 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, the execution of the variation stop suggestion production is restricted, or In the variation production of the second variation path of the annular scroll, for example, after a pseudo continuous production (specific production) in which the production pattern 70a is changed from a normal symbol to a unique symbol is executed, the execution of the variation stop suggestion production is restricted. You may perform either one of the following. For example, only when a pseudo continuous effect is executed on the first variation route, the execution of the variation stop suggestion effect is restricted during the variation stop suggestion period of the unique symbol in the middle row, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed on the second variation route. After being executed, the variation stop suggestion performance may be made executable during the variation stop suggestion period of the unique symbol in the middle row. Note that the above relationship between the first variable route and the second variable route may be interchanged.

According to the example of FIG. 29, in the variable presentation of the first variable path of vertical scrolling, the presentation pattern 70a in the normal pattern state flows from top to bottom, exceeds a predetermined stop display position, and bounces back. It is possible to display a variable stop in a first stop mode accompanied by a stop suggesting operation or a variable stop suggestion effect accompanied by the above-mentioned stop sound A or the like. In the variable presentation of the second variable path of the annular scroll, a stopping motion in which the presentation pattern 70a in the normal pattern state flows diagonally upward to downward, bounces back beyond a predetermined stop display position, It is possible to display a variable stop display in a second stop mode accompanied by a variable stop suggestion effect using the above-mentioned stop sound B or the like. In the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when the production pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to the normal pattern and the production (predetermined production) is performed by changing the display of the unique symbol (predetermined production), the above-mentioned first variation is performed. It is possible to display a variable stop in a third stop mode with a stop suggesting action different from the first stop mode (for example, not bouncing) and a variable stop suggestion effect using a different stop sound T or the like. In the variable presentation of the second variable path of the annular scroll, when the presentation pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to the normal pattern and the presentation (predetermined presentation) is performed (predetermined presentation) with the variable display of the unique pattern, as described above. A variable stop display can be performed in a third stop mode with a stop suggesting action different from the second stop mode (for example, not bouncing) and a variable stop suggestion effect using a different stop sound T or the like. Note that the third stopping mode is not limited to a mode in which a specific symbol suddenly appears, but may also be a mode in which a unique symbol suddenly appears and does not follow a variable path (the variable path is unknown). Further, even when a performance using a unique symbol is executed in the middle row, the performance symbols 70a in the right and left columns can be displayed in a variable and static manner in a stopping manner according to the variable path. In this way, in the embodiment, after the predetermined effect in which a unique symbol appears in the middle row is executed, regardless of whether it is the first variable route or the second variable route, the first stop mode and the second stop mode are changed. The unique symbols in the middle row are displayed in a variable and stopped manner in different third stopping modes. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the variable stop display of the third stop mode will be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the example of FIG. 29-2, similarly to the example of FIG. 29-1, in the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling, the effect pattern 70a in the normal pattern state flows from top to bottom to a predetermined position. It is possible to perform a variable stop display in a first stop mode accompanied by a stop suggestion operation such as bouncing back beyond the stop display position, or a variable stop suggestion effect accompanied by the above-mentioned stop sound A or the like. In the variable presentation of the second variable path of the annular scroll, a stopping motion in which the presentation symbol 70a in the normal symbol state flows diagonally from above to diagonally downward, bounces back beyond a predetermined stop display position, It is possible to display a variable stop in a second stop mode accompanied by a variable stop suggestion effect using the above-mentioned stop sound B or the like. According to the example of FIG. 29-2, in the variable presentation of the first variable path of vertical scrolling, the presentation pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to the normal pattern, and a presentation (predetermined presentation) is performed by changing the display of the unique symbol (predetermined presentation). Unlike the first stop mode described above, a variable stop display can be performed in a third stop mode that does not involve a variable stop suggestion effect. In the variable presentation of the second variable path of the annular scroll, when the presentation pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to the normal pattern and the presentation (predetermined presentation) is performed (predetermined presentation) with the variable display of the unique pattern, as described above, Unlike the second stop mode, a variable stop display is possible in a third stop mode that does not involve a variable stop suggestion effect. Note that the third stopping mode is not limited to a mode in which a specific symbol suddenly appears, and may be a mode in which a unique symbol suddenly appears, which does not follow a variable path (the variable path is unknown). Further, even when a performance using a unique symbol is executed in the middle row, the performance symbols 70a in the right and left columns can be displayed in a variable and static manner in a stopping manner according to the variable path. In this way, in the example of FIG. 29-2 as well, after the predetermined effect in which a unique symbol appears in the middle row is executed, regardless of whether it is the first variation route or the second variation route, the first stop mode and In a third stopping mode different from the second stopping mode, the unique symbols in the middle row are displayed in a variable and stationary manner. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the variable stop display of the third stop mode will be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, in the variable presentation of the first variable route and the variable presentation of the second variable route, the presentation symbols are arranged in a specific arrangement (arrangement in which the identification information is not aligned) including presentation symbols 70a with different identification information. It is possible to execute a specific variation effect in which the symbol 70a is displayed in a fixed manner (a variation effect in which losing symbols are displayed in a fixed manner). Then, in the specific fluctuation performance, a specific sound performance is executed in which a specific sound (stop sound) is output during a fluctuation stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the fluctuation stop suggestion performance until the fluctuation stop is displayed. It has become. As shown in FIGS. 29, 29-2, and 29-3, the specific variation performance may include a unique symbol "NEXT" as a performance symbol 70a with different identification information.

In the example shown in FIG. 29, even if the specific variation effect includes a unique symbol, the specific sound (stop sound ) is running a specific sound production that outputs. More specifically, a specific sound production is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the production pattern 70a in the left column, a specific sound production is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the production pattern 70a in the right column, and further, A specific sound production is executed during a period in which a specific symbol stops changing.

In the example shown in FIG. 29-2, a specific sound production is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the production pattern 70a in the left column, and a specific sound production is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the production pattern 70a in the right column. However, the execution of specific sound effects is restricted during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the unique symbol in the middle row. In this way, in a specific variation production that includes a unique symbol, a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) during the variation stop suggestion period from when the specific symbol starts the stop suggestion production until the variation stop display is displayed. is restricted. In this way, the example shown in FIG. 29-2 is a production based on a variation display of a unique symbol changed to a normal symbol, regardless of whether it is a specific variation production on the first variation route or a specific variation production on the second variation route B. When the (specific effect) is executed (after being executed), the execution of the specific sound effect that outputs the specific sound (stop sound) can be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the pseudo-continuous performance will be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the specific variation production of the first variation route, when the production (specific production) by the variation display of the unique symbol changed to the normal symbol is executed (after being executed), a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) While restricting the execution of Execution of a specific sound effect that outputs a sound) may not be restricted. In addition, in the specific variation performance of the second variation route, when the production (specific production) with the variation display of the unique symbol changed to the normal symbol is executed (after being executed), a specific sound (stop sound) is output. While restricting the execution of the sound production, when a production (specific production) with a variation display of a unique symbol changed to a normal symbol is executed (after being executed) in a specific variation production of the first variation route, a specific sound Execution of a specific sound effect that outputs (stop sound) may not be restricted.

In the example shown in FIG. 29, in the variation performance of the first variation route, during the variation stop suggestion period from when the production pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion production until the variation stop display, a predetermined sound (depending on the variation route) It is possible to perform the first sound production that outputs a stop sound (usually associated with a symbol). In addition, in the variation performance of the second variation route, a predetermined sound (according to the variation route, the normal symbol It is possible to execute the first sound production that outputs a linked stop sound). In the variation production of the variation production of the first variation route, it is possible to execute a second sound production that outputs a specific sound (stop sound linked to a specific symbol) different from the predetermined sound during the variation stop suggestion period. Further, in the variation production of the variation production of the second variation route, it is possible to execute a second sound production that outputs a specific sound (stop sound linked to a specific symbol) different from the predetermined sound during the variation stop suggestion period.

In the example shown in FIG. 29, in the variation performance of the first variation route, the normal symbol different from the unique symbol is more important than the variation performance of a loss in which the unique symbol "NEXT" (the performance symbol 70a having specific identification information) is displayed in a fluctuating and stopped manner. The first sound performance is easier to execute in the losing fluctuating performance in which (the performance pattern 70a having predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information) is displayed in a fluctuating and stopped manner. In addition, in the fluctuating performance of the second fluctuating path, the normal symbol (with specific identification information) that is different from the unique symbol is better than the fluctuating fluctuating performance in which the unique symbol "NEXT" (the performance symbol 70a with specific identification information) is displayed as a variable stop. The first sound performance is easier to execute in the losing fluctuating performance in which the performance symbols 70a) having different predetermined identification information are displayed in a fluctuating and stopping manner. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the pseudo-continuous performance will be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, it may be possible to execute both the first sound performance and the second sound performance for at least one of the normal symbol and the unique symbol, but even in this case, the unique symbol “NEXT ” (performance symbol 70a having specific identification information) is displayed in a fluctuating and static manner, a normal symbol different from the unique symbol (performance symbol 70a having predetermined identification information different from specific identification information) is displayed in a fluctuating and static manner. It is preferable that the first sound performance is more likely to be executed in the variation performance of the loss.

Here, even in a losing fluctuating performance in which the normal symbols are displayed in a fluctuating and static manner, if a specific condition is met (for example, a performance with high expectations for jackpot or reach completion is being performed), the second sound performance will be executed. However, in this case as well, it is preferable to make the first sound performance easier to execute than the second sound performance (execution ratio of the second sound performance<execution ratio of the first sound performance). In addition, in the embodiment, in the case of a losing fluctuating performance in which a normal symbol (the performance symbol 70a having predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information) different from the unique symbol is displayed in a variable stop state, execution of the second sound performance is restricted. The first sound performance is executed.

Note that the first sound performance and the second sound performance may differ in some or all of the elements such as the content of the tone, the volume of the sound, the execution timing within the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the length of the execution period, etc. The rest of the elements may be the same as long as some of the elements are different. Further, even if some or all of the accompanying performances, such as effects, executed in conjunction with the first sound performance and the second sound performance are different, some or all of the accompanying performances may be the same.

FIGS. 29-3(a1) to 29-3(e1) show the case where the effect symbol 70a is variablely effected on the third variable path. The first variation path is a case where the performance symbol 70a rotates around the vertical axis on the screen. For example, when the performance symbol 70a is fluctuating in the third fluctuation path of the vertical axis scroll (Figure 29-3 (a2)), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol 70a in the left column and the performance symbol 70a in the right column are fluctuating. The production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left column and the right column, the variation stop suggestion performance of mode C corresponding to the third variation path is executed. In addition, as a type of variation stop suggestion production of mode C, a stop sound C is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns are displayed as variation stop (temporary stop). Fig. 29 (b2).Here, although the variation stop suggestion effect of aspect C may be the same as that of aspect A or aspect B, in the embodiment, a variation stop suggestion effect of a different aspect from aspect A and aspect B may be executed. Then, in the middle row, the special symbol "NEXT" as the production symbol 70a arrives in a vertical scroll different from the third variable path of the vertical axis scroll (Figure 29-3 (c2)), and temporarily stops (Figure 29-3 (c2)). 29-3(d1)).

According to the example in FIG. 29-3, in the variable effect of the second variable path of the annular scroll, the effect (predetermined effect) by the variable display of the unique symbol changed to the normal symbol is executed (after being executed). , it is possible to display the unique symbol in a variable and stationary manner on a vertical scrolling variation route different from the second variation route without going through the circular scroll of the normal mode as the second variation route. Similarly, in the variation performance of the third variation route of vertical axis scrolling, when the production (predetermined production) by the variation display of the unique symbol changed to the normal symbol is executed (after being executed), It is possible to display the unique symbol in a variable and stationary manner on a vertical scroll variable path different from the third variable path without going through the vertical axis scroll of the normal mode. In this way, in the example of Figure 29-3, even if the variation performance has a different variation path, when the performance (predetermined performance) is executed by the variation display of the unique symbol changed to the normal symbol, the Switch to variable path. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the pseudo-continuous performance will be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 29-2, in the variable effect of the second variable path of the annular scroll, the effect (predetermined effect) is executed by the variable display of the unique symbol changed to the normal symbol (after being executed) ), and while displaying the unique symbol in a variable and static manner on a vertical scrolling variable path different from the second variable path without going through the annular scroll of the normal mode as the second variable path, the first vertical scrolling variable path In the fluctuating performance, when the performance (predetermined performance) is executed (after being executed) by the fluctuating display of the unique symbol changed to the normal symbol, the unique symbol is may be displayed without changing. Note that the relationship may be opposite to that described above.

In the pseudo-continuous production, we have illustrated changing the production symbol 70a in the middle row from a normal symbol to a special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 29-4, in addition to the normal symbol in the middle row, You may perform a variation effect using a unique symbol. In this case, the timing of the fluctuation stop display of the normal symbols in the middle row and the fluctuation stop display timing of the unique symbols in the middle row may be the same or different. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the normal symbols in the middle row, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be executed or restricted in accordance with the fluctuation path. In the variation stop suggestion period of the unique symbol in the middle row, the variation stop suggestion performance may be executed depending on the variation path, or the execution may be limited.

The matters explained above with reference to the pseudo-continuous effect in which the effect pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a unique pattern or a unique pattern is added are not limited to this, but include conversion effects such as an eye catch used to change the fluctuating path. , SP reach performance, return performance to return to normal performance state (attract player's attention) from SPSP reach performance, and other performances performed in variable performance, the above-mentioned control is applied. may be applied.

In addition, we will give examples of pseudo-continuous performances, and provide explanations such as conversion performances such as eye catch used to change the fluctuating route, SP reach performances, and returning to the normal performance state from SPSP reach performances (players' cautions). In the case of a return effect (to attract people) or other effects performed as a variable effect, the above-mentioned controls do not need to be applied, and even if different controls from the pseudo-continuous effect, such as the opposite control to the pseudo-continuous effect, are performed. good.

In the variable stop display (actual stop, temporary stop) of the production pattern 70a, the production pattern 70a stops for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined manner (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. It looks like this. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular performance symbols 70a such as "357" (for example, a chance pattern), The failure mode is any other mode.

(Reach performance)
Also, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on the image display devices 132 and 133 (sub-liquid crystals), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. It has become.

Here, "reach performance" is a jackpot game executed for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a pattern of variation that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect."

"Normal reach effect" means that the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is stopped in the center area. This is a reach effect that is executed with a fluctuating reach state.

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) It is a reach effect where a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played.

"SPSP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after the normal reach effect or SP reach effect, and where a movie (video, animation, etc.) with a higher production effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach effect or SP reach effect is played. It's about the performance. In addition, also in the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the performance symbol 70a in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed may be displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In the embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning a jackpot lottery.

In the embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation regarding the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

(Example of normal reach variation)
FIG. 30(a1) shows a case of a variable performance of the first variable path of vertical scrolling in the normal game state. The performance symbols 70a having the same identification information in the left column and the right column temporarily stop on the first variable path of vertical scrolling and become a reach (FIG. 30(b1)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns, the variation stop suggestion production of mode A is executed, and for example, stop sound A is output. Incidentally, a fluctuating stop display in a temporary stop state is being executed in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns are slightly swayed (swinging display) so that the performance symbols 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position. .

As shown in FIG. 30(c1), the performance symbol 70a in the middle row, which has different identification information from the left and right rows, temporarily stops on the first variable path, resulting in a loss. At this time, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode A is executed, and for example, stop sound A is output and a fluctuation stop display of the temporary stop state is executed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (FIG. 30(d1)).

In addition, the performance symbol 70a having the same identification information as the left column and the right column in the middle row temporarily stops, resulting in a hit, and after the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, a predetermined winning performance is executed. After this is executed, the game enters a gaming state advantageous to the player. In the case of a win, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode (for winning) different from the variation stop suggestion production of mode A that is normally executed may be executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a.

FIG. 30(a2) shows a case of a variable performance of the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal game state. The performance symbols 70a having the same identification information in the left column and the right column temporarily stop on the second variable path of the annular scroll and become a reach (FIG. 30(b2)). At this time, the variation stop suggestion performance of mode B is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left column and the right column, and for example, stop sound B is output. Incidentally, a fluctuating stop display in a temporary stop state is being executed in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns are slightly swayed (swinging display) so that the performance symbols 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position. .

As shown in FIG. 30(c2), the performance symbol 70a in the middle row, which has different identification information from the left and right rows, temporarily stops on the variable path B, resulting in a loss. At this time, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode B is executed, and for example, stop sound B is output and a fluctuation stop display in the temporary stop state is executed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (FIG. 30(d2)).

It should be noted that the production symbol 70a having the same identification information as the left column and the right column in the middle row temporarily stops, resulting in a hit, and after the production symbol 70a, which had been temporarily stopped, comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, a predetermined winning production is executed. After this is executed, a transition is made to a gaming state advantageous to the player. In the case of a win, a variation stop suggestion performance of a different mode (for winning) from the variation stop suggestion production of mode B that is normally executed may be executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a.

In this way, in the case of a losing normal reach, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation path is executed, and a stop sound in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation path is output. It is supposed to be done.

(Example of SP (SPSP) reach variation effect)
FIG. 31(a1) shows a case of a variable performance of the first variable path of vertical scrolling in the normal game state. The performance symbols 70a having the same identification information in the left column and the right column temporarily stop on the first variable path of vertical scrolling and become a reach (FIG. 31(b1)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left column and the right column, the variation stop suggestion production of mode A is executed and the stop sound A is output. Incidentally, a fluctuating stop display in a temporary stop state is being executed in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns are slightly swayed (swinging display) so that the performance symbols 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position. .

Thereafter, when the SP ready-to-win performance (specific performance) is developed, a development performance (predetermined performance) for developing into the SP ready-to-win performance (attracting the player's attention) is executed. A single development presentation or a plurality of development presentations, such as a first development presentation and a second development presentation, can be set. When executing a plurality of development effects, if a jackpot game is not executed, the first development effect is likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and if a jackpot game is executed, the second development effect is likely to be executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute (execution rate is high). In other words, it is preferable that the second advanced presentation has a higher jackpot expectation than the first advanced presentation. Note that the normal reach effect may be executed for a predetermined period and then switched to the SP ready-to-reach effect. Note that the advanced effect is executed singly or in combination with predetermined image displays such as whiteout, blackout, and effects.

As shown in FIG. 31(c1), in the SP reach effect, the background is switched from the mode A background to the SP background. Then, the effect pattern 70a in the left row is switched to a mode different from the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped (for example, a simple mode with only the identification part), and at the same time, it is reduced in size compared to when it was temporarily stopped and is placed in a different position such as the upper left of the screen. The variable stop display is executed in a temporary stop state. In addition, during the SP reach performance, a symbol whose configuration, size, etc. have changed from a normal symbol may be referred to as a changed symbol. In addition, the production pattern 70a in the right row is switched to a different mode from the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a (for example, a simple mode with only the identification part), and is also reduced in size and placed in a different position, such as the upper right of the screen, compared to when it was temporarily stopped. The variable stop display is executed in a temporary stop state. At this time, the change symbols, which are the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns, which are reduced and temporarily stopped and displayed, repeat predetermined production operations such as swinging left and right.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c1), in the SP reach performance of the embodiment, the performance symbols 70a in the middle row are also different from the normal symbols of the performance symbols 70a on the first variable path (for example, a simple format with only the identification part). ) and switches to an SP variable route (scrolling diagonally from the upper right to the lower left in the embodiment) that is different from the first variable route. The middle row performance symbol 70a may remain on the first variable route, but in the embodiment, it is configured to switch to a different variable route from the first variable route. Then, if necessary, exciting effects such as unillustrated animation cut-ins and battle effects are executed.

If the result of the variable performance is a "loss", the performance symbols "2", "8", and "2", which are the combination of losses, are temporarily stopped on the screen, as shown in FIG. 31 (d1). Ru. The changing symbols in the middle row scrolling on the variable path for SP reach effect are displayed in a variable stop at the center of the screen after performing the variable stop suggestion effect for SP reach in the variable stop suggestion period. Then, the changed symbols in the left column that had been reduced in the upper left corner of the screen are enlarged and displayed in a fixed state on the left side of the screen, and the changed symbols in the right column that had been reduced in the upper right corner of the screen are now displayed on the right side of the screen. The area will be enlarged and the fluctuation will stop appearing. At this time, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column that are lined up in a temporarily stopped state are performing a swinging performance motion. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the mode A corresponding to the first fluctuation path is not executed, and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode is executed, or the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed. Execution of the performance may be restricted. In addition, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row production pattern 70, a stop sound A corresponding to the first fluctuation path may be output, or a stop sound in an SP mode may be output without outputting the stop sound A. , or the output of the stop sound may be limited. In addition, when the middle row performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Lose" may be displayed to notify that the game is a loss.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 31 (e1), a return effect (predetermined effect) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach effect (specific effect). be done. Specifically, a return image (for example, a door image) is displayed on the screen so that visual recognition of the SP reach effect effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) is restricted. At this time, the special symbol TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 31 (f1), the SP background is switched to the mode A background, the change pattern effect pattern 70a is switched, and the normal effect pattern 70a of the first variation path A is changed. are displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the performance symbols "2", "8", and "2" of the first variable route are stopped and displayed as normal symbols. That is, before the return effect is executed, the changed symbols are displayed in a fixed and variable manner, but after the return effect is executed, the changed symbols return to the normal symbols. In addition, the performance symbols 70a in each row do not stop from the fluctuating state of the first fluctuating path, but when the return performance is completed, they temporarily stop at predetermined positions on the left, center, and right of the screen and become normal symbols. appears. Further, after execution of the return performance, a fluctuation stop display is performed in a temporary stop state without performing a fluctuation stop suggestion performance. Furthermore, the output of the stop sound is also limited. Then, after the main stop, the next variable effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the result of the fluctuating performance is a "jackpot", the winning combination of performance symbols "2", "2", and "2" will be tentatively displayed on the screen, as shown in Figure 31-3 (d1). will be stopped. The changing symbols in the middle row scrolling on the variable path for SP reach performance are displayed in a variable stop at the center of the screen after performing the variable stop suggestion performance for SP reach in the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the changed symbols in the left column that had been reduced in the upper left corner of the screen are enlarged to the left area of the screen and displayed in a fixed state, and the changed symbols in the right column that had been reduced in the upper right corner of the screen are now displayed on the right side of the screen. The area will expand and appear to stop fluctuating. At this time, the performance symbols 70a in the left-center right column that are lined up in a temporarily stopped state are performing an oscillating performance motion. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the mode A corresponding to the first fluctuation path is not executed, and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode is executed, or the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed. Execution of the performance may be restricted. In addition, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row production symbol 70, a stop sound A corresponding to the first fluctuation path is output, or a stop sound of a winning pattern is output without outputting the stop sound A, Alternatively, the output of the stop sound may be limited. It should be noted that when the middle row of performance symbols 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Win" may be displayed to notify that it is a hit.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, as shown in Figure 31-3 (e1), the screen displays a return effect (predetermined effect) to return from the SP reach effect (specific effect) (to attract the player's attention). is executed. Specifically, a return image (for example, a door image) is displayed on the screen so that visual recognition of the SP reach effect effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) is restricted. At this time, the special symbol TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 31-3 (f1), the SP background is switched to the mode A background, and the SP performance pattern 70a is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a of the first variation path. is displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the production symbols "2", "2", and "2" of the first variable route are stopped and displayed as normal symbols. That is, before the return effect is executed, the changed symbols are displayed in a fixed and variable manner, but after the return effect is executed, the changed symbols return to the normal symbols. In addition, the performance symbols 70a in each row do not stop from the fluctuating state of the first fluctuating path, but when the return performance is completed, they temporarily stop at predetermined positions on the left, center, and right of the screen and become normal symbols. appears. Further, after execution of the return performance, a fluctuation stop display is performed in a temporary stop state without performing a fluctuation stop suggestion performance. Further, the output of the normal stop sound may also be limited, and a hit stop sound may be output. Thereafter, after the performance symbols 70a come to a full stop, the opening performance of the jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, when winning, the return performance (Fig. 31-3 (e1) and (Fig. 31-3 (f1)) is omitted, and the opening performance of the jackpot game is executed after the performance symbol 70a comes to a final stop. It's okay.

FIG. 31(a2) shows a case of a variable performance of the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal game state. The performance symbols 70a having the same identification information in the left column and the right column temporarily stop on the second variable path of the annular scroll and become a reach (FIG. 31(b1)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left column and the right column, the variation stop suggestion production of mode B is executed and the stop sound B is output. Incidentally, a fluctuating stop display in a temporary stop state is being executed in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns are slightly swayed (swinging display) so that the performance symbols 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position. .

Thereafter, when the SP ready-to-win performance (specific performance) is developed, a development performance (predetermined performance) for developing into the SP ready-to-win performance (attracting the player's attention) is executed. A single development presentation or a plurality of development presentations, such as a first development presentation and a second development presentation, can be set. When executing multiple development effects, if a jackpot game is not executed, the first development effect is likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and if a jackpot game is executed, the second development effect is likely to be executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute (execution rate is high). In other words, it is preferable that the second advanced presentation has a higher jackpot expectation than the first advanced presentation. Note that the normal reach effect may be executed for a predetermined period and then switched to the SP reach effect. Note that the advanced effect is executed singly or in combination with predetermined image displays such as whiteout, blackout, and effects.

As shown in FIG. 31(c2), in the SP reach effect, the background is switched from the mode B background to the SP background. Then, the effect pattern 70a in the left row is switched to a mode different from the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped (for example, a simple mode with only the identification part), and at the same time, it is reduced in size compared to when it was temporarily stopped and is placed in a different position such as the upper left of the screen. The variable stop display is executed in a temporary stop state. In addition, during the SP reach performance, a symbol whose configuration, size, etc. have changed from a normal symbol may be referred to as a changed symbol. In addition, the production pattern 70a in the right row is switched to a mode different from the production pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped (for example, a simple mode with only the identification part), and is also reduced in size compared to when it was temporarily stopped and placed in a different position such as the upper right of the screen. The variable stop display is executed in a temporary stop state. At this time, the change symbols, which are the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns, which are reduced and temporarily stopped and displayed, repeat a predetermined production operation such as swinging left and right.

As shown in FIG. 31(c2), in the SP reach performance of the embodiment, the performance symbols 70a in the middle row are also different from the normal symbols of the performance symbols 70a on the second variable path (for example, a simple format with only the identification part). ) and switches to an SP variable route (scrolling diagonally from the upper right to the lower left in the embodiment) that is different from the second variable route. Although the middle row performance symbol 70a may remain on the second variation route, in the embodiment, it is configured to switch to a variation route different from the second variation route. Then, as necessary, exciting effects such as unillustrated animation cut-ins and battle effects are executed.

If the result of the variable performance is a "loss", the performance symbols "2", "8", and "2", which are the combination of losses, are temporarily stopped on the screen, as shown in FIG. 31 (d2). Ru. The changing symbols in the middle row scrolling on the variable path for SP reach performance are displayed in a variable stop at the center of the screen after performing the variable stop suggestion performance for SP reach in the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the changed symbols in the left column that had been reduced in the upper left corner of the screen are enlarged to the left area of the screen and displayed in a fixed state, and the changed symbols in the right column that had been reduced in the upper right corner of the screen are now displayed on the right side of the screen. The area will expand and appear to stop fluctuating. At this time, the performance symbols 70a in the left-center right column that are lined up in a temporarily stopped state are performing an oscillating performance motion. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the mode B corresponding to the second fluctuation path is not executed, and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode is executed, or the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed. Execution of the performance may be restricted. Also, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row production pattern 70, a stop sound B corresponding to the second fluctuation path is output, or a stop sound in the SP mode is output without outputting the stop sound B. , or the output of the stop sound may be limited. It should be noted that when the middle row performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "lost" may be displayed to notify that it is a loss.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 31 (e2), a return effect (predetermined effect) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach effect (specific effect). be done. Specifically, a return image (for example, a door image) is displayed on the screen so that visual recognition of the SP reach effect effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) is restricted. At this time, the special symbol TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 31 (f2), the background for SP is switched to the background for mode B, the effect pattern 70a of the changed pattern is switched, and the normal effect pattern 70a of the second variation path is displayed. (visual recognition is permitted), and the performance symbols "2", "8", and "2" on the second variable route are stopped and displayed as normal symbols. That is, before the return effect is executed, the changed symbols are displayed in a fixed and variable manner, but after the return effect is executed, the changed symbols return to the normal symbols. In addition, the performance symbols 70a in each row do not stop from the fluctuating state of the second fluctuating path, but when the return performance is completed, they temporarily stop at predetermined positions on the left, center, and right of the screen and become normal symbols. appears. Further, after execution of the return performance, a fluctuation stop display is performed in a temporary stop state without executing a fluctuation stop suggestion performance. Furthermore, the output of the stop sound is also limited. Then, after the main stop, the next variable effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the result of the fluctuating performance is a "jackpot", the winning combination of performance symbols "2", "2", and "2" will be tentatively displayed on the screen, as shown in Figure 31-3 (d2). will be stopped. The changing symbols in the middle row scrolling on the variable path for SP reach performance are displayed in a variable stop at the center of the screen after performing the variable stop suggestion performance for SP reach in the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the changed symbols in the left column that had been reduced in the upper left corner of the screen are enlarged to the left area of the screen and displayed in a fixed state, and the changed symbols in the right column that had been reduced in the upper right corner of the screen are now displayed on the right side of the screen. The area will be enlarged and the fluctuation will stop appearing. At this time, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column that are lined up in a temporarily stopped state are performing a swinging performance motion. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the mode B corresponding to the first fluctuation path is not executed, and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode is executed, or the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed. Execution of the performance may be restricted. In addition, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row production symbol 70, a stop sound B corresponding to the second fluctuation path is output, or a stop sound for a winning pattern is output without outputting the stop sound B, Alternatively, the output of the stop sound may be limited. It should be noted that when the middle row of performance symbols 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Win" may be displayed to notify that it is a hit.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, as shown in Figure 31-3 (e2), the screen displays a return effect (predetermined effect) for returning from the SP reach effect (specific effect) (attracting the player's attention). is executed. Specifically, a return image (for example, a door image) is displayed on the screen so that visual recognition of the effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) of the SP reach effect is regulated. At this time, the special symbol TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 31-3 (f2), the SP background is switched to the mode A background, and the SP effect pattern 70a is switched to the normal effect pattern 70a of the second variation path. is displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the performance symbols "2", "2", and "2" of the second variable route are stopped and displayed as normal symbols. That is, before the return effect is executed, the changed symbols are displayed in a fixed and variable manner, but after the return effect is executed, the changed symbols return to the normal symbols. In addition, the performance symbols 70a in each row do not stop from the fluctuating state of the second fluctuating path, but when the return performance is completed, they temporarily stop at predetermined positions on the left, center, and right of the screen and become normal symbols. appears. Further, after execution of the return performance, a fluctuation stop display is performed in a temporary stop state without performing a fluctuation stop suggestion performance. Further, the output of the normal stop sound may also be limited, and a hit stop sound may be output. Thereafter, after the performance symbols 70a come to a full stop, the opening performance of the jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, when winning, the return performance (Fig. 31-3 (e2) and (Fig. 31-3 (f2)) is omitted, and the opening performance of the jackpot game is executed after the performance symbol 70a comes to a final stop. It's okay.

In addition, when the result of the variable performance is a "jackpot", the performance pattern 70a which is a jackpot combination is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 31(d2). Thereafter, after the performance symbol 70a comes to a full stop (after performing a return performance (which may be in a different form from the return performance at the time of loss)), the opening performance of the jackpot game will be executed. At this time, a stop sound (hit suggestion sound) may be output during the stop suggestion period until the tentative stop, and a stop sound (hit confirmation sound) may be output during the stop suggestion period after the return performance.

Although SP reach has been described as an example, SP reach may be similar to SP reach.

In the variation performance of the first variation route of vertical scrolling, it is possible to perform a specific variation performance in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed in a different arrangement (loss mode) while changing and stopping. Similarly, in the variable effect of the second variable path of the annular scroll, it is possible to perform a specific variable effect in which the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a different arrangement (losing mode) while changing. In the specific variation performance of the first variation route that results in a loss, it is possible to execute a specific sound performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol 70a is stopped. In the specific variation performance of the second variation route that results in a loss, it is possible to execute a specific sound performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol 70a is stopped.

In the variable presentation of the first variable route and the variable presentation of the second variable route, there are cases where the reach effect is not executed and there are cases where the reach effect is executed and there is a loss. In the variation production of the first variation route, in the case of a loss in which the reach production is not executed, a stop sound A is output as a sound production executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the production pattern 70a in a specific row (for example, the middle row). . On the other hand, in the case of a loss when the reach effect is executed in the variation effect of the first variation route, SP There is a pause sound output and a silence state after the return performance. In the variation production of the second variation route, in the case of a loss in which the reach production is not executed, a stop sound B is output as a sound production executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the production pattern 70a in a specific row (for example, the middle row). . On the other hand, in the case of a loss when the reach effect is executed in the variation effect of the second variation route, SP There is a pause sound output and a silence state after the return performance.

According to the embodiment, in the variable presentation of the first variable route, the variable presentation of a loss in which a reach effect is not executed and the variable presentation of a loss in which a reach effect is executed are performed in the specific row (middle row) production pattern 70a. The performance mode of the sound performance that is executed during the stop suggestion period from when the fluctuating stop suggesting performance is started until the fluctuating stop display is started is different. Similarly, in the variation performance of the second variation route, the variation performance stops at the performance pattern 70a of the specific row (middle row) between the loss fluctuation performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the loss fluctuation performance in which the reach performance is executed. The production mode of the sound production executed during the stop suggestion period from the start of the suggestion production until the variable stop display is different.
By doing so, it is possible to increase the level of expectation when the ready-to-win effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variation production of the first variation route, the display mode when the production pattern 70a is displayed in a variable and stopped manner is a normal symbol corresponding to the first variation route (first display mode), and a SP symbol in a mode different from the normal symbol. There is a changed pattern (a second display mode different from the first display mode). In addition, in the variation production of the second variation route, the display mode when the production pattern 70a is displayed in a variable and stopped manner is a normal symbol (first display mode) corresponding to the second variation route, and an SP in a mode different from the normal symbol. There is a changed symbol (a second display mode different from the first display mode) for use.

In the losing fluctuating performance in which the SP reach performance is executed, when the performance symbols 70a in the left column and right column (first column) are displayed in a variable stop state, when the normal symbols corresponding to the fluctuating route are displayed, and when the SP In some cases, a changed pattern for the game may be displayed. In the losing fluctuating performance where the SP reach performance is executed, when the performance symbols 70a in the middle row (second row) are displayed in a fixed state, normal symbols corresponding to the fluctuating path are displayed, and changes for SP Sometimes a pattern is displayed. In the losing fluctuating performance in which the SP reach performance is executed, the right column and the left column are fluctuated and displayed with normal symbols when reaching the reach, and are also fluctuated and displayed with the normal symbols after the execution of the return performance. On the other hand, in the losing fluctuating performance where the SP reach performance is performed, the middle row is displayed with a change symbol for SP in the SP reach performance and is displayed as a variable stop, and only changes with the normal symbol after the return performance is executed. Stop display.

In the variation production of the first variation route, a specific sound production that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) can be executed during the stop suggestion period from when the production pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion production until the variation stop display is displayed. It is. In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path of loss where the SP reach performance is executed, the right and left columns can execute a specific sound performance during the fluctuation stop suggestion period in which the fluctuation stop is displayed with a normal symbol when reaching the reach. However, the execution of the specific sound performance is limited during the fluctuation stop suggestion period in which the fluctuation stop is displayed with a normal symbol after the return performance is executed. In addition, in the variation production of the second variation route, a specific sound production that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) during the stop suggestion period from when the production pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion production until the variation stop display is performed. It is doable. In the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path of loss where the SP reach performance is executed, the right and left columns can execute a specific sound performance during the fluctuation stop suggestion period in which the fluctuation stop is displayed with a normal symbol when reaching the reach. However, the execution of the specific sound performance is limited during the fluctuation stop suggestion period in which the fluctuation stop is displayed with a normal symbol after the return performance is executed.

In this way, in the embodiment, in the variable presentation of the first variable route, in the case of a losing variable presentation in which a reach effect is executed, the placement pattern 70a in the left column or the middle column is displayed in a fixed manner than in the middle column. When the effect pattern 70a is displayed as a normal pattern (first display mode) in a variable stop manner, it is more difficult to output a stop sound (specific sound effect). In addition, in the variable presentation of the second variable route, in the case of a losing variable presentation in which a reach effect is executed, the production symbol 70a in the middle row is more It is more difficult to output a stop sound (specific sound effect) when the normal symbol (first display mode) is displayed in a variable stop manner. By doing so, it is possible to increase the level of expectation when the ready-to-win effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the variation production of the first variation route, it is possible to execute a specific stop production in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop. In the variation performance of the second variation route, it is possible to execute a specific stop production in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop. The specific stop performance includes a first performance mode in which a sound performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) is performed, and a second performance mode that is different from the first performance mode. Here, the specific sound performance of the first performance mode is executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period when the performance symbols 70a in the right and left rows are in the ready-to-reach mode. Examples of the second performance mode include an SP stop sound output during the SP change symbol variation stop suggestion period, and a silent state after a return performance. In the embodiment, the execution of the specific sound production of the first production mode is restricted during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the production pattern in the middle row, and only the second production mode with the SP stop sound or the silent state is executed. ing.

In this way, in the variable presentation of the first variable route, in the case of a losing variable presentation in which the SP reach effect is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left column and right column (first column) are displayed in a fixed manner than when they are displayed in a fixed state. , when the performance symbols 70a in the middle row (second row) are displayed in a variable and static manner, the specific stop performance of the second performance mode is more easily executed. In addition, in the variable presentation of the second variable route, in the case of a losing variable presentation in which the SP reach effect is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left column and right column (first column) are displayed in a medium The specific stop performance of the second performance mode is easier to execute when the performance symbols 70a in the row (second row) are displayed in a variable and static manner. By doing so, it is possible to increase the level of expectation when the ready-to-win effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variation production of the first variation route, in the case of a loss where the reach production is not executed, a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a in the middle row (specific row) will be stopped. is possible. In the variation production of the first variation route, in the case of a loss where the reach production is not executed, when the specific sound production is executed, the normal symbol (variation stop display in the first display mode).In the variation production of the first variation route, In the case of a loss in which the SP reach effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific sound effect that outputs a specific sound during a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect symbol 70a in the middle row (specific column) is stopped.However, , In the variation production of the first variation route, in the case of a loss in which the SP reach production is executed, when the fluctuation stop display is displayed in the normal symbol (first display mode) after the return production, the execution of the specific sound production is restricted, The specific sound performance becomes executable when the SP change symbol (second display mode) before the return performance is displayed in a variable and stopped manner.

In the variation production of the second variation route, in the case of a loss in which the reach production is not executed, a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a in the middle row (specific row) will be stopped. is possible. In the variable performance of the second variable route, in the case of a loss where the reach effect is not executed, when the specific sound effect is executed, the normal symbol (variation stop display in the first display mode).In the variable effect of the second variable route, In the case of a loss in which the SP reach effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific sound effect that outputs a specific sound during a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect symbol 70a in the middle row (specific column) is stopped.However, , In the variable performance of the second variation route, in the case of a loss when the SP reach performance is executed, when the normal symbol (first display mode) after the return performance is displayed as a fluctuation stop, the execution of the specific sound performance is restricted, The specific sound performance becomes executable when the SP change symbol (second display mode) before the return performance is displayed in a variable and stopped manner.

Therefore, in the variable presentation of the first variable route, the losing variable presentation in which the reach effect is not executed is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol (first display mode) than the losing variable presentation in which the reach effect is executed. It can be said that a specific sound production is likely to be executed at times. Similarly, in the variable presentation of the second variable path, the variable presentation of loss in which the reach effect is not executed is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol (first display mode) than the variable presentation of loss in which the reach effect is executed. It can be said that specific sound effects are more likely to be executed when By doing so, it is possible to increase the level of expectation when the ready-to-win effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variation production of the variation production of the first variation route, in the case of a losing variation production, a stop sound (predetermined sound : Loss eye stop sound) can be executed (see FIGS. 24 and 31 (b1)). In the variable presentation of the variable presentation of the second variation path, in the case of a losing variable presentation, a stop sound (predetermined sound 24 and 31 (b2)). Particularly, in a losing fluctuating performance in which a ready-to-win performance is not performed, the first sound performance is performed once during the execution period of the fluctuating performance. Particularly, in the losing fluctuating performance in which the SP ready-to-win performance is performed in which the fluctuating stop display and re-fluctuation of the performance symbols are repeated, the first sound performance may be performed multiple times during the execution period of the fluctuating performance.

As shown in Figure 31-3, when the SP reach effect (reach effect) is executed in the variable effect of the first variable route, if the result of the variable effect is a "jackpot", it is a jackpot combination. After executing the second sound production that outputs a hit suggestion stop sound (specific sound: hit stop sound) during the fluctuation variation suggestion period in which the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (FIG. 31-3 (d1)), a win is generated. A third sound performance that outputs a confirmed sound (special sound) may be made executable (FIG. 31-3 (f1)). Similarly, when the SP reach effect (ready-to-reach effect) is executed in the variable effect of the second variable route, if the result of the variable effect is a "jackpot", the effect pattern 70a that is the jackpot combination temporarily stops. After executing the second sound production that outputs the winning suggestion stop sound (specific sound: winning stop sound) during the fluctuation fluctuation suggestion period (Figure 31-3 (d2)), the winning confirmation sound (special sound) is executed. It may also be possible to execute a third sound performance that outputs (FIG. 31-3 (f2)). By doing this, the transition to the jackpot can be made more exciting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The first sound effect is executed in a normal (no reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) stop display of a loss, and the sound output at this time may be referred to as a first specific sound. The second sound performance is executed, for example, when the performance symbols 70a are aligned for the first time after the final performance, and the sound output at this time may be referred to as a second specific sound. In the third sound performance, after the execution of the second sound performance, a predetermined performance pattern (middle row performance pattern) 70a among the three performance symbols 70a displayed as jackpot symbols is larger on the screen than other performance symbols 70a. The sound that is executed when the occupied area is displayed to become wider, and the sound that is output at this time is sometimes referred to as a third specific sound. Here, the third sound production includes a fourth specific sound when the jackpot symbol stops in the promotion production after outputting the third specific sound, and a production symbol in which only the identification part changes after outputting the fourth specific sound. 70a includes a fifth specific sound when changing to a normal mode consisting of a decoration part and an identification part and finalizing it. The output of the first to fifth specific sounds may be performed as a performance in the normal gaming state, and the output of all the first to fifth specific sounds may be restricted in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the number of types of executable specific sounds can be made larger in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state. In the time-saving gaming state, various display processes are performed in a short period of time, so the first specific sound is output for situations 1 to 5 on the display where the first to fifth specific sounds are output in the normal gaming state. Sometimes it is possible to advance multiple situations together.

As described above, in the variation performance of the first variation route, the stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period from when the production pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion production until the variation stop display is displayed. Control is possible when performing a specific sound performance and when not performing a specific sound performance, such as after the return performance of the SP reach performance. Similarly, in the variation performance of the second variation route, a specific sound that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) during the variation stop suggestion period from when the production pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion production until the variation stop display is displayed. Control is possible when performing the performance and when not performing the specific sound performance as after the return performance of the SP reach performance.

In the embodiment, the fluctuation effects are executed in the order of the fluctuation stop display due to the change symbol for SP, the return effect, and the fluctuation stop display due to the normal symbol, and the specific sound effect is executed in the fluctuation stop display due to the change symbol for SP. , Execution of a specific sound effect is restricted in the variable stop display with the normal symbol after the return effect. That is, in the variation production of the first variation route, it can be said that the return production (predetermined production) is more likely to be executed when the specific sound production is not executed than when the specific sound production is executed. Similarly, in the variable effect of the second variable route, it can be said that the return effect (predetermined effect) is more likely to be executed when the specific sound effect is not executed than when the specific sound effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the margin of not executing the specific sound performance due to the return performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As mentioned above, in the variation production of the first variation route, the stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the production symbol 70a is displayed in a predetermined manner (normal symbol) in a variation stop display. It is possible to perform a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of a stop sound (specific sound) is limited. In the variation production of the second variation route, the first variation stop suggestion production in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in a predetermined manner (normal symbol) , or a second variable stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound (specific sound) is limited. Here, the second stop suggestion performance is basically executed when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed. Then, as described above, in the SP reach and SPSP reach effects, a change effect is executed in which the display position of the effect symbol 70a moves between the normal position in the center of the screen and the corner of the screen.

Therefore, in the variation performance of the first variation route, when the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating stop state, the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance (with stop sound) is executed when the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating stop state. It can be said that the variation production in which the second variation stop suggestion production (without stop sound) is executed is easier to execute the variation production in which the display position of the production symbol 70a changes in the variation production. Similarly, in the fluctuating performance of the second fluctuating path, the normal symbol is displayed as a fluctuating stop rather than the fluctuating performance in which the first fluctuating stop suggestion performance (with stop sound) is executed when the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating and stopping. It can be said that the variation production in which the second variation stop suggestion production (without stop sound) is executed is easier to execute the variation production in which the display position of the production pattern 70a changes in the variation production. By doing so, the impression given to the player can be changed depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the type of stop suggestion effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As mentioned above, in the variation production of the first variation route, the variation stop is suggested during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the decorative part and the identification part. A first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which sound A (specific sound) is output is executable. In addition, in the variation production of the first variation route, when the SP reach production is executed, after the return production, until the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part, it is stopped and displayed. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period, a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is limited can be executed.

As mentioned above, in the variation production of the second variation route, the variation stop is suggested during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the decorative part and the identification part. A first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which sound B (specific sound) is output is executable. In addition, in the variable performance of the second variable route, when the SP reach effect is executed, after the return effect, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part until it stops changing. During the variation stop suggestion period, a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is limited can be executed.

In the variation performance of the first variation route, when the SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is executed is more likely to be suspended before the reach performance is performed than when the SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is not executed. It is easier to execute change effects in which predetermined information displayed on the screen changes, such as a pending change effect in which the icon T1 changes from a normal mode to a special mode (advance effect: see FIG. 21(b)). Similarly, in the variable performance of the second variable route, the case where the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is executed is better before the reach effect is performed than the case where the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is not executed. In addition, it becomes easier to execute a change effect in which predetermined information displayed on the screen changes, such as a hold change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes from a normal mode to a special mode (preview effect: see FIG. 21(b)). There is.

Here, as a change effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5, the shape or color of the icon may change to arouse a sense of anticipation. In other words, in a losing fluctuating performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, the change performance is often executed before the SP reach performance to encourage the formation of a reach, whereas in a losing fluctuating performance in which an SP reach performance is not performed. In this case, the frequency with which the change effect is executed to encourage reach establishment is low. Incidentally, the change effect is not limited to an example in which the shape and color of the hold icon changes, but also changes in the color and shape of the effect pattern 70a, and changes in the color and shape of characters and symbols displayed on the screen. This includes effects in which the information display changes (in a manner that gives the player a sense of expectation), such as Here, the changing effects are likely to be executed in the order of, for example, a variable effect in which a reach effect is not executed ≦ a variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed ≦ a variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed ≦ a variable effect in which a SP SP reach effect is executed. May be set.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is executed in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route. It can be said that the change performance of the predetermined information display is more likely to be executed in the variable performance (loss of SP reach execution) in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed than (the loss fluctuation without reach). Similarly, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is performed in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route. It can be said that the variation performance in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed (SP reach execution loss) is more likely to be executed as a change performance of the predetermined information display than the performance (loss variation without reach). By doing so, it is possible to increase the difference from before the execution of the second stop suggestion performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variable effect of the first variable route, when the SP reach effect is executed than when the SP reach effect is not executed, the hold icon T1 changes from the normal mode to the special mode before the reach effect is performed. It is becoming easier to execute change performances in which the level of expectation represented by the preview performance changes in stages, such as a pending change performance (notice performance) that changes in a step-by-step manner, or a step-by-step change in the display mode of a cut-in image. Similarly, in the variable effect of the second variable route, when the SP reach effect is executed than when the SP reach effect is not executed, the pending icon T1 changes from the normal mode to the special mode before the reach effect is performed. It is now easier to perform changes in which the level of expectation expressed by the preview effect changes in stages, such as a pending change effect (notice effect) in which the appearance changes in stages, or a change in the display form of a cut-in image in steps. .

In other words, in a losing fluctuating performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, the change performance is often executed before the SP reach performance to encourage the formation of a reach, whereas in a losing fluctuating performance in which an SP reach performance is not performed. In this case, the frequency with which the change effect is executed to encourage reach establishment is low. Note that the change effect is not limited to the example in which the shape and color of the hold icon changes, but also changes in the color and shape of the effect pattern 70a, and changes in the color and shape of characters, symbols, etc. displayed on the screen. This includes effects in which the information display changes (in a manner that gives the player a sense of expectation). Here, the changing effects are likely to be executed in the order of, for example, a variable effect in which a reach effect is not executed ≦ a variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed ≦ a variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed ≦ a variable effect in which a SP SP reach effect is executed. May be set.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is executed in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route. It is believed that a variable performance in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed (a loss in the SP reach execution) is more likely to be executed than a change performance in which the expectation level changes step by step (a loss variation without reach). I can say that. Similarly, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is performed in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route. It is easier to execute a variable performance in which the level of expectation changes step by step in a variable performance in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed (loss in SP reach execution) than in a performance (loss fluctuation without reach). It can be said. By doing so, it is possible to increase the difference from before the execution of the second stop suggestion performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variable production of the first variation route, when the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed than when the SP ready-to-reach effect is not executed, the look-ahead chance effect in which the same color symbol is displayed before the ready-to-reach effect is performed is better. It is easier to implement. In the variable effect of the second variable route, the look-ahead chance effect in which the same color symbol is displayed before the reach effect is more effective when the SP reach effect is executed than when the SP reach effect is not executed. It is easier to implement. In other words, in the fluctuation performance of a loss when the SP reach performance is executed, the look-ahead chance performance is often executed before the SP reach performance to encourage the establishment of a reach, whereas the variation of the loss performance in which the SP reach performance is not executed In terms of performance, there is a low frequency of executing look-ahead chance performances to encourage reach establishment. Here, the look-ahead chance effects are executed in the order of, for example, a variable effect in which a reach effect is not executed ≦ a variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed ≦ a variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed ≦ a variable effect in which a SP SP reach effect is executed. It may be set so that it is easy to do so.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is executed in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route. It can be said that the look-ahead chance effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect (loss of SP reach execution) in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed than (the loss variation without reach). Similarly, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is performed in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route. It can be said that the look-ahead chance effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed (the loss of SP reach execution) than in the effect (the loss change without reach).

In the variation performance of the first variation route, during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part, a stop sound A (specific sound ) is output, and the first stop suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, in the variation production of the first variation route, when the SP reach production is executed, after the return production, until the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part, it is stopped and displayed. During the variable stop suggestion period, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is limited can be executed. In the variation production of the first variation route, when the look ahead chance production is executed, the same color symbol stop sound different from the stop sound A (specific sound) during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop. is output. Thus, in the first stop suggestion performance, there are the normal stop sound A (first specific sound) and the same color symbol stop sound (second specific sound) specific to the look-ahead chance production. Note that in the second stop suggestion performance, the same color symbol stop sound is not output.

In the variation performance of the second variation route, during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part, a stop sound B (specific sound ) is output, and the first stop suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, in the variable performance of the second variable route, when the SP reach effect is executed, after the return effect, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part until it stops changing. During the variable stop suggestion period, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is limited can be executed. In the variation production of the second variation route, when the look-ahead chance production is executed, the same color symbol stop sound different from stop sound B (specific sound) during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop. is output. In this way, in the first stop suggestion performance, there are the normal stop sound B (first specific sound) and the same color symbol stop sound (second specific sound) unique to the look-ahead chance production. In addition, in the second stop suggestion performance of the embodiment, the same color symbol stop sound is not output.

In the variation production of the first variation route, the variation production in which the first stop suggestion production is executed is more effective than the variation production in which the second stop suggestion production is executed. is easier to output. In addition, in the variation production of the second variation route, the variation production in which the first stop suggestion production is executed is better than the variation production in which the second stop suggestion production is executed, and the same color symbol stop sound (second specific sound) is easier to output. By doing so, it is possible to increase the difference from before the execution of the second stop suggestion performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variable performance of the first variable route, when the SP reach effect is executed than when the SP reach effect is not executed, the above-mentioned various preview effects (advance notification effects) are performed before the reach effect is performed. is becoming easier to implement. Similarly, in the variable effect of the second variable route, when the SP reach effect is executed than when the SP reach effect is not executed, the above-mentioned various preview effects (preliminary (notification effects) are easier to execute. In other words, in the fluctuating performance of a loss in which the SP reach performance is executed, the aforementioned notice performance (pre-notification performance) is often executed before the SP reach performance to encourage the establishment of a reach, whereas the SP reach performance is executed. In the fluctuating performance that does not occur, the frequency of executing a notice performance (advance notification performance) to encourage the establishment of a reach is low.

The advance notice performance that informs the expectation level of a jackpot is not particularly limited, but may include, for example, a look-ahead chance performance in which symbols of the same color are displayed, and an operation performance in which the movable accessory 73 is activated. Further, in the variation, a preview performance may be a development performance that suggests a transition to a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, such as a reach performance developing into an SP reach performance. Here, the preview performances are likely to be executed in the order of, for example, a variable performance in which a reach performance is not performed ≦ a variation performance in which a normal reach performance is performed ≦ a fluctuation performance in which an SP reach performance is performed ≦ a variation performance in which a SPSP reach performance is performed May be set.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is executed in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route. It can be said that the notice performance is more likely to be executed in the variable performance (loss of SP reach execution) in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed than (loss fluctuation without reach). Similarly, since the second stop suggestion performance is based on the execution of the SP reach performance (return performance after the SP reach performance), the first stop suggestion performance is performed in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route. It can be said that the preview performance is more likely to be executed in the variable performance (loss of SP reach execution) in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed than in the performance (loss fluctuation without reach). By doing so, it is possible to increase the difference from before the execution of the second stop suggestion performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variation performance of the first variation route, during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part, a stop sound A (specific sound ) is output, and the first stop suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, in the variation production of the first variation route, when the SP reach production is executed, after the return production, until the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part, it is stopped and displayed. During the variable stop suggestion period, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is limited can be executed. In the variation performance of the second variation route, during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part, a stop sound B (specific sound ) is output, and the first stop suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, in the variable performance of the second variable route, when the SP reach performance is executed, after the return performance, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part until it is displayed in a variable state. During the variable stop suggestion period, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is limited can be executed.

In the variation production of the first variation route, when the SP reach production (SPSP reach production) is executed, the symbol change production in which the reach target symbols (production symbols 70a in the left column and right column) are changed in position and displayed in a reduced size is performed. executed. In addition, in the variation production of the second variation route, when the SP reach production (SPSP reach production) is executed, the symbol change is such that the reach target symbols (the production symbols 70a in the left column and the right column) are changed in position and displayed in a reduced size. The performance is executed. On the other hand, in the variation production of the first variation route, if the SP reach production (SPSP reach) is not executed (in the case of normal variation or normal reach production), the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns change their positions and are displayed in a reduced size. The symbol change effect is not executed. In addition, in the variation performance of the second variation route, if the SP reach performance (SPSP reach) is not executed (in the case of normal variation or normal reach performance), the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns change their positions and are displayed in a reduced size. The symbol change effect is not executed.

Therefore, in the variation production of the first variation route, the variation production in which the second variation stop suggestion production is executed is more likely to reach the reach target in the reach production in the variation production than the variation production in which the first variation stop suggestion production is executed. It can be said that a pattern change effect in which the effect pattern 70a changes is likely to be executed. Similarly, in the fluctuating performance of the second fluctuating route, the fluctuating performance in which the second fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed has a higher reach in terms of the reach performance in the fluctuating performance, than the fluctuating performance in which the first fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed. It can be said that a pattern change effect in which the target effect pattern 70a changes is likely to be executed. By doing this, it is possible to vary the variable performance and improve the interest of the game.

In addition to or in place of the position change and reduced display, the symbol change effect may be an effect in which the color of the effect symbol 70a changes. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-6, the color of the identification numbers forming the performance pattern 70a changes from blue to red.

In the embodiment, a group effect or a mode common effect (predetermined effect: see FIG. 21-4) can be executed in the variable effect of the first variable route in the normal game state. Further, in the variable performance of the second variable route in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the group performance and mode common performance that can be executed in the variable performance of the first variable route, and the group performance and mode common performance with the same motif. Here, the same motif means that the subject matter is the same within the conceptual range of animals, flowers, cars, etc. For example, a group notice executed with a dog figure on the first variable route and a cat figure on the second variable route. The group announcements to be executed can be said to be group announcements with the same motif of animals.

It is more advantageous for the player when group effects and mode common effects are executed in the variable effects of the second variable route than when group effects and mode common effects are executed in the variable effects of the first variable route. It may be possible to make it easier to shift to an advantageous gaming state. Here, the ease of transition to the advantageous gaming state is that group effects and mode common effects are executed in the variable effects of the second variable path than when group effects and mode common effects are executed in the variable effects of the first variable path. If it is executed, the reach effect (establishment of a reach) may be set to be more likely to be executed, or even if the ease of execution of the reach effect (establishment of a reach) is the same, the reach effect is set for variable path B. You can make a difference by making settings that are easier to develop. By doing so, expectations can be differentiated depending on the variation path, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that it is more convenient for the player when group effects and mode common effects are executed in the variable effects of the first variable route than when group effects and mode common effects are executed in the variable effects of the second variable route. It may be possible to make it easier to shift to an advantageous advantageous gaming state. In addition, in the case where a group effect or mode common effect is executed in the variation effect of the first variation route, and when the group effect or mode common effect is executed in the variation effect of the second variation route, it is possible to The ease of transition to an advantageous gaming state may be the same.

In the embodiment, a group effect or a mode common effect (predetermined effect) can be executed in a variable effect of a predetermined variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) in an advantageous gaming state. Here, even in the predetermined variable path in the advantageous gaming state, there are group effects and mode common effects that can be performed in the variable effects of the first variable path and second variable path in the normal gaming state, and group effects and mode common effects with the same motif. may be executable. In this case, since it is easier to win and the fluctuation time is shorter in the advantageous gaming state than in the normal gaming state, group effects and mode common effects are executed in the variable effects of the first and second variable paths in the normal gaming condition. It can be said that it is easier for the player to shift to an advantageous game state (jackpot) when a group performance or a common mode performance is executed in a variable performance of a predetermined variable route in an advantageous game state, rather than when the player is in an advantageous game state. By doing so, expectations can be differentiated depending on the variation path, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that even in the advantageous gaming state, the same variable path as in the normal gaming state may be set.

In a reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect, etc.), a change effect in which a predetermined (for example, middle row) effect symbol 70a is displayed larger than a specific (for example, right column or left column) effect symbol 70a is a normal game. The advantageous gaming state may be easier to execute than the state.

(Example of variation of full rotation reach)
In an embodiment, a full rotation reach is a reach effect performed as a normal reach, a SP reach, or an evolution of a SPSP reach. Here, before the symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", they are temporarily stopped in the pre-final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" corresponding to the second or third jackpot to correspond to the second jackpot. From the final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa"("222" etc.), there is a possibility of promotion to the final temporary stop mode "XXX"("333" etc. or "777") corresponding to the third jackpot or the first jackpot. , Also, the pre-final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa"("333" etc.) corresponding to the third jackpot suggests the possibility of promotion to the final temporary stop mode "XXX"("777") corresponding to the first jackpot. In other words, it is configured such that there are cases in which the promotion suggestion effect is executed and cases in which it is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 21-4(a), it is assumed that the performance symbols 70 in the left middle right column are displayed in a variable stop state (temporary stop) in the alignment of "222". At this time, the sound output device 331 outputs the hit suggestion sound A corresponding to the type of identification information during the variation stop suggestion period until the production pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop (temporary stop). Then, when the production pattern 70a stops at the alignment of "222", the sound output device 331 outputs a hit confirmation sound A corresponding to the type of identification information during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed. Ru. Note that the hit suggestion sound A and the hit confirmation sound A are different.

When the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows are in the pre-final temporary stop mode "222" and the promotion suggestion performance is executed from the temporary stop state, the fluctuating path in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows rotate around the horizontal axis in synchronization. (Figure 21-4(b)). After the promotion suggestion performance is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop in the final temporary stop mode "333" which is one step up from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and the final temporary stop mode "333" is changed to the stop mode. (Figure 21-4(c)). At this time, the sound output device 331 outputs the hit suggestion sound B corresponding to the type of identification information during the variation stop suggestion period until the production symbol 70a is displayed in a variation stop. Then, when the production pattern 70a makes a final stop when "333" is aligned, the sound output device 331 outputs the hit confirmation sound B according to the type of identification information during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed. be done. It should be noted that the hit-suggesting sound B and the hit-suggesting sound A are different, and in the embodiment, the hit-suggesting sound B has a higher level of sound production that greatly arouses the expectation level than the hit-suggesting sound A. The confirmed hit sound B is different from the confirmed hit sound B, and in the embodiment, a high sound performance that greatly arouses the expectation level is executed for the confirmed hit sound B than for the confirmed hit sound A. Furthermore, the hit suggestion sound B and the hit confirmation sound B are different.

Alternatively, after the promotion suggestion performance is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop in the final temporary stop mode "222", which is the same as the pre-final temporary stop mode, and use the final temporary stop mode "222" as the stop mode. Main stop (Figure 21-4(a)). At this time, the sound output device 331 outputs the hit suggestion sound A corresponding to the type of identification information during the variation stop suggestion period until the production symbol 70a is displayed as a variation stop. Then, when the production pattern 70a stops at the alignment of "222", the sound output device 331 outputs the hit confirmation sound A according to the type of identification information during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed. Ru.

After the promotion suggestion performance is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop at the final temporary stop mode "777", which is further promoted by two stages from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and stop the final temporary stop mode "777". As a mode, the main stop is performed (FIG. 21-4(e)). At this time, a hit suggestion sound C corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331 during a variation stop suggestion period until the effect pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop. Then, when the performance symbols 70a stop at the alignment of "777", the sound output device 331 outputs a hit confirmation sound ``ha'' according to the type of identification information during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed. Ru. Note that the hit-suggesting sound C is different from the hit-suggesting sound A and the hitting-suggesting sound B, and in the embodiment, the hit-suggesting sound C arouses the expectation level more than the hitting-suggesting sound A and the hitting-suggesting sound B. A high sound performance is performed. The definite hit sound C is different from the definite hit sound A and the definite hit sound path, and in the embodiment, the definite hit sound C is a higher pitched sound that greatly arouses the level of expectation than the definite hit sound A and the definite hit sound B. The performance is executed. Further, the hit suggestion sound C and the hit confirmation sound C have different modes.

When the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows are in the pre-final temporary stop mode "333" and the promotion suggestion performance is executed from the temporary stop state, the fluctuating path in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows rotate around the horizontal axis in synchronization. (Figure 21-4(d). After the promotion suggestion effect is executed, the effect symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop at the final temporary stop mode "777" which is further promoted by one step from the pre-final temporary stop mode. Then, the final temporary stop mode "777" is set as the stop mode and the main stop is made (Figure 21-4 (e)).At this time, during the variable stop suggestion period until the effect pattern 70a is displayed as a variable stop, the audio output is The device 331 outputs a hit suggestion sound C according to the type of identification information. Then, when the production symbols 70a stop at the alignment of "777", during the variation stop suggestion period until the variation stop display, The sound output device 331 outputs the hit confirmation sound C according to the type of identification information.

Alternatively, after the promotion suggestion performance is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "333" which is the same as the pre-final temporary stop mode, and the final temporary stop mode "333" is set as the stop mode. This stops (Figure 21-4(c)). At this time, the sound output device 331 outputs the hit suggestion sound B corresponding to the type of identification information during the variation stop suggestion period until the production symbol 70a is displayed in a variation stop. Then, when the performance symbols 70a stop at the alignment of "333", the sound output device 331 outputs the hit confirmation sound C according to the type of identification information during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed. Ru.

Examples of the difference in the form of the sound include a difference in content such as tone color, a difference in volume, a difference in length and timing, and the like.

Note that it is also possible to promote the status by two levels from "222" to "777". Alternatively, the identification information may be switched to different identification information without being promoted.

In the embodiment, in a variable performance in which a promotion suggestion performance is performed, if the final temporary suspension mode "XXX" is not promoted from the pre-final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" through the promotion suggestion production, the pre-final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" is set to be the same as the initially determined suspension mode, and if the final temporary suspension mode "XXX" is promoted from the pre-final temporary suspension mode "XaXaXa" through the promotion suggestion effect, the pre-final temporary suspension mode " XaXaXa'' is set to be the same as the stopping pattern corresponding to the jackpot that is less advantageous than the jackpot corresponding to the initially determined stopping pattern.

In the variation production of the first variation route, when the promotion suggestion production is executed, the production pattern 70a having the first identification information (for example, "222") is displayed in a variation stop during the variation stop suggestion period; It is possible to perform specific sound effects in different ways depending on the case where a production pattern having second identification information (for example, "333" or "777") that is different from the identification information is displayed in a variable stop state during the variable stop suggestion period. , when the promotion suggestion effect is executed in the variation effect of the second variation path, the effect pattern 70a having the first identification information (for example, "222") is displayed in a variable stop state during the variation stop suggestion period; Different types of specific sound production can be performed depending on the case where a production pattern having second identification information (for example, "333" or "777") different from the first identification information is displayed in a variable stop during the variation stop suggestion period. By doing so, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation due to the difference in identification information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The specific sound production is the first sound production (hit suggestion sound) that is executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed in the first stage, and the first sound performance (hit suggestion sound) that is executed until the fluctuation stop is displayed in the second stage toward the actual stop. There is a second sound performance (hit confirmed sound) that is executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period. The first sound performance and the second sound performance are different modes.

In the variation production of the first variation route, when the promotion suggestion production is executed, the production pattern 70a having the first identification information (for example, "222") is displayed in a variation stop during the variation stop suggestion period; The first sound production of a specific sound production in a different manner is executed in the case where a production pattern having second identification information (for example, "333" or "777") that is different from the identification information is displayed in a variable stop state during the variation stop suggestion period. In addition, in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route, when the promotion suggestion performance is executed, the performance symbol 70a having the first identification information (for example, "222") is displayed in a fluctuation stop during the fluctuation stop suggestion period. and when a production pattern having second identification information (for example, "333" or "777") that is different from the first identification information is displayed in a fluctuating stop mode during the fluctuating stop suggestion period. The first sound performance can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation due to the difference in identification information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variation production of the first variation route, when the promotion suggestion production is executed, the production pattern 70a having the first identification information (for example, "222") is displayed in a variation stop during the variation stop suggestion period; In the case where a production pattern having second identification information (for example, "333" or "777") different from the identification information is displayed in a fluctuating stop mode during the fluctuating stop suggestion period, a second sound production of a specific sound production in a different manner is executed. In addition, in the variable presentation of the second variable route, when the promotion suggestion presentation is executed, the presentation pattern 70a having the first identification information (for example, "222") is displayed in a variable stop state during the variable stop suggestion period. and when a production pattern having second identification information (for example, "333" or "777") that is different from the first identification information is displayed in a fluctuating stop mode during the fluctuating stop suggestion period. It is possible to perform a second sound production. By doing so, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation due to the difference in identification information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production of advantageous gaming state)
An example of a variation effect of an advantageous gaming state will be explained below.

(Production pattern - normal pattern)
As the effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 131 in the advantageous gaming state, a normal pattern is set which is basically composed of an identification part consisting of a numerical part (identification number). The normal symbol may be used in common in different advantageous modes, but a plurality of types of normal symbols may be set, such as using different types of normal symbols in advantageous mode A and advantageous mode B, for example. Note that, as the normal symbol used in the advantageous gaming state, one composed of a decorative part (such as a character image) and an identification part may be used, as in the above-mentioned normal gaming state.

(Production design - unique design)
Even in the advantageous gaming state, the performance symbols 70a include unique symbols in addition to the normal symbols having identification portions (identification information) such as numbers such as "1" to "9" and symbols such as "A" to "Z". may be set. Examples of specific patterns include, for example, a change pattern that is stopped and displayed to suggest (notify) the occurrence of an icon change notice (a first change pattern that indicates that the pending icon changes to a display mode with one level of high expectations; It is possible to set a second change pattern indicating that the hold icon changes to a display mode with a high level of expectation, a pseudo continuous pattern that suggests (announces) the occurrence of a pseudo continuous effect by temporarily stopping, etc.

In the advantageous gaming state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the advantageous modes set in a plurality of types are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion).

(Variable effect example 10)
FIG. 1 shows the case of advantageous mode A in an advantageous gaming state. Here, in the embodiment, an example is given in which only one type of advantageous mode is set, but a plurality of types of advantageous modes may be set. In this case, if the number of modes set in the advantageous gaming state is smaller than the number of modes set in the normal gaming state (see Fig. 35), mode switching in the advantageous gaming state will be prevented. It has the advantage of being able to reduce the speed and speed up the game.

When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production design designation command, and variation pattern designation command (starting time CD) as the start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol The variable display of the second lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-second variable display starts (see FIG. 32(a)). At this time, variable display of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 122.

On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left-center right column is displayed in a variable manner along a vertical scrolling variable path A that flows from top to bottom. Further, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner along a variable path in which the numbers change on the spot. The second lamp pattern and the second special pattern are displayed in a variable manner along a variable path by emitting light (blinking) of one or more LEDs or changing the light emitting position. In this way, the variation path of the performance symbol 70a is different from that of the special symbol TZ, the second lamp symbol, and the second special symbol.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column temporarily stop in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a is slightly oscillating (oscillating display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the pending icon T2 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 32(b)). Here, when the production pattern 70a moves toward a variable stop display (variation stop suggestion period), the production pattern 70a itself swings during a temporary stop, the production pattern 70a emits light, and production operations such as expansion/contraction and rotation, The variation stop suggestion performance is executed by displaying an effect accompanying the performance pattern 70a. Note that as the variation stop suggestion performance, a stop sound may be output without outputting a stop sound, and in the embodiment, a stop sound is output.

Here, the variation route A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variation route in the normal gaming state are the same in that the production symbol 70a scrolls vertically, but the variation stop suggestion performance is executed during the variation stop suggestion period. The aspect may be made different between the variable path A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variable path in the normal gaming state. For example, the mode of the stop suggestion effect on the variable path A in the advantageous gaming state is made smaller in the number of types of effects or the effect period is shorter than the mode of the variable stop suggestion effect on the first variable path in the normal gaming state. By doing this, there is an advantage that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Although the variable path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous gaming state and the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state are different, the mode of the variable stop suggestion effect executed during the variable stop suggestion period is as follows. The variable route A in the advantageous gaming state and the second variable route in the normal gaming state may be the same or different. For example, the mode of the stop suggestion effect on the variable path A in the advantageous gaming state is made smaller in the number of types of effects or the effect period is shorter than the mode of the variable stop suggestion effect on the second variable path in the normal gaming state. By doing this, there is an advantage that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The variation route A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variation route in the normal gaming state are the same in that the production symbol 70a scrolls vertically, but the stop sound (special sound) production is performed during the variation stop suggestion period. The aspect may be the same or different between the variable route A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variable route in the normal gaming state. In this way, the mode of the stop sound during the variable stop suggestion period is made different between the variable path A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variable path in the normal gaming state (the type of stop sound is different, the presence or absence of the stop sound is different, etc.) ), it is possible to change the atmosphere for each game state even on the same vertical scrolling path.

Although the variation path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous gaming state and the second variation path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state are different, the stop sound (special sound) effect executed during the variation stop suggestion period is different. The aspect may be the same or different between the variable route A in the advantageous gaming state and the second variable route in the normal gaming state. In this way, the mode of the stop sound during the variable stop suggestion period is made different between the variable path A in the advantageous gaming state and the second variable path in the normal gaming state (the type of stop sound is different, the presence or absence of the stop sound is different, etc.) ), the atmosphere can be changed for each game state in conjunction with the difference in the variable path.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the second special symbol display 122. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 32(c)), and the sub-second On the variable display, the second lamp pattern stops in a losing manner (for example, goes out).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 122. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of the second lamp pattern on the sub-second variable display is started. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the effect movement such as rotation as in this embodiment in the variation start period (see FIG. 32(d)). In this way, when the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate (during the fluctuation start period), a fluctuation start performance including performance operations such as a shaking motion of the performance pattern 70 and a rotation of the performance pattern 70a is executed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T2 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 32(e)). Note that as the variation start effect, the start sound may be output without outputting the start sound during the variation start period, and in the embodiment, the start sound is output.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, a variation stop suggestion effect is executed. Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 32(f)).

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the second special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop CD in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("164") (see FIG. 32(g)), and the sub-second The second lamp pattern on the variable display stops in a losing manner (for example, turns off).

When the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 122. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of the second lamp pattern on the sub-second variable display is started. At this time, the variation start effect of the effect pattern 70a is executed, and the effect pattern 70a scrolls (see FIG. 32(h)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 32(i)).

In this way, the fluctuating performance of the fluctuating path in which the performance pattern 70a flows from top to bottom is repeated. Further, the fluctuation start performance and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance for advantageous mode A are basically repeated unless a special performance such as a look-ahead performance is executed.

Here, the variation route A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variation route in the normal gaming state are the same in that the production symbol 70a scrolls vertically, but the variation start is executed in the variation start period in the variation production. The mode of performance may be the same or different between the variable route A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variable route in the normal gaming state. For example, the mode of the variable start effect on the variable path A in the advantageous gaming state is made smaller in the number of types of effects or the effect period is shorter than the mode of the variable start effect on the first variable path in the normal gaming state. By doing so, there is an advantage that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Although the variable path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous gaming state and the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state are different in mode, the mode of the variable start effect executed in the variable start period in the variable effect is different. , the variable route A in the advantageous gaming state and the second variable route in the normal gaming state may be the same or different. For example, the mode of the variable start effect on the variable path A in the advantageous gaming state is made smaller in the number of types of effects or the effect period is shorter than the mode of the variable start effect on the second variable path in the normal gaming state. By doing so, there is an advantage that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The variation route A in the advantageous gaming state and the first variation route in the normal gaming state are the same in that the production symbol 70a scrolls vertically, but the mode of the start sound production executed in the variation start period is changed to be advantageous. The variable path A in the gaming state and the first variable path in the normal gaming state may be the same or different. In this way, the mode of the start sound of the start period is made different between the variable path A of the advantageous gaming state and the first variable path of the normal gaming state (different types of start sounds, different presence or absence of the start sound, etc.). Even with the same vertical scrolling path, the atmosphere can be changed depending on the game state.

Although the variable path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous gaming state and the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state are different in mode, the mode of the start sound effect executed in the variable start period is different from that in the advantageous game. The state fluctuation path A and the second fluctuation path of the normal gaming state may be the same or different. In this way, the mode of the start sound of the start period is made different between the variable path A of the advantageous gaming state and the second variable path of the normal gaming state (different types of start sounds, different presence or absence of the start sound, etc.). Coupled with the difference in variable paths, the atmosphere can be changed for each game state.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the embodiment, three types of normal variable paths are set in the normal gaming state, while three types of normal variable paths are set in the advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. One type is set. That is, the number of types of fluctuating paths of the performance symbols 70a in the fluctuating production is greater in the normal gaming state (first gaming state) than in the advantageous gaming state (second gaming state). By doing so, there is an advantage that the amount of time required to switch the variable path in an advantageous gaming state can be suppressed, and the speed of playing the game can be increased in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Note that the number of types of variable paths of the performance symbols 70a in the variable production may be greater in the advantageous gaming state (second gaming state) than in the normal gaming state (first gaming state).

Even in the advantageous gaming state, the following variable performance can be executed as in the normal gaming state. In the variable stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be.

(Reach performance)
During the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on the devices 132 and 133 (sub-liquid crystals), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. There is.

Even in an advantageous gaming state, a "reach performance" is a jackpot game for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a change. It means a variation mode that is expected to be executed. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

Even in the advantageous gaming state, there are five types of reach effects in this embodiment: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect." Note that the number of types and modes of reach effects may be the same or different between the advantageous gaming state and the normal gaming state.

"Normal reach effect" means that the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is stopped in the center area. This is a reach effect that is executed with a fluctuating reach state.

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) It is a reach effect where a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played.

"SPSP reach performance" is a reach performance that is executed after the normal reach performance or SP reach performance, and a movie (video, animation, etc.) with a higher production effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach performance or SP reach performance is played. It's about the performance.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In the embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning a jackpot lottery.

In the embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation regarding the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

(Example of variation effect of normal reach - advantageous gaming state)
FIG. 33 shows the case of advantageous mode A in an advantageous gaming state. Note that the matters explained in the normal gaming state may also be applied.

In the left column and the right column, the performance symbols 70a having the same identification information are displayed in a variable stop state (temporarily stopped) on the vertically scrolling variable path A, resulting in a reach (FIG. 33(b)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns, the variation stop suggestion performance of mode YA is executed, and the stop sound YA is output. Note that the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows are in a temporarily stopped state in which the performance symbols 70a slightly swing (swing display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. It should be noted that the variation stop suggestion performance when reaching the reach may be different from the variation stop production when not reaching the reach, but may be the same. Further, the variation stop suggestion performance at the time of reach in the advantageous gaming state may be the same as or different from the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 33(c), the performance symbol 70a in the middle row, which has different identification information from the left and right rows, temporarily stops on the variable path A, resulting in a loss. At this time, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode YA is executed, the stop sound YA is output, and the fluctuation stop display of the temporary stop state is executed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a which had been temporarily stopped comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (FIG. 33(d)). It should be noted that the production symbol 70a having the same identification information as the left column and the right column in the middle row temporarily stops, resulting in a hit, and after the production symbol 70a, which had been temporarily stopped, comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, a predetermined winning production is executed. After this is executed, a transition is made to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

In this way, in the case of normal reach, a variation stop suggestion performance in a mode corresponding to the gaming state and the variation path is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a, and a stop sound in a mode corresponding to the gaming state and the variation path is executed. is now output.

(Example of SP (SPSP) reach variation effect)
FIG. 34 shows the case of advantageous mode A in an advantageous gaming state. Note that the matters explained in the normal gaming state may also be applied.

The effect symbols 70a having the same identification information in the left column and the right column temporarily stop on the variable path A, and become a reach (FIG. 34(b)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns, the variation stop suggestion performance of mode YA is executed, and the stop sound YA is output. Incidentally, a fluctuating stop display in a temporary stop state is executed in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns are slightly swayed (swinging display) so that the performance symbols 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position.

Thereafter, when the SP ready-to-win performance (specific performance) is developed, a development performance (predetermined performance) for developing into the SP ready-to-win performance (attracting the player's attention) is executed. A single development presentation or a plurality of development presentations, such as a first development presentation and a second development presentation, can be set. When executing a plurality of development effects, if a jackpot game is not executed, the first development effect is likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and if a jackpot game is executed, the second development effect is likely to be executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute (execution rate is high). In other words, it is preferable that the second advanced presentation has a higher jackpot expectation than the first advanced presentation. Note that the normal reach effect may be executed for a predetermined period and then switched to the SP ready-to-reach effect. Note that the advanced effects include predetermined image displays such as white-out, black-out, effects, etc., performed alone or in combination.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the SP reach effect, the background is switched from the advantageous A background to the SP background. Then, the effect pattern 70a in the left row switches to a mode different from the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped (for example, a simple mode in which there is no decoration attached to the identification part), and also becomes smaller than when it was temporarily stopped and is displayed at the top left of the screen. The variable stop display is executed in a temporary stop state by moving to a different position such as . In addition, during the SP ready-to-win performance, a symbol whose configuration, size, etc. have changed from the normal symbol in an advantageous gaming state may be referred to as a changed symbol. In addition, the effect pattern 70a in the right row switches to a different mode from the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped (for example, a simple mode in which there is no decoration attached to the identification part), and is reduced in size from the time it was temporarily stopped, and is displayed at the top right of the screen. The variable stop display is executed in a temporary stop state by moving to a different position such as . At this time, the change symbols, which are the production symbols 70a in the left and right columns, which are reduced and temporarily stopped and displayed, repeat predetermined production operations such as swinging left and right. The changing symbols for the advantageous gaming state and the changing symbols for the normal gaming state may be in the same manner or in different manners.

In this way, in the fluctuating performance of the advantageous gaming state, the performance pattern of the performance symbol 70a that is reduced and temporarily stopped is displayed on the left and right of the performance symbol 70a that is reduced and temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable performance of the normal gaming state. It is the same as the swaying production style. In addition, in the embodiment, the placement position of the effect pattern 70a that is reduced and displayed in a temporary stop is the same in the advantageous gaming state and the normal game state, but the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a temporarily stopped state at different positions in the same effect mode. It may be . In the normal game state, the component elements of the performance symbol 70a are reduced and displayed in a reduced form, but in the advantageous game state, the number of types of components of the performance symbol to be reduced is made smaller than in the normal game state, or in the advantageous game state, It is also possible to display the image in a reduced size in the same manner as used for the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the SP reach effect of the embodiment, the vertical scrolling variation route A is switched to a different SP variation route (in the embodiment, scrolling from the back to the front). Then, as necessary, exciting effects such as unillustrated animation cut-ins and battle effects are executed. Here, the performance pattern 70a in the middle row is also different from the performance pattern 70a in the variation path A (for example, by reducing the number of components of the performance pattern, etc. mode). Although the middle row performance symbol 70a may remain on the variable path A, in the embodiment, it is configured to switch to a different variable path from the variable path A. Then, as necessary, exciting effects such as unillustrated animation cut-ins and battle effects are executed.

If the result of the variable performance is a "loss", the performance symbols "2", "8", and "2", which are the combination of losses, are temporarily stopped on the screen, as shown in FIG. 34(d). Ru. At this time, the performance symbols 70a in the left-center right row, which are in a temporarily stopped state, are performing a swinging performance operation. During the variation stop suggestion period of the middle row production pattern 70, execute the variation stop suggestion production of the mode YA corresponding to the variation route A, execute the variation stop suggestion production of the SP mode, or execute the variation stop suggestion production of the SP mode. Execution may be restricted. In addition, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row production pattern 70, a stop sound YA corresponding to the fluctuation path A is output, or a stop sound in the SP mode is output without outputting the stop sound YA, Alternatively, the output of the stop sound may be limited. In addition, when the middle row performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Lose" may be displayed to notify that the game is a loss.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 34(e), a return effect (predetermined effect) to return from the SP reach effect (specific effect) (to attract the player's attention) is executed on the screen. be done. Specifically, a return image (for example, a door image) is displayed on the screen so that visual recognition of the effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) of the SP reach effect is regulated. At this time, the special symbol TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 34(f), the background for SP is switched to the background for advantageous A, and the effect pattern 70a of the changed pattern is switched and the normal effect pattern 70a of the variable path A is displayed ( (visual recognition is permitted), and the performance symbols "2", "8", and "2" are stopped and displayed as normal symbols. That is, before the return effect is executed, the changed symbols are displayed in a fixed and variable manner, but after the return effect is executed, the changed symbols return to the normal symbols. In addition, the performance symbols 70a in each row do not stop from the fluctuating state of the fluctuating path A, but when the return performance ends, they temporarily stop at predetermined positions on the left, center, and right of the screen and become normal symbols. appear. Further, after execution of the return performance, a fluctuation stop display is performed in a temporary stop state without performing a fluctuation stop suggestion performance. Furthermore, the output of the stop sound is also limited. Then, after the main stop, the next variable effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the result of the variable performance is a "jackpot", the winning combination of performance symbols "2", "2", and "2" will be temporarily stopped on the screen at the timing shown in FIG. 34(d). . The changing symbols in the middle row scrolling on the variable path for SP reach effect are displayed in a variable stop at the center of the screen after performing the variable stop suggestion effect for SP reach in the variable stop suggestion period. Then, the changed symbols in the left column that had been reduced in the upper left corner of the screen are enlarged and displayed in a fixed state on the left side of the screen, and the changed symbols in the right column that had been reduced in the upper right corner of the screen are now displayed on the right side of the screen. The area will be enlarged and the fluctuation will stop appearing. At this time, the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column that are lined up in a temporarily stopped state are performing a swinging performance motion. During the variation stop suggestion period of the middle row production pattern 70, the variation stop suggestion production in the mode corresponding to the variation path A is not executed, but the variation stop suggestion production in the SP mode is executed, or the variation stop suggestion production is executed in the SP mode. Execution may be restricted. In addition, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row production symbol 70, a stop sound corresponding to the fluctuation path may be output, or a stop sound for a winning pattern may be output without outputting the stop sound A, or a stop sound may be output. You may limit the output of It should be noted that when the middle row of performance symbols 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Win" may be displayed to notify that it is a hit.

Thereafter, when the SP ready-to-win performance ends, a return performance (predetermined performance) for returning from the SP ready-to-win performance (specific performance) (to attract the player's attention) is executed on the screen. Specifically, a return image (for example, a door image) is displayed on the screen so that visual recognition of the effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) of the SP reach effect is regulated. At this time, the special symbol TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance is completed, the SP background is switched to the advantageous A background, the SP performance pattern 70a is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a (visual recognition is allowed), and the performance pattern "2" "2" is displayed. “2” is stopped and displayed as a normal symbol. That is, before the return effect is executed, the changed symbols are displayed in a fixed and variable manner, but after the return effect is executed, the changed symbols return to the normal symbols. In addition, the performance symbols 70a in each row do not stop from the fluctuating state of the fluctuating path A, but when the return performance ends, they temporarily stop at predetermined positions on the left, center, and right of the screen and become normal symbols. appear. Further, after execution of the return performance, a fluctuation stop display is performed in a temporary stop state without executing a fluctuation stop suggestion performance. Further, the output of the normal stop sound may also be limited, and a hit stop sound may be output. Thereafter, after the performance symbol 70a comes to a stop, the opening performance of the jackpot game will be executed.

Incidentally, upon winning, the opening performance of the jackpot game may be executed after the performance symbol 70a comes to a final stop by omitting the return performance.

In addition, although SP reach was illustrated and demonstrated, you may carry out the same thing as SP reach also about SPSP reach.

As mentioned above, in the SP reach performance in the advantageous gaming state, in the temporarily stopped state of the reduced display symbols 70a (changed symbols) in the left and right rows, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows are left and right, respectively. The production style is such that it oscillates. In addition, even in the SP reach performance in the normal game state, when the reduced display of the left and right row performance symbols 70a (changed symbols) is temporarily stopped, each of the left and right row performance symbols 70a swings left and right. The style of production is to do so. In this way, in the normal game state (first game state) and the advantageous game state (second game state), the operation mode of the performance symbol 70a in the temporary stop state in the ready-to-win performance is the same. By doing so, even in the normal gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in the same way as in the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the SP reach effect in the normal gaming state, in both the first variation route and the second variation route, the reduced mode (second mode), and both the first variable route and the second variable route have the same performance mode of swinging left and right in a reduced mode. By doing so, it is possible to give the same sense of expectation when the ready-to-win effect is executed, regardless of which variable path in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variable performance of the vertical scrolling variable path A, in the SP reach performance in an advantageous gaming state, the performance symbols 70a (changed symbols) in the left and right columns that are reduced in size are temporarily stopped, and the performances in the left and right columns are Each of the symbols 70a is designed to swing from side to side. In addition, in the variable performance of the first variable path of vertical scrolling, even in the SP reach performance in the normal gaming state, in the temporarily stopped state of the performance symbols 70a (changed symbols) in the left column and right column that are reduced and displayed, the left column and right column Each of the performance patterns 70a in the row is in a performance mode that swings from side to side. In this way, in the variable path of vertical scrolling in the normal gaming state (first gaming state) and the variable path of vertical scrolling in the advantageous gaming state (second gaming state), the operation mode of the performance symbol 70a in the temporary stop state in the ready-to-win performance are the same. By doing so, even in the normal gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in the same way as in the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a ready-to-reach performance, the expression that the motion patterns of the production symbols 70a in the temporarily stopped state are the same does not necessarily mean that the motion patterns are exactly the same, but also that the swinging directions of the production symbols 70a are the same, or the moving parts of the production symbols 70a are the same. Some of the operating modes may be the same, such as being the same.

As mentioned above, in the variable presentation of the first variable path of vertical scrolling in the normal game state, when the loss stops without going through the SP reach effect, the presentation pattern 70a is in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the decorative part and the identification part. ), it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which stop sound A (specific sound) is output during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed. In the normal game state, in the variable performance of the first variable path of vertical scrolling, when the loss stops after the SP reach performance (return performance), the performance pattern 70a is in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the decorative part and the identification part. A second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is limited can be executed during the stop suggestion period until the variable stop display is displayed.

In the variable presentation of the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state, when the loss stops without going through the SP reach effect, the presentation pattern 70a stops changing in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the stop sound is displayed, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which stop sound B (specific sound) is output. In the normal game state, in the variable performance of the second variable path of the annular scroll, when the loss stops after the SP reach performance (return performance), the performance pattern 70a is in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. It is possible to execute a second stop suggestion effect in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is limited during the variable stop suggestion period until the variable stop display is performed.

In the fluctuating performance of the vertical scrolling fluctuating path A in the advantageous gaming state, when the loss stops without going through the SP reach performance, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the identification part until the variable stop is displayed. During the variable stop suggestion period, it is possible to execute a first stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output. In the variable performance of the vertical scrolling variable path A in the advantageous gaming state, when the loss stops after the SP reach performance (return performance), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of an identification part. It is possible to execute a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound (specific sound) is limited during the variable stop suggestion period until the stop sound is reached.

In addition, in the advantageous gaming state, a variable path B may be set in a manner different from the vertical scrolling variable path A (for example, around the vertical axis or in an annular scroll). In this case, in the variable performance of the variable path B in the advantageous gaming state, when the loss stops without going through the SP reach performance, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the identification part until the variable stop is displayed. During the variable stop suggestion period, a first stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output may be made executable. In the variable performance of the variable path B in the advantageous gaming state, when the loss stops after the SP reach performance (return performance), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the identification part until the variable stop is displayed. During the variable stop suggestion period, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound (specific sound) is limited may be made executable.

Here, the stop sounds of the first stop suggestion effect are the first stop sound (stop sound A, stop sound B, etc.) when a loss is normally made, and the second stop sound that is output during a fluctuating stop suggestion period of the same color symbol, etc. There is a sound (same color symbol stop sound) and a third stop sound (stop sound for jackpot) that is output at the time of hit.

In the first fluctuating path of vertical scrolling in the normal game state, it is possible to execute a first reach promotion performance (for example, a preview performance such as a pending change or the operation of a movable accessory) that encourages the player to expect a reach. In addition, in the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state, it is possible to perform the first reach promotion performance (for example, a preview performance such as a hold change or the activation of a movable accessory) that stimulates the reach to make people expect it to become a reach. It is.

In the fluctuating path A of vertical scrolling in an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute a second reach promotion performance (for example, a preview performance such as a pending change or the operation of a movable accessory) to encourage the player to expect a reach. Similarly, when the variable path B of the advantageous gaming state is set, a second reach promotion effect (for example, a preview effect such as a hold change or the activation of a movable accessory) is executed to encourage the expectation of reaching the reach. It may be possible.

Here, in the advantageous gaming state, it is easier to shift to a jackpot than in the normal gaming state due to the time saving setting and the difference in winning probability. In other words, the vertical scrolling variable path A in the advantageous gaming state is better than the vertical scrolling first variable path in the normal gaming state, even if the variable paths are in the same manner, the third stop sound ( It is easy to execute a fluctuating stop suggestion effect using the jackpot stop sound. By doing so, the expectation of the variable path in the normal gaming state can be brought closer to the advantageous gaming state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the variable path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous gaming state is different from the second variable path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state, the third stop sound that is output at the time of attack is different. (stop sound for jackpot) makes it easy to execute a fluctuating stop suggestion effect. By doing so, expectations can be differentiated depending on the variation path, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the advantageous gaming state, compared to the normal gaming state, it is easier to execute a reach-inciting effect that incites the player to expect a reach. In other words, the vertical scrolling variable path A in the advantageous gaming state is better than the first vertical scrolling variable path in the normal gaming state, even if the variable path is in the same manner, it is easier to reach an advantageous situation such as a shift in reach. It is easy to perform a variation stop suggestion effect using a second stop sound (same color pattern stop sound) that makes you expect a transition. By doing so, the expectation of the variable path in the normal gaming state can be brought closer to the advantageous gaming state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the variation path is different from the second variation path of the annular scroll in the normal gaming state, the variation path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous gaming state leads to advantageous situations such as shifting reach. It is easy to execute a fluctuation stop suggestion effect using a second stop sound (same color pattern stop sound) that makes you expect a transition. By doing so, expectations can be differentiated depending on the variation path, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the variable performance of the vertical scrolling variable path, the variable performance (advantageous gaming state) in which the second reach promotion performance is executed is better than the variation performance (normal game state) in which the first reach promotion performance is executed. , when the reach performance is performed after the reach promotion is performed, the third specific sound is likely to be output. In the variable performance of the variable path of the annular scroll, the variable performance (advantageous gaming state) in which the second reach promotion performance is executed is better than the variation performance (normal gaming state) in which the first reach promotion performance is executed. When the reach performance is executed after the reach promotion is performed, the third specific sound is likely to be output. By doing this, expectations can be differentiated depending on the difference in reach promotion effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the type of the variable path in the variable performance changes, the display mode (configuration mode) of the performance symbol 70a may be changed. For example, the effect pattern 70a of the first variable path of the vertical scroll is composed of a decoration part and an identification part based on the character image A, and the effect pattern 70a of the second variable path of the annular scroll is formed of a character in a different form from the character image A. An example of changing the contents of the constituent elements of the production pattern 70a, such as configuring it with a decoration part based on image B and an identification part, is given. Note that the different aspect is one in which the character image has a dog motif, but also includes the dog in a different pose. In addition, the effect pattern 70a of the first variable route is composed of an identification part, and the effect pattern 70a of the second variation route is composed of a decoration part by the character image B and an identification part, etc. Other modifications such as changing the number of types may also be used.

When the type of variable route in the variable effect changes, the background display may be changed. For example, when a mode A background is used in the variable effect of the first variable path of vertical scrolling, a mode B background which is different from the mode A background may be used in the circular scroll variable effect. Note that the different aspect is one in which the background image has a town motif, but also includes the difference in morning and evening.

Even if the type of fluctuating route in the fluctuating performance changes, the fluctuating start performance executed during the start period may have the same aspect, but if the type of the fluctuating route in the fluctuating performance changes, the fluctuating start performance executed during the start period may change. The mode of the variation start effect may be changed. It should be noted that the change in the mode includes a change in the content of the performance, a change in the number of types of performance, a change in the performance period, and the like.

In the variation start production executed in the variation production of a predetermined variation route, production patterns 70a having different identification information may have different production modes, or may have the same motif. Here, the same motif includes the characters taking the same pose, such as raising their hands, even if the character images of the decorative parts are different.

Even if the type of the fluctuating route in the fluctuating performance changes, the stop suggestion start performance executed during the stop suggestion period may be the same, but if the type of the fluctuating route in the fluctuating performance changes, the stop suggestion start performance executed during the stop suggestion period may change. The mode of the stop suggestion start effect to be executed may be changed. It should be noted that the change in the mode includes a change in the content of the performance, a change in the number of types of performance, a change in the performance period, and the like.

In the variation suggestion performance executed in the variation performance of a predetermined variation route, the performance patterns 70a having different identification information may have different performance modes, or may have the same motif. Here, the same motif includes the characters taking the same pose, such as raising their hands, even if the character images of the decorative parts are different.

A variable path may be configured such that the effect symbol 70a is moving not only on the main (first image display device 131) screen but also on the sub (second image display devices 132, 133).

Regardless of which of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) and the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll) are executed, the production symbols are 70a may be made switchable to the variation of the third variation path.
Here, the third variable path is the same as one of the first variable path and the second variable path (including the case where all or some of the variable paths of the performance symbols 70 in multiple rows are the same). ) is different from the other (including cases where all or some of the rows of fluctuating routes of the performance symbols 70 in multiple rows are different), both the first fluctuating route and the second fluctuating route. They may be different (this also includes the case where all or some of the rows of fluctuating routes are different among the fluctuating routes of the performance symbols 70 in multiple rows).
Then, regardless of which of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) and the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll) are being executed, the third variable route (pseudo continuous effect and reach effect) It can be said that it is easier for the player to shift to an advantageous gaming state if the player changes to the third variable trajectory than if the player does not switch to the third variable trajectory.

The variable path differs depending on the mode, which means that when comparing a predetermined number of rows of performance symbols 70a that are variable in the mode, the fluctuation paths of all or some of the rows of the multiple rows of performance symbols 70 are different. Contains cases.

In the embodiment, regardless of whether the performance symbol 70a and another special symbol TZ are executed in the first variation route (for example, vertical scroll) or the second variation route (for example, circular scroll), A fluctuating effect that fluctuates along a predetermined fluctuating path (rotation on the spot) is being executed. Then, regardless of which of the first variation route's variation performance and the second variation route's variation performance is executed, when a specific performance (reach performance) is executed, the performance pattern 70a is moved in a manner common to the predetermined variation trajectory. It may be possible to switch to a variable route or to a variable route in a different manner.

In the variable performance of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll), the first aspect of the variable start effect is executed in the start period, and in the variable effect of the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), in the start period, A variation start effect of a second mode different from the first mode is being executed. Regardless of whether it is a variation effect on the first variation route or a variation effect on the second variation route, there is a third aspect (such as enlargement of the symbol, a symbol effect, a color change of the symbol, etc.) that is different from the first and second aspects, such as a jackpot transition. It is also possible to perform a variation start effect (a type of preview effect that stimulates expectations for the game). Then, when the variation start performance operation of the third aspect is executed, it can be said that it is easy to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

When a pseudo continuous performance and a reach performance are executed, the stop suggestion performance of the middle row performance symbol 70a may be different from the stop suggestion performance in the normal mode when a pseudo continuous performance and a reach performance are not performed, or the same It may also be a mode. Different modes include not only changes in the normal mode and the content of the production, but also the fact that part or all of the production, such as a stop action, is not executed.

In the variable performance of the first variable route (eg, vertical scroll), it is possible to switch to the variable display of the second variable route (eg, circular scroll) with a switching effect (eg, eye catch, etc.) in between. The switching direction of the fluctuating route may be one direction, but in the fluctuating effect of the second fluctuating route (for example, an annular scroll), the first fluctuating route (for example, vertical scrolling) is ) may be made switchable to a variable effect. Here, the switching effect when switching from the first variable route to the second variable route and the switching effect when switching from the second variable route to the first variable route may be the same, but may be different. It may be a mode. In addition, it can be said that it is possible to switch between the predetermined mode and another mode in the variable production of the predetermined mode.

It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance in which a fluctuating route in a first period (start period, first half of fluctuation, etc.) in the fluctuating performance is different from a fluctuating route in a second period (stop suggestion period, second half of fluctuation) in the fluctuating performance. Further, during the third period (after the return performance (when the loss is confirmed after the reach performance)), it is possible to set a stop display mode different from the fluctuation path of the first period and the second period.

In a fluctuating performance, when a specific performance (such as a continuous performance, a role-playing performance, or an operation button operation suggestion performance) is being executed, from the first fluctuation route to the second fluctuation route (from the second fluctuation route to the first fluctuation route) switching is restricted. Further, in the variable performance, when a specific performance (such as a continuous performance, a function action performance, or an operation button operation suggestion performance) is being performed, the execution of the switching performance is restricted. Here, when the specific effect is executed, the visibility of the variable route may change (become invisible), for example, by displaying an operation button operation suggestion image.

When a specific performance (for example, a continuous performance, a role object operation performance, or an operation button operation suggestion performance) is executed, a switch from the first variation route to the second variation route (from the second variation route to the first variation route) is performed. Although limited, it may be possible to switch from the first variable route to the second variable route (from the second variable route to the first variable route) when a switching effect (for example, an eye catch) is executed.

Regardless of whether it is a fluctuating performance for the first fluctuating route or a fluctuating performance for the second fluctuating route, the first predetermined performance (a cut-in, etc. that arouses expectations) is used as a performance that hides part or all of the fluctuating route. , a second predetermined effect (switching effect such as an eye catch for scene switching) that is different from the first predetermined effect can be executed. Either the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be performed at a position overlapping the variable route (a position where the visibility of the variable route is changed (made invisible)). When the first predetermined effect is executed, switching from the first variable route to the second variable route (from the second variable route to the first variable route) is restricted, but when the second predetermined effect is executed , it may be possible to switch from the first variable route to the second variable route (from the second variable route to the first variable route).

During the execution period of a continuous performance, the performance period of a role object operation performance, or the effective period during which the operation of the operation button is reflected in the performance, there are restrictions on variable route switching, mode change restrictions, and execution restrictions on switching performance for mode change. You may also do so. Here, rather than a variable performance that is executed after a predetermined reach performance such as SP reach performance or SPSP reach is not executed and loses, it is preferable to lose after a predetermined reach performance such as SP reach performance or SPSP reach is executed. The variation effect executed later may be easier to switch the variation path, change the mode, or execute the switching effect for mode change.

In the variation presentation of the first variation route and the variation production of the second variation route, a special production (such as a cut-in) that hides the variation route of the production pattern 70a (changes the visibility) can be executed. When a special performance is executed, whether it is a variable performance on the first variable route or a variable performance on the second variable route, it may be possible to easily shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, if a special effect is executed, regardless of whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route or a variable effect on the second variable route, the transition will be made to the variable effect on the third variable route (reach effect, pseudo-run, etc.). You can make it easier. Furthermore, regardless of whether the first variable route is a variable effect or the second variable route is a variable effect, if the display of the variable route is restricted (by a cut-in or other effect), a gaming state advantageous to the player may be created. It may be made easier to migrate.

In production mode A or advantageous mode, 1 (in the case where one roulette wheel is displayed) or all columns are variable paths that scroll vertically. In this way, in the fluctuating performance using the multiple rows of performance patterns 70a, among the multiple rows of performance symbols, there is a relationship between the rows that fluctuate along a common (same) fluctuation path. On the other hand, in production mode B, in the first mode, the right and left rows rotate in a circular pattern, and the middle row rotates horizontally. In this way, in the fluctuating performance using the multiple rows of performance patterns 70a, there is a relationship between the rows that fluctuate in different fluctuation paths among the multiple rows of performance symbols. Here, regardless of whether it is the first mode or the second mode, the fluctuation path of the middle row performance symbol 70a may be the same in the pseudo-continuous performance or the ready-to-reach performance, and in this case, even if the modes are different, It can be said that it is possible to perform a variation effect of a variation route in a common manner.

The number of types of modes can be greater, the same, or fewer in the normal gaming state than in the advantageous gaming state. In this case, the number of types of variable paths may be greater in the normal gaming state than in the advantageous gaming state.

Regardless of whether it is the first variation route or the second variation route, there are a variation production that executes a special sound production that is different from the specific sound production (output of the variation start sound), and a variation production that does not execute the special sound production. . The specific sound performance is executed in a start period from when the performance symbol 70a which has been permanently stopped (temporarily stopped) starts to fluctuate until reaching the high-speed fluctuation period. In addition, the specific sound production is basically executed at the start of the variation in the normal mode without any other special production such as a preview production, and based on the timing of the start of variation of the production pattern 70a, the mode and variation of the production pattern 70a are Outputs a specific sound that corresponds to the route type, mode, etc.

The special sound production includes a predetermined first sound production (fluctuation start sound with low expectation level) (Fig. 36 (f1)), and a predetermined production (pre-reading production) that gradually suggests the expectation level over one or more variation productions. There is a second sound performance (fluctuating start sound with high expectations) that accompanies the start of a fluctuating performance in which a continuous performance such as , pseudo-rendition, etc.) is performed (FIG. 36 (f2)). And, the expectation level for transitioning to a jackpot is higher in the predetermined effect B, which is executed when the second sound effect is executed, than in the predetermined effect A, which is executed when the first sound effect is executed. is becoming easier to implement. Furthermore, the predetermined performance may be more easily performed when the second sound performance is performed than when the first sound performance is performed. The special sound production can be executed from the start of variation of the production pattern 70a until at least one production pattern 70a stops (temporarily stopped), and can be executed in a wider period than the specific sound production. Further, in the special sound production, it is possible to execute the timing of the start of variation of the production pattern 70a as a reference. In particular, the second sound production is a predetermined production including a preview production that is executed at the same time, before or after the special sound production (reach-stimulating production, display production in front of the screen (light guide plate, 3D, etc.), accessory production, hold-up, etc.) A special sound corresponding to a change effect, etc.) may be output.

In the gaming machine 1, sounds different from the fluctuation start sound, such as sounds accompanying the reach promotion effect, sounds accompanying the display effects in front of the screen (light guide plate, 3D, etc.), sounds associated with the role effects effects, and sounds associated with hold changes, etc. The output is being executed, but while the various effects described above are sound effects based on the start of the effect, the specific sound effects and special sound effects are executed based on the start of variation of the effect pattern 70a. They differ in some respects.

Here, the fluctuation stop sound output in the sound production of the stop suggestion performance executed during the stop suggestion period of the fluctuation production is a stop suggestion in which the production pattern 70a in the normal mode linked to the fluctuation route is stopped in fluctuation (temporary stop). Refers to the sound output during the period. For example, even if a sound is output when the performance pattern 70a in a reduced mode different from the normal mode is stopped and displayed, such as in the SP reach effect, this sound effect is different from the fluctuating stop sound. It is.

As shown in FIG. 19, when a special performance (resurrection performance) is executed in which the lottery is restarted after the performance symbols have temporarily stopped in a losing mode, the performance symbols 70a in a changed mode that has changed from the normal mode are temporarily When stopping, the stop sound performance may be executed or restricted, and furthermore, after the return performance, when the performance pattern 70a that has returned to the normal mode is stopped and displayed, the stop sound performance may be executed or restricted. . That is, when a revival effect is executed, even when an SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, a stop sound may be output during the stop suggestion period of the normal mode production symbol after the SP ready-to-reach effect (return effect). .

In a loss variation where a unique symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops, it is likely to develop into an SP reach performance, so the stop sound performance is likely to be restricted during the stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a in the normal mode. . However, even in the case of a losing variation in which a peculiar symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops, the stop sound production is likely to be executed during the stop suggestion period in which the production symbols 70a in the left and right rows stop in a normal manner. .

In this disclosure, "the mode of sound production (sound) (to vary the mode of production") includes not only varying the type (content) of sound effects, but also varying the volume or no sound (changing the sound output). (restrictions) may also be included.

In a loss variation performance in which a normal reach performance is executed, a predetermined sound performance is performed during a stop suggestion period in which the performance symbols in the middle row are stopped and displayed. In the variable performance of losing when the SP reach performance is executed, a sound performance in a mode different from a predetermined sound performance is executed in a stop suggestion period in which the middle row of performance symbols in the normal mode are stopped and displayed. In this way, the production mode of the sound production performed during the stop suggestion period of the middle row production symbol 70a is different between the variation production of loss when the normal reach production is executed and the variation production of loss when the SP reach production is executed. You can leave it there.

In the variable performance of losing when the normal reach performance is executed, a predetermined stop sound is output during the stop suggestion period in which the performance symbols in the middle row are stopped and displayed. In the variable performance of losing when the SP reach performance is executed, the output of a predetermined stop sound is limited during the stop suggestion period in which the performance symbols in the middle row in the normal mode are stopped and displayed. In this way, the presence or absence of a predetermined stop sound that is output during the stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a is determined between the loss variation performance when the normal reach performance is executed and the loss variation performance when the SP reach performance is executed. May be different.

(a) In the variable performance of loss when SP reach performance is executed, if you lose after performing the decisive button operation using the operation button 135, the middle row performance pattern 70a in a change mode different from the normal mode is stopped and displayed as a stop suggestion During the period, a predetermined stop sound is output, but after the return performance, the output of the predetermined stop sound is limited during the stop suggestion period during which the middle row of performance symbols 70a in the normal mode are stopped and displayed.
(b) In the variation performance of loss when SP reach performance is executed, if you lose after performing the deciding button operation with the operation button 135, the middle row performance pattern 70a in a change mode different from the normal mode is stopped and displayed as a stop suggestion During this period, the output of a predetermined stop sound is limited, and after the return performance, the output of a predetermined stop sound is limited during a stop suggestion period in which the middle row of production symbols 70a in the normal mode are stopped and displayed. .
Both patterns (a) and (b) may be set, or (a) or (b) may be selected and executed depending on conditions such as the type of SP reach effect. .

The promotion effect is executed (transition) in two cases: a promotion effect that temporarily stops in the attack mode and then changes again to expect the player to change to an advantageous attack mode, and a case where the promotion effect is not executed. After the promotion inciting performance that incites, the performance mode of the stop sound when temporarily stopping in the Atari mode may be different.

In an advantageous gaming state (especially in a time-saving gaming state) than in a normal gaming state, the output of the stop sound of the performance symbols 70a (especially in the middle row) is limited during the stop suggestion period, even if the variable performance is a hit. You can make it easier.

The effect pattern 70 may be divided into display modes as follows. Note that the content of the display mode is an example.
(a) First display of the effect pattern 70a: Display when the effect pattern 70a is stopped/The display area of the effect pattern 70a is opaque (low transparency). A state in which the background is difficult to see, difficult to see, or invisible through the display area of the effect pattern 70a. When the effect pattern 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped display), the decoration part (character image) and the identification part (numbers) are displayed. ), etc., do not work, or the decoration part (character image), identification part (number), etc. moves so that the decoration part of the character sways, or the decoration part (character image) or identification part (number) is inside the identification part (number). There are various presentation modes, such as effect displays (fire and character images) acting as effects.
(b) Second display of the performance pattern 70a: performance pattern 70a of the fluctuation start period in which the fluctuation start performance is executed
- It is also possible to perform a start action such as raising the effect pattern 70a when the effect pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, and then scroll. In this case, if the fluctuation path is from top to bottom, a start action that moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the fluctuation direction will be noticeable.
- When performing a start action, an action effect may be displayed. For the action effect display, for example, a first mode used for a preview effect (pre-reading effect) or a pseudo continuous effect and a second mode used for normal fluctuations are set, so that different modes have different expectations. It's okay.
・In the second display of the production pattern (display after the second display), even if the constituent elements remain the same as those in the first display of the production pattern, even if the constituent elements change from the first display of the production pattern. (Increase/decrease in the number of constituent elements, change in the contents of constituent elements, etc.). For example, the effect pattern 70a consisting of a decorative part and an identification part in the first display may change to only the identification part in the second display. Note that the displays after the second display also include displays used for ready-to-reach effects, pseudo-continuous effects, and the like.
(c) Third display of production pattern 70a: production pattern 70a during high-speed fluctuation period
A state in which the transparency of the display area of the effect pattern 70a is higher than that of the first display of the effect pattern 70 (transparent display), or the background display becomes easier to see through the display area of the effect pattern 70a.
(d) Fourth display of the performance pattern 70a: Hiding of the performance pattern in the variable performance Although the special design TZ is displayed in the SP or SPSP reach performance, a part of the performance pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right columns or Everything is hidden.
(e) 5th display of the performance pattern 70a: During the reach performance/during the temporary stop display of the performance pattern 70a in the left and right columns in the reach performance (SP or SPSP), the display of the performance symbols in the left and right columns is reduced. (reduced display), a state in which the constituent elements have changed and the swing fluctuation has changed in a manner different from the normal reach performance.
Note that the performance operation such as shaking of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows in the temporarily stopped state in the normal reach performance may be the same as the performance motion such as the shaking of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows in the variable performance of loss.
(f) Sixth display of performance symbols 70a: The performance symbols in the middle row and the performance symbols in the middle row in the reach performance are slowly scrolled at a speed slower than the high-speed fluctuation period.
- The effect pattern 70a with lower transparency is displayed than the third display when promoting development in reach, and the effect pattern 70a in the middle row is easier to see than in the third display.
- It may be easier to perform slow scrolling in the normal reach effect than in the SP and SPSP reach effects. In this case, execution of slow scrolling may be restricted in SP and SPSP reach effects.
(g) Seventh display of performance symbols 70a: The performance symbols 70a in the middle row are scrolled at a higher speed than the sixth display.
- The effect pattern 70a is displayed with lower transparency than the third display, so that the effect pattern 70a in the middle row is easier to see than in the third display.
- The effect pattern 70a is displayed with higher transparency than the sixth display, and the effect pattern 70a in the middle row is made more difficult to see than in the sixth display.
(h) Eighth display of the production pattern 70a: A roulette display in which a special symbol is added to the production pattern in the middle row.This is a state used in a roulette display that may occur before or after a reach production, and is a pseudo-coupled display. Performs performances and instigates SP reach performances. In this case, it may be displayed transparently and scrolled at high speed.
(i) Ninth display of the effect pattern 70a: Transparent display when the effect pattern 70a stops changing/The background display changes from a state where it is easily visible to a state where it is difficult to see through the display area of the effect pattern 70a.
(j) Tenth display of performance pattern 70a: The display area of the stop suggestion performance/performance pattern 70a during the stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a is in an opaque (low transparency) state. The background is displayed in a state where it is difficult to see, difficult to see, or invisible through the display area of the effect pattern 70a.
-Perform a stop suggestion effect in a manner different from the second display (fluctuation start effect).
- The effect pattern 70a may perform a stop action, such as bouncing, during the stop suggestion period, and then be stopped and displayed. In this case, if the fluctuation path is from top to bottom, it will be noticeable if the stopping action is performed by going too far in the same direction as the fluctuation direction and then returning to the top. Note that when performing a stop action, an effect such as a bounce effect may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19, after the stop display is displayed in a losing state (FIG. 19(g)), and after performing a predetermined revival effect (FIGS. 19(h) and 19(i)), You may also set a variable effect. In this case, in the stop display shown in FIG. 19(g) that makes it appear as if the loss has been confirmed, it is preferable to limit the output of the stop sound in order to make it appear similar to the loss after SP reach. In this case, the output of the stop sound of the middle row performance symbol 70a may be restricted during the stop suggestion period, rather than a variable performance in which the output of the stop sound of the middle row performance symbol 70a is not limited during the stop suggestion period. It can be said that the degree of expectation that the variable performance will shift to an advantageous gaming state is higher because there is a resurrection hit.

When a plurality of variable routes are set, the mode of the stop sound output during the stop suggestion period may be different or the same depending on the variable route. In addition, even if the variation route is the same, the stop sound may be different due to differences in the stop suggestion period (loss variation stop, temporary stop at reach, etc.) or differences in the rows of the production symbols 70a, etc. It may be.

When a plurality of modes are set, the mode of the stop sound output during the stop suggestion period may be different or the same depending on the mode. Furthermore, even if the mode is the same, the mode of the stop sound may be different due to a difference in the stop suggestion period (loss fluctuation stop, temporary stop when reaching, etc.) or a difference in the rows of the production symbols 70a. There may be.

When a plurality of variable paths are set, the display mode of the effect pattern may be different or the same depending on the variable path. In addition, even if the fluctuating path is the same, the display mode of the performance symbols may be different or the same due to differences in performance (normal performance, reach performance, etc.), differences in the rows of the performance symbols 70a, etc. good.

When a plurality of variable routes are set, the mode of the variable start effect in the start period may be different or the same depending on the variable route. Furthermore, even if the fluctuating path is the same, even if the mode of the fluctuating start performance is different due to differences in the performance and start period (normal performance, reach performance, etc.), differences in the rows of the performance symbols 70a, etc., the same fluctuation path will not occur. There may be.

When a plurality of variable routes are set, the mode of the variable stop suggestion effect during the stop suggestion period may be different or the same depending on the variable route. In addition, even if the variation route is the same, the stop suggestion effect may be different due to differences in the effect or stop suggestion period (normal effect, reach effect, etc.) or differences in the rows of the effect patterns 70a, etc. It may be.

When a plurality of modes are set, the variation paths may be different or the same in all or some modes. Note that even in the same mode, the variable path may be switched in a ready-to-win performance, a pseudo-continuous performance, etc.

The number of types of variable paths may be greater in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.
The number of types of modes and the number of types of variable paths may be increased in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.
The number of types of modes may be larger and the number of types of variable paths may be smaller in the normal gaming state than in the time-saving gaming state.
The number of types of modes may be smaller and the number of types of variable paths may be larger in the normal gaming state than in the time-saving gaming state.
The number of types of modes and the number of variable paths may be smaller in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.

The number of types of variable paths may be greater in a gaming state with a second winning probability (for example, normal) that is lower than the first winning probability than in a gaming state with a first winning probability (for example, variable probability). .
A gaming state with a second winning probability lower than the first winning probability (e.g. normal) has a larger number of mode types and a larger number of variable path types than a gaming state with a first winning probability (e.g. variable probability). You can increase the number.
A gaming state with a second winning probability lower than the first winning probability (e.g. normal) has a larger number of mode types and a larger number of variable path types than a gaming state with a first winning probability (e.g. variable probability). The number may be reduced.
A gaming state with a second winning probability (for example, normal) that is lower than the first winning probability has fewer types of modes and different types of variable paths than a gaming state with a first winning probability (for example, variable probability). You can increase the number.
A gaming state with a second winning probability (for example, normal) that is lower than the first winning probability has fewer types of modes and different types of variable paths than a gaming state with a first winning probability (for example, variable probability). The number may be reduced.

Depending on the difference in the number of pending storage groups, the mode of the variable start effect in the start period may be the same or different.
Depending on the difference in the number of pending storage groups, the length of the performance period of the variable start performance in the start period may be the same or different.
Depending on the group's difference in the number of pending memories, the mode of the stop suggestion effect during the stop suggestion period may be the same or different.
Depending on the group's difference in the number of pending memories, the length of the performance period of the stop suggestion performance in the stop suggestion period may be the same or different.
Depending on the group with the number of pending memories, the mode of the fluctuation start sound in the start period may be the same or different.
The mode of the stop sound during the stop suggestion period may be the same or different depending on the group with the number of pending memories.
In addition, the groups of the number of reserved memories can be divided into, for example, the number of reserved memories "0 to 3" and the number of reserved memories "4", divided into "0 to 2" and "3 to 4", or divided individually. , can be divided into various.

When a predetermined effect (preview effect or other effect) is executed in the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll), and when a predetermined effect is executed in the variable effect of the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll) The expectations for shifting to a state advantageous to the player (big win, time saving) may be different or the same.
The predetermined effect was executed in the variable effect of the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll) than the case where the predetermined effect (preview effect or other effects) was executed in the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll). It may be possible to make it easier for the player to transition to an advantageous state (big win or time saving) in the case of a case.
The predetermined effect was executed in the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) than when the predetermined effect (preview effect or other effects) was executed in the variable effect of the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll). It may be possible to make it easier for the player to transition to an advantageous state (big win or time saving) in the case of a case.

The stop sound output during the stop suggestion period may have different modes depending on the difference in identification information, the difference between the normal mode and the changed mode, the difference between the unique symbol and the normal symbol, etc. For example, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a having the identification information "7" may be different from the stop sound of other production patterns 70a having identification information such as "6".

When a promotion effect is executed, the stop suggestion effect (e.g. stop sound effect) executed in the previous stop suggestion period (e.g. temporary stop at "666") and the stop suggestion effect (e.g. stop sound effect) executed during the previous stop suggestion period (e.g. temporary stop at "777") ) may be different depending on the stop suggestion performance (for example, stop sound performance) performed. In this case, regardless of the temporary stop identification information, the form of the stop suggestion effect may be changed after the stop suggestion period, and if the temporary stop identification information is different, the form of the stop suggestion effect may be changed after the stop suggestion period. You can change it.

When a promotion effect is executed, the stop suggestion effect (for example, a stop sound effect) executed in the previous stop suggestion period (for example, a temporary stop at "666") and the subsequent stop suggestion period (for example, "666" or "222") are used. The mode may be the same as the stop suggestion effect (for example, a stop sound effect) executed during the temporary stop at ''. In this case, regardless of the identification information to temporarily stop, the form of the stop suggestion effect may be the same after the stop suggestion period, and if the identification information to temporarily stop is the same (same group), after the stop suggestion period The mode of the stop suggestion performance may be the same.

Performance mode A is composed of one type of fluctuating path in which the performance symbols 70a in the left middle right column are vertically scrolled. Performance mode B is composed of two types of variable paths, in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right rows scroll annularly, and the performance symbols 70a in the middle row rotate laterally. As described above, in the embodiment, there is a second mode in which the number of types of variable paths of the performance symbol 70a in the variable performance is smaller than that in the first mode.

The switching effect used when switching the variable route may be a still image or a moving image (animation). For example, even if it is a switching effect using characters, it is sufficient to make them appear while moving and spread across the screen. Here, if the switching performance is accompanied by a performance operation, it is preferable to stop the performance operation and then end the switching performance.

The switching performance may be used not only for switching the variable route but also for switching the reach performance, switching between the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, etc. There may be one or more types of switching effects. When setting a plurality of types of switching performances, it is preferable to have switching performances with different performance contents with different expectations of jackpot. When setting a plurality of types of switching effects, even if the effects have the same level of expectation for a jackpot, they may have different levels of expectation for transition to the revival effect.

Specific patterns such as pseudo-continuous patterns also include zone patterns that suggest zone switching. Note that the matters explained in the pseudo-continuous performance may be replaced with a performance based on zone symbols.

The mode for comparing variable paths is not limited to the relationship between normal gaming states, but may also be read as the relationship between normal gaming states and advantageous gaming states, or the relationship between advantageous gaming states.

In the production of the present disclosure, the same aspect may mean that some or all of the elements configuring the production are the same. For example, modes in which the fluctuating stop performance is the same during the stop suggestion period after the return performance include, although the components that make up the performance pattern are different when the fluctuation path is different, there is no stopping action, there is no path to the stop, and the stop sound is different. The same thing is said by saying that it does not happen.

The variable suspension in the present disclosure includes temporary suspension and permanent suspension.

The timing of switching the fluctuation route is not limited to the middle of the fluctuation performance, and may be after the fluctuation has stopped.

It may be possible to make it easier to develop a reach effect when the variable route is switched than when the variable route is not switched.

The continuous performance may include a pseudo-continuous performance, a look-ahead performance, and the like.

The operation performance of the movable accessory 73 may be performed during the start period of the losing fluctuating performance before the target pending memory that is the target of pre-reading is put on hold. Even if the target pending memory that is the target of pre-reading is placed on hold, the action effect of the movable accessory 73 may be performed.

In the normal reach performance, a stop sound can be output during the stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a. On the other hand, in the SP (SPSP) reach performance, the production pattern 70a in the normal mode changes to the production pattern 70a in which only the identification part is changed, and a stop sound is output during the stop suggestion period of the production pattern 70a in the middle row. Although it is possible, it is possible to limit the output of the stop sound during the stop suggestion period toward the confirmed stop of the loss mode after the return performance. The number of times the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is greater in the variable performance in which the SP (SPSP) reach effect is executed than in the variable performance in which the normal reach effect is executed and the variable effect in which the reach effect itself is not executed. easy.

The special symbol TZ does not perform a fluctuation start performance or a stop suggestion performance unlike the performance symbols. The special symbol TZ changes rapidly at a timing earlier than the performance symbol 70a, making its identification information impossible or difficult to discern. It can be said that the special symbol TZ has a shorter start period than the performance symbol 70a.

The identification information may be not only the numerical information of the identification part, but also the character image CG of the decoration part, the identification part, etc. alone or a combination thereof, as long as it is an identifier that allows the player to recognize the difference between the production symbols. good.

Even if the mode (for example, color, etc.) of the identification part (numbers, etc.) of the performance symbols 70a in the reach performance (for example, SP (SPSP) reach performance ~) is the same, the first variation of the first game state (for example, normal game state) The variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) in the second gaming state (advantageous gaming state) is more advantageous to the player than the variable effect of the route (vertical scroll) (for example, hit or more advantageous). state, etc.).
Even if the mode (for example, color, etc.) of the identification part (numbers, etc.) of the performance symbols 70a in the reach performance (for example, SP (SPSP) reach performance ~) is the same, the first variation of the first game state (for example, normal game state) The variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll) in the second gaming state (advantageous gaming state) is more advantageous to the player than the variable effect of the path (vertical scroll) (for example, a hit or a more advantageous It may be possible to make it easier to transition to a state such as
Even if the mode (for example, color, etc.) of the identification part (numbers, etc.) of the performance symbols 70a in the reach performance (for example, SP (SPSP) reach performance ~) is the same, the second variation of the first game state (for example, normal game state) The variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) in the second gaming state (advantageous gaming state) is more advantageous to the player than the variable effect of the route (circular scroll) (for example, a hit or a more advantageous It may be possible to make it easier to transition to a state such as

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means (main control section 110m) that controls an effect according to a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). The production control section 130m) is provided. The main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is also capable of determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory. It is. Based on the determination, the performance control means (performance control unit 130m) displays the performance symbol (70a) on the first fluctuation path (e.g. A first mode in which a fluctuating effect is performed that changes with vertical scrolling), and based on the determination, the effect pattern (70a) is It is possible to control a second mode in which a variable performance is performed that varies along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) and a second variable path (for example, circular scrolling) that is different from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling). Here, even if both the first mode and the second mode are set to the normal gaming state, or both the first mode and the second mode are modes set to the advantageous gaming state, , even if the first mode is a normal gaming state and the second mode is an advantageous gaming state, or even if the second mode is a normal gaming state and the first mode is an advantageous gaming state. It's okay.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment performs a fluctuation start performance (a performance such as the movement of the performance pattern itself or light emission, a performance such as the movement or light emission of the constituent elements of the performance pattern, or a performance such as the movement or light emission of the performance pattern itself) at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance. It is possible to perform effects such as actions of accompanying elements, effects such as light emission, and effects using elements other than the effect design such as sound effects, either singly or in combination. Here, the fluctuation start effect may be performed on at least one of the plurality of fluctuation paths. For example, even if the fluctuation start effect is performed on both the first fluctuation path and the second fluctuation path, the fluctuation start effect may be performed on the first fluctuation path. Even if the start effect is performed, the variable start effect is not executed on the second variable route, while the variable start effect is performed on the second variable route, the variable start effect is not executed on the first variable route. You can do it either way.

Variation start effects of different modes (a part or all of the variation start effects are different) between the first variation route (e.g. vertical scroll) and the second variation route (e.g. circular scroll). It is possible to do so.
By doing so, the differences in the fluctuating paths can be highlighted and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the variation effect of the first variation route (e.g. vertical scroll) and the variation effect of the second variation route (e.g. circular scroll) have a common aspect (some or all aspects of the variation start effect are the same). A start effect may be executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment performs a fluctuation stop suggestion performance (such as the movement of the performance symbol itself or light emission) during a fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol 70a in the fluctuation performance is to be stopped (temporary stop or permanent stop). , effects such as movement and light emitting of component elements of the effect design, effects such as movement and light emission of elements accompanying the effect design, effects using elements other than the effect design such as sound effects, etc. singly or in combination), and the effect pattern 70a It is possible to perform variable stop display (temporary stop or permanent stop). Here, it is sufficient to perform the fluctuation stop suggestion performance on at least one of the plurality of fluctuation routes. For example, even if the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is performed on both the first fluctuation route and the second fluctuation route, the first fluctuation route Even if you perform a fluctuation stop suggestion performance on the second fluctuation route and do not execute the fluctuation stop suggestion performance on the second fluctuation route, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be performed on the second fluctuation route while the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is performed on the first fluctuation route. You may choose not to perform the performance or not.

The variation effect of the first variation route (e.g. vertical scroll) and the variation effect of the second variation route (e.g. circular scroll) have different aspects (some or all aspects of the variation stop suggestion effect are different). It is possible to perform a performance.

It should be noted that the variation effect of the first variation route (e.g. vertical scroll) and the variation effect of the second variation route (e.g. circular scroll) have a common aspect (some or all aspects of the variation start effect are the same). A stop suggestion effect may be executed.

In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route (for example, vertical scrolling), after a specific performance (for example, a return performance such as a pseudo continuous performance or an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed. The fluctuation stop display may be executed by restricting the execution (partial or all non-execution of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect).
In the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (for example, circular scroll), after a specific performance (for example, a return performance such as a pseudo continuous performance or an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach performance, etc.) is executed, the above-mentioned fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed. The above-mentioned fluctuation stop display may be executed by restricting the execution of (non-execution of part or all of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect).
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), a specific effect (e.g. pseudo continuous effect or SP (SPSP) reach effect) After a return effect such as an eye catch is executed, the execution of the variation stop suggestion effect may be restricted (a part or all of the variation stop suggestion effect is not executed), and the variation stop display may be executed. .

The mode of the variation stop suggestion performance executed in the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) is the same as the mode of the variation stop suggestion production performed in the variation production of the second variation route (for example, circular scroll). However, the variation stop suggestion effect of the first variation route and the variation stop effect of the second variation route may be different from each other (performance components, number of types of performance components, content of the performance, performance timing, performance period, etc.) , and some or all of the performance components may be different).

After a specific effect (for example, a return effect such as a pseudo continuous effect or an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed in the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scrolling), it is set in the first variable route. The variation stop suggestion performance in the normal mode that was set and the variation stop suggestion production in the normal mode set in the second variation route (performance components, number of types of performance components, content of the performance, performance timing, performance period, etc.) (in which some or all of the performance components are different) may be executed.
After a specific effect (for example, a return effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed in the variable effect of the second variable route (for example, an annular scroll), the first variable route is changed to The set normal mode of fluctuation stop suggestion performance and the mode different from the normal mode of fluctuation stop suggestion performance set in the second fluctuation path (performance component, number of types of performance component, content of performance, performance timing, performance period) It is also possible to perform a fluctuation stop suggestion performance (where some or all of the performance components are different).
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), a specific effect (e.g. pseudo continuous effect or SP (SPSP) reach effect) After a return performance such as an eye catch is executed, a variation stop suggestion production in the normal mode set in the first variation route and a variation stop suggestion production in the normal mode set in the second variation route are performed (effects different from the variation stop suggestion production in the normal mode It is also possible to perform a variation stop suggestion performance in which some or all of the performance components are different due to differences in the number of types of performance components, the content of the performance, the performance timing, the performance period, etc.

During the variation stop suggestion period in the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the variation stop suggestion production in the normal mode set in the first variation route and the variation stop suggestion in the normal mode set in the second variation route A performance that suggests a stoppage of fluctuation in a third aspect that is different from the performance (differences in performance components, number of types of performance components, content of the performance, performance timing, performance period, etc., where some or all of the performance components are different) In the case where the variation stop suggestion effect of the third aspect is executed, the game state is more advantageous to the player (e.g., the normal to advantageous gaming state or the advantageous gaming state to an even more advantageous advantageous gaming state). etc.) may be made easier to transition to.
During the variation stop suggestion period in the variation performance of the second variation route (for example, an annular scroll), the variation stop suggestion production in the normal mode set in the first variation route and the variation stop in the normal mode set in the second variation route Suggestions for stopping fluctuations in a third aspect that is different from the suggested performance (differences in performance components, number of types of performance components, content of performance, performance timing, performance period, etc., where some or all of the performance components are different) When the variation stop suggestion performance of the third aspect is executed, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, a normal to advantageous gaming state or an even more advantageous advantageous gaming state from an advantageous gaming state) state, etc.).
Even if it is the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route (for example, vertical scroll), or the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation route (for example, circular scroll), the first fluctuation A third aspect (performance components, number of types of production components, content of production, production The case where the variation stop suggestion performance of the third aspect is executed is better than the case where the variation stop suggestion production of the third aspect (where some or all of the production components are different due to differences in timing, production period, etc.) is not executed. However, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, from a normal to an advantageous gaming state or from an advantageous gaming state to a more advantageous gaming state).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can display the performance symbols 70a in a variable stop mode in a first stop mode (for example, move from top to bottom and stop (temporary stop)) in the variable presentation of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling). In the variable presentation of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), the presentation pattern 70a can be displayed in a variable stop state in a second stop mode (for example, moving from diagonally upward to diagonally downward and stopping (temporary stop)). .
In the variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), after a predetermined effect (for example, a return effect such as an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed, the first stop mode and the second stop mode are executed. A variable stop display may be performed in a third stop mode (display of the movement of the effect symbols until the stop is not displayed, and is displayed in a stopped (temporary stop) state) which is different from the above mode.
In the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), after a predetermined effect (for example, a return effect such as an eye catch in the SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed, the first stop mode and the second A variable stop display may be performed in a third stop mode that is different from the stop mode (the movement of the effect symbols until the stop is not displayed and is displayed in a stopped (temporary stopped) state).
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), a predetermined effect (e.g. eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach effect, etc.) After the return effect, etc.) is executed, a third stop mode that is different from the first stop mode and the second stop mode (the movement of the effect symbols until the stop is not displayed and is displayed in a stopped (temporary stop) state) It may also be possible to display the fluctuation and stop display.

In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, in a variable production of a first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), the production pattern 70a is moved in a first variable stop route (for example, from top to bottom) according to the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling). In a variable presentation of a second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), the effect pattern 70a can be displayed in a second variable stop path (for example, a circular scroll) corresponding to the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll). It is possible to change and stop display from (moving diagonally upward to downward).
After a predetermined effect (for example, a return effect such as an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), the first variable stop path (for example, from above) is executed. It is also possible to execute the variable stop display of the effect pattern 70a without going through the downward movement).
After a predetermined effect (for example, return effect such as eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed in the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), the first variable stop path (for example, upper It is also possible to execute the variable stop display of the production pattern 70a without going through the process (movement downward from the top).
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), a predetermined effect (e.g. eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach effect, etc.) After the return effect, etc.) is executed, a variable stop display of the effect pattern 70a may be executed without going through the first variable stop path (for example, moving from top to bottom).

A predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) may be executed to switch from the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scroll) to the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll). .
A predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) may be executed to switch from the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll) to the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scroll). .
While it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) to switch from the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll); , restricting the switching from the variable effect of the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll) to the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll), or switching from a variable route different from the second variable route to the first variable route. It may also be possible to switch to.
While it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) to switch from a variable effect on a second variable path (for example, an annular scroll) to a variable effect on a first variable path (for example, a vertical scroll). , restricting the switching from the first variable route (e.g. vertical scrolling) to the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), or switching from a different variable route than the first variable route to the second variable route. It may also be possible to switch to.
Note that the predetermined effect for switching the variable route (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) may be the same, or may be different depending on the switching destination or the switching source.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment includes a first continuous performance (for example, a cut-in, a step-up, an accessory, operations, effects, etc.).
During the period in which the first continuous effect is executed, switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling) may be restricted. In the variable performance of the first variable route, execution of a predetermined performance (for example, switching performance such as eye catch) may be restricted during the period in which the first continuous performance is performed.
In the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), the second continuous effect (for example, a cut-in, step-up, function action, effect, etc.) performed in one or more variable effects. is possible. During the period in which the second continuous effect is executed, switching from the second variable path (for example, annular scroll) to the first variable path (for example, vertical scroll) may be restricted. In the variable performance of the second variable route, execution of a predetermined performance (for example, switching performance such as eye catch) may be restricted during the period in which the second continuous performance is performed.
During a period in which a continuous performance (for example, a cut-in, step-up, action of a role object, effect, etc.) is executed, even if the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) is the second variable route (for example, circular scrolling). However, switching to other variable paths may be restricted. Whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), a predetermined effect (e.g. switching effect such as eye catch) is executed during the period in which the continuous effect is executed. may be restricted.

During the period in which the movement effects of the movable accessories (first movable accessory 73, second movable accessory 74) are executed, the first variable path (for example, vertical scroll) to the second variable path (for example, annular scroll) It may also be possible to restrict switching to. In the variable performance of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), during the period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory (first movable accessory 73, second movable accessory 74) is executed, a predetermined performance (for example, eye catch etc.) is performed. Execution of switching effects) may be restricted.
During the period in which the action effects of the movable accessories (first movable accessory 73, second movable accessory 74) are executed, the second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll) to the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll) It may also be possible to restrict switching to. In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), during the period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory (first movable accessory 73, second movable accessory 74) is executed, a predetermined performance (such as eye catch etc.) is performed. (switching effect)) may be restricted.
During the period in which the movement effects of the movable accessories (first movable accessory 73, second movable accessory 74) are executed, even if the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) is the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll) ), switching to other variable paths may be restricted. Whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), the operation effect of the movable accessory (first movable accessory 73, second movable accessory 74) is Execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) may be restricted during the execution period.

During a period in which an operation suggestion effect prompting the operation of the operation means (operation button 135) is executed, switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling) is restricted. Good too. In the variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) is restricted during the period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts the operation of the operating means (operation button 135) is executed. You may.
During a period in which an operation suggestion effect prompting the operation of the operation means (operation button 135) is executed, switching from the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling) to the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) is restricted. Good too. In the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) is executed during a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts the operation of the operating means (operation button 135) is executed. May be restricted.
During the period in which the operation suggestion effect that prompts the operation of the operation means (operation button 135) is executed, whether it is the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling), other Switching to a variable path may be restricted. Whether it is the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), a predetermined Execution of effects (for example, switching effects such as eye-catching) may be restricted.

The main control means (main control unit 110m) operates in a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (advantageous gaming state) in which the degree of advantage to the player is different from the first gaming state (normal gaming state). and can be controlled. The performance control means (performance control unit 130m) displays the display means (first image display device 131, It is possible to execute a variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner on the second image display device 132, 133).
The number of types of fluctuating paths of the performance symbols 70a in the fluctuating performance may be greater in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) than in the second gaming state (advantageous gaming state).
The number of types of fluctuating paths of the performance symbols 70a in the fluctuating performance may be greater in the second gaming state (advantageous gaming state) than in the first gaming state (normal gaming state).

Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. annular scroll), a specific variable effect in which the effect patterns 70a are displayed in a different arrangement while changing and stopping. It is possible to perform (variable effects that result in uneven results). Further, it is possible to perform a specific sound performance that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol 70a in the specific variation performance (a variation performance that results in a random loss) is stopped.
After a specific performance (for example, a return performance such as an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed in a specific variation performance (variation performance that results in a random loss) on the first fluctuation route (for example, vertical scrolling), a specific sound Execution of the performance may be restricted.
After a specific variation performance (for example, a return performance such as an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed in a specific variation performance (variation performance that results in a random loss) on the second variation route (for example, an annular scroll), a specific Execution of sound effects may be restricted.
Whether it is a specific variation performance (variation performance that results in uneven loss) on the first fluctuation route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a specific variation performance (fluctuation performance that results in uneven loss) on the second fluctuation route (e.g. circular scroll), After the specific performance (for example, return performance such as eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach performance, etc.) is executed, the execution of the specific sound performance may be restricted.

Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), in the variable stop suggestion period which suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be stopped. , a first sound effect that outputs a predetermined sound (for example, a stop sound for a random failure), and a second sound effect that outputs a specific sound different from the predetermined sound (for example, a stop sound for a unique symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol or a development suggestion symbol). It is possible to perform sound production.
In the variation performance of the first variation path (for example, vertical scrolling), the specific performance symbol (for example, the production symbol (singular symbol) such as a pseudo-continuous symbol or a development suggestion symbol) is displayed in a fixed state. , the fluctuating performance of a loss in which a predetermined performance symbol (normal performance symbol (normal symbol)) that is different from the specific performance symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner is better than the first sound performance (for example, a stop sound for a random loss). may be made easier to perform.
In the fluctuating performance of the second fluctuating path (for example, a circular scroll), the specific performance pattern (for example, a performance pattern (singular pattern) such as a pseudo-continuous pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed in a fixed state. Also, the fluctuating performance of a loss in which a predetermined performance symbol (normal performance symbol (normal symbol)) that is different from the specific performance symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner is better than the first sound performance (for example, a stop for a random loss). (sound effects) may be made easier to perform.
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), the specific effect pattern (e.g. pseudo continuous pattern, development suggestion pattern, etc.) Compared to the fluctuating performance in which a performance symbol (specific symbol)) is displayed in a static state, a loss in which a predetermined performance symbol (normal performance symbol (normal symbol)) that is different from the specific performance symbol is displayed in a static state. The variable performance may make it easier to execute the first sound performance (for example, a performance using a stop sound for a discrepancy).

In the variable performance of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), the variable performance of a loss in which the reach effect is not executed and the variable effect of loss in which the reach effect is executed, the effect on the effect pattern 70a of a specific row (for example, the middle row) The sound performance (for example, the sound performance using a stop sound) that is performed during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests stopping is different (the presence or absence of sound, the content of the sound, the timing of sound output, the period of sound output, etc.) difference).
In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), the performance pattern 70a of a specific row (for example, the middle row) is divided into a loss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed and a loss variation performance in which the reach performance is executed. The presentation mode of the sound production (for example, the sound production with a stop sound) performed during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests stopping at is different (presence or absence of sound, sound content, sound output timing, sound output period, etc.) ).
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), there will be a variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed and the reach effect is executed. The performance mode of the sound performance (for example, the sound performance with a stop sound) performed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests stopping at the performance symbol 70a of a specific row (for example, the middle row) is different depending on the fluctuating performance of a loss. (Differences in presence or absence of sound, content of sound, timing of sound output, period of sound output, etc.) may be made.

In the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), it is possible to perform a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. In the variable performance of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), the display modes when the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable and stopped manner are the first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character), There is a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the first display mode. In the case of a losing variable presentation in which a reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed in a variable effect on the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), the effect pattern 70a in the first column (right column or left column) is It is better when the production pattern 70a in the second row (middle row) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character) than when it is displayed in a fluctuating and static manner. , a specific sound effect (for example, a stop sound effect) may be made difficult to perform.
In the variation production of the second variation path (for example, annular scroll), it is possible to execute a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. . In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), the display mode when the production pattern 70a is displayed in a variable and stopped manner is a first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character), There is a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the first display mode. In the variable presentation of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), in the case of a losing variable presentation in which a reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed, the effect pattern 70a of the first column (right column or left column) It is better when the production pattern 70a in the second row (middle row) is displayed in a fixed and variable manner in the first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than when it is displayed in a fixed and variable manner. However, it may be made difficult to perform a specific sound effect (for example, a stop sound effect).
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be stopped. , it is possible to perform a specific sound performance that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound). Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), the display mode when the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable and stopped manner is the first variable effect. There are one display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character) and a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the first display mode. Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), there is no risk of losing if the reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed. In the case of a variable performance, the performance symbols 70a in the second row (middle row) are displayed in the first display mode (for example, numbers, It may be possible to make it more difficult for a specific sound production (for example, a production using a stop sound) to be performed when a variable stop display is performed with the identification part + decoration part such as a character.

In the variable performance of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol 70a is stopped, the specific stop performance (for example, the movement of the performance symbol itself, the production of light emission, etc.), It is possible to perform effects such as actions of constituent elements and effects such as light emission, effects such as movements and light emission of elements accompanying the effect design, effects using elements other than the effect patterns such as sound effects, etc. singly or in combination). The specific stop production includes a first production mode in which a sound production (for example, a production using a stop sound) is performed, and a second production mode that is different from the first production mode (for example, no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing). , the sound output period, etc. are different from the first production Taiyo).
In the variable presentation of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), in the case of a losing variable presentation in which a reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed, the effect pattern 70a in the first column (right column or left column) When the performance symbols 70a in the second row (middle row) are displayed in a variable and static manner than when they are displayed in a variable and static manner, the second performance mode (for example, no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing, The specific stop performance may be made easier to execute (the sound output period, etc. is different from the first performance).

In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a is stopped, a specific stop performance (for example, the movement of the performance pattern itself, the effect of light emission, etc.), the performance pattern It is possible to carry out performances such as actions and light emitting of the constituent elements of the elements, performances such as actions and light emitting of elements accompanying the performance patterns, performances using elements other than the performance patterns such as sound effects, etc. singly or in combination). The specific stop production includes a first production mode in which a sound production (for example, a production using a stop sound) is performed, and a second production mode that is different from the first production mode (for example, no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing). , the sound output period, etc. are different from the first production Taiyo).
In the variable presentation of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), in the case of a losing variable presentation in which a reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed, the effect pattern 70a of the first column (right column or left column) When the performance symbol 70a in the second row (middle row) is displayed in a fluctuating and static manner than when it is displayed in a fluctuating and static manner, the second performance mode (e.g., no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing) , the sound output period, etc. are different from the first effect).The specific stop effect may be easily executed.

Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be stopped. , Specific stop effects (for example, effects such as movement and light emission of the effect design itself, effects such as movement and light emission of constituent elements of the effect pattern, effects such as movement and light emission of elements accompanying the effect pattern, effects such as sound effects, etc.) It is possible to perform performances using other elements alone or in combination. The specific stop performance includes a first performance mode in which a sound performance (for example, a performance using a stop sound) is performed, and a second performance mode that is different from the first performance mode (for example, no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing). , the sound output period, etc. are different from the first production Taiyo).
Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), there is no risk of losing if the reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed. In the case of a fluctuating performance, it is better when the performance symbols 70a in the second row (middle row) are displayed in a fluctuating and static manner than when the performance symbols 70a in the first row (right or left column) are fluctuating and statically displayed. , the specific stop performance in a second performance mode (for example, no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing, sound output period, etc. are different from the first performance sun) may be made easier to execute.

In the variable performance of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) is output during a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol 70a in a specific row (for example, the middle row) is stopped. It is possible to perform sound production. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the first fluctuation path, the display modes when the effect pattern 70a is displayed to stop changing include a first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character), and a first display mode. There is a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the second display mode.
In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the loss variation performance in which the reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is not executed is higher than the loss variation performance in which the reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed. The specific sound effect may be more easily executed when the variable effect is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character).

In the variable production of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a in a specific row (for example, the middle row) is stopped. It is possible to perform specific sound effects. During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll), the first display manner (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character) when the effect pattern 70a is displayed as a fluctuation stop is selected. and a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the first display mode.
In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, a circular scroll), the loss variation performance in which the reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is not executed is better than the loss variation performance in which the reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed. The specific sound effect may be more easily executed when the variable effect is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character).

Suggests that the performance symbol 70a in a specific row (for example, middle row) is stopped in a variable performance, whether it is the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (for example, circular scroll). A specific sound effect that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) can be executed during the variable stop suggestion period. Regardless of whether it is the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), the first There is a display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character), and a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the first display mode.
Whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), in the variable effect, from the variable effect of a loss when the reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed. Also, when the variable effect of losing where the reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is not executed is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (for example, identification part such as numbers + decoration part such as character), the above-mentioned A specific sound production may be made easier to execute.

In the variable presentation of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), in the case of a losing variable presentation, a predetermined sound (for example, a stop sound when losing) is output during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the presentation symbol 70a is stopped. It is possible to perform the first sound production.
In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), in the case of a variation production of hit, after executing the second sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, the stop sound at the time of strike) during the variation stop suggestion period, a special Sounds (for example, change sounds when the size etc. of a predetermined performance pattern change, stop sound of the performance pattern during promotion performance, final confirmation when the performance pattern of only the identification section returns to the original normal performance pattern) A third sound effect may be executed that outputs a stop sound, etc.).

In the variable presentation of the second variable path (for example, annular scroll), in the case of a losing variable presentation, a predetermined sound (for example, a stop sound at the time of a loss) is emitted during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the presentation pattern 70a is stopped. It is possible to execute the first sound performance to be output.
In the variation production of the second variation route (for example, annular scroll), in the case of a variation production of hit, after executing the second sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, the stop sound at the time of strike) during the variation stop suggestion period, Special sounds (for example, the change sound when the size of a predetermined performance symbol changes, the stop sound of the performance symbol during a promotion performance, the final sound when the performance symbol of only the identification section returns to the original normal performance symbol) A third sound effect may be executed that outputs a final stop sound, etc.).

Whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), in the case of a losing variable effect, a variable stop indicating that the effect symbol 70a will be stopped. During the suggestion period, it is possible to execute a first sound production that outputs a predetermined sound (for example, a stop sound when losing).
Whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), in the case of a variable effect of hit, a specific sound (e.g. After executing a second sound effect that outputs a stop sound), a special sound (for example, a change sound when the size of a predetermined effect pattern changes, a stop sound of a effect pattern during a promotion effect, or a effect only for the identification part) A third sound performance may be executed that outputs a final final stop sound (such as when the symbol returns to the original normal performance symbol).

Fluctuation start effects (for example, effects such as the movement or light emission of the effect design itself, effects such as the movement or light emission of the constituent elements of the effect pattern, effects such as the movement or light emission of elements accompanying the effect pattern, effects other than effects such as sound effects) There are a first mode (normal) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, look-ahead, pseudo-connection, etc.).
In the variation effect of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the variation of the second aspect is more effective than the case where the variation start effect of the first aspect is executed during the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect. When the start effect is executed, it is better to perform a predetermined effect that makes you expect a big hit (for example, a pre-read effect such as the movement effect of a role, a cut-in, development, step-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, etc.) It may be made easier to execute.
In the variation effect of the second variation route (for example, an annular scroll), the variation start effect of the second aspect is more effective than the case where the variation start effect of the first aspect is executed during the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start effect. When a variable start effect is executed, it is better to use a predetermined effect that makes you expect a big hit (for example, a pre-reading effect such as an action effect of a role model, a cut-in, development, step-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, etc.) may be made easier to execute.
In a variable performance, whether it is a first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) or a second variable route (for example, circular scroll), the first aspect is When the variable start effect of the second aspect is executed, the predetermined effect that makes you expect a big win (for example, a look-ahead effect such as an action effect of an accessory, a cut Effects such as in, development, step-up, pseudo-continuation effects, etc.) may be made easier to execute.

In the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped; It is possible to control the case where the specific sound production is not executed and the case where the specific sound production is not executed.
In the variable presentation of the variable presentation of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), the case where the specific sound presentation is not executed is better than the case where the specific sound presentation is executed. (e.g., eye-catching, etc.) may be made easier to perform.

In the variation production of the second variation route (for example, an annular scroll), a specific sound production is executed in which a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. , a case where the specific sound effect is not executed, and a case where the specific sound effect is not executed.
In the variable presentation of the variable presentation of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), the case where the specific sound presentation is not executed is better than the case where the specific sound presentation is executed. Return effects such as eye-catching in effects) may be made easier to perform.

Whether it is the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable route (for example, circular scroll), in the variable production, a specific sound is generated during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. (For example, a stop sound) can be controlled to execute a specific sound effect and not to execute the specific sound effect.
Whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), in the variable effect of the variable effect, the specific sound effect is more effective than when the specific sound effect is executed. A predetermined effect (for example, a return effect such as an eye catch in the SP (SPSP) reach effect) may be more easily executed if it is not executed.

In the variable performance of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), there are two cases: a case where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one) and a case where the number of pending memories is a specific number (for example, four) different from the predetermined number. In a variable start period that includes the execution period of the variable start effect, variable start effects may be executed in different ways (for example, the content of the effect, the execution timing of the effect, the execution period of the effect, etc. are different).
In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), there are cases where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one), and cases where the number of pending memories is a specific number (for example, four) different from the predetermined number. In this case, a variable start performance may be performed in a different manner (for example, the content of the performance, the performance execution timing, the performance execution period, etc. are different) during the fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance.
Whether it is the first variable route (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), in the variable performance, there are cases where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one), and the case where the number of pending memories is In the case where the specific number is different from the predetermined number (for example, 4), different aspects (for example, the content of the effect, the execution timing of the effect, the execution period of the effect, etc.) may be set during the variable start period including the execution period of the variable start effect. You may perform a variation start effect (different).

Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), a predetermined effect with the same motif (e.g. group effect, mode common notice, etc.) It is doable.
When the predetermined effect (e.g. group effect, mode common notice, etc.) is executed in the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g. vertical scrolling in the normal gaming state), the second variable path (e.g. the circular shape in the advantageous gaming state) It may be possible to make it easier for the player to shift to a state advantageous when the predetermined performance (for example, group performance, mode common notice, etc.) is executed in the variable performance (scroll).
When the predetermined effect (e.g. group effect, mode common notice, etc.) is executed in the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll in the advantageous gaming state), the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll in the normal gaming state) is It may be possible to make it easier for the player to shift to a state advantageous when the predetermined performance (for example, group performance, mode common notice, etc.) is executed in the variable performance (scroll).
It should be noted that although the first variable route is in the normal gaming state, it may be in the advantageous gaming state. Although the second variable route is set to an advantageous gaming state, it may be a normal gaming state. That is, the above control may be applied to different variable paths in the normal gaming state, and the above control may be applied to different variable paths in the advantageous gaming state.

Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable route (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be stopped. , it is possible to perform a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound).
The first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) and the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling) may have different aspects (some or all of the contents, execution timing, execution period, etc.). The specific sound effects may be executed.
In the case of the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) and the case of the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), there are common features (some of the content, execution timing, execution period, etc.) The specific sound production may be executed in which all the sounds are the same.

In the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), it is possible to perform a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (such as a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped.
In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), a case where a predetermined production pattern 70a (for example, the identification part "6", etc.) is displayed in a variable stop during the variation stop suggestion period, and a case where the predetermined production pattern 70a The specific sound production may be executed in a different manner depending on the case where a production pattern 70a having a different specificity (for example, the identification part "7", etc.) is displayed in a variable stop state during the variation stop suggestion period.
In the variable performance of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), there are two cases: a case where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one) and a case where the number of pending memories is a specific number (for example, four) different from the predetermined number. , the specific sound effects may be performed in different patterns.

In the variation production of the second variation route (for example, circular scroll), it is possible to execute a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (such as a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. .
In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), a case where a predetermined (for example, identification part "6", etc.) production pattern 70a is displayed in a variable stop during the variation stop suggestion period, and a case where the predetermined production pattern The specific sound production may be executed in a different manner depending on the case where a production pattern 70a having a different specificity (for example, the identification part "7", etc.) from 70a is displayed in a variable stop state during the variation stop suggestion period.
In the variable performance of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), there are cases where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one), and cases where the number of pending memories is a specific number (for example, four) different from the predetermined number. Then, different patterns of the specific sound effects may be executed.

Whether it is the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable route (for example, circular scroll), in the variable production, a specific sound is generated during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped. It is possible to execute a specific sound effect that outputs a stop sound (stop sound, etc.).
Whether it is the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variation route (for example, circular scroll), in the variation production, a predetermined production pattern 70a (for example, the identification part "6", etc.) indicates the variation stop. A case in which the performance symbol 70a of a specific (for example, identification part "7" etc.) different from the predetermined performance symbol 70a is displayed in a variable and static manner during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, The specific sound production may be performed in different ways.
Whether it is the first variable route (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second variable route (e.g. circular scroll), in the variable performance, there are cases where the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one), and the case where the number of pending memories is The specific sound production may be performed in different patterns depending on the specific number (for example, four) that is different from the predetermined number.

Whether it is a variable effect on the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or a variable effect on the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in the first form (e.g. numbers etc.) in the reach effect. Change from the identification part + decorative part such as a character) to the second mode (for example, only the identification part such as numbers), and stop the fluctuation in a temporary stop state with a predetermined movement mode (up/down, left/right, rotation, etc.) Can be displayed.
The reach effect in the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g., vertical scroll) and the reach effect in the variable effect of the second variable route (e.g., circular scroll), the effect being displayed as fluctuating and stopped in the second mode. The presentation mode of the symbol 70a (for example, the mode until the symbol 70a is fluctuated and stopped displayed after a return presentation such as an eye catch in the SP (SPSP) reach presentation) may be the same.

A first variation stop suggestion in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped in a predetermined manner in the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling). It is possible to perform a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the production or the output of the specific sound is limited.
A first variable stop in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped in a predetermined manner in a variable presentation of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll). It is possible to execute a suggestive effect or a second fluctuation stop suggestive effect in which the output of the specific sound is limited.
In a variable production, whether it is the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variation route (for example, circular scroll), the production pattern 70a is in a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern 70a is stopped in a predetermined manner. , a first variable stop suggestion effect in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output, or a second variable stop suggestion effect in which the output of the specific sound is limited.

In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the second variation stop suggestion production (specific sound A variable performance in which a performance in which the output of the output is limited) is performed, a change in a predetermined information display (a pending icon, a pending display of the icon, a display that presents information to other players, etc.) Effects (changes in color, shape, etc.) may be made easier to perform.
In the variation performance of the second variation path (for example, an annular scroll), the second variation stop suggestion production (specific A variable performance in which a performance in which the output of sound is limited) is executed, a variable performance in which a predetermined information display (a hold icon, a hold display such as the icon, a display to present information to other players, etc.) is performed. Change effects (changes in color, shape, etc.) may be made easier to perform.
The first variation stop suggestion production (production that can output a specific sound) is executed in the variation production whether it is the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variation route (for example, circular scroll). A variable effect in which the second variable stop suggestion effect (a effect in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is performed is better than a variable effect in which a predetermined information display (such as a hold icon or the relevant icon) is executed. Change effects (changes in color, shape, etc.) may be made easier to execute (such as a hold display or a display that presents information to other players).

In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the second variation stop suggestion performance (specific sound It is better to perform variable performances in which the level of expectation changes step by step (for example, development, cut-in, step-up, role-playing, pending changes, etc.). It may be made easier to execute.
In the variation performance of the second variation route (for example, an annular scroll), the second variation stop suggestion production (specific A variable performance in which the level of expectation changes step by step is better for a variable performance in which a production in which sound output is limited (for example, development, cut-in, step-up, function action, pending change, etc.) may be made easier to execute.
The first variation stop suggestion production (production that can output a specific sound) is executed in the variation production whether it is the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variation route (for example, circular scroll). A variable performance in which the variable second stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is performed is better than a fluctuating performance in which the level of expectation changes in stages (e.g. development, cut-in, step-up, accessory action, pending change, etc.) may be made easier to execute.

In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the second variation stop suggestion production (specific sound A variable performance in which the display position of the performance symbol 70a changes (for example, a change in the symbol position in the left column or right column during a reach performance) is better than a variable performance in which a production in which the output of the output is limited) is executed. It may be made easier to execute.
In the variation performance of the second variation path (for example, an annular scroll), the second variation stop suggestion production (specific A variable production in which the display position of the production symbol 70a changes (for example, a change in the symbol position in the left column or right column during a reach production) is better than a variation production in which a production in which the output of sound is limited (production in which the output of sound is limited) is performed. may be made easier to execute.
The first variation stop suggestion production (production that can output a specific sound) is executed in the variation production whether it is the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variation route (for example, circular scroll). The variation production in which the second variation stop suggestion production (production in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is performed is better than the variation production in which the display position of the production symbol 70a changes ( For example, changes in the symbol positions of the left column and the right column during a ready-to-reach performance may be made easier to execute.

In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the second variation stop suggestion production (specific sound It may be possible to make it easier to execute a change performance (such as a promotion performance) in which the performance symbol 70a that is a reach target changes in a reach performance in a variable performance (for example, a promotion performance) in a fluctuating performance in which a performance in which the output of is limited) is executed. .
In the variation performance of the second variation path (for example, an annular scroll), the second variation stop suggestion production (specific Even if a variable production in which a production in which the output of sound is limited is executed, a variation production in which the production pattern 70a that is a reach target changes in a reach production in a variable production (for example, a promotion production, etc.) is easier to execute. good.
Even if the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) is the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll), the first variable stop suggestion effect (a effect capable of outputting a specific sound) is executed in the variable effect. The variation production in which the second variation stop suggestion production (production in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is performed is better than the variation production in which the production symbol 70a that is a reach target changes in the reach production in the variation production ( For example, promotion effects, etc.) may be made easier to execute.

The specific sounds of the first variable stop suggestion production (production that can output a specific sound) include a first specific sound (for example, a normal stop sound, etc.) and a second specific sound different from the first specific sound (for example, a pseudo sound). There is a special stop sound (such as when temporarily stopping a pattern or a pattern of the same color).
In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the first variation stop suggestion production (specific The second specific sound (for example, a special stop sound such as when a pseudo pattern or a pattern of the same color is temporarily stopped) may be output more easily in a variable effect in which a effect that can output a sound is executed.
In the variation performance of the second variation route (for example, an annular scroll), the first variation stop suggestion production ( The second specific sound (for example, a special stop sound such as when a pseudo symbol or a symbol of the same color is temporarily stopped) may be output more easily in a variable production in which a production that can output a specific sound is performed. .
Whether it is the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variation route (for example, circular scrolling), the second variation stop suggestion production (production in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is The variation production in which the first variation stop suggestion production (a production that can output a specific sound) is more effective than the variation production that is executed in which the second specific sound (for example, a temporary stop of a pseudo pattern or a pattern of the same color) is executed. It may also be possible to make it easier for a special stop sound (such as a special stop sound) to be output.

In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the first variation stop suggestion production (specific It is better to use a variable performance in which a performance that can output sound) is executed, and a pre-warning performance that notifies the expectation level of a jackpot (for example, the operation of a role model, the display of symbols for pre-reading, the effect of the symbol, etc.). You can make it easier.
In the variation performance of the second variation route (for example, an annular scroll), the first variation stop suggestion production ( It is better to perform a variable performance in which a performance that can output a specific sound is performed, and a pre-warning performance that notifies the expectation level of a jackpot (for example, the operation of a role object, the display of a symbol for pre-reading, the effect of a symbol, etc.). It may be made easier to do so.
Whether it is the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), in the variable effect, the second variable stop suggestion effect (the effect in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is A variable effect in which the first variable stop suggestion effect (a effect that can output a specific sound) is performed is better than a variable effect in which a pre-warning effect that informs the expectation level of a jackpot (e.g., an ornament) (operation, display of pre-reading symbols, effects of symbols, etc.) may be made easier to execute.

The specific sounds of the first variable stop suggestion production (production that can output a specific sound) include a first specific sound (for example, a stop sound during normal (balance failure)) and a second specific sound different from the first specific sound. (for example, a special stop sound when a pseudo symbol or a symbol of the same color is temporarily stopped), and a third specific sound (for example, a stop sound for a jackpot) that is different from the first specific sound and the second specific sound.
In the first mode (normal game state mode), it is possible to execute a first reach promotion effect that encourages the player to expect a reach. Furthermore, in the second mode (mode of advantageous gaming state), it is possible to execute a second reach-increasing performance in which the above-mentioned reach-increasing is performed.
The variable performance in which the second reach promotion performance is performed is better than the fluctuation performance in which the first reach promotion performance is performed, when the reach performance is executed after the reach promotion is performed, the first reach promotion performance is performed. 3. A specific sound (for example, a stop sound for a jackpot) may be made easier to output.

Regarding the control linked to the above-mentioned fluctuation path, if the control of a predetermined fluctuation path is specified but the control of other fluctuation paths is not specified, the same control as the predetermined fluctuation path is executed on the other fluctuation path. The same control as the predetermined variable path may not be executed, or the control different from the predetermined variable path may be executed.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration 1-1 to solve the above problem includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a plurality of control means that can execute notification in a predetermined manner. Notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) and a plurality of detection means capable of detecting predetermined information (game board connector 1620, reflective sensor 680a) ~680d, 780a~780d), wherein the control means is capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state using the plurality of detection means. , the plurality of notification means are configured to provide first abnormality notifications based on the detection of the first abnormal state (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: FIG. 14-1). A), etc.) and a second abnormality notification based on the detection of the second abnormal state (upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), and when the first abnormal state is resolved while the first abnormality notification is being executed by a predetermined detection means among the plurality of detection means, the first abnormality notification being executed is executed for a predetermined period of time. The gist is to provide continuous notification (Figure 14-1 (C)).

◆The gaming machine with the 1-2 configuration to solve the above problem includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a plurality of control means that can execute notification in a predetermined manner. Notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) and a plurality of detection means capable of detecting predetermined information (game board connector 1620, reflective sensor 680a) ~680d, 780a~780d), wherein the control means is capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state using the plurality of detection means. , the plurality of notification means are configured to provide first abnormality notifications based on the detection of the first abnormal state (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: FIG. 14-1). A), etc.) and a second abnormality notification based on the detection of the second abnormal state (upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), and can be executed so that the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification have different priorities.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration 1-3 to solve the above problems includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a first means (upper unit) that can execute the performance. 180, a second means (accessory unit 102B, superior accessory main body part 650, inferior accessory main body part 750) to which the superior accessory decoration part 600, inferior accessory decoration part 700) can be attached, and notification in a predetermined manner a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) capable of performing In the gaming machine equipped with a game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), the second means includes a third means different from the first means (superior role decoration part 800, lower role decoration part 800, When the third means is attached to the second means, the control means is configured to notify the abnormality by the notification means based on the detection by the detection means. The gist is that it is possible to perform incorrect installation error notification of the lower decorative part, notification of the incorrect installation error of the lower decorative part, notification of the incorrect installation error of the upper unit: Fig. 14-1 (B), etc.).

◆The gaming machine having the configuration 1-4 to solve the above problems includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a first means (upper unit) that can execute the performance. 180, a second means (accessory unit 102B, superior accessory main body part 650, inferior accessory main body part 750) to which the superior accessory decoration part 600, inferior accessory decoration part 700) can be attached, and notification in a predetermined manner a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) capable of performing In the gaming machine equipped with a game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), the second means includes a third means different from the first means (superior role decoration part 800, lower role decoration part 800, The object decoration part 900) can be attached, and when the third means is attached to the second means in an abnormal attachment state, the control means controls the notification means based on the detection by the detection means. The first abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Figure 14-1 (B), etc.) is possible and is different from the above-mentioned abnormal installation state. In the case of a predetermined abnormal state, the notification means issues a second abnormality notification different from the first abnormality notification (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: FIG. 14 -1(A), etc.), and can be executed so that the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification have different priorities.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-5 to solve the above problem includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a first means (upper unit) that can execute the performance. 180, a second means (accessory unit 102B, superior accessory main body part 650, inferior accessory main body part 750) to which the superior accessory decoration part 600, inferior accessory decoration part 700) can be attached, and notification in a predetermined manner (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342), and a detection device (game board) capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means. connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), in which the second means includes third means different from the first means (superior accessory decoration part 800, inferior accessory decoration part 800, 900), and when the first means is in a first attachment abnormality state in which the first means is not normally attached, the control means causes the notification means to detect the first abnormality based on the detection by the detection means. It is possible to perform notifications (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and the third means is attached to the third means. 2. If the installation is in an abnormal state, based on the detection by the detection means, the notification means issues a second abnormality notification different from the first abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, Upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Fig. 14-1 (B), etc.) can be executed.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-6 to solve the above problem includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a first means (upper unit) that can execute the performance. 180, a second means (accessory unit 102B, superior accessory main body part 650, inferior accessory main body part 750) to which the superior accessory decoration part 600, inferior accessory decoration part 700) can be attached, and notification in a predetermined manner (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342), and a detection device (game board) capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means. connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), in which the second means includes third means different from the first means (superior accessory decoration part 800, inferior accessory decoration part 800, 900), and when the first means is in a first attachment abnormal state in which the first means is not normally attached, the control means causes the notification means to detect the first abnormality based on the detection by the detection means. It is possible to perform notifications (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and the third means is attached to the third means. 2. When the installation is in an abnormal state, the notification means generates a second abnormality notification different from the first abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: FIG. 14 -1(B), etc.), and if the abnormal state is a predetermined abnormal state different from the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state, the notification means will issue a third abnormality notification (various notifications: 15-1 to 15-11) can be executed, and can be executed so that the first abnormality notification or the second abnormality notification and the third abnormality notification have different priorities. shall be.

◆The game machine having the configuration 1-7 to solve the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), and detachable members (upper unit 180, decorative part 600). , a lower accessory decoration part 700), a main body member to which the removable member is attached (accessory unit 102B, a superior accessory main body part 650, a lower accessory main body part 750), and a notification capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342); a game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and the control means is configured to control the control means when the first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred. A predetermined event notification can be executed by the notification means (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and the detection means When a second predetermined event based on the detected predetermined information has occurred, the notification means can execute the predetermined event notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification). , Upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Figure 14-1 (B), etc.).

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-8 to solve the above problems includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), and detachable members (upper unit 180, decorative part 600). , a lower accessory decoration part 700), a main body member to which the removable member is attached (accessory unit 102B, a superior accessory main body part 650, a lower accessory main body part 750), and a notification capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342); a game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and the control means is configured to control the control means when the first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred. A predetermined event notification can be executed by the notification means (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and the detection means When a second predetermined event based on the detected predetermined information has occurred, the notification means can execute the predetermined event notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification). , Upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Fig. 14-1 (B), etc.), when a third predetermined event different from the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occurs, the notification means causes the predetermined Specific event notifications that are different from event notifications can be executed (various types of notifications: Figures 15-1 to 15-11), and are executed so that the predetermined event notifications and the specific event notifications have different priorities. The main point is that it is possible.

◆The game machine having the configuration No. 1-9 to solve the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), and detachable members (upper unit 180, decorative part 600). , a lower accessory decoration part 700), a main body member to which the removable member is attached (accessory unit 102B, a superior accessory main body part 650, a lower accessory main body part 750), and a notification capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342); a game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and the control means is configured to control the control means when the first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred. A predetermined first event notification can be executed by the notification means (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and the above-mentioned detection When a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the means has occurred, the notification means can execute a predetermined second event notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification). Installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Figure 14-1 (B), etc.).

◆The game machine having the configuration No. 1-10 to solve the above problems includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), and detachable members (upper unit 180, superior decoration part 600). , a lower accessory decoration part 700), a main body member to which the removable member is attached (accessory unit 102B, a superior accessory main body part 650, a lower accessory main body part 750), and a notification capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342); a game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and the control means is configured to control the control means when the first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred. A predetermined first event notification can be executed by the notification means (upper decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and the above-mentioned detection When a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the means has occurred, the notification means can execute a predetermined second event notification (upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decoration part incorrect installation error notification). If a third predetermined event different from the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occurs (installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Fig. 14-1 (B), etc.), the notification means It is possible to execute a third event notification that is different from the first event notification and the second event notification (various notifications: FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11), and the first event notification and the third event notification The main point is that it can be executed with different priorities.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-11 to solve the above problem includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a first means (upper unit) that can execute the performance. 180, a superior accessory decoration part 600, a subordinate accessory decoration part 700), and a second means different from the first means (accessories unit 102B, a superior accessory main body part 650, and a lower accessory main body part 750), Detects predetermined information regarding a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner and the second means. In a gaming machine equipped with possible detection means (gaming board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), the control means controls the notification when the second means is in a predetermined abnormal state. The gist is that abnormality notification (attachment error notification: FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) can be performed by means.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration 1-12 to solve the above problems includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a first means (upper unit) that can execute the performance. 180, a second means (accessory unit 102B, superior accessory main body part 650, inferior accessory main body part 750) to which the superior accessory decoration part 600, inferior accessory decoration part 700) can be attached, and notification in a predetermined manner a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) capable of performing the above, and a first detection device capable of detecting first information regarding the second means. means (gaming board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and a second detection means (effect control board 320) capable of detecting second information different from the first information regarding the two means. In the gaming machine, the control means is configured to cause the notification means to issue a first abnormality notification (up to Decoration part not installed error notification, lower decoration part not installed error notification, upper unit not installed error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.), and a predetermined second abnormality different from the first abnormal state. If the condition is the same, based on the detection by the second detection means, the notification means issues a second abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lower decoration incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: FIG. 14 -1(B), etc.), and the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be executed with different priorities.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-13 for solving the above problems includes a performance control means (performance control board 320) that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a performance control means that is controlled by the performance control means and performs a predetermined A production member (upper unit 180, upper decoration part 600, lower decoration part 700) configured to be detachable according to the following steps, and a main body member (role part) to which the production member is attached, which is controlled by the production control means. object unit 102B, superior object main body section 650, subordinate object main body section 750), and notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, A performance board lighting device 341, a performance frame lighting device 342), and the main body member includes detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event, the effect control means causes the notification means to respond to the first predetermined event. When a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs, the notification means can execute the first event notification (installation error notification: FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4). The gist is that it is possible to execute a second event notification in response to a second predetermined event (various notifications: FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11).

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-14 for solving the above problem includes a performance control means (performance control board 320) that controls a performance according to the progress of the game, and a performance control means that controls a performance according to a predetermined value. The performance members (upper unit 180, upper accessory decoration part 600, lower accessory decoration part 700) configured to be detachable according to the following steps, and the main body member (role part decoration part) to which the performance member is attached, which is controlled by the performance control means. object unit 102B, superior object main body part 650, subordinate object main body section 750), and notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, The main body member includes detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event, the effect control means causes the notification means to respond to the first predetermined event. If a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs, the notification means can execute the first event notification (installation error notification: FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4). It is possible to perform a second event notification according to the second predetermined event (various notifications: FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11), and a third predetermined event different from the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event. occurs, the notification means can execute a third event notification corresponding to the third predetermined event (various notifications: Figures 15-1 to 15-11), , the third event notification, and the third event notification can be executed in different priority orders.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-15 for solving the above problems includes a performance control means (performance control board 320) that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a performance control unit that is controlled by the performance control means and performs a predetermined A first performance member (upper unit 180) configured to be detachable in accordance with the following steps, a main body member (accessories unit 102B) to which the first performance member is attached and controlled by the performance control means, and the performance control means. a second performance member (upper accessory unit 154, lower accessory unit 156) that is controlled by the performance control means and executes a predetermined mode of operation performance according to the progress of the game; Notifying means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) capable of executing notification, and the main body member has a predetermined information regarding the first presentation member. The production control means includes a detection means (gaming board connector 1620) for detecting information on the predetermined information, and when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a predetermined event, the production control means controls the notification means to detect the predetermined information by the notification means. It is possible to execute a predetermined event notification according to the predetermined event (upper unit not installed error notification, upper unit incorrectly installed error notification: Figure 14-3), and the second effect is executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined event occurs. The gist is that the members can perform operations in a predetermined manner.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-16 for solving the above problem includes a performance control means (performance control board 320) that controls a performance according to the progress of the game, and a performance control unit that controls a performance according to a predetermined value. A first performance member (upper unit 180) configured to be detachable in accordance with the following steps, a main body member (accessories unit 102B) to which the first performance member is attached and controlled by the performance control means, and the performance control means. a second performance member (upper accessory unit 154, lower accessory unit 156) that is controlled by the performance control means and executes a predetermined mode of operation performance according to the progress of the game; Notifying means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) capable of executing notification, and the main body member has a predetermined information regarding the first presentation member. the performance control means detects the information of the first predetermined event when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of the first predetermined event. A first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event can be executed by means (upper unit not installed error notification, upper unit incorrectly installed error notification: Fig. 14-3), and depending on whether or not the first predetermined event occurs. Regardless of the situation, when a second predetermined event that is different from the first predetermined event occurs, the second predetermined event can be executed in response to the second predetermined event by the notification means. (Various types of notifications: Figures 15-1 to 15-11), and the first event notification and the second event notification can be executed in such a way that the notification priorities are different. The gist is that it is possible.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-17 to solve the above problem includes a game control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. (performance control board 320), main body members (accessories unit 102B, superior role object main body part 650, lower role object body part 750) controlled by the effect control means, and the main body members controlled by the effect control means, A production member (upper unit 180, superior decoration part 600, subordinate decoration part 700) that can be attached to and detached from the member, and a notification means (main display device 131) that is controlled by the production control means and can execute a predetermined notification. , an audio output device 331, a presentation board lighting device 341, a presentation frame lighting device 342), a display section (identification display section 1532, 632, 732) that displays predetermined information related to attaching and detaching the presentation member, The effect control means is capable of performing an attachment determination as to whether or not the effect member is normally attached to the main body member, and in the attachment determination, an abnormal state in which the effect member is not normally attached is detected. If it is determined that this is the case, the gist is that the notification means can perform an abnormality notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) according to the abnormal state.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration No. 1-18 to solve the above problem includes a game control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. (performance control board 320), main body members (accessory object unit 102B, upper role object body part 650, lower role object body part 750) controlled by the effect control means, and the main body members controlled by the effect control means, A production member (upper unit 180, superior decoration part 600, subordinate decoration part 700) that can be attached to and detached from the member, and a notification means (main display device 131) that is controlled by the production control means and can execute a predetermined notification. , an audio output device 331, a production board lighting device 341, a production frame lighting device 342), a display section (identification display section 1532, 632, 732) that displays predetermined information regarding attaching and detaching the production member, The effect control means is capable of performing an attachment determination as to whether or not the effect member is normally attached to the main body member, and the effect control means is capable of performing an attachment determination as to whether or not the effect member is normally attached to the main body member, and in the attachment determination, a first When it is determined that the abnormal state is present, the first abnormality notification corresponding to the first abnormal state can be executed by the notification means (installation error notification: FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4), and the first abnormality It is possible to perform an abnormality determination as to whether or not the system is in a second abnormal state different from the state, and when it is determined that the second abnormal state is present in the abnormality determination, it is possible to perform a second abnormality notification by the notification means. Yes (various notifications: FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11), the gist is that the priority order of notification is different between the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration 1-19-1 for solving the above problem includes a first gaming machine that is rotatably supported with respect to the gaming machine frame (outer frame 160) and can be maintained in a closed state or an open state. A frame (inner frame 170), a second frame (glass frame 150) that is rotatably supported with respect to the first frame and can be maintained in a closed state or an open state, and a frame for executing a special game advantageous to the player. setting means (RAM clear switch 302a, setting key switch 302b) capable of setting a set value with a predetermined probability to a predetermined value; the setting means is configured such that the first frame is in an open state; When the second frame is in an open state, the set value can be set to a predetermined value, and when the first frame is in a closed state but the second frame is in an open state, the set value can be set to a predetermined value. The gist is that it can be set to a predetermined value.

◆The gaming machine having the configuration 1-19-2 for solving the above problem includes a first gaming machine that is rotatably supported with respect to the gaming machine frame (outer frame 160) and can be maintained in a closed state or an open state. A frame (inner frame 170), a second frame (glass frame 150) that is rotatably supported with respect to the first frame and can be maintained in a closed state or an open state, and a frame for executing a special game advantageous to the player. setting means (RAM clear switch 302a, setting key switch 302b) capable of setting a set value with a predetermined probability to a predetermined value; the setting means is configured such that the first frame is in an open state; When the second frame is in an open state, the set value can be set to a predetermined value, and when the first frame is in an open state but the second frame is in a closed state, the set value can be set to a predetermined value. The gist is that it can be set to a predetermined value.

◆The game machine having the structure No. 1-20 to solve the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), and detachable members (upper unit 180, upper accessory decoration part 600). , a lower accessory decoration part 700), a main body member to which the removable member is attached (accessory unit 102B, a superior accessory main body part 650, a lower accessory main body part 750), and a notification capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342), and setting means (RAM clear switch 302a, setting key switch 302b), and the main body member has detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d) for detecting predetermined information regarding the detachable member. When a first predetermined event for which the setting value can be set in the setting means occurs, the control means can execute a specific event notification by the notification means (setting change notification: FIG. 15 -3), when a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means has occurred, the notification means can execute a predetermined event notification different from the specific event notification; Attachment error notification: FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4), if the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred, the notification means does not perform the predetermined event notification and the The gist is that it is possible to perform specific event notification.

◆The game machine having the configuration No. 1-21 to solve the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), and detachable members (upper unit 180, superior decoration part 600). , a lower accessory decoration part 700), a main body member to which the removable member is attached (accessory unit 102B, a superior accessory main body part 650, a lower accessory main body part 750), and a notification capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342); a game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d), and the control means detects a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means; The gist is that when a second predetermined event different from the above occurs, the predetermined event notification can be executed by the notification means (installation error notification and switch connection error notification: Figure 15-6 (C)). do.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration 1-22 to solve the above problem includes a first detection means (radio wave detection sensor 305b) capable of detecting a first fraud from outside the gaming machine, and a A second detection means (magnetic detection sensor 305a) capable of detecting a second fraud, a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a plurality of controllers capable of executing notification in a predetermined manner. In the gaming machine equipped with notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342), the control device may control the control device based on the detection by the first detection device. If it is a first abnormality, the notification means can issue a first abnormality notification (radio wave error notification), and if it is a second abnormality detected by the second detection means, the notification means can issue a second abnormality notification. If an abnormality notification (magnetic error notification) is executable, the first abnormality and the second abnormality have both occurred, and the first abnormality has occurred before the second abnormality, the The gist is that the first abnormality notification is executed for a predetermined period even if the second abnormality occurs.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration 1-23 to solve the above problem includes a first detection means (radio wave detection sensor 305b) capable of detecting a first fraud from outside the gaming machine, and a A second detection means (magnetic detection sensor 305a) capable of detecting a second fraud, a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) that controls the game, and a plurality of In the gaming machine equipped with notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342), the control device may control the control device based on the detection by the first detection device. If it is a first abnormality, the notification means can execute a first abnormality notification (radio wave error notification) in a predetermined manner, and if it is a second abnormality based on the detection by the second detection means, the notification can be executed. A second abnormality notification (magnetic error notification) in a predetermined manner can be executed by the means, and the second abnormality notification can be executed with a higher priority than the first abnormality notification. The gist is:

◆The gaming machine having the 2-1 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control section 130m) that controls a performance according to the following, wherein the main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). It can be controlled in a second mode that performs variable production,
At a predetermined timing in the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance, the fluctuation start performance (effects such as movement and light emission of the effect pattern itself, effects such as movement and light emission of the constituent elements of the effect pattern, movement and emission of elements accompanying the effect pattern) (e.g., a sound effect, etc.), a single or combination of effects such as effects using elements other than the effect design, such as a sound effect, etc. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform a variation start effect in a different manner (some or all aspects of the variation start effect are different) from the variation effect of the scroll.

◆The gaming machine with the 2-2 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine is provided with a performance control means (performance control section 130m) that controls a performance according to the following: The main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a fluctuating performance is performed, and during a fluctuating stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol (70a) in the fluctuating performance is stopped, a fluctuating stop suggesting performance (such as the operation of the performance symbol itself or (single or in combination, such as effects such as light emission, movements of constituent elements of the effect design, effects such as light emission, effects such as movement and light emission of elements accompanying the effect design, effects using elements other than the effect design such as sound effects, etc.) A variation stop display of the production pattern (70a) can be executed, and the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scroll) and the variation production of the second variation route (for example, circular scroll) are different in mode. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to execute a fluctuation stop suggestion performance (in which some or all aspects of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance are different).

◆The gaming machine having the 2-3 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a fluctuating performance is performed, and during a fluctuating stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance symbol (70a) in the fluctuating performance is stopped, a fluctuating stop suggesting performance (such as the operation of the performance symbol itself or (single or in combination, such as effects such as light emission, movements of constituent elements of the effect design, effects such as light emission, effects such as movement and light emission of elements accompanying the effect design, effects using elements other than the effect design such as sound effects, etc.) It is possible to execute a variable stop display of the effect pattern (70a), and in a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), a specific effect (for example, an eye catch in a pseudo continuous effect or an SP (SPSP) reach effect). The present invention is characterized in that after a return effect (such as a return effect, etc.) is executed, execution of the variation stop suggestion effect is restricted, and the variation stop display can be executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-4 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). and a second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) is stopped. 1 type of fluctuation stop suggestion (effects such as the movement and light emission of the effect pattern itself, effects such as movement and light emission of the constituent elements of the effect pattern, effects such as movement and light emission of elements accompanying the effect pattern, effects such as sound effects, etc.) It is possible to execute (single or combination of effects such as effects using elements other than effect patterns) and a variable stop display of the effect patterns, and the effect pattern (70a) in the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll) During the fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests that the fluctuation is stopped, it is possible to execute a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a second mode different from the first mode and a fluctuation stop display of the performance pattern, and the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical After a specific performance (for example, a return performance such as a pseudo continuous performance or an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed in the variable performance of The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform a variation-stopping suggestion effect of the aspect.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-5 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). and a second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) is stopped. 1 type of fluctuation stop suggestion (effects such as the movement and light emission of the effect pattern itself, effects such as movement and light emission of the constituent elements of the effect pattern, effects such as movement and light emission of elements accompanying the effect pattern, effects such as sound effects, etc.) It is possible to execute (single or combination of effects such as effects using elements other than effect patterns) and a variable stop display of the effect pattern (70a), and the effect pattern (single or combination) in the variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll) can be executed. 70a) is capable of performing a variation stop suggestion performance of a second mode different from the first mode and a variation stop display of the production pattern (70a), during a variation stop suggestion period indicating that During the variation stop suggestion period in the variation performance of one variation path (for example, vertical scrolling), the third aspect of the variation stop suggestion period is more effective than the case where the variation stop suggestion effect of the third aspect, which is different from the first aspect and the second aspect, is not executed. The player is characterized in that it is easier to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player when the variation stop suggestion performance is executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-6 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable effect on the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), the effect pattern (70a) is moved in a first stop mode (for example, from top to bottom). In the variable presentation of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a second stop mode (e.g., moved from diagonally upward to diagonally downward). It is possible to perform a variable stop display by stopping (temporary stop)), and in the variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), a predetermined effect (for example, a return effect such as an eye catch in the SP (SPSP) reach effect, etc.) ) is executed, a fluctuation stop in a third stop mode different from the first stop mode and the second stop mode (there is no display of the movement of the effect pattern until the stop, and it is displayed in a stopped (temporary stop) state) It is characterized by being able to perform display.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-7 configuration to solve the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), the effect pattern (70a) is controlled according to the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling). A variable stop display is possible from a first variable stop path (for example, moving from top to bottom), and in a variable effect of the second variable path (for example, an annular scroll), the effect pattern (70a) is moved from the second variable path ( For example, a variable stop display can be performed from a second variable stop path (for example, moving from diagonally upward to downward) according to a circular scroll), and in a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), a predetermined effect (for example, , SP (SPSP) return performance such as eye catch in reach performance, etc.) is executed, the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) is stopped without going through the first fluctuation stop path (for example, moving from top to bottom). It is characterized by being able to perform display.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-8 configuration to solve the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) is executed to switch from the variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable route. (for example, an annular scroll).

◆The gaming machine having the 2-9 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in the variable effect, the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) can be switched to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling); In a fluctuating performance of one fluctuating path (for example, vertical scrolling), it is possible to perform continuous performances (for example, cuts-in, step-up, role-acting, effects, etc.) that are performed in one or more fluctuating performances. The present invention is characterized in that switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling) can be restricted during the period in which the continuous effect is executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-10 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in the variable effect, the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) can be switched to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling); When switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch), and when switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling), In the fluctuating performance (scroll), it is possible to execute a continuous performance (for example, a cut-in, a step-up, a function action, an effect, etc.) performed in one or more of the fluctuating performances, and the first fluctuation In the route variation performance, execution of the predetermined performance (for example, switching performance such as eye catch) can be restricted during a period in which the continuous performance is performed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-11 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control section 130m) for controlling a performance according to the performance, wherein the main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) displays the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) changes along a second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in the variable effect, it is possible to switch from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), Switching from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) during a period in which the action effect of the object (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is executed. It is characterized by being restrictable.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-12 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in the variable effect, the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) can be switched to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling); When switching from the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable route, a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch) can be executed, and in the variable effect of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling) , the execution of the predetermined performance (for example, switching performance such as eye catch) can be restricted during a period in which the movement performance of the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed. do.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-13 configuration to solve the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode in which a fluctuating performance is performed, and in the fluctuating performance, it is possible to switch from the first fluctuating route (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second fluctuating route (for example, circular scrolling); It is possible to restrict switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scroll) during a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts the operation of the (operation button 135) is executed. It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine having the 2-14 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in the variable effect, the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) can be switched to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling); When switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scroll), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a switching effect such as an eye catch), and when switching from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) to the second variable path (for example, circular scrolling), scroll), the execution of the predetermined performance (for example, a switching performance such as an eye catch) can be restricted during a period in which an operation suggestion performance that prompts the operation of the operating means (operation button 135) is executed. shall be.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-15 configuration to solve the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control section 130m) that controls a performance according to a first game state (normal game state); It is possible to control a second gaming state (advantageous gaming state) in which the degree of advantage to the player is different from the first gaming state (normal gaming state), and the performance control means (performance control unit 130m) Whether in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) or the second gaming state (advantageous gaming state), the effect symbols (70a) are displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable performance that variably displays the above-mentioned performance symbols (70a) in the variable performance, and the first gaming state (normal gaming state) can perform a variable display in which the performance symbols (70a) in the variable production are It is characterized by a large number of types of fluctuation paths.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-16 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, whether it is a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or a variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll). , it is possible to execute a specific variation performance (a variation performance that results in a random loss) in which the performance symbols (70a) are displayed in a different arrangement while changing and stopping; ) can be executed to output a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling) is to be stopped. After a specific performance (for example, a return performance such as an eye catch in SP (SPSP) reach performance, etc.) is executed in a variable performance that becomes , the execution of the specific sound performance can be restricted.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-17 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control section 130m) that controls a performance according to the performance, wherein the main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a fluctuating performance is performed; In the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern (70a) is stopped, a first sound production that outputs a predetermined sound (for example, a stop sound for a random failure) and a specific sound that is different from the predetermined sound (for example, a pseudo-sequenced sound) are output. It is possible to execute a second sound production that outputs a stop sound for a unique symbol such as a symbol or a pattern suggesting development, and in the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), a second sound production that outputs a stop sound for a specific symbol such as a symbol or a pattern suggesting development, and in the variation production of the first variation path (for example, vertical scrolling), For example, a predetermined performance pattern (normal performance pattern) that is different from a specific performance pattern is better than the fluctuating performance in which a performance pattern (specific design) such as a pseudo-continuous pattern or a development suggestion pattern is displayed in a fixed state. The first sound performance is more likely to be executed in the losing fluctuating performance in which the symbol )) is displayed in a fluctuating and stopping manner.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-18 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control section 130m) for controlling a performance according to the performance, wherein the main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) displays the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) changes along a second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable presentation is performed, and in the variable presentation of the first variable route (for example, vertical scrolling), the variable presentation of a loss in which a reach effect is not executed, and the loss mode in which a reach effect is executed. The fluctuating performance includes a performance mode of a sound performance (for example, a sound performance using a stop sound) that is executed during a fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests stopping at the performance symbol (70a) of a specific row (for example, the middle row). characterized by different things.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-19 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) is stopped in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); A display mode in which a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) can be executed, and the production pattern (70a) is displayed in a variable and stopped manner in the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling). There are a first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character), and a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the first display mode. In a fluctuating performance of a route (for example, vertical scrolling), in the case of a losing fluctuating performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the performance pattern (70a) in the first column (right column or left column) The production pattern (70a) in the second row (middle row) is displayed in a fixed and variable manner in the first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than when is displayed in a fixed and variable manner. The specific sound effect is more difficult to execute when

◆The gaming machine having the 2-20th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control section 130m) for controlling a performance according to the performance, wherein the main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) displays the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) changes along a second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) is stopped in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); Specific stop effects (for example, effects such as movement and light emission of the effect design itself, effects such as movement and light emission of constituent elements of the effect pattern, effects such as movement and light emission of elements accompanying the effect pattern, effects other than effects such as sound effects) (single or in combination), and the specific stop performance includes a first performance mode in which a sound production is performed and a second performance mode different from the first production mode (for example, a sound production is not performed). In the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), in the case of a losing variable effect in which a reach effect (SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed, the first column (right column) The second effect is better when the effect pattern (70a) in the second row (middle row) is displayed in a fixed and variable manner than when the effect pattern (70a) in the second column (or left column) is displayed in a variable and fixed manner. It is characterized in that the specific stop effect of the mode is easily executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-21st configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable effect on the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), the effect pattern (70a) in a specific row (for example, the middle row) is stopped. A specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) can be executed during the suggested variation stop suggestion period, and a display mode when the production pattern (70a) is displayed in a variation stop during the variation stop suggestion period. There are a first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character), and a second display mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number) that is different from the first display mode. In a fluctuating performance of a route (for example, vertical scrolling), the variation of a loss in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is not executed is greater than the fluctuation performance of a loss in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed. The specific sound effect is more likely to be executed when the effect is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character).

◆The gaming machine having the 2-22 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), in the case of a loss in the variable effect, the effect pattern (70a) is stopped. It is possible to execute a first sound performance that outputs a predetermined sound (for example, a stop sound when losing) during the suggested fluctuation stop suggestion period, and in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the fluctuation of the hit In the case of a performance, after executing a second sound performance that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound when hitting) during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, a special sound (for example, a sound when the size of a predetermined performance symbol changes, etc.) is executed. It is possible to execute a third sound performance that outputs a change sound, a stop sound of a performance symbol during a promotion performance, a final confirmed stop sound when returning from a performance symbol only in the identification section to the original normal performance symbol, etc.) It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine having the 2-23rd configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) changes along a second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). It is possible to control a second mode in which a fluctuating production is performed, and when starting the fluctuating production, a variation start production (for example, a production such as the movement of the production pattern itself, a production of light emission, etc., a movement of the component elements of the production pattern, a production of light emission, etc.) It is possible to execute a performance, a performance such as the operation of an element accompanying a performance design, a performance such as light emission, a performance using elements other than the performance design such as a sound performance, etc. alone or in combination), and the fluctuation start performance can be executed in the first mode (normally ) and a second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, look-ahead, pseudo-continuation, etc.). During the period, when the fluctuation start performance of the second aspect is executed than when the fluctuation start effect of the first aspect is executed, a predetermined performance that makes you expect a jackpot (for example, an action performance of an accessory, etc.) It is characterized by the ease with which pre-read effects such as effects, effects such as cut-ins, developments, step-ups, pseudo-continuation effects, etc. are easily executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-24th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) is stopped in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); It is possible to control a case where a specific sound effect is executed to output a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) and a case where the specific sound effect is not executed, and the variation of the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) is controllable. In the performance, a predetermined performance (for example, a return performance such as an eye catch in the SP (SPSP) reach performance) is easier to execute when the specific sound performance is not performed than when the specific sound performance is executed. It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine having the 2-25th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). It is possible to control a second mode in which a fluctuating production is performed, and when starting the fluctuating production, a variation start production (for example, a production such as the movement of the production pattern itself or the production of light emission, a movement of the constituent elements of the production pattern or the production of light emission, etc.) is possible. It is possible to perform a performance, a performance such as movement of an element accompanying a performance design, a performance such as light emission, a performance using elements other than the performance design such as a sound performance, etc. singly or in combination, and the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) In the fluctuating performance, the execution period of the fluctuating start performance is determined depending on whether the number of pending memories is a predetermined number (for example, one) and the case where the number of pending memories is a specific number (for example, four) different from the predetermined number. It is characterized in that it is possible to perform variable start effects in different ways (for example, the content of the effect, the execution timing of the effect, the execution period of the effect, etc. are different) during the variable start period.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-26 configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control section 130m) for controlling a performance according to the performance, wherein the main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) displays the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) changes along a second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, whether it is a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or a variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll). , it is possible to execute a predetermined presentation of the same motif (for example, a group presentation or a mode common notice), and the second The game player is characterized in that it is easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player when the predetermined performance (for example, a group performance or a mode common notice) is executed in a variable performance of a variable path (for example, an annular scroll).

◆The gaming machine having the 2-27th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, whether it is a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or a variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll). , it is possible to execute a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern (70a) is stopped, and the first variation path (for example, vertical scrolling) It is possible to execute the specific sound performance in different modes (different content, execution timing, execution period, etc.) in the case of the variation production of the second variation path (for example, annular scroll) and the case of the variation production of the second variation path (for example, annular scroll). It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine having the 2-28th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control section 130m) for controlling a performance according to the performance, wherein the main control means (main control section 110m) is capable of storing a suspended memory based on the establishment of a starting condition. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) displays the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) changes along a second fluctuation path (for example, annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) is stopped in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); It is possible to perform a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (such as a stop sound), and in the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the production pattern (70a ) is displayed as a fluctuation stop during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, and when the performance symbol (70a) with a specific (for example, identification part "7" etc.) different from the predetermined performance symbol (70a) is displayed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period. It is characterized in that the specific sound production can be performed in different modes depending on when the specific sound effect is displayed in a fluctuating and stopped manner.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-29th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode in which a variable effect is performed, and in a variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) is stopped in the variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); It is possible to execute a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (such as a stop sound), and in the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), a variation stop that suggests that the production pattern (70a) is stopped. During the suggestion period, it is possible to execute a specific sound production that outputs a specific sound (stop sound, etc.), and in the variation production of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the suspended memory is a predetermined number (for example, 1 piece). It is characterized in that different patterns of the specific sound production can be executed depending on the case where the number of pending memories is a specific number (for example, four) different from the predetermined number.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-30th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). A second mode in which a variable effect is performed, whether it is a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) or a variable effect of the second variable path (for example, circular scroll). , In the reach effect, the effect pattern (70a) is changed from the first mode (for example, an identification part such as a number + a decoration part such as a character) to the second mode (for example, only an identification part such as a number), and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to perform a variable stop display in a temporary stop state with a mode (up/down, left/right, rotation, etc.), and a reach effect in the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scrolling) and a reach effect in the variable effect of the first variable route (e.g. vertical scrolling) and the second variable route (e.g. vertical scrolling). The present invention is characterized in that the performance mode of the performance pattern (70a) displayed in a variable and stopped manner in the second mode is the same as the ready-to-reach performance in the variable performance of the circular scroll).

◆The gaming machine having the 2-31st configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode for performing a fluctuating performance, and a fluctuation stop suggestion that indicates that the performance symbol (70a) is stopped in a predetermined manner in the fluctuating performance of the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scrolling); During the period, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited, and the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical In the fluctuating performance (scroll), the fluctuating performance in which the second fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to display predetermined information in the fluctuating performance than the fluctuating performance in which the first fluctuating stop suggestion rendering is executed. It is characterized by the ease with which changes (changes in color, shape, etc.) of (a hold icon, a hold display of the icon, a display that presents information to other players, etc.) are easily executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-32nd configuration to solve the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode for performing a fluctuating performance, and a fluctuation stop suggestion that indicates that the performance symbol (70a) is stopped in a predetermined manner in the fluctuating performance of the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scrolling); During the period, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited, and the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical In the fluctuating performance (scroll), the level of expectation in the fluctuating performance is higher in the fluctuating performance in which the second fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed than in the fluctuating performance in which the first fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed. It is characterized by the fact that it is easy to execute change productions that change automatically (for example, development, cut-in, step-up, role play, pending change, etc.).

◆The gaming machine having the 2-33rd configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). It can be controlled in a second mode that performs variable production,
In the variation performance of the first variation route (for example, vertical scrolling), a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the production pattern (70a) is stopped in a predetermined manner. It is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited, and in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation route (for example, vertical scrolling), the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance is The variation production in which the second variation stop suggestion production is executed is better than the variation production in which the display position of the production symbol (70a) changes in the variation production (for example, during the reach production). (such as changing the position of symbols in the left column or right column) can be easily executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-34th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode for performing a fluctuating performance, and a fluctuation stop suggestion that indicates that the performance symbol (70a) is stopped in a predetermined manner in the fluctuating performance of the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scrolling); During the period, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited, and the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical In the fluctuating performance (scroll), the fluctuating performance in which the second fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed has a higher reach in the reach performance in the fluctuating performance, compared to the fluctuating performance in which the first fluctuating stop suggestion performance is executed. It is characterized in that a change performance (for example, a promotion performance, etc.) in which the target performance pattern (70a) changes is easily executed.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-35th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode for performing a fluctuating performance, and a fluctuation stop suggestion that indicates that the performance symbol (70a) is stopped in a predetermined manner in the fluctuating performance of the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scrolling); During the period, it is possible to execute a first variable stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second variation stop suggestion production in which the output of the specific sound is limited, and as the specific sound, the first specific sound There are a sound (for example, a normal stop sound) and a second specific sound different from the first specific sound (for example, a special stop sound when a pseudo symbol or a symbol of the same color is temporarily stopped), and the first variation path In the variation production, the variation production in which the first variation stop suggestion production is executed is more effective than the variation production in which the second variation stop suggestion production is executed, and the second specific sound (for example, a pseudo symbol or It is characterized by the fact that a special stop sound (such as when temporarily stopping symbols of the same color) is easily output.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-36th configuration to solve the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a first mode in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); In the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) fluctuates along a second fluctuation path (for example, an annular scroll) different from the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll). a second mode for performing a fluctuating performance, and a fluctuation stop suggestion that indicates that the performance symbol (70a) is stopped in a predetermined manner in the fluctuating performance of the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scrolling); During the period, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited, and the first fluctuation path (for example, vertical scroll), the variable performance in which the first variable stop suggestion effect is executed is better than the variable effect in which the second variable stop suggestion effect is executed in advance of notifying the expectation level of a jackpot. It is characterized in that notification effects (for example, actuation of accessories, display of pre-read symbols, effects of symbols, etc.) are easy to execute.

◆The gaming machine having the 2-37th configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means (main control section 110m). A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for controlling a performance according to In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the suspended memory, and the performance control means (performance control section 130m) can display the display means based on the determination. (a first image display device 70, a second image display device 71), a first mode (normal game state mode) in which a variable effect is performed in which the effect symbol (70a) changes along a first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling); Based on the determination, on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the effect pattern (70a) is displayed on a second variable path (for example, vertical scrolling) different from the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling). A second mode (advantageous gaming state mode) in which a variable effect that changes with a circular scroll) can be controlled, and even if the variable effect is a variable effect of the first variable path (for example, vertical scrolling), the second variation can be controlled. Even in the case of a fluctuating performance of a route (for example, an annular scroll), a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) is output during a fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) is stopped in a predetermined manner. It is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited, and as the specific sound, a first specific sound (for example, a stop sound during normal (balance failure)), A second specific sound different from the first specific sound (for example, a special stop sound when a pseudo symbol or a symbol of the same color is temporarily stopped), and a third specific sound different from the first specific sound and the second specific sound (for example, In the first mode (the normal gaming mode), it is possible to execute a first reach promotion effect that makes you expect a reach, and in the second mode In the (advantageous gaming state mode), it is possible to execute a second reach-inciting performance in which the reach-increasing effect is performed, and the second reach-increasing performance is performed more than the variable performance in which the first reach-increasing performance is executed. The variable performance is characterized in that the third specific sound (for example, a stop sound for a jackpot) is more likely to be output when the reach performance is executed after the reach promotion is performed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the invention described above are for facilitating understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention. The present invention may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present invention includes equivalents thereof.

100... Gaming machine, 102B... Accessory unit (second means), 131... Main display device (notification means), 180... Upper unit (first means), 300... Main control board (control means), 320... Performance control Board (control means), 331... Audio output device (notification means), 341... Performance board lighting device (notification means), 342... Performance frame lighting device (notification means), 600... Superior accessory decoration part (first means), 650...Superior item main body (second means), 680a to 680d...Reflective sensor (detection means), 700...Junior item decoration part (first means), 750... Subordinate item main body (second means), 2 means), 780a to 780d...Reflective sensor (detection means), 800...Superior object decoration part (third means), 900...Inferior object decoration part (third means), 1620...Game board connector (detection means) ).

Claims (1)

a game machine door that is located in front of a game board having a game area and can be opened and closed;
A control means for controlling game performance ;
a second means to which the first means capable of performing the performance can be attached;
a plurality of notification means capable of performing notification in a predetermined manner;
A gaming machine comprising a detection means capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means ,
The control means includes:
When the second means is attached to something different from the first means, the first abnormality notification can be executed by the plurality of notification means based on the detection by the detection means ,
When the gaming machine door is in an open state, a second abnormality notification can be executed by the plurality of notification means,
In the first notification means, the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be executed in a visible state at the same time,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second notification means, the first abnormality notification can be executed with a higher priority than the second abnormality notification .